HANDBOOK OF QUALITY- STANDARD PAPERS ■ Class. BooL T^ \Z I o \ GojpgM .- COEHRIGHT DEPOSH1 Americ . o 3i!.S<-> j2.S o o o , l±l > >, :>, >,^ .:> XXX* Oo .id o ~~-*«g fth >> side No side No. side No. uck & c. egan Pa or Pape n. o ffl.2 ions River River River Shatt Wi Waur Wind Cor u > ^C*l**i 33 r\ O* C> t> © 3°c oU oj- to >> Otrt m -*8 _ ffi = n r y CO ny, my iy. on\ o% 1-1 r Comp er Com Compa Comp Compa ter, Un 5= ri Oh Of \ T5 w D - U h— 1 Oh Divisions 13 Mt. Tom Pape 14 Nonotuck Pap 15 Norman Paper 16 Oakland Pape ter, Conn. 17 Parsons Paper 18 Platner & Por : Holyoke Water an Writing Paper Tom, Holyoke nical Research an o H w iklin, O. silo, O. yoke , South Lee, Holyoke E Dam o F Americ G Mount oke (Chei w •-£ .o,cucua. « X o 5 ns 11, Geo arding arding olyoke urlbut Mass. nden t o "o 3K MO .9 0ESGEK J En &gO.G /?00OOOh cn •^ ° ° j3 +i „ ke y o 0) +J o^ be sum o c -^ ^ *-< Uh 5 cl % § >o S£° c c M D< i +jE E^ - OUHC 55 -MM : re! * o 2 P o o , JD O u . tu Sac SS«C 2 CO C0.O uSSoo oi\ isioiis ! Vgawam No. I. Mittineague, Mass. I Agawarn No. i, Mittineague, Mas>. 2 Albion Paper Co., Holyoke .< Beebe & Holbrook, Holyoke .<-! Massasoit, Holyoke 4 Chester PaperCo., Huntington, Mass 5 docker Mfg. Co., Holyoke 6 Dickinson. Coo. R., Holyoke KEY TO PICTURE Divisions s GUI, Geo. C, Holyoko S)-l Harding Paper Co., Franklin, O. 9 2 Harding Paper Co., Excello. O. 10 Holyoko Papei <. o., Holyoke 11 Hurlbut Papei Mfg. Co., South Lee, Mass. 12 Linden Paper Company. Holyoke Divisions 13 Mt. Tom Paper Company, Holyoke 14 Nonotuck Paper Company, Holyoke 15 Norman Paper Company, Holyoke 16 Oakland Paper Company, Manches ter, Conn. 17 Parsons Paper Company. Holvokc 18 Platner & Porter. Onionville, Conn. Divisions i<> i Riverside Mo. 1, Holyoke 19-2 Riverside No. I, Holyoke I 1 ' i Riverside No. A, Holyoke 20 Shattuck & Babeo. I Co., I )ePerej \\ i ,, 22 Wauregan PaperCo., Holyoke 23 Windsor Paper Co., Windsor Locks, ( OIIII A General Office, Holyoke E Dam of Holyoke Water Power Co., Connecticut River, Holyoke B Central Repair Shop, Holyoke F American Writing Paper Co.'s dam at Miami River, Ohio C Engineering Dept. Office, Holyoke (i Mount Tom, Holyoke D Department ot Technical Control, Holyoke (Chemical Research and Paper Testing Laboratory) , pes Copyright, 1922 by the American Writing Paper Company Holyoke, Massachusetts QCLA6b6559 PRESS OF WILLIAM GREEN, NEW YORK OCT 30 "22 1V« I Contents The 26 Mills of the American Writing Paper Company Frontispiece Page The Pioneer in Paper Standardization 1 A Radical Reform 1 Manufacturing Efficiency 2 The Advantages of Size __ 2 Selling Efforts Centralized 3 Three Necessary Steps 3 Department of Technical Control 4 Standardizing Distribution 5 Eagle-A Service Houses 5 How the Paper Buyer Benefits 6 Co-operation with the United States Envelope Company 6 How to Select the Right Paper 8 Use 8 Impress 8 Some General Rules 9 Index and Charts of Eagle-A Papers Suitable for Various Printed Pieces 9 Qualities of Different Kinds of Papers 9 Index to Charts 10 Advertising 10 Books 11 Documents 12 Office and Factory Forms 12 Greetings 12 Labels and Mailing Wrappers 13 Magazines 13 Miscellaneous 13 Programs 13 Stationery 13 Tickets 13 Chart — Inside Pages and Self Covers, Kinds and Grades Suitable for 14-15 Chart — Covers, Kinds and Grades of Papers Suitable for 16-17 Chart — Cards, Folded and Unfolded, Kinds and Grades Suitable for 18-19 Chart — Documents and Office and Factory Forms, Kinds and Grades of Papers Suitable for 20-2 1 Stationery — Kinds and Grades of Paper Suitable for 22-23 Styles and Sizes of Printed Pieces 24 Practical Styles 24 Practical Sizes 24 Index to Charts of Sizes which Cut Without Waste 24 The Selection of a General Size 24 The Relation Between Styles and Sizes and Standard Sheets 25 Standard Forms or Vehicles for Printed Messages 2-:' Untrimmed Sizes of Printed Pieces that Approximate 2 ite 2 x3.... 28-29 3 x4.... 30-31 3 x6... . 32-33 4 x5... 34-35 4 x9... . 36-37 5 x7.... 38-39 6 x9... . 40-41 7 x 10... 42-43 £x 11 — 9x 12 44-45 Practical Sizes for Letterheads, Documents, and Office or Factory Forms 46 [Hi] Page Standard Sheet Sizes 47 Chart — Standard Sheet Sizes in Which Each Grade Is Stocked . . . 48-49 Substance Weight 50 The Choice of the Weight of Paper for Any Printed Piece 50 The Selection of the Proper Substance Weight for a Printed Piece . . 50 The Style of Printed Piece 50 The Size of Printed Piece 51 The Quality Appearance Required in Printed Piece 51 Extra Folding or Wearing Quality Required in Printed Piece 51 Economy of Production 51 Mailing Cost of the Printed Piece 51 A Practical Plan to Follow 51 Substance Weights in Which Each Grade Is Stocked 52-53-54 Equivalent Substance Weights 54 Colored Papers 55 Chart — Standard Colors in Which Each Grade Is Stocked 56-57 Finishes and Formations 58 Finishes 58 Formations 58 Simple Method of Finding the Grade Made in Each Finish and Formation 58 Chart — Finishes and Formations in Which Each Grade Is Stocked.. 59 Impress 60 What Is Meant by "Impress" 60 Selecting Paper for a Definite Impress— the Various Methods of Impress and the Kinds of Paper to Which Each Is Best Adapted • . : 60-61 A Quick Way of Finding Papers Suitable to Each Method of Impress 61 Chart — Methods of Impress to Which Each Grade Is Adaptable. 62-63 Postage Rates 64 First-Class Matter 64 Rates of Postage, First-Class Matter 64 Second-Class Matter 64 Third-Class Matter 64 Rates of Postage on Unsealed Third-Class Matter 65 Letters Attached to Third-Class Mail 65 Fourth-Class Matter (Domestic Parcel Post) 65 Rates of Postage on Fourth-Class or Parcel Post Matter 65 Communications Attached to Parcels 65 Mailings of Matter Without Stamps Affixed 65 Pre-canceled Postage Stamps 66 Selecting the Right Weight of Paper to Reduce Mailing Costs 66 Getting the Most Out of the Mailing Cost 66 What Can Be Mailed for Two Cents, First-Class Postage 67 Envelopes 68 The Use of Envelopes 68 The Choice of Paper for Envelopes 68 The Appropriate Size of Envelopes for a Printed Piece Size 68 Printed Matter on Envelopes 68 Envelope Styles and Their Uses (illustrated) 69-70-71-72 To Obtain the Proper Envelope 73 The United States Envelope Company 73 How to Order Envelopes 73-74 Envelope Papers Suitable for Each Grade 75 Specifications 76 Standard Versus Non-standard Papers 76 Papers Having Standard Qualities 76 Papers Having Standard Specifications 76 Papers of Non-Standard Qualities and Specifications 76 What the Use of Standardized Papers Means 77 When the Use of Non-Standard Papers Is Necessary 77 Making Orders 77 When a Standard Grade Is Being Run 77 Making It Easy to Find Conditions Controlling the Making of Standard Grade to Non-Stan dard Specifications 77 Bond Papers in Non-Standard Specifications 78-79 Linen " " " " ' 80 [ivl Specifications — continued Page Mimeograph Papers in Non-Standard Specifications 81 Ledger Writing Book Cover Bristol 82-83 84-85 86-87 90-91 Wedding and Papeterie Papers in Non-Standard Specifications . . 92-93 Offset Papers in Non-Standard Specifications 94 Bulking 95 Relative Bulking of Book Papers 96 Eagle-A Line of Quality-Standard Papers 97 What It Consists of 97 Why It Was Developed 97-98 How the Eagle-A Line Was Developed to Meet Demands 98-100 An Analysis of the Use-Requirements of Paper 98-100 The Standardization of Each Grade 100 The Ten Kinds of Essential Papers and the Range of Grades in Each 1 00 Relative Qualities of the Various Kinds and Grades of Paper 101 Kinds or Classifications 101 Grades — The Relative Charts 101 General Uses 102 Adaptability to Each Method of Impress 102 Sizes 103 Weights 103 Colors 103 Finishes 103 How Eagle-A Papers Are Trimmed 104 How Eagle-A Papers Are Packed (illustrated) 104 Grain Direction in Each Size and Grade 105 Eagle-A Papers Suitable for Envelopes to Match Each Grade 105 Where Eagle-A Papers May Be Obtained 105 Grades Made to Non-Standard Specifications 105 Eagle-A Papers in Converted Form 106 A Summary of the Eagle-A Line 106 Bond Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 107-109 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Bonds 110-111 Coupon Bond 112-113 Agawam Bond 1 14-115 Persian Bond 116-117 Contract Bond 1 18-1 19 Airpost Bond 1 20-1 2 1 Chevron Bond 122-123 Acceptance Bond 124-125 Norman Bond 126-127 Telephone Bond 128-129 Linen Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 130 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Linens 131 U. S. Linen 132-133 Colonial Linen 134-135 Aulde Scotia Lynene 136-137 Rival Linen 138-139 Ledger Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 140 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Ledgers 141 Government Record Ledger 142-143 Brunswick Linen Ledger 144-145 Account Linen Ledger 146-147 Extension Ledger 148-149 Gloria Ledger 150-151 Telephone Ledger 152-153 Flat Writing Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 154 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Writing Papers. . . 155 Old Chester Mills 156-157 Parsons Tinted Writings 158-159 Wauregan Colored Flats 160-161 Mt. Nonotuck Mills 162-163 Mt. Tom Mills 164-165 [v] Page Book Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 166-167 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Book Papers. 168-169 Deckle d'Aigle 170-171 American Vellum .- 172-173 Berkshire Text 174-175 Albion Text 176-177 American Bulking Book 178-179 Railroad Folder 180-181 Arrive Halftone 182-183 American Super Calendered Book 184-185 American English Finish Book 186-187 American Eggshell 188-189 Offset Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 190 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Offsets 191 Albion Offset 192-193 Beebe Offset 194-195 Chester Offset ■ 196-197 Dickinson Offset 198-199 Cover Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 200 Chart of Relative Quality- Standards of Eagle-A Covers 201 Deckle d'Aigle 202-203 Herculean Cover 204-205 Arven Plate 206-207 Paradox Cover 208-209 Riverdale Cover 210-2 1 1 Standard Cover 212-213 Bristols of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 214 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Bristols 215 Agawam Index Bristol . 2 16-2 1 7 Cherokee Index Bristol 218-219 Darieh Index Bristol 220-22 1 American Rope Bristol 222-223 American Post Card 224-225 Weddings and Papeteries of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 225 Chart of Relative Quality- Standards of Eagle-A Weddings and Papeteries 227 Arden Wedding 228-229 Biscay Wedding 230-23 1 Chesterfield Papeterie 232-233 Dorrington Papeterie 234-235 Farnsworth Papeterie 236-237 Mimeograph Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 238 Chart of Relative Quality-Standards of Eagle-A Mimeographs 239 Peerless Mimeograph 240-241 Delta Mimeograph 242-243 Converted Forms of Eagle-A Papers 244 The Eagle-A Announcement Line 245 Folded and Flat Sheets and Cards and Envelopes to Match. . . 246-248 Illustration of Sheets, Cards and Envelopes 249 Cabinets of Wedding Announcements 250 Stork Announcements 25 1 Visiting Cards and Envelopes 252 Mourning Stationery 253 Papeteries (Boxed Stationery) 254 Commercial Stationery Cabinets of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 255-59 Coupon Bond Stationery Cabinets 256 Contract Bond Stationery Cabinets 257 Acceptance Bond Stationery Cabinets 258 Old Chester Mills Stationery Cabinets 259 Typewriter Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards 260-273 Sheet Sizes and Weights of Eagle-A Typewriter Papers 262 Coupon Bond Typewriter Paper 263 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Agawam Parchment Typewriter Paper 264 U. S. Linen Typewriter Paper 265 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked [vi] Typewriter Papers of Eagle-A Quality-Standards— continued Page Roman Typewriter Paper 266 Persian Bond Typewriter Paper 266-267 Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Paper 267 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Contract Bond Typewriter Paper 268 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper 269 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper 270 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper 271 Weights and Sizes, Ruled and Unruled, Where Stocked Quality-Manifold Typewriter Paper 272 Description, Colors, Sheet Sizes and Weights, How Packed, Where Stocked, etc. Manuscript Cover 273 Description, Colors, Sizes and Weights, How Packed, Where Stocked, etc. Writing Tablets (illustrated) 274 Description, Size, Distinguishing Cover Colors, Where Obtainable, etc. Specialties and Industrial Papers 275-280 The Correct Use of Specifications 275 Development of Special and Technical Papers 275 Experimental Equipment for Specialty and Industrial Papers 276 List of Specialty Papers 277-280 How to Plan Printed Salesmanship 281-284 Printing Depending on Business 281 Business Depending on Printing 281 The First Step : 281 Investigation and Analysis 282 The Plan Outlined 282 Principles, Not Methods, Underlie Plan 282 Specifying the Media 283 The Execution of the Plan ......... 283 Copy 283 Design 283 Printing or Multiplying 284 An Important Step 284 A Key to the Lesson Booklets 284 Key (Index) to a Course in Writing Printed Salesmanship for U. T. A. Printers Written by Robert Ruxton 285-301 Planning Stationery — Documents, Office and Factory Forms .... 302 The Substance Factor 303 Old and New Substance Weights 303 Freight Rates, with Map 304-305 Paper Trade Customs — General Regulations 306-332 Writings 306-3 10 Writings, Substance Number Plan 310 Book Papers 311-314 Offset Papers 314 Cover Papers 31 5-316 Card Boards 316-321 Envelopes „. 321 Blue Print Paper 321 Wrapping Paper 321 Machine Glazed 321 Manila 322 Cutter Rolls 322 Glazed and Fancy 323-324 Tissue Paper 324-326 Blotting Paper 326 Onion Skins and Manifolds 327 rviil Paper Trade Customs — General Regulations — continued Page Vegetable Parchment 327-329 Waxed Paper 329-330 Glassine and Greaseproof Papers 330-331 Roll News Print 331-332 Sheet News 332 Paper Brand Names 333-336 How Paper Is Made 337-341 A Journey Through the World's Largest Paper-Making Insti- tution (Illustrated) 338-341 How Eagle-A Quality Is Maintained 342 Testing Appliances — Illustrated 343 Watermarking and Rubberstamp Marking 344 What Papers the Printer Should Stock 345-346 Glossary of Words and Terms used in the Handbook of Quality-Standard Papers 347-367 The Stock Used in This Handbook 368 Index 369-390 Eagle-A Service Houses Inserted at back of book Price List Inserted at back of book {For Complete Details of Contents, see Index — Green Section) The Pioneer in Paper Standardization THE American Writing Paper Company is the largest maker of high-grade papers in the world. It is naturally proud of its pre-eminence in size, but it is prouder still of the fact that it has grasped the opportunity which its size and wide variety of resources have created, namely, the opportunity to simplify and standardize its manufacture and distribution of paper. This means that its famous Eagle-A lines of Quality-Standard Papers, comparatively few in number yet comprising a grade for almost every use to which paper is put, are produced on a quan- tity basis and priced accordingly. It means that their quality jj,^ remains uniform, with the brand of the manufacturer as a guarantee; and that they are distributed throughout the country in readily accessible stocks immediately available for delivery. Sllbstanc No confusion, for the buyer, among countless private brands W$k in choosing the right paper for his purpose; no guesswork as to p ■ j its maker and materials. The user knows, too, that in the price p a n 8rs he pays is reflected every economy known to the mass production of a standard commodity, and that he can get each item in } , quantity when and where he wants it. A RADICAL REFORM Under the conditions prevailing in the paper industry the American Writing Paper Company could have undertaken no more radical reform or thorough-going public service. Such a reform, indeed, was possible at the time only to an institution making a kind and grade of paper for practically every essential printing, stationery and advertising requirement, with adequate equipment for efficient manufacture of such a wide range of products and with practical experience and technical skill cover- ing the entire field of papers — in other words, to the American Writing Paper Company alone. The American Writing Paper Company operates 26 mills containing 55 modern paper machines with their auxiliary equipment. Most of these mills, together with the headquarters of the company, are situated in Holyoke, Massachusetts, the world's fine paper city. Others are in Unionville, Manchester, and Windsor Locks, Connecticut; at Mittineague, Huntington, and South Lee, Massachusetts; De Pere, Wisconsin, and Franklin and Excello, Ohio, where conditions for the manufacture of paper have been found especially suitable. [1] Impress ates Mato The combined output of the company's mills is 460 tons of paper a day, of which 100 tons come under the general class of fine papers, such as bonds, ledgers, linens and writings, while 360 tons consist of coarse papers which include cover, book and offset papers, wrappings, and industrial specialties of all sorts. MANUFACTURING EFFICIENCY These statistics, however, offer only indirect evidence of the potentialities of this huge aggregation of productive units. The small paper mill of from one to four machines is the unit that the experience of paper manufacturers in general has proved to be the best and most economical for the manufacture of a quality product. This is because the paper-making machines in a given mill must share more or less in common their extensive auxiliary equipment, and the range of product which can be handled efficiently with any mill-unit of this equipment is, therefore, decidedly limited. The fewer the machines, therefore, the better able the mill is to devote its production to the limited number of grades for which its equipment is best adapted. Similarly, its personnel develops a familiarity with its operations and a consequent skill impossible in a big mill with a hetero- geneous product. Finally, the small mill is better able to pre- serve the economies of continuous production and to avoid the overhead of idle equipment. The American Writing Paper Company is an organization of small mills in such number and variety that, regardless of the wide field which its products cover, it is able to make each mill a specialist in one or a few related grades of paper and is free from the temptation to manufacture too many papers with any given equipment. THE ADVANTAGES OF SIZE Yet it enjoys also in unique degree all the advantages of which the big mill boasts. First, in the matter of purchases. All its purchases of mate- rial are effected at headquarters and are made in quantities that command minimum prices. Moreover, due to the strict stand- ardization of the Eagle-A Line, these purchases can always be foreseen and can be made, therefore, in the most favorable market. And for the same reason they can be, and always are, made for definitely specified products, so that there never occurs any guesswork or compromise either in the selection or adapta- tion of the materials bought. Secondly, in the matter of personnel. The American Writing Paper Company, as the largest high-grade paper-making institu- tion in the world, naturally attracts to itself the best technical brains and mechanical skill to be found in the country. Among [2] its 26 mill superintendents, for example, will be found a ranking specialist in the manufacture of practically every kind of paper made, whose aid is immediately available in the solution of any problem in his line that may arise. These men help one another, all together supplying a knowledge of paper-making which no one man or handful of men could possibly possess. SELLING EFFORTS CENTRALIZED All the Company's efforts are directed from headquarters and are, therefore, carefully co-ordinated among a comprehensive variety of paper products, another advantage of the big producer. It has an engineering corps responsible for the maintenance of the operating equipment of all the mills; a laboratory completely equipped for all kinds of paper testing and investigational work, and a manufacturing department in charge of the distribution of orders to the mills best equipped to handle them, and of the general supervision of manufacture. The American Writing Paper Company, in other words, is w ? ideally organized to benefit from every aid to economy and effi- ciency so far discovered in the industry. Colored A short time ago this institution was making 1,500 different Papers papers of which the majority were based on purely arbitrary ryj, distinctions. By the elimination of overlapping grades and f orma brands differing only in watermark there was established the Eagle-A Line of Quality-Standard Papers containing a paper for Impre! each printing, advertising and stationery requirement. This line contains but a small percentage of the original 1,500 and yet it covers the field. With simplification and standardiza- tion of line came simplification and standardization of distribution by means of carefully selected paper merchants (Service Houses), each one of which stocks the complete line. As a result the paper user knows that wherever he can buy one Eagle-A paper he can buy all of them, and in any size, color or weight in which they are manufactured. THREE NECESSARY STEPS There were three major steps necessary in achieving this reform. The first consisted of consulting the users and big buyers of paper who had impelled the Company to undertake the reform by their organized demand for standardization and simplification — in other words the seven national associations of printers and buyers of printing controlling 95 per cent, of the paper used in the graphic arts, as follows: The United Typothetae of America — the leading printers who do an annual business of roughly $500,000,000; The [3] National Association of Stationers and Manufacturers — retail and wholesale stationers whose volume exceeds £250,000,000 a year; The National Association of Employing Lithographers, the members of which manufacture 3150,000,000 worth of lithography; The National Association of Steel and Copper Plate En- gravers, representing the producers of all engraved and em- bossed letterheads in the United States, with a volume of 3150,000,000; The Association of National Advertisers — comprising the largest advertisers in the country; The National Association of Purchasing Agents with more than 4,000 members; The Direct Mail Advertising Association — comprising leading advertising managers and sales executives. From a careful canvass of these men the countless uses to which paper is put were authoritatively established and the foundation laid for their scientific analysis and classification. The second step consisted of translating these paper needs into terms of manufacturing skill and methods and thence into paper products. The third step was that of interpreting these products in terms of the needs of the paper user. A complete and careful survey of equipment was made to determine which of the 55 paper machines was best adapted to producing each of the selected grades of paper. Thereafter, that grade went to that machine. Each Eagle-A paper is made on the manufacturing unit completely adapted to its efficient production. THE DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL CONTROL The Company expanded and developed its laboratory at Holyoke into the best and most extensive of its kind. This department occupies a mill building of its own containing a miniature and a full-sized paper machine, with auxiliary equipment, on which to conduct its manufacturing and mechanical experiments. It con- tains also a completely equipped chemical and physical laboratory in which to test every raw material used in paper manufacture and every quality inherent in the finished product — its bursting strength, its tensile strength, its folding strength, its chemical nature, the length of its fibers, its resistance to light, and other important attributes. [4] To effect an absolute uniformity of product this laboratory, or Department of Technical Control, has been made the keystone of the arch of the Company's manufacturing policy. It has scientifically standardized the raw materials used in each grade of paper produced and maintained a definite standard in each case. After the finished product has gone through its regular inspection in the mill that produced it the laboratory provides an additional safety check with its own exhaustive, thorough routine tests which hold rigidly in line the men, methods and machines employed in its production. The only deviation in standards permitted is that in the direc- tion of a better product for the same money or the same product for less money. STANDARDIZING DISTRIBUTION But having determined the essential uses of paper, and the papers best adapted to those uses, and the machines best adapted to those papers, and having copper-riveted the uniformity of each grade — in other words, having cleared the way for economical production on a quantity basis — two problems remained: (1) to fit distribution to economical mass production, and (2) to inform the buyer regarding the paper for his particular use. The Company had been distributing its papers through a multiplicity of jobbers, none of whom carried its complete line, most of whom carried only a few of its grades as an incident to their stocks of private brands. This was the common method of distribution in the industry. The brands and grades of paper on the market were multiplied beyond all reason, since each jobber wanted his own brands, and this in turn caused a progressive deterioration of quality in the different brands, due to competition and the loss of the manufac- turer's identity; it resulted in a great volume of small orders to the manufacturer, necessitating short, expensive runs, and it JM greatly confused and inconvenienced the customer who, if he wanted different kinds and grades of paper made by the same manufacturer, had to deal with a number of different jobbers. EAGLE-A SERVICE HOUSES Automatically, of course, in reducing from approximately 1,500 to 55 the number of papers it manufactured, the American Writing Paper Company reduced the number of jobbers handling its product. But it went further than this and carefully selected the best known, most responsible jobbing houses in each of the important paper distributing centers and made each the agent for its complete Eagle-A Line. These houses are its Service Houses. Their salesmen have [5] ates flrd been carefully schooled in the principles, materials and methods at the foundation of Eagle-A service. They are prepared to give the paper buyer the full benefit of their expert judgment in the selection of his paper, with due consideration for every factor. Finally, the American Writing Paper Company has gone and is going direct to the paper consumer not only with a national advertising campaign which is educating him in what the printer can do for him, not only with carefully prepared literature, of which this is a fair sample, designed to simplify for him the whole problem of paper selection, but also with trained men who, at the instigation of the printer, will personally call upon him and help him in applying to his individual problem the principles of selection set forth in this book. HOW THE PAPER BUYER BENEFITS What does all this mean to the paper buyer — to the printer, lithographer, stationer, engraver? Simply this, that in the American Writing Paper Company he has a paper-making institution prepared at a moment's notice to deliver him a paper — 1 — that is adapted scientifically to the use to which he would put it; 2 — that is easily chosen from a list of standard papers to fit each essential use, carrying the Company's own statement as to the use for which it is fitted; 3 — that has behind it all the guarantee of uniform quality that lies in the substitution of scientific analysis and test for guesswork in its manufacture, and that inheres in the name and reputation of the greatest fine paper manufac- turing company in the world; 4 — that is produced on a quantity basis and reflects all the consequent economies in its price, and 5 — that is already "sold" on its merits to his customer. In other words, to the printer and to every other big buyer of paper it means infinitely less time and worry in the selection of his paper, better prices and more satisfaction to his customer — and more business! To obtain Eagle-A paper he need only apply to the nearest Eagle-A Service House — a list of these Service Houses appears in the price list between end leaf and back cover of this book — which is prepared to deliver it to him in quantity immediately. CO-OPERATION WITH UNITED STATES ENVELOPE COMPANY Securing a suitable paper for his purpose leaves the user's prob- lem only partly solved; he still needs a proper envelope. For [6] the effective use of paper in correspondence or in direct-by-mail advertising, it is essential that efficient and harmonious envelopes — usually of the same stock as the enclosure — be used. (See page 75.) These must be easily obtainable by the user through the same sources as the paper. Since the Eagle-A Line is so comprehensive and, therefore, calls for the widest range of styles and sizes of envelopes for its varied uses, only an envelope manu- facturer with the most complete equipment could meet its demands. To fill these needs, the American Writing Paper Company has secured the co-operation of the United States Envelope Company. This company is the largest of its kind in the world, amply equipped to give unusual service in supplying every type of envelope and having behind it an enviable record of years of achievement. It also manufactures the boxed cabinet line of goods from Eagle-A papers. (See page 244.) This Company Sheet ! is the authorized manufacturer of Eagle-A envelopes which it sells only through the Eagle-A Service Houses — the distributing agents of all Eagle-A papers. The user may — and should — L •l anC therefore, order his envelopes when and where he orders his " paper, being assured of the proper envelope for his purpose. Colored There is an Eagle-A Envelope for each Eagle-A Paper. Papers !ates [7] How to Select the Right Paper THE proper class and grade of paper to use can be determined by examining or analyzing separately the different require- ments of the use to which it is to be put. There are a number of characteristics or physical qualities of paper any or all of which may be necessary in different relative degrees for the purpose for which the paper is to be used. Therefore, the class of paper to use can be determined by separating the use-requirements into their different elements, and selecting the kind of paper in which the dominant qualities demanded by the important requirements are found. Two basic factors must be considered: 1. Use — the use to which the printed piece is to be put. 2. Impress — the method of impress which is to be employed. USE Use may be divided with reference to — (a) Longevity — the length of time for which the paper must resist deterioration, requiring consideration of the life or permanency of the paper. (b) Treatment — the amount and character of handling, folding or exposure to which the paper will be subjected, requiring consideration of whether paper for ordinary usage or of extra strength is necessary. (c) Appearance — the character or sense appeal in the paper itself requiring consideration of special quality or a range of colors. In general, printed pieces fall into two clearly defined groups: 1. Vehicles for messages. This group includes advertising and formal announcements of widely different types. 2. Records of transactions. This group embraces office and factory forms, records, and documents of all kinds. (1) Printed Pieces that convey messages require paper selected on a basis of (a) ordinary usage; (b) special strength; (c) special bulk to weight; (d) special appearance. (2) Printed Pieces that record transactions require papers selected on a basis of (a) degree of permanency; (b) treatment, or amount of handling, folding and exposure. IMPRESS Irrespective of whether the printed piece is the vehicle for a message or the means of recording a transaction, the choice of paper must also be considered from the method of impress to be applied. The adaptability of the various methods of impress is governed largely by the class and finish of the paper. Fine- screen half-tones, for example, can be applied successfully to papers of the book class in super calendered finishes, but cannot be used on papers in the cover class in antique finishes. SOME GENERAL RULES Papers have been developed to meet all use-requirements and methods of impress for both classes of printed pieces. Each kind of paper includes a range of grades to cover printed pieces for ordinary usage, printed pieces requiring extra strength, printed pieces requiring a distinctive de luxe or quality appear- ance. In general — papers of the lower and middle grades within p aD or any kind can be selected for ordinary usage. For extra strength SelBCti in paper use the higher grades of any kind. Because individual tastes vary so widely and the price element enters into every transaction, no one paper can be exclusively recommended for a given use. It is necessary to offer a range of papers suitable for the specific use and the method of impress to be employed. As a guide to the paper user the following INDEX AND CHARTS SUGGEST QUALITY-STANDARD PAPERS Eft SUITABLE FOR EACH USE AND METHOD OF IMPRESS The index on pages 10-13 alphabetically lists the various classes Colored of printed pieces (such as booklets, announcements, office forms, ' a P ers etc.); and lists under each class the different forms which each Finish- may take. For example, a price list may be developed in the Formatiffl form of a single sheet, a folded card, a stitched pamphlet or in some other form, the index gives after each form the page number Impress of a chart which shows all the Quality-Standard Papers that are suitable for that form. The charts on pages 14-23 subdivide i^m, the papers for price lists into those which are suitable for ordi- lates nary use, and those for which unusual requirements necessitate special qualities, such as extra strength, etc. They then indicate m \«w which of the papers suitable to the given requirements are adaptable to each form of impress, bearing in mind the chief fy| a kj characteristics of the classes of paper as follows: Bonds. — Strength combined with adaptability to pencil writing or typewriting. Linens. — Strength combined with adaptability to pencil writing or typewriting. Ledgers. — Specially adapted to large amount of pen writing; ability to with- stand frequent erasure; heavy sheet will lie flat. Writings. — Suitable where appearance and pen writing are important factors or as a substitute for a light-weight ledger, where strength is not a governing condition. Books. — Strength and uniformity of texture, free from dust or fuzz and adaptable principally to various types of letterpress printing. Offsets. — Surface that will not lift or pick; minimum shrinkage or stretch. Covers. — High resistance to handling, combined with good folding qualities and appearance. Index Bristols. — Good for pen and pencil writing; has stiffness, strength and erasive qualities. Weddings and Papeteries. — Pen writing qualities, smooth finish, brightness of color. Mimeographs. — High absorbency to produce rapid reproduction of mimeograph copies without slip-sheeting, [9] SPECIAL INDEX TO CHARTS ON PAGES 14 TO 23 WHICH SHOW THE QUAblTY-STANDARD PAPERS SUITABLE FOR THE FOLLOWING CLASSES OF PRINTED PIECES Advertising Announcements Single Card or Folded Card Pages 18-19 Single or Folded Sheets " 14-15 Booklets or Bound Sheets " 16-17 Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Booklets Covers 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Broadsides " 14-15 Bulletins Single or Folded Sheets " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Calendars Mounts " 18-19 Pages " 14-15 Catalogs Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Circular Letters Section 1, " 14-15 2, " 22-23 Circulars " 14-15 Directories Covers 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Display Cards (Hanging) " 18-19 Envelope Stuffers Single Card or Folded Card ' 18-19 Single or Folded Sheets " 14-15 Booklets or Bound Sheets Covers 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Folders Card " 18-19 Sheet " 14-15 Hand Bills " 14-15 Note: An Eagle-A Envelope may be obtained for each Eagle-A Paper. See page 75 for proper envelope for each paper. [10] Handbooks Covers Pages 14-15 Pages " 16-17 House Organs Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Magazine Inserts " 14-15 Mailing Cards " 18-19 Package Inserts . Single Card or Folded Card " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheets " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Post Cards " 18-19 Posters " 14-15 Price Lists Single Card or Folded Card Section 3, " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheets " 4, " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Covers " 3, " 16-17 Pages " 4, " 14-15 Books Children's Books Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Gift Books Covers Section 4, " 17 Pages " 4, " 15 De Luxe Editions Covers Section 4, " 17 Pages " 4, " 15 Popular Novels Covers Section 4, " 16-17 Pages " 4, " 15 Reference Books Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Text Books Covers " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Note: An Eagle-A Envelope may be obtained for each Eagle-A Paper. See page 75 for proper envelope for each paper. [Ill Weight Papers Impress lates Mak Toy Books Covers Section 2, Page 16 Pages " 2, " 14 Documents Certificates Section 1-2-6, Contracts Deeds Diplomas Document Covers , Letters of Credit Mortgages Notes Permits Policies Wills Acknowledgment of Orders . Section 5 Bill Heads Checks Credit Memos Debit Memos Drafts Estimate Forms File Copies , Inventory Slips Invoices Manufacturing Orders Memo Slips Order Blanks Proposals Purchase Orders Receipts Receiving Reports Reports Requisitions Statements Stock Reports Telegraph Blanks Telephone Call Slifs Time Slips tio n 1-2-6, Pa ges 20-21 « 1-2-6, ' 20-21 « 1, ' 20-21 (C 1-2-6, ' 20-21 a 12, ' 20-21 a 1, ' 20-21 u 2, ' 20-21 tt 5, ' 20-21 ft 2, ' 20-21 a 2-6, ' 20-21 a 1, 4 20-21 ry Forms tio n 5, 1 20-21 a 5-6, ' 20-21 a 2, ' 20-21 tt 5, ' 20-21 tt 5, ' 20-21 a 6, ' 20-21 a 5-6, * 20-21 a 9, ' 20-21 tt 5-10, 1 20-21 a 5-6, ' 20-21 a 5, ' 20-21 << 11, 1 20-21 « 2-5, ' 20-21 tt 6, ' 20-21 (< 2-5-9-10, * ' 20-21 (( 9, 4 20-21 (« 9, ' 20-21 tt 9, ' 20-21 tt 9, ' 20-21 a 6, < 20-21 it 6, ' 20-21 a 9, 4 20-21 a 11, 1 20-21 tt 5-9, ' 20-21 Greetings Birthday Single Card or Folded Card " 18-19 Note: An Eagle-A Envelope may be obtained for each Eagle-A Paper. See page 75 for proper envelope for each paper. [12] Greetings — continued Single or Folded Sheet Pages 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Covers 16-17 Pages " 16-17 Holiday Single or Folded Card " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheet " 16-17 Booklet or Bound Sheets Covers 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Labels and Mailing Wrappers Labels Chart 1, " 14-15 Mailing Containers Chart 1, Section 2, " 16 Mailing Envelopes " 1, " 2, " 14 Magazines Cover 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Miscellaneous Menus Single or Folded Card Section 3, " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheet " 4, " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Cover Section 3, " 16-17 Pages " 4, " 14-15 Programs Single or Folded Card Section 3, " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheet " 4, " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Cover Section 3, " 16-17 Pages " 4, " 14-15 Stationery Visiting Cards " 18-19 Executives' Letters Section 1, " 20-21 General Letters " 20-21 Letterheads and Envelopes " 20-21 Tickets Single or Folded Card " 18-19 Single or Folded Sheet " 14-15 Booklet or Bound Sheets Cover " 16-17 Pages " 14-15 Note: An Eagle-A envelope may be obtained for each Eagle-A paper. See page 75 for proper envelope for each paper. 113 1 Finish- Impress Mak Ord Jnr 9' .t! £ CO £ Ph OJ l-H o CO S3 5 J-H > o U CO -a cj CO bO as Oh -a • l-H CO c CO U • ^i Oh Ph rt O C u PhPhPhPh CO w 03 0> bo as Ph w ■a ti .fcl -^ OOOQ ~ a S3 2 ^'3 rt o o d . . o o C 3° OP F8 «3 B Ba a« • 2 Ed Q P pq t-. 0)^3. S " C <3CQOQ o « -s jj 3 S'3 c g § "3 « ■S S OP caw en OS's l-i t. »-. h c E c B B"3 o „, o c« *-• i> I* b B t S'3 «"(5_! l 2 ecflc .13 t- "2W cS ta nl ta •S G S^.H.H.H.H ss'sSbeee .a Q) O « E o 3 C o E •« 3 OS •a c o 4 0.2 > F 0.&J3 < 0 V .a O ° a) 3 S3 o O O O > o •d C ca OCX O O <:d, & a £1! o J3 u O E ■o < O SSg 3 CO o u tfl fe > h •52 '? u u O ™ E « 3 §11*2^11 3 P-S CO _ o o •HS.S.S SEfe£ Q o o if,- SES5 ^^s «<&. « 22 E 15 M d d OjO * * o '■§<* S T3 to *ll« ai pi O CD -■ > O BO U S S BO ^, O BO 4) .£ ^ bo * na Q 3 fe . 3 ^3fl fl 3 ^4 o tu co (O 9, a £ " £ > H *d o Jh o u »-. s. *d »E 5 « v c u • +J p<$ m - 5o.M a o 1 M 4) -fcj M . CD to an o * a) 14-1 w Fh 55 S 1 •S c _3 o ."Sen .2^3 S> (8 2JS a £ o a) > iS < ^£ to ,3 3 co W> ctii-3 *S5 P. cti 2 «o CO H It O »H .8 -a CO C 5 § O +3 Sg 2 > u •S-S > ^•S Directories Envelope Stuffers Gift Books Greeting Cards CO a Q T3 i u > ■a ft o to- .fa c3 a W-d t-. n. a; )T 0) a Herculi Arven Parado Standa Riverd Albion Beebe o •c i < 3gg O h > 0) tu C Qffi<3 .2 »> < < S o "3 Is 3 Pi C *d to JJ ,Oj3 co^4 o>il g ft O cfl a O cfl _, o fi-d at « fci CO •d a -e^l cfl 3 *"> w> 5 2 u S3 cu ^"d,-* 9< cfl •2 £ *> S cfl g Ck 11 c/2 g-^-S M -2 * 10 ce Is §i| •+■* P - 2 5 O O CO O S J3 S CST) 8 6ti&sS&^ K O ft 3il u w fe 17 Pi o CO -T-( 5 < a <3 to to )— 1 13 4-> ,. ^ en n u to rt (J oi H u QO w w> ^« S.S g c 5 O t 1 ^ fcrH O m Mm "£ S al u k a a G SOI . bo u 0) 4) •£J2 3 O s rrt ea o V.PQ (X) H V-c 0) a 03 .2,2 Oh PnOih 's w 5* H oi •si &i a H o ft . 51 S S W Q .A ft & P § 8 Si a, I S.SP 6«*3* O-S o ' *1 So a* ■sjpq o* b OS iu 2.8 £2 * S 3 SS^ - a, oi C CL, Ph 2 .£5 g grass's g'S •H.J3 Sp'u B'g*E ■teol ^ 0)6 ■q'd'd a *. ^oi oi ■» t-c -d * a, Oj ? "to cS-fi tC 2 oi o n tf . .« 3 oi K 18 * >. ■::- do JM Covei : d'Aigl Weddi (3 ply) (3 ply! rfield ( g"3i ^ T) ci K .v ® # 1 § •V V CO w "3 a >> ^ii co cfl 8 ° *d «i » u * "S K 0) « C.2J3 o> co fc!.!2 43 Q u s? * 5 sr S^3 g 01 ^5? S 8 s si £ CO a .0 CO 1 C «> cO S-^.a ■sJ5 | s> on »a 5 "-• S 3 1 £8 M 60.3 fa cO 73 t« .i3^ ^ co 2 Ji *,£* p. ^8* fiasco * o« o, 0. !">"> » ° "3 CO 3 O 3 Deckle Arden Biscay Cheste js-3.2 S-Sc.a oj « 3 t».e cj E ki-^4 CO 45 CO N O 6 -SSSy "5 3T3 3 ion 2 ranee the print ust be of i y artistic ve chara Si *-< .3 Otj 2 O CU +3<-> g^S CO rt E u CO 1 .« 8 8 sB-aa 1 w sJ-S-g? Oh * e Lu App (Whe piece unusu impre ter.) Jh ^ CO 3 tifl^j a W - [19] as *-> CO u en O o CD s o o Q $ a) a) i«&as.s 3 4>rM tDAlDDl ft+j o a) a> £~ CT\ *0 \o (J\ ~ On »h o 42 © •3 d nit32 3 g m w o y c T i i CN CN (N 45 iS W ,Q .S " n a i ^a ^&fi o & >. o ■n hO oj (3 > x) Tl -a a 13 cu aJ.O c 3 o t-. 3 3 Xl B ~ < is a! a . 3 4> 3 O > O co 11 a* b*d J cd "8 CD CD & . c 53 K cd w ° I-. c ^ 8K S° (DO & 1 " K 1 || a 10 PnO 0> CN co to to bo+? u C_cd "3 bO Sft +j "o w 13 CD >J a CD a « 3 < 0) a B.S cd 2 i3 g G-S « OB •d'e.S cocO pq h S " c cd *> 5 52 to « C C CO bo-y u a cd O §> ■3 ft t« "o CO -0 CD a a) £"2 m CD 4-> 'u m CD K c 2 s •d § ^S 1 ^* CD U CD > O O a a 3 y c ° t! P 4 a> 15 2 3 X cd B 1— i CD CD A) O IH CD .Ej O 60iJ CD C cd g OQ CD" O CD c c cd O ft'a CD CD O CD O PQ C O PQ§ 3 CD O g S § _2 ftHZ CD . . "vim .ft O 3 fi ca Th to ^O t< 00 Os O 1—1 1— ( 1— 1 T— 1 Weight Impress 'ostage 21 > r .S J8 03 M as 8 a> ft£- a . 2 S B •S J .2 W '3 ajr "g S3 a* O 3-£ 3 «■?■§. £"3" 3 ™ s.§ a w MO o 5" 3 . . i3 * ■** +• ->** t* I 1j O 4-> C rt : o £ art's, ft .3 8> -oS ■ « T3 5 ^J S > « o o" '^g§a w BO O o g£SH - ' * ^ "J In P *> S3 r; 0.3^3 o O o "S S3 a 4 3 s-ss-a 45. 2S . ? S3 E g MO o O ViZf- 1 V> 3 . . o J, t* S ■- ° Pi V o S^J u. S y Sr^ o-a « 03-S S^3 "8a Sfd o_^ » •S^"o o. - ^ w MO o g£^H ?» 3 . . J3 oj +j +j *.* * "^2 C^3 .2 o u M M MS U H S J3 O S OQfe .g c « ojj3 e 3 Q-M^ • 3 ^ w cfl'g ftg3 ft ^.i fe „ H M-" - • s > 5 s K - •2 &a*« ~t 3 trj C C" 1 " •^B C3_ a.s . C3 DCS a; S3 I 2 ■§t St- I I it . 3 cj ^ Biu O M S--3^h o t5E- fl CN -a &S.3 3 d 3. 2 3 «K U -<.S O tij o • o v 4> o> .S •"-« "5? * *S B £ .B om o b& >■•)+; 1-3 V i>^4 c^ g-g e| £ b |2 fu o« 8^2 1! S2 dm T3* „* 3 ■^ B 4) O u 8 2 '"' « 6 J7tt.S S 5 & s a g o bo a) en .2 «o«J~ , O bo|S O Q <3PQ Be £*.£ £ CM S "3 °9 -+. I? •-< (M ^ 3 ca i2 O bo a> f %°*c "S^c 7t ^~J -*CN D^S *«1 ftpi s; b 3 o! 5; 3 o s U< OPQ 171* ■ cq-cn O J? 3 cS o bo P5 B -ts.2 '■b'j 8.2? Bis „ OCQ Q 5 a.£ t: SP ^0 0) g, £ g g^o " o B 8 3 >. r! fl <2 b >. r* 1 +J (M '« 1> ,-.« ot 01 0, U - o-fi "g 42 mi; a! p.2 a ja yl H B O s fes » ^ o 1> V en In § 01 !?„f^ 2 bo ^. B 5 ?^ o oio B b" 5 H.2 CI - f« fee s ftop o bo o S rs n nl.B 5-5 §.§2-8 G'c3- C! • -h a) (VCQ2 o B 23 Styles and Sizes of Printed Pieces THE style and size of any printed piece may be practical or impractical in relation to its economy in production. By style is meant the shape, number of pages, and folding. Practical Styles Practical styles are those which best meet the use-requirements which cut, fold, and print without waste from standard sheet sizes. They mean a saving in paper and labor. Everything that can be economically folded can be printed, but everything that can be printed cannot be economically folded. Select a practical style for the piece before planning the printing. Illustrations of practical styles for printing, advertising, and publishing use are shown on pages 26 and 27. Practical Sizes Practical sizes are those which cut, print, and fold without waste from standard sheet sizes. On pages 28 to 46 are shown a series of charts which give a number of printed piece sizes. These sizes will meet all the ordinary essential use-requirements. They are cut from standard sheet sizes. Each chart is arranged so that all printed piece sizes which approximate a general size are grouped together for convenient selection. Thus, if an approximate size has been determined upon, turn to the chart that embodies the group. INDEX TO CHARTS Practical Untrimmed Sizes of Printed Pieces that Cut Without Waste from Quality-Standard Sheet Sizes: Pages Printed piece sizes that approximate 2x3 28-29 3x4 30-31 3x6 32-33 4x5 34-35 4x9 36-37 5x7 38-39 6x9 40-41 7x10 42-43 8x11-9x12 44-45 The Selection of a General Size The selection of a general size for a printed piece should be considered in relation to the following factors: 1. The amount of space necessary to carry a message, the size of type, and size and number of illustrations. 2. Recommendations that may be in force by the class of readers to whom the pieces are to be sent and used, such as the National Association of Purchasing Agents. [24] 3. The customary size of similar pieces and envelopes, such as letterheads, checks, etc. 4. The cost of mailing. 5. Post Office recommendations and regulations. 6. The adaptability to filing and other uses. The Relation Between Styles and Sizes and Standard Sheets Standard sheet sizes are those which have been developed at the demand of users and buyers of printing to meet ordinary and essential use-requirements in the printing, advertising and publishing fields. An exhaustive survey made by the Committee on the Simplification of Page Sizes, appointed through the Bureau of Standards by the Department of Commerce, Washington, Selecting D.C., shows that with but a slight change of from Yd' to %" m the- Page Sizes dimensions, practically all present-day printing, publishing and advertising pieces could be cut, printed and folded without Sheet Size: waste from these standard sheet sizes. The use of impractical sizes, those which necessitate the making of non-standard sheet sizes in order to eliminate waste, may seem Mf nM 6 to be an immediate economy, but in order to get this special sheet size the user gives up all the quality benefits of standardized Colored quantity production. Papers Non-standard papers or papers which have to be made to order cjnjM, are, at the best, experiments, while standard papers are known Formation factors whose qualities have been tested by continual usage. For example, the use of a 31" x 41" sheet, in place of a standard 32" x 44", may save about 320.00 on an order as large as 4,000 pounds; in exchange for this saving the user runs the risk of having to buy an over-run of 10%, costing approximately $35.00. If he gets the exact amount of paper he ordered, he either has to pay for the wastage and the manufacturers' time in adjusting the grade to his specification or there is a variation in the stock. In non-standard papers the user gets "green," unseasoned stock which may cost far more than the $20.00 "saved," as he realizes when he sees the poor register of the printing. Then again, he must wait for delivery. If the stock is not satisfactory, the printer is put to the inconvenience of waiting until a new lot of paper is made. He has lost the chance of buying seasoned, finished stock made under the most favorable conditions when an impractical piece size is specified which necessitates the use of non-standard papers. 25 THE STANDARD FORMS OR VEHICLES FOR PRINTED MESSAGES THE illustrations indicate those forms or styles which an analysis of more than 30,000 individual printing jobs shows to comprise 99% of the requirements of printers, advertisers and publishers. They are the forms, signatures or vehicles upon which all standard paper sizes are based. There are possible, of course, a great many variations of these forms obtainable simply by folding sheets off center, as short end folds, and the like. Attention value should be dependent upon illustration, color and typographic display rather than upon oddly proportioned shapes and freak folds. The tendency to-day is toward con- secutive reading, and these forms cover every requirement in the presentation of a printed message whether it be a circular, booklet or a catalog. Illustration No. 1 — Single Sheet or Two-page Form. Either, of course, may be folded again to fit envelopes; for example, a letterhead is a single or a two- page form and, obviously, is folded to fit an envelope. Illustration No. 2 — Four Pages, One Fold. Out of an examination of over 30,000 pieces of advertising litera- ture, 54% were four pages folded once. See pages 28-42 for those sizes that cut and print without waste the four-page form or vehicle. Illustration No. 3 — Six Pages, Two Parallel Folds. This form is used largely for en- velope enclosures and stuffers. Nineteen per cent, of over 30,000 pieces of literature examined fell into this type of form or fold. See pages 28-42 for such sizes for this form as cut and fold without waste from the leading sheet sizes. Illustration No. 4 — Eight Pages, Two Parallel or Two Right Angles. This is another popular form for printed messages. Out of more than 30,000 pieces of printed ad- vertising literature 14% of them came within the range of these two signatures or forms. [26] Illustration No. 5 — Twelve Pages, Letter Fold. A very popular form for en- velope enclosures or for broadsides folded for mailing. This form is mainly for four-page messages that are folded to fit the envelopes. Six per cent, of the advertising litera- ture in a survey representing more than 30,000 individual jobs were in this form. Illustration No. 6 — Sixteen Pages, Three Right Angles or Two Right Angles and One Parallel. These two forms are largely used for booklet work as well as circular work or for broadsides. A sixteen- page form may also be folded in three parallels, but when unstitched it is inconvenient to read. These two forms are also largely used for stitched and trimmed booklet work of sixteen pages. Illustration No. 7 — Twenty-four pages, three Right Angles and One Parallel or Four Right Angles. The twenty-four-page unstitched or double letter form represented but one-half of 1% of the more than 30,000 individual pieces analyzed. Illustration No. 8 — Thirty-two Pages, Three Right Angles, One Parallel or Four Right Angles. This unstitched form represented but a small volume of the un- stitched advertising work surveyed. Its principal use is for booklet work. The majority of forms over eight pages are largely used for stitched and trimmed booklet work. Illustration No. 9 — Gang Work. This illustration shows the gang work method of producing large editions of printing jobs or for running two or more jobs at the same time. Booklets printed in gang-work forms show, of course, a marked saving in both press work and binding. [27] Sheet Sizes Substance Papers Impress 'ostage * uHtine opera R=fe Ui ffl to Oh pq O o ■Z -13 53 £> • 3 q oj Jx .a cu o 3 u «5 6° M- 73 i»P r^O £/)£> 03 B -«5 « Si fe§? III 03 *J > vHm B m -y 6 ro •r •- ^ o a g X CO CM 1-H CO X X ■^COCM XXX XXX i-HCCI I I r-ttMTH I I I (NCR-* XXX OltMO .-ICd-* Li I XXX *-l D 00 CO O E.9 •«J< CO XI SU o S % a UK VO D o CO CO 43 3 o fc! OT3 O D. ID ^s CN S O CO ""' c3 0) o <« li 9" 3 CO "3 2co au ca Bn §"£ ■a ID H 21 a c a a a ,a t=P E=!3t> o -2 CD CD > o «s 2 o w W O o S 8%. <—IM -HCN-* 1 II cocMoq rtCNCO co bo CD ^(21 O ' e3 «« s 3-Sc2 o l|| ""CM « co M 3-ScS o MOM "S.ScS CO CD CO "3.SS2 CD CD 'ft CD CO i— 1 CD > 3 < a, IN N Q« coS c CONN a o O o O T3 a PQ CD 'ft CD CD CO o » t; CN - -i O " cd 'C Ct) CD O CD C o5 & •w CO 3 C5 ^ 5 ^t^^ 0Lt -+^ cL -fj O I C3 O I C3 O i C3 P-I-* 3 O^ 03 +=cO CO CO CM CM *CO Cl *«a -^co 3 -^co a 0) co u o CO CO OS O O o O R O | 1-H O O ro ■" CO - 3 O CD 2° co ^* 5 s s rt'co & 'eel p^ « "-• & '-' _fi o5 -M O a 2 co acj '2 ^ b fe to u 3 ^ft CD % CTJ B 3 <3 2 5°0 . H O 0) CO CO •* CM C32 3 00 N 00 CM •52 k "* 2° CO MCN CO "3 .C •g 3 O 00 CO 3! CM 00 CO ■5M B cs lO CM OS >o o CM ^Ov .s to £ 3 u ts t> "* ■* 2 o CO CM CM so 00 t}< > i> CO CN O N a X X « D 00 OS 00 to ^K CM -h 1 1 OT3 O CM a to 00 to CM ^ ^ £ Q w cm irt cn Ui •* ax a£; * 1 JttS <-> M a « a H < o w Zw aO s "5 i 3tM g co M bD O.O, t>C3 <-HtM 1000 CM CM M K a 0. »-ICM cid CM CM K X 0. P T CM CO a> 2 co in C3 bO 0) S o 3 " xn .as w o X a. 3. 233 O 05>0 ^ to £ •* f.SE o < Cm n a ^HCM ^NCM "3 po eq 1 a) a A o S-9 5 CO (h CD o p 35 CM CM GO °l >S M N Pf Ot a 0. 0.0, a 0, 0, N < O.O. to mem &&& rtCM-* PP <- .& CO 2: o w W o < a. o 1 1 -HIM .-IIN CMOS ^21 £4 9 OB sp ■S.StS TTT OSW5 00 <-t(MC0 XXX CM C5SIO Li 1 •-ncq CM XXX co-^ to 1 1 CO CM 1-1 CO X X £4g ■S.StS ^ ,« ** OS ^ u O m tjj U • »— 1 U-l re S M o r^^^ PPS= 0) PPP ppp PPP CO -rd CC-* S 1 < O a> C ti CD 'o c -HCNI-rt* 1 II 111 S to Si o«2i ^ fl.SP 3 — CO S T «CM"*I J ' ' —■CM'* 1 1 1 ^ S 8 O 1 C3 -*"* C 3 — CO 6 55 w o x x x OIMC5 X K K 05CM05 XXX t-»co •* XXX CO 00 XXX "- 1 1 CO >-c j« ~S^ ^ O is^^ ^^ :*^ O 6 •9 m <: a. 4. KP S500-H CO Ol CM too* cm CO I--CO E^ Tt*-«f So s 1 °S„S . 3 O V Or 1 W J3 2 to CM CO CM CO 00 •* 4-) si! 2 M W 5£ £) 'u & •+J CM. « be rt "Jr< L> 2m 1 IN CM ■* CM X 00 CO 00 CO CM tp CM CM X t^ OS 10 CM 10 CM CO CM CM CO t^. a>£ w £ 3 H 1 b. O •a 4) ^ S! ^ ^ £ S L u g ■* ■* "* •* CO Tf •* a s ai* X X X X X « « "£« h2^ 0. a < ^ X X X £ ^ CM CO CO CO CO CO co [30 ■»-> w OH 2S o bo ?l KD O en Zco qCJ KD o •» >- & S3 • 3 On Z° CO £f£i (3 fa() <1> ■8«.§ a-2co O W 4) GO ■* 3 a "3.203 cp P as. P£> HN* i-lCM 1 1 1 (ONM 1 1 b-CM .sa xxx X X - HH ■S3 2e4g Zto S.U Z° CO co 2 a fa u •E •- f* o x * » » »-i.-i(N XXX £ « Si o X J. J, J. -H r^ (M X M K oo — r- HS X £ c O 4) C .3 s O 4) -<\ ll * «*- o .§.c o C w +> |!3 £> S3 g .S o ° Si x x- £ 2 2 • • e "3 at J A V H w CO i— i W W CO Q W < O HH CO W Q CO CO W Z S5 & H Q < M Pi o 31] «2 a IM CO ■*-> C/3 =3 i* « O i 1 a w > & «i ,9.9 °1 OTJ *s c^ P S! CM 00 ■* *H a vs X) X! CN ■-< 1 1 H O 13 CN CO CO CO "* CM CM « 00 2 > 8,5 -S3 | OJ, 13 s N 4 ^TJ W "S.Sbo t^ S c CJ 3 O o rt O O ih's) o H a a "c/5 00 CM CO Oi COOS CM CM CO H a w o , o q 10 -r^ COOS -rJoo • i-H 1 09 W X X W r- ■^ co ■S 1 w Mt^O CO'* CO PSiOO a O n a X K M X X X X X X X X X en <— i ^^^ ^ X ^\ ^ ^\^$t CD rf < Ph 4 CO CM CM t^co-^ i>-co-^ t~- CO CO 6 • i— i t3^ BP • 3 O OJ ^5-cg ""? CO CO a J-t s '2 o CM 1—1 « "8 ' ■o m -_2 o C^l OS 00 OS OS •* & +3 CN § XJ H 1 W 2 3 CO CM t>3 X CO X CO C3 CO "frt X ^ ^ ^ ^ H m -u S \n »o CO CO t^ CO CO a p CI to °x cs o « So f °,-a 3 a P CI CJ a '$ o w 3 -^ (0 O •* ^ °1 0T3 C X O w 5 % CI moo Cl«> CO-* CO-«4i a >— 1 XI w K N M H X X V —1 < o tl Q, 0) H s > o w < N 0. ^ 05 o>o 00 « E W a. KB r ~ l ~* tHM CI CO « s ftl 3 CO Q 2° w c N ■^ ■* 53 X5 O co w 3 p Si h §■ 2 to Q.O ci O CI us i-J -3 i < 2 o m e 1HN 1 1 f~CI "-ICJ 1 1 1 II c Si ca xi m >. 1 s i— 1 co H Q lo w o < ft. 59 X X X X X X tt 3 g to* 2 CO CO Ph 4 1 HN oa> ci'oa 10 •0 'S. § 8 09 « X! 2 t! A 3 ° * 0,, "£ j, •* CO •d a ° H 01 -»-> OJ s s .3 w x> "* 3 P H < 2 a> 1- g, 2co no CI 10 Cl CO OJAl 0. 0. 0. ft a a ■4-i* ppp »-* CI -* 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 ._ 03 03 g w O Q M O V CO o sl «-h r- c-i e-10^ CICS ut> CJ O C w X 5 to o < ft. 1 cop « X X CO fhn X H K •S<. X « « OiCIOS •2 4) ft (U 9. O rr s x 8 ° 1) c C)X .3 x •" is ^2 U d3 2S 1 00 00 to w CO Z u co *1S * <3 o si fe CO Pw 2co 0,0 e» CJ _, CI CJ _ bj"S "3 S g H ■* c» CO CO c< c Si « o < Cm (i) W 5C 10 w ■J o ■a-S 2 is & ii"3 § ■Sac St 3 O Pm < 2 o» x X|o GO - 5 n 2° co •* 00 CI c? CO •- x '" m CI ■* CO CO ■* fJS. '" ■Sl JD OO CO eci jo o fcu 00 tJ< O N Urn "S'E . M OT3 CO CN c io CN >-i X C3 CO CO | | 58 1 O cn P CM CM 5t W CN w " 2co &U ** Oh X -i- 3 i s O CN WD CM CD CO CD CO co bO CD 03 1-3 2 O co W CO C 77 O— I CT5-* X « 1-HCM 1 1 CM ^J< COtJ* X X 5cM * ■g.ScS 1 R s PQ " to o < LoP OO IN CO o CM CO O $3 S3 tu-S to - "c3 pq a CD > CM «5 OCO - ■* ■o* 1^1 2co au t ^j CO CD T3 a> a ,*3 o ^ m ^3 _ 53 c 03 -th fl CD ct) n a 1 * 3 co CD ^3 Pi H eg a u)co *£% "S.Scq o eg ct> CO C3 bfl OP OcAg cn^ a •S.2c3 O PPP •-1CCITJI 1 II s a a q. PPP ■-HCM-* P& O w oo" 1 CO o o CO W o < CO 4-* cd wP XXX IfSO© XXX o*o rHFHN Oh •** O i c« -*■«> a 3 — CO o 53i 5e-SP a'~cc a 1 1 1 CD CM CM t-h CM CO XXX »HCO« -H-HCN 1 1 t»CM X X l-H t^ . 3 o H 2° w «5 CO •»)< fe ° aj ^ •- CM CM «« CO 3>d "Hi < Ph H Zco aU CO CO 2 SI • w4 c t; 21 PPP 5 2*1 O 1 C3 PPP a 0, a PPP CO < en C *i CD N □, coP 1 1 1 XXX ill O i C3 *>■* a 1 r T t-h CO CM 1-1 CM'* 1 if ~H t- CM OlOO ■"•* c -H-H CM -H-HCM ~0 _ w ■9: CO — < CO W o XXX XXX 3 — CQ O XXX 00 -H CO XXX O0 HN s 'to ^ < a. t~o>n *-( *H 6 4 oS„« . — O cu Or > -"X CO CM CO 00 4mt S CO •1 1 2° w •o ^ a Cos Si « •o c a 2 3 X X o CO X 5 X CM CO 3! X CO CM CO X • X X X X X Ifl ■* •<* "5 "5 3 « m '5 "2 « X « * X • 3 'co H S "* 3 < X X CO ■* M< "* ■* 34] s a CO a CO °JS to S2 X +3 o 5; a £ OO CO CM J3 So O N US rt O -0 CN X a cn CO CO OT3 2g a CM CM 0) > w •"« C3 3 tf vS-g 8 10 CO cS u •3 u Cu c 01 > < z 5* 5 CO CD CO « MO £2 3 J T 3 111 to CP CO a bov a> CO a < .Si* 5-* g "S.2CQ X CT> X °4g s.Sra O s-Sco Cl> O 0. )— 1 a> > cn w£ 1 6 • 3 I ■St)'"-* 3 Z° w O u J3 CM CO CO Q °«s| O WD -t-> O w ZoiftU & 8 JS 1 aj j«s -1-3 H z 2 111 a. a. OP *-ICC| »-lCM M X! NO CO Id CO co a bou 5 |i| 111 cO J C n) O 1— < CO CO CD T3 5 ^ °2§ f.as ■3.SK 5^ 9 "S.H&o | a >j CD 0) -4^ <: 8&8 i=>P^ 3 ?,S 'Z CO ^5 CO a) a co J z 00 w < a. 3§ s n a, 153 s3s 3 — CO O *- ii 3 t; ■^ 0. « ^0, to S» 3 CO w 3 CM t>- 3 CO ™« ^ Z w w "&CN w go ^ ™* 'J fe.5 Z 0) 1— 1 Standard Sheets From Which Sizes 9 O X CM X a 3! X CM CO 3 X CM CO CM CM X •0 V ^ & ^ £ ^ U5 ■* •* l« 10 in c v (d •5.a j= 1" a < X H H K K ^ & P M ■* ■* ■* •* 35] « x p s" > < PL, to • I n a KP O O ■ a O S CM >Cn 10 - ZwaU # CD C ^3 O 66 - rt O w & .a @ cH P H < Z O 33 CO CO O CM 8-g £ DO ™ 0) N O. wP 0. CD "§ a; CO ot cd in Q. C PP CD cd 'O to xn in 3 i 1 CJ D •r-l C cu £* rG 5 g CO o> 50 S CO CO ■* p H < 2 ZwaO 00 00 ■O <^ SO 77 c- a. 1 1 eg S DO " f£jo 3 g. a a PPP rtCM-* 1 II CD ■4_) &43 00 O n a 2SCS Qpjl-g 1 ca O t c« -woo a •^00 a OMOQO 3 +» J2 <-H CO s ^ 1 CO en W O < He —ICO mi co 5 fl.SP 3 — 00 O -HIM CO XXX CMOSiO iS d.£P 3 — cffl O CO c/iP i-l-H *H^H 00 ■ 3 Si CO IM 00 Zw aO CNI CM 00 CO CO 00 N CO id 3T3 « O 3! X CM CM CM X CM X CO 00 CO X 10 OO CO X 10 H 1 W 2 a CO 1-4 CM fa O ■a ^ ^ £ £ $ fl t- 00 00 00 05 05 E SS rt '3T) X K « X m H 5 a a < « ^ ^ £ X ^ p eo M CO co co •* 36] «~ ^ m a P CO CO WO) O £ X to •m a P IN d 3 +» ooU > u '& o.2 Uoo *© P CO CO * CO eo a "si K O cn o-o a > •7 c CN P CO CO 00 CO CO oo <-< cd Zoo ftU O s 8 ■a a CM cd £ c 0. P.O. ft « > o < o 00 i-HCM O— c CO'* ^HCM 1 1 CM** CO-* CM cu cm ja P I CM CO 5 © to °* >* •* CM ft T CO CO to .9 CO < X X OO X X K < n a CM CM !>. •d 6 H 4 CN 00P CM CO CM CO rt $ B • O os fl '6 w u -ISP 1 ' Z° 00 •* ■* CM CM CO Q 0> ,3 o Zoo aCJ •O W5 O O h *d W s Cm P -■£■ a on 60 CD CO CD CO « t»0 OD co 60 ft 7 CM ft ft rtCM 1 1 lOOO CM CO -a * > C CO C c3 1 S O 1— 1 CO m Q CO o < XXX X M H X 3.9S O X X X OS »0 «CM (J CU CO to co CO M Cfl Ph CN C c3 cm" to 00 CD CM CM t— "° 'a 00 CQ so -2 H .■§ i 1 ^ Ph . g O u Z° 00 00 OO CM CM * 00 v •- a 05 J3 CD O Zoo no CO CO 3 OO iO O 00 100 CM»JO CM Pi §-* 11 "^ •5" C •C "i 1 e CO £ 00 O wXi S 5*3 H vo P H °l ^ c c G G. Cm £g -S S ft ft ft ft ft P < Z O 00 W *-» ctj S 1-1 CM* ILL woo i-l CM* 1 II CO CM CM t-CM if* 0^"c3 ill O 1 03 *tOB ■-HCM a *-l CM* IN OilfOOO '-HCMCO 2 < CO M X X •HNCO M X X X X 3**^CQ 2 0.% 3 — CQ X X XXX CNIOi IO p^ u o *S ^is:^ O CMOS T W) < _n a »oo l-HCOCM i-tS -H»-HCM ■s a^ O CO 1 Of •o 00P O „ B Slj J3^ H "o « -5; 3 S " CD CO ■* ■* 00 CO Z°"w 2 "••*■ pi! < PS tS.S fe cd lo ^ CO o Ph °| § 'l rt ^! CM CM ■"J! CM S H H W W SB 1^3 CM CM 00 * CO •* P4 O O H c3 ^ Ph < 00 W Hi ■Soo ft- 10 o 2* 3 o C» »o 00 2 3 (I. CO CO CM N ^ CM .. —"d w S S S S 6 oi c Z 001— 1 •a Si s £ X X S S B «■■-. So, iJooH >-* t» 00 00 00 OS o> 05 X X. X « 2R C3 5 9 3 < eo CO CO CO co •* ■* Weight 'ostage V 37 °J3 M a •* •* ■* CO ■wCO X a S,° P OO 00 00 CO „ oort< CO CN 03 a. K X VO & -* •* CO t^ «o ON TT X O cn a CO 00 CO ^ W CN W «H ax Zmou to +* 1 Oh O lO WD j; J4 bfl H < 2 O 55 °l CO « 2 4> « a & CN 1 OO CO « tj) S °CN * a 7 ra CD ^o!l °CN ^ 7 ■* •* CO «•» * 60 fO °CN rt •g.Sra s^ ^'d m S "S.Scc X •s.abo CO "S.afco X "S 8 S O nS W CO a g Q T co < Oh CN CN CO ■a to C pq >hOS ■2c)* J - c CN CN CN & a CO > 4 CI) S3 wpq 3.H ■4J CO O V-. CO .£3 +-> O to" CO u < O 53 to O CN O O CN CO C 5 ^ a I CN aa 1-1 CN 1 1 •Aoo CNCO « CO m aa >-HCN MOW CO bfl CO h9^§ aa P& >-H0"co C a) 3 +-> cti C w < a. >o t-ICN a.Sco X X 00 CNCO a .2 to X X CN CN CNCO •3.200 o» % • 1— t Oh & as CO a Ph CN to a . 3 O o> 5 r > ■" -a CN H* ■* •* 3 Oh H ,S.c ^ ZLo 0.0 O CN CN "5 CN ICD Hi! aa %B l-HCN &i=P -S i-HCN-* ■S „ CD a a a a +3 CO Si 11 CO +J 8? "H 2 co B 1 | 1 1 1 1 1 1 £jfa -H(Nt)< 1 11 CNCNHi* CNCOth XXX COCNCN »HCNCO l-H 4-> • 1—1 00 1 O w w t; m N C to £3 C31T« -HCN K K i-l(NCO M « M ig o.SP a-— &o CNCO'* XXX Ol C3 -«oo a ■3- M co O 1 CN CN t~ Plh en < Oh 00 NO> moo t-tCNCO ^ 03 ^ .S08 2° to •* 00 OO 00 CN O N < fYj 0S3S J2 J3 cu 2: CO QCJ CN CO CO 3 CO CO CO CO CO O CN S4< *» Ph °l •X M CO c i> CM 6° a a aa CO 23 &Pt= PDP P &PP 1= PPP &t= id CC^ rC CN < O -HCNHHi 1 I 1 ^HCN-* 1 II 7 -HCN'* 1 II 7 rtCN-* 1 II -HCN 1 I i^H\ ^h\^ "G yc^-x ^ 6 • 1— i ■a* < Oh 4 OiCNOS OINCS 00 coo HCCM rHN OS t> ■ 3 O CU 00 CO CN CO 00 CO ■* CD •4-) c s 1 +J CN Eh 1 Z° CO ■a Ji 5 Sc/jE w £ s cu.t; m CN K 00 CN X CO CM •* CO ■* X CN CO 5! X CN CO CN X & u TI cu X X «\ X v< So »Si- CD O I> t^ t^ 00 CO S I J3 g « « K X M M K !«! isc? H "5 to a a < ^ X X X X )h\ )h\ & <# M< ■* 10 10 10 >0 38 s a CO P •"CM m< ■* CO °£ CO 3 u. M ^ O « CO a 3 CS p 00 oo CO CO O m o .C coS "• a, OK VO P •* •& CO 3 'o'H o-o M o cn a cu Z | sa_ w J3 C3 ZlfiQU g •d CO "S +a C3 O •d 5J-M p C i-i °l in C ■a § o S » CO P I CM K S CO .2 $ .2 a; > o .a < 2 O w W OJ, « *°n 3 to M to co co C3 60 CO CO 60 iff C3 60 CO °CM S co 5b "g.SS m m 03 & to CO O^ C3 ■i.sis co

5 oi < 4 n a wP 13 S ai E Ph 3 !-■ O w CO P H H CM — — „_ CD X5 o a 2£a<3 O CO CO CO 00 s C/T P < 2 O w W o s* 2 0) t-c 3 CO 05 60 w e m *£3 C3 60 CO o. o. 93 60 CO o. p I cu C3 60 CO 5 room a « cu XI to >. c 2 00 e .s 3 § - (a O l-H CO W P co CO 3 t5 o-J, « -"rt CI oo 60 -g.Sto o o CO CD CM CM ■^ CO -2«S CO 60 O °2i ■g.aa o "|.2ca O M a! < NO, 35 P •-HCM •a "a H Ph CM 8 ►J ** .Sou O , 3 - J3 2° w ■* CO cq co ^ *d O H P 2 co aU ■a 00 CO 2 Pi p < 2 O s oo -u CO 1 -1 0) cu XS S J .°60 ™ a) g « co co °3 S o. c c •* CO Oi CO O.Q, PP n CO CM Hi O jf C3 -wc6 cl CO l* 60 £ ■Scil s « •a « to G CO O CO -M CO C co XI H P <3 to CD 'So .s CO 1 CO w w o < co 60 ■§ — o3 ,-HCM CM 3- a CQ rHCO S2 d.SP ^•"•cc 5 a.S ■g — CQ ft ^3i ° CO pi C0J3 .3 .s r M <: is 33P o o COThcO •-"-I CM O -*■* o O of2 ti .Soj 2° w OO 2 O ft °!is| co CM CM 00 »o J2 w CO O f^ OO 00 -M X is X X X X C3 3 < ■* ■* ■* lO >0 US 10 Weight Papers Impress \ 39 s a _ Sj m O tp CO CO Oj3 <«3 o s; to o So > o> O N X "i CM a 00 CO CO 00 "* CO CN - a X X Ui» cH 03 CN CO CU ^ a- » i P4 -' - - — ^J3 a; O o o U5 o o W3 O J4 ^ **** Q J5 w o - i- °l « M m B ■»-» cd og a 7 "room C8 hO CD go cd cn ro M & CO © CO c3 bfl a> ■ssSa 7 M s ^T3 S c O oi « 03 o S3 £ CM "S.HiS o 3-9o3 3-ScS O "SI "55 W a > ft. n a B5D CO 1 .^h <0 03 C N t— 1 CO CM CM ^ 'in ~ CD C JH o 3 03 t-i s O WD o o o o N^l 03 pQ H S^ N T3 rH O °l CO, a.SS O ft o CO © cn *d 03 cs.2 oT CD u Z o 0: sa IT. B t! cn r 3 .0 TT CM -* T CO 7 Ob -gig *i w 3 C/3 O cc-^t* CO 0} t> 0} :§* .31 CCS a ox> a) CS Ph CN o <: Oh CM CM 3.2S o - 3 °, *> 2° w TiH — i o a> CO o lO »o eu id s *~" H3 CM CM Td S^3 3. c3 CU <£ O ° ftaft a — c - o< 03 U a) g ■O H S^ Pi^P |3 P^ t>P -S oo" < o 0) C 1 1 1 I l-HCM 1 1 IOCO *-*CM 1 1 CDOi ►2 §>£ J> «_3 O I "« -"oo a 3 — CC 3 -+J o 52 1 on-* XXX X CM CO CM CM l-i " g -3- X o a; a COIN CM CiiO ^ CO o o CO Xh o < Oh 00 *-tCHCO i-HCM «CM • ^ O o 00 CM Tj< T* °S^| CO OO Id >n ■* 313 "3 B U f +3 1 o P-, ilita lO o 2 2 00 N • >— i &Q.O, — Q, a a a ftftft ft CO ^2 &P3P3 t=b &!=& &&& i3 tC <* <: ^m -HCM-* «CM ^KN 1 * ^HCM"^ -"< H3 -3 cn o 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 (U ^co CONN Oi If3 C35 »0 O0 *COOJ o OQ ~- CM CO t-icm -HCMCO g •2 I o i! KP XXX X X XXX XXX X s 55 * < Oh -h «oecj CMOS c*a>m co-^co CO B I ro eu . 3 O « , , <-• -C CO ■«< 00 00 CM -M d ^<-> tf> ■a J3 3 •* ■* 00 OS _ & -U CN 3 * ■o c a 2§ m £ CU > CO 5£ HS< X CM CM CO X CM X CO -CK O (U* W 3 CO CM CM CO H 1 £ J "O CU ^ £ ^ g; a> a © 9 t> t> E «,- go ■H p u id 5 nj: a X i»! X X x i«iH ^ ^ S 5 Q. < ■* CO CO CO CO 40] 2 a, »*-i v 13 ■»»< CO CO °J3 to 3<£ X ^ O S> to a 3 w > & 00 to CD O 2 ° 0) u J3 O N "S a Oo5 VO |3 CM CM 3 o a cn O . ct) X OT3 2§ O CN a D ■<* ^H 0) > O w •"■ C3 °«2-S •a s Ztfl qU 0) CtJ ■3 c^ ■X DO co C «J CO s s s g CJ _g 0) z o 5 o oj ■7i bfi 0J ^1 o?i Cg © K) « bfl a> ^1 54) ID C8 bO 0J og a> m o .a < 55 3 o "SI « to M 3.9S3 3.H02 "cm a to Wl s.253 OJ, CO "3.S53 0) S3 T3 1— 1 EH o cd m o Q O CJ) O 'a 0) > << a- CN n a 33 £ •a a> ^> C I o» t; 5 • Sou Z° w 3 CO lH Q o $ Zto ao 0) on ■a 0) < in OS H c 1- a> •| co 1* •J: m en c <-> a 03 -g CD CD S 0> O 3 P3 CD J3 z. CN G Z u w CD H p 2 °j; eg O Zot nu ctj cn" CD CD .G CO CD "So g CO 1 CO 8 pet < Z o 'C co- oi ca d CO CD ■a 'to C CU s J3 P4 p EH Q < •a m •" C3 fa 535 § * CD P-|-g -t^ci p O ■ C3 CD 8 8,8 CD Q ft<-g O- Oi P. 1 1 1 55 w o < Ph 3 — CQ iSfl.SP 3 — 03 O ^3.a 3—'03 O 3- a t72 K « K >reoo ^H CM CO .2 o> • §I O O) ° s ct) to boo; C 0) .s™ g_c3 CD "3 *SSo .2 X d c O ■flj OJ 4J ■ 3 O OJ Z u w 00 O W O C5 CM S CO to CM _o & ct) E co O (H < W J o 3 z ^S n ti CM 00 CO to •* O CO CM +> Z° 53 CD CO •a a •a J3 y cd ^ a> 3 O 5! CM ►4 00 CO CM •* to^. 13 e |a«a |l CM OS m to O ^2 '"3 0) a 53 3 u CO CM CM CO w S P 2 Z 0) ■o CI iS ^ ^ s a> (0 »-( 05 © l> t> E B« Eon »H to G CD CO S.NJ3 c 3 fc; o tl . a o-o o cs ft s 1 1 CM p tM CM CM ^ 0 to O S 09 03 CD "3 < O w og o tn cd hp a> ■g.ScS CO CD CO Oc!, cd 3. SCO CO CD CO Cd bO CD Scm « a.Bbo cd S)S "S.Bco to CD tn OS 60 CD OcJ, ed ■S.StM 8 s £ O ■■ cd D O O £§ rf to N ft .as co G 'co «. o CO pq > wP "5 to t; .So" or.* 1 * 2;° w ^ $ XI ft ° * CD O Zw qo ^ ^ jj tn JJ o 3 in u CD s rt s "5 a -a ^ k.g CO ■*■■ o H < i! 60 ■£ tti td bO » ft CD "m cb tn ft CD rf ^ S 1 c CD c/T Z O 55 w o ^(21 1 *£! T N53 4-> as c3 a Vh cd 'fe** 3 cd H +-> co C bfl CO 5 ^ Sa KP 1 M 3^§ tn M ■g-BcS O 4< X CM CO Oci cd en 60 H <: (Vi o CO o 2 ti . 3 O 01 O J K *■ J3 CO u VM CO CD W) co Ph CM CM Zw ftU O O Pn g M O CD CN CO •a O to CM c *• 0: to tn S ft ft -a ■s g CO O co H < z o 33 w o < 1 S s ^ ed S 77 i CM tx CO CM ft ft 1-1 CM ID rt ^ as ocf | ■2 M ° s Sft o^ld ^co a •g-co a "^3 co-* ■A X CM CO o'T'cd ra a .a 3-=CCl O u cn KP 00 CM CO Ph g e CJ CD X S 1 S Of om *! O O . ti O Ji O.R*'£ Z u w T)< CM ■* O *j 5 .tu Zw ftU Ifl O Iffl CO N • i— i O Ph w H < CM CM CM 0) Ja! c is CD ft ft ft C3PP ft ft ft ft ft s CO fe ed 3 ^HtMTjl 1 1 1 £3& III -d o ii id o S COOi 1 1 1 (M (N <* PL -** O 1 ed ■*=■* a o < 3 — CO CM CO Tic CM CM X X (MCOt* 3 — CO s •- 1 1 C/> r-l CD •* 55 * CD T-C' It O lOOO ^h to T-.CM r-ie>J CO u a 0H 4 °3 «5 . 3 O 1) O r \ ** JS 0O tjl 00 gc? .1 1 Z U «5 ' 3.1. =1 o ,*2 CO -* CM 5! 00 CO & * 5 !^ CM O CO CM CO tM OJ £ t o 8 3 CO H 1 ta u a. ^ ^ ^ v CD CM m 0> B mw Bo rt rH r-l T-i f3 iu rt o X K ^ M X ^ X ft < CO l> t> 00 CO 42 O £ o Si OK 5 Ph o * »« & Zc/3 Q.O c t; «)3 5.S S o 2§ o g n a .Soil Z co aCJ ?l 0S5 s ■ 5 ° Z U < c « „ -2 fe « •2 5 c o> •Sjs o Cm -h 'St, !>, put. fl 8 q CM CM °0 CUX « 1 ( ~ ) tut) a h ctjM 43. s < d i" "- §• Zm &.cj CO C 09 C8 M CJ 2 © tn 03 C3 bp CO 3^ n a "*^ S? C3 a," Ed co^ bo ^1 ^1 ^t3 Cd "a.9c2 3.9cS a-9c3 3. Sen "S.ScS "S-ScS "S.SB O nj & O U O o o o u O « PQ M CO .9 8 co C o PQ CL, (55 . a O v CPth 'co - a3 r d CD c .G O «>pq > o CO u CD & o < Zoo o,CJ o o o o o o o 5 0) « bo a) "S.ScS 1) QQ 0) oa oo £ ■* s 03 "m 03 do *Td co co" CU 3 O w o e a.Scffl m bo "S-ScS CMCQ 2-3 coco COM ^£3 go bO "S. Sen *r^>i M-g c3 (1 s« O o o o ^Sj fi CD G <1 .n a P co M-l CO ■+* J a m O <1> CO* CD M CTJ Pm CN ro Oh >4 ooD °1 o 1 2 U «» - - - pi .2' .8 S§- Zoo oO o o "5 o o o o "5 o o o 0) *£ OS cU ?^ s 5 33 t> £ £ 4J H CO g < to C 111 gag ftlS T 7 7 CM. 2 u CD P <4-< 00 o oP- 1 * ■^co a O i* C3 •^oo a ^ rt.S 1 OO CO -* -* •+f CD ii d.S M M X eoj • »-H 3 -^ o < Of CO "S S a- H °2 ■g-co a -, "oa O CO (U J-H Ph o o J9 1 CO O o Ah n a 85 O o O CM CM CO . H O HI Z u w CM CM CM 00 w Oh < Zw oo CD o o s O CM o CM o »C5 CM o o U5 01 M £ t§ t§ ao. AA l§ CD « rS ^ 2 O co B -w ca 5^ I 1 1 3 1 1 W5 00 O-H 1 1 1 C/3 en CO CM CM CO CO ■«* CM V t* O N a Oifl o P ^ 1-1 ^ 3 CO ■si X cs o -o s a CO zg P CM CM CM > o ,w ~* J3 cct 3 s 5 O s T3 CO o •3 «•* P H a bo 0) 3 -t-> cd S d? o51 cq O n £p!s CO CO CO ci ho CO t N CO 1— 1 > o Si < coco 0Q OJ, cd a.Sco a.Sco a.Sco co bd a-2c3 B4 53 a.Sbo CJ CO o CO o o O O O O ft CO a > < a. 4 n a LoP * I Z u w O rt rt Cm 3 co u u o P h *C W O 00 ►2.3 S o Zoo aO 1 8 c co C in PC P H S-5S ^ -a 2 - 60 co B +j cd o -2 s © -S S S CO 13 *" 3 co o < Z o 00 « bO CO M O CO as hfl a> CO o CO « bfl CJ CO 0> DO ^11 OT O DO 03 ho 55 CO CO CO ^p!1 m co co c3 to ca £p!j III CO U3 to >\ G cd 1— 1 CQ *=•£: a CO w li.Sm o-J.cs ■s s a Off}. c3 *2 3 co be 0,-J. c3 ""2 3 co bO CO bO 52§ to bo °2S co bO m bO | a Q co Cd a.2i» a. SB "S.Scq a.Sbo a.SbS a.ScS j o CO a; O CO rt a O D O O a O o QJ C/2 DO < P-, n a 55P 'O 'S w Ph 4 1 2 °2 j (N a CN*" Z° «> CO 01 a -1 Ph S « ,°..s S o Zoo aU S* CD P H < Z o a 12 to 3 *j cd 2 co 2< s2 Si CO 111 P-i -*° III 3 as Jag ►2 Si P « 3 •- Ci w S Q 55 <3 ^3 CD 5 ^ o 5 5c6 a o £ ca ■"to a S t/5 -§ COX! .5 ^-^ is GO w O < Ph £ H.EP a — co 5 3.£P 5 o.SP a — co n a. S a'-co " 3 £P "a — cq 3--CQ ^ 3.SP a -- " co iS b.SP a — co M Ph o Ph Ph < 'So G CO 1 CO n a c75P D O O Q O o O O . 5 O Of ° r i ■" -3 Z u w Ph O Ph « co . ft ZuiaU ^! ^< o o IO vo to o "8 2 fe co Ph o oo 00 CM CM CM CM »o a Is & Ph Ph 00' ■SCO o M CO lJ W ►J - Z ►4 < 00 CM CM ■>* "* CO 00 00 "K ■™ x '" 2° w ■qoCN w So ^ •d | 1 ,_, ■»* CM ■* OO . ■* S3 co^, .23 |2^§*» X X CM X CO X X ■* CM X J«6 O e 4< S > 1 © CM ^ C3» U5 o CM CO ^2 .3 iiil s 8 a ^ CO l-l w 8 s eo CO »^ lr ^ CM CO CO CM u. u « s ^ ^ W "* i-H (N CM >0 CO S •* X Untrimm Sizes That Approxim 9x12 X « X K X rH ca t^ CO oo C3S OS o fH w IH 45] Practical Sizes for Letterheads, Documents and Office or Factory Forms The following sizes cut without waste from three standard sheet sizes of Bonds, Linens, Ledgers and Writings. They include sizes for all essential uses. GROUP SIZES Printed piece sizes which ap- proximate gen- eral sizes. Standard Sheets from which sizes cut without waste. Number of untrimmed cuts to sheet. Number of sheets to thousand copies. 3 x4M 2^x5^ 3^x4M 3 x4M 17x22 17x28 19x24 32 32 32 32 32 32 3Mx8H 2^x8H 33^x8^ 4 x83^ 17x22 17x28 17x28 16 16 14 63 63 72 4 x6& 4^x5^ 4Mx7 4 x6& 17x22 17x28 19x24 16 16 18 63 63 56 5^x8^ 5^x8J^ 4^x7 4Mx8 17x22 17x28 19x24 8 16 12 125 63 82 6 x9K 6 x9}4 19x24 8 125 8^x7 8^x7 17x28 8 125 83^x11 8^x11 17x22 4 250 8^x14 8^x14 17x28 4 250 9^x12 9^x12 19x24 4 250 46 Standard Sheet Sizes STANDARD Sheet Sizes are those in which the standard grades of paper are stocked. These sizes were demanded by seven associations of buyers and users of printing controlling the use of over 3500,000,000 worth of paper annually and developed on the recommendation of the Committee on the Simplification of Paper, appointed by the Bureau of Standards, Department of Commerce. The survey conducted by this committee shows that with only a slight change of from Yi' to %" in the dimensions, practically all present-day printing, publishing and advertising pieces can be cut without waste from Standard Sheet Sizes. Because of this fact Standard Sheet Sizes are the sizes that printers should stock. In addition: Sheet Siz Standard Sheet Sizes fit most closely the mechanical equip- ment of the printer. %± p m Standard Sheet Sizes eliminate waste in production at m\$l the paper mill. ^ Buyers of printing will aid in the elimination of waste and Papers reduce the cost of paper if they will confine themselves to popular rmj-j,. printed piece sizes (see pages 24 to 46) which cut without waste Formatim from the standard sheet sizes. To aid the user of paper to find easily and without waste of Impress time all the kinds and grades made in each standard sheet size, a chart has been compiled, as shown on pages 48 and 49 of this p Handbook. The foundation of this chart is the Eagle-A Line p-i™ of Quality-Standard Papers. % H 47 Standard Sheet Sizes in Which Each Grade Is Stocked From the sizes in parentheses are cut without waste the majority of the present-day page sizes used by printers, advertisers and publishers KEY W — indicates size to left is made in white only in grade listed directly above. C — indicates size to left is made in colors only in grade listed directly above. X CM T5 X CD CM M CD CN CO CM CM 1-1 CO CM X 00 CM X CO (M X 00 CM X 10 CM X 05 00 CM X CO CM X 05 CO CM X o CM 00 CM X o CM CM X o CM CM CO X CM CO CO X I-I CM CO X CM 00 CM X CM CM I §■ «naa ■ « « ssajjas,-! J & is ^ r« •cTbj miioMsuaBj; pq •deg uo^Suujoq PQ •d-ej pi9gjaq.s9i{3 1 03 ABosig 1 1 pq uspjy is in ffl pjBQ ISOJ UBDU3UIV is gdo^j UB0U9UXV 1 1 1 X9pUJ U9UBQ 1 1 1 1 1 pq X9pUT 993JOJ9qQ | 1 pq xgpuT weiAvay 1 1 1 cq w u 0) o pjBpUB^S 1 1 1 o| 9JEpj9AI-a | «l XOpBJBg | 1 3%-eid U9Ajy I 1 1 1 UB9[nOJ9JJ | 1 l«l 9l3iy,P 9ppsfi I P3 pq 73 w ttj o udsubfoiQ | jg^sgqQ | | 1 9q99g | 1 uoiqjY_ o o m qsiuig qsqSug treouguiy JSpUSJEQ -dng UB0U9UTV | 1 (pqs33g UBOugmy | 1 SUOIJI'EJJ 3AUJV | 1 japjo^ pBOJUB-g j 1 1 1 1 1 1 Suij[jng U-B0U3UIV | 1 1 1 1 1 1X9 j, uoiqtv I 1 *X9X 9Jiq s V a 9 1 1 1 1 amjisA u , B0ij9urv j 1 1 9I3?V,P 8PF»a l£ r* w M c silTK "iox -IH 1 siI'H jpniouojNj np\[ | 1 !fs ► 51 1 1 s^ld P*H>PO u'B^gjn'B^ j o Q o| o a 1 pg^uij, suos.ieg | Q o o| 1 silfiAt J3^S9qo PIO p: 1 03 u O M CU ^uoqdSfgj, m P3 pq| Is 1 ■BUOIO 1 IES l« «lfe fes| ts| 1* uoisug^xg 1 l« l« pq|m «l 1 1 1 l«,l U9uiq ^unooay 1 lisl ^lt£ • W 1 is uguiq jpi/asurug 1 1*1 pq pq Ml pq pjoog'g ^u9uniJ9Aon m r* pq CQ pq PQl pq a CD C I BA ?H !s Bi^oog apmy 1 1 feraopQ 1 1 1 1 isslfet 1 uguig -a -n 1 1 1 Ifelfc w C O pq guoqagpj. 1 1 1 |M| pq «l UBUIJOfyJ 1 1 1 Iffll l« 90U , Bid900V 1 1 1 l« l«l pq|« UOJA9qQ 1 1 1 1 ^ is m 1 ^sodiiy 1 1 1 1 ^ fc Ifcsl lOEJ^UOQ 1 1 1 I pq pq Irtl UBISJ9J | pq is ?l 1 UlBAi'ESV 1 is 1 1 uodnoQ pq is M 1 1 — «* w fi m 2 W o»s ,H a6 fi .13 1 (u-w 53 "IS «o .2-g" „,*«*!+* s«c-S -m-2.2^ « E o u pq^g-^d C5 rH M 0! t— 1 CO 1— 1 as 1-1 CO CN X CO CM CD 1-1 CM CM M CO CM X t~ 00 CM X CO CM X 00 5 CM X 0) 10 CM X 00 CM X 05 CO CM X 05 l-H CO CM X o CM 00 CM X o CM ■* CM X o CM CM CO X CM CO CO X CO X X 1-1 CM 00 CM X CM CM [48] 5 M K CN IN IN X S3 * X CO CO ■* X m CO 00 X CO CO o lO X 00 CO en lO X CO M HOW TO USE THE CHART If, for example, it has been decided to make the booklet 6" x 9", trim size, you Follow the row across and the grades directly above the shaded squares are made already know that this size cuts without waste from a 25" x 38" sheet. (See Chart in size 25" x 38". The chart shows that all the book papers (except Deckle on pages 40-41, "Form Sizes Which Cut Without Waste from Standard Sheet d'Aigle) and all the offset papers are made in this popular size. Any of these Sizes.") You then want to know all the papers that are made in 25" x 38" size. papers will cut without waste into size 6" x 9". The paper possessing proper char- Follow down the column of sizes at the left of the chart until you find the size in the acteristics necessary for the specific use can then be selected from the list. (See row which contains 25" x 38", one of the popular and most generally used sheet sizes. pages 14-15.) 511 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 ( IMM 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 1 MM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6" 1 6-| 1 o 1 61 M| 1 I 1 i i i | M| | 1 1 1 05 1 pq 1 1 o 1 [ pq 1 M| 1 1 1 1 1 1 |M| 1 II II 1 1 MM 1 IIM| || 1 1 1 1 l«l II II M 1 Mill 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 M F 1 I6l 616 1 161 6 II II 1 61 1 161 1 1616 1 161 6 1 61 1 16 1 1616 | | 1 1 6 1 6 II* 6 6 ] | 6| 1 6 1 6" 61 16 6 6 ~T 1 1 16= 1 6161 1616 6 II II 1 1 in 1 1 m|m| |n| 05 1 II 1 1 1 in 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 |M| 1 |M| I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 16 1 1 6I6I6I6I 1 1 16 1 1 1 1 in 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In 1 1 In 1 II II II 1 II MM! w 1 1 161 1 1 I o| II |o| | I |0|Q| I II 1 1 o| 1 1 |o| 1 1 £ 1 1 1 1 1 1 ! 05 In| 1 IMI6I 1 m a 161 1 |M| 1 « 1 |M| IMM II 1 |M| I || || 1 II 1 6 1 161 IW. 1 1 .1 II6II II II 1 1 pq 1 |M| |rt| 1 |M| m 1 PQI PQ j 1 05 6~ 1 1 1 £ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 I 611 1 II 1 fe 1 1 1 6_ PQ M| 1 1 05 6 M| 1 1 1 M| 1 61 Ml ! 1 |M| 1 1 M| | | 61 1 1 1 161 1 61 £1 1 1 1 161 1 61 1 1 Ml 1 1 1 |M| 1 MM m 1 1 161 1 1 161 MM 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MM 05 61 6 MM 3 M X (M CN CM X CO 0) M X CO CN o X CO 0) 5? co X ao CM 00 CO X CO CM CM X 00 CM <* X CO CN X o CO 5 X CM CO CD ■* X CO CO X --H CO CO Tjl X 10 CO 00 X CO CO O 55 X 00 CO IQ X CO CO Weight Impress Postage V [49] Substance Weight THE CHOICE OF THE WEIGHT OF PAPER FOR ANY PRINTED PIECE THE substance weight of a paper is the weight of 500 stand- ardized sheets in accepted basis size, which, in the case of bonds, for example, is 17" x 22". These basis sizes vary for different kinds of paper as shown in the charts on pages 52, 53 and 54. Since it is often necessary to find equivalent weights in different kinds of paper, such as the equivalent weight of a 60 pound book in bonds, a chart is shown on page 54, which indicates that bonds on a basis of 17" x 22" — 20 pounds equal in weight the 60 pound book on basis 25" x 38". An effort is being made to standardize all substance weights to one basis size. This movement is described in detail on page 303 of this Handbook. THE SELECTION OF THE PROPER SUBSTANCE WEIGHT FOR A PRINTED PIECE Before considering substance weight at all, it is best to deter- mine papers which will fit the use-requirement and method of impress (see pages 20-30, "How to Select the Right Paper"). When more than one kind of paper will fit the use-requirements of the printed piece, and the substance weight is a factor, the relative paper qualities of the different kinds must be taken into account. For example, if a booklet the impress requirements of which made it adaptable for both book and bond papers and the booklet would have to resist severe handling, strength would be an essential quality in the paper. In this case a higher grade bond would have much greater strength than a book paper, and therefore lighter weight could be used in bonds than in books, providing the translucency of the bond would not be a militating factor. When a definite grade has been selected and the substance- weight is to be determined, the following factors should be con- sidered: The Style of the Printed Piece Stitched signatures can be made of lighter weight paper than can unbound pieces. Books with a large number of pages, such as reference books, require lighter papers than those with a fewer number of pages. Mailing cards or folders sent through the mails without en- velopes should at least have the rigidity of an ordinary govern- ment post card or a letter of the same size. [50] Package inserts or envelope stuffers should be made of papers light enough not to crowd the contents or increase the mailing cost; at the same time they should not be too translucent to reduce the legibility of the message or the ease of handling. The Size of the Printed Piece Larger pieces generally require heavier papers than do smaller pieces. The ease of handling the page, the economy of produc- tion and the cost of mailing also have to be considered here. The Quality Appearance Required in the Printed Piece Heavier weight papers of any grade express greater quality than papers of lighter weight, but here again the style, the size, the economy of production and mailing cost must be considered. Extra Folding or Wearing Quality Required in the Printed Piece Heavier weights in any grade of paper have a greater resistance to tearing, exposure, abrasion, and rough usage. The folding strength also increases up to a certain point when cracking be- gins. This cracking may, in most cases, be overcome by scoring, but scoring also reduces the folding strength to some degree. The Economy of Production. Lighter weight papers obviously mean lower cost to the unit, but in no case should economy be the chief factor in reducing the weight of paper, The effectiveness of many printed pieces has been ruined by the use of paper too light. It is poor economy simply to reduce the initial cost, when the real cost is determined by the effectiveness of the piece. The Mailing Cost of the Printed Piece When the printed piece is to be mailed, the weight of the paper may seriously increase the cost, therefore must always be con- sidered. A slight difference in substance weight may cut the mailing cost in half. However, any reduction in weight must also be considered from the standpoint of the other factors that govern effectiveness, as referred to in preceding paragraphs. A Practical Plan to Follow The best method of ascertaining the proper substance weight for a printed piece, when the specification as to size is fixed and number of pages known, is to make up dummies in grade of paper decided upon in two or three weights. These dummies should be compared then from the point of view of all the use- requirements of the printed piece, and weighed for the mailing cost, if they are to be mailed, with or without envelopes, or with or without other enclosures. These must be considered. A chart showing the kinds and grades of paper made in any substance weight appears on pages 52-54. [51] Colored Papers Finish- Formation Impress Postage Rates invehipes 4 j Substance Weights in which each Grade Is Stocked Letters in chart indicate sizes in which grade at left is stocked, in sub- stance weights given directly above. (For key to letters see first column). STANDARD SHEET SIZES (Key to letters at right.) A— 16 B— 16 x21 x26 C— 16 x42 D— 17 x22 E— 17 x26 F— 17 G— 18 H— 19 J— 19 x28 x23 x24 x28 M— 21 N-22 0—22^ x 22^ P— 22^x34 Q— 23 x 36 R— 24 x38 S— 24J^x24^ T— 28 x34 U— 28 x38 V— 34 x44 W— 26 x 34 K— 20 x 26 L— 20 x 28 x32 x34 Basis 17 x 22—500 Sheets to the Ream Bonds COUPON AGAWAM Substance Weights 13 D-F-H-N R-T 16 D-F-H-N R-T PERSIAN CONTRACT AIRPOST CHEVRON ACCEPTANCE NORMAN TELEPHONE D-N D-F-H-N R-T D-F-H-N R-T D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H N-R-T D-N-V D-N D-F-H-N R-T D-F-H-N R-T D-N-R-T F-H D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H-N R-T-V D-F-H-N R-T-V 20 D-F-H-N R-T D-N D-F-H-N R-T D-F-H-N R-T D-N-R-T F-H D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H-K L-N-R-T D-F-H-N R-T-V D-F-H-N R-T-V 24 D-F-H-N R-T D-N D-F-H-T D-N D-N D-N D-N D-N-V D-N-V Linens U. S. LINEN COLONIAL AULDE SCOTIA RIVAL Substance Weights D-E-N-W D-E-N-W 11 D-E-N-W D-E-N-W 13 D-E-N-W D-N-E-W D-N D-N 16 D-E-N-W D-E-N-W D-N D-N 20 D-E-N-W D-E-N-W D-N 24 D-N D-N D-N D-N Ledgers GOVERNMENT BRUNSWICK ACCOUNT EXTENSION GLORIA TELEPHONE Substance Weights 24 D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H N-R-T D-F-H-L P-R-T A-D-F-G-H-M N-0-Q-R-S-T D-F-H-J N-R-T-U 28 A-D-F-H M-N-R-T A-D-F-H M-N-R-T A-D-F-H M-N-R-T D-F-H-P R-T D-F-H-N 0-R-S-T 32 A-C-F-G H-M-Q-R-T A-C-F-G-H M-0-Q-R-T A-C-F-G-H M-Q-R-T A-F-G-H M-G-Q-R-T F-H-M O-R-T 36 H-R H-R-T H-R G-H-L Q-R Writings OLD CHESTER MILLS PARSONS TINTED WAUREGAN COLORED FLATS MT. NONOTUCK MILLS MT. TOM MILLS Substance Weights 16 D-F-H N-R-T D-F-N 20 D-N D-F-H-N-R D-F-H N-R-T D-F-N 24 D-N D-N-T D-F-H-N R-T-U-J D-F-H N-R-T 28 D-F-H N-R-T Mimeographs PEERLESS DELTA Substance Weights 16 20 D-F-N B-D-E-F-N D-F-N D-F-N [52 Basis 21 Y?, x 33—500 Sheets to the Ream STANDARD SHEET SIZES Weddings Substance Weights 53 60 H 76 2-53s 3-53s 2-60 y 2 3-60^ A— 21^x33 ARDEN A A A A BISCAY A A A A A CHESTERFIELD PAPETERIE A A A DORRINGTON PAPETERIE A A A A A A FARNSWORTH PAPETERIE A A A A A A Basis 25 x 38 — 500 Sheets to the Ream STANDARD SHEET SIZES Books Substance Weights 19 40 45 50 60 70 80 100 A— 12J^xl9 B— 19 x25 C— 24 x36 D— 25 x38 E— 28 x42 F— 28 x44 G-30^ x 41 H— 32 x44 J— 33 x46 K— 36 x 48 L— 38 x 50 M— 38 x59 DECKLE D'AIGLE B B AMERICAN VELLUM D D D BERKSHIRE TEXT D D ALBION TEXT D D AMERICAN BULKING D-E-F G-H-L D-E-F G-H-L D-E-F G-H-L D-L RAILROAD FOLDER D-F ARRIVE HALFTONE D D D D AMERICAN EGGSHELL D-E-F H-L D-E-F H-L D-E-F H-L D-L AMERICAN SUPER CAL. D-E H-L D-E-F H-J-L D-E-F H-J-L D-E H-L D-H-I AMERICAN ENG. FINISH C-D-E-F H-J-K-L C-D-E F-H-J K-L C-D-E-F H-J-K-L C-D-E-F H-J-K-L D-H-L D Basis 25 x 38 — 500 Sheets to the Ream - STANDARD SHEET SIZES Offsets Substance Weights 50 60 70 80 100 120 A— 215^x34^ B— 22J^x34M C— 25 x 38 D— 28 x 42 E— 32 x 44 F— 36 x 48 G— 38 x 50 ALBION C-D-E C-D-E F-G C-D-E F-G C-D-E C F-G BEEBE B-C E-F-G B-C-D E-F C-D-E F-G C-D-E G C-D C CHESTER B-C D-E-F B-C-D E-F-G C-D-E F-G C-D-E C C DICKINSON C-D-E F-G C-D-E F-G C-D-E F-G C-D-E C 53 Basis 253^x303^—500 Sheets to the Ream STANDARD SHEET SIZES Bristols Substance Weights , 110 140 170 220 A— 20^x24% B— 22 x28 C— 22^x28^ D— 25y 2 x.30y 2 E— 28 x44 AGAWAM INDEX A-C-D A-C-D A-C-D A-C-D CHEROKEE INDEX A-D A-D A-D A-D DARIEN INDEX A-C-D A-D A-D Basis 223^x283^ 100 105 110 200 AMERICAN POST CARD B-C-E AMERICAN ROPE BRISTOL C Basis 20 x 26—500 Sheets to the Ream STANDARD SHEET SIZES Covers Substance Weights 25 35 45 50 65 80 100 130 A— 20 x 26 B— 23 x33 C— 26 x40 HERCULEAN A-B A-B ARVEN C C PARADOX A-B A-B A-B A-B STANDARD A A-B A-B RIVERDALE A-B-C A-B-C A-B-C Basis— 19 Mx 26 = A— 13 xl9% B— 19^x26 DECKLE D'AIGLE Substance Weights 64 A-B Equivalent Substance Weights Numerals in italics indicate standard substance weights; other numerals, in same row, reading across, show approximate equivalent weights in the various basis sizes. 17x22 Bonds, etc. 20x26 Covers 21^x33 Weddings Papeteries 25^ x 30^ Index Bristols 25x38 Books Offsets 7.4 13 16 17.7 18.0 20 24 25.2 28 31.5 32.5 32.4 36 40 47.0 52.9 55.9 63.3 67.3 71.9 81.7 83.8 93.6 94.9 105.8 10.4 18.1 22.2 24.6 25 27.8 32.8 35 38.3 43.8 44.7 45 50. 54.7 65 73.5 77.7 87.9 93.6 700 113.7 116.5 130 131.9 147.1 14.2 24.7 30.4 33.6 34.1 37.9 44.8 47.8 53 59.7 60.5 61.5 68.3 76 89.6 100.3 106 121 127.7 136.4 155.1 159 177.3 181.5 200.4 15.6 27.0 33.3 36.8 37.4 41.6 49.1 52.3 57.3 65.5 66.8 67.3 74.9 81.8 98.2 110 116.2 131.6 140 149.6 170 174.29 194.4 197.3 220 19.0 33.0 40.6 45 45.5 50 60 63.9 70 80 81.67 82.2 91.4 100 120 134.4 141.9 160.7 171.0 182.7 207.7 212.89 237.5 241.0 268.7 54 Colored Papers Colored papers have been developed: To meet desired color effects in design. To provide against the soiling qualities of a white paper. To simplify filing and office systems. All necessary colors have been provided in each grade ac- cording to the use-requirements for which it has been particu- larly developed. Thus, the selection of color can follow the selection of the kind and grade of paper. (See pages 8-23, "How to Select the Right Paper.") It is sometimes necessary to find two kinds of paper that match approximately in color, or papers that are made in a wide range of colors. A chart has been compiled (see pages 56 and 57) showing all the kinds and grades made in any given color and the grades made in a range of colors.' By using the chart, it is possible to ascertain (1) all Quality- Colored Standard Papers of the same class made in a given color (for ex- Papers ample, bonds made in blue); (2) all papers of different classes n-jd. made in a specified color (for example, all bond papers and all forma cover papers made in yellow). Thus, for instance, it is easy to locate a range of bond papers of different grades and prices obtainable in an indicated color and at the same time determine all grades of cover papers that harmonize in color with each bond paper. This makes it easy K ' to select for a booklet, cover and inside pages of approximately the same shades. fl\ M [55 < Pi < < < P < « CO CO p P pq fa & pq < O O O a j o o < Q S < fa Pi O > $ fa H Z «j Pi O 2 pq fa >< & m° o •si 8.S-S <5 < 22 a w SI < < w £ C W P pq P pq t- w Q O P pq < P o o W P pq M Pi P P pq H P C 2 p J pq W pi o p^ pq o pi pq Pi < H Ph < < < > < E < Ph B GO CO P Pi p fa fa P pq < O O o Q O c < 3 g < fa < fa Pi o > fa s o jj 2 pp pi O Eh W a 13 56 $ o Q Pi O B o < b o J B b CO b H y 3 o S3 B O b B Pi o w B B < 2: b b Pi o M Pi < a 2 B B Pi O y < B y b b Pi o H X o 1 — I 1-5 y b b Pi o B § S3 B s Pi o B > o B S3 < B o M o o Pi s «U CO B O z o y 2 <<3 Q S5 < o B s B Ph Pi P Pi B y < < B B O > s Pi Pi B o M M Ph 2 s Ph o Ph B CO O Pi y o < 00 B Pi < o CO B GO o Pi B tn 00 X CO B P pq B B < Pi P H < 2 o B B B Pi B PQ < Pi < < B O Pi !3 B Q B O a B 1— 1 Pi B P O Pi < B GO O Pi 1— 1 Pi Ph < Pi B CO 1 i CO co i CO CO ml i CO CO CO 1 1 1 |G0 GO col 1 CO I 1 1 1 1 i |co 1 |0Q co| 1 CO 1 1 1 1 1 00 1 1 |«a 1 co| 1 1 ' 1 1 1 GO wj CO CO fco oo|oo 1 |oo GO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II W| co| 1 1 1 CO 1 1 1 1 laol col GO | 1 f CO 1 1 1 1 col coj GO co| CO 1 1 1 1 CO |co co| co| 1 1 1 Icol 1 GO 1 GO 1 CO 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 |oo 1 co|co| co 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 jco 1 CO ! 1 CO 'on i cn| | |co go 1 GO 1 | GO 1 |co 1 1 I jco 1 1 1 GO 1 1 GO ! 1 1 1 |co| i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 CO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 leal 1 CO col |oo 1 1 1 1 1 CO |co| | CO i GO 1 1 1 |co| | 1 1 1 1 l«J| 1 - ■ 1 ] 1 GO 1 1 1 1 GO 1 1 1 1 1 Ico CO i GO 1 |«a CO |co CO GO r o 1 |m 1 | o B y 13 < Ph o M O Pi < K CO s C3 y t y 2 < Q y < y o B 3 B ft Pl P Ph Pi B Q y B > < b < B 13 B b B o > Q a Pi > ci Pi b X O M y s y < a Ph a o Ph B CO' O Pi y o B < CO K Pi < O CO B GO Pi B a CO X CO B P pq B* X 5 B p < y O B ►J Pi B PQ < Pi < o Q O K B B B O O B 2 B P C Pi < B GO C Pi S 2 Ph is B GO Impress Bulking i Eaglet lim I 6i 57] Finishes and Formations TO DIFFERENTIATE between finish and formation an arbi- trary distinction has been made between characteristics given to the paper as it is forming on the wire of the paper machine and those brought about in subsequent operations. The former are known as "formations" and the latter are termed "finishes." FORMATION There are three general formations of paper. These are termed "well closed," "wild" and "very wild." Their differences can be seen by holding sheets of paper to the light and looking through them. For this reason the formation is sometimes called the "look-through." A well-closed paper has uniform translucency, a wild paper shows a slightly cloudy or mottled appearance, a very wild paper a decidedly mottled or cloudy appearance. For example: Govern- ment Record Ledger is well closed; American Vellum has a very wild or cloudy appearance when held to the light. These differ- ent formations are obtained by different methods of processing. There is also what might be termed a secondary formation. This is spoken of as wove or laid. It is determined by the dandy roll of the paper machine. (See pages 340.) Deckled edges and watermarks in accordance with the definition given above are formations, while a rubber stamp mark may be considered as a finish since the mark is impressed in the already formed sheet. (See pages 337-341 "How Paper Is Made.") FINISHES All papers were originally made without distinctive finishes and for that reason papers with a lack of finish are called "an- tique" or said to have an antique finish. As different printing processes came into use the antique finishes had to be smoothed out. This smoothing process is done by subjecting the paper to great pressure between steel plates or calender rolls. These plates are sometimes processed to imitate fabrics and leather. In this way imitation cloth or leather papers are made. The finish of the paper chiefly determines its adaptability to the various forms of impress. The formation need not be considered in this relation, with two exceptions — papers having a wild formation and laid papers are not adaptable to fine screen half-tone printing. SIMPLE METHOD OF FINDING THE GRADE MADE IN EACH FINISH AND FORMATION In order to aid the user of paper to locate quickly all the grades made in each finish and formation, a chart has been compiled. (See page 59.) [58] -a HJ u o 4-1 CO CO *-< -a a u w •!-H c CM o • l-H 4-1 a in O -a a tf CO CJ -a co 'a if ■ewa CO CJ o 4-> d s o 1 1-51 -CJ CO r T i ssspsaj a pq - ^ .* q^jo.usmej a pq pq uo^Suijjoq 1 1 l« 1 |« |M pjayja^saqQ 1 1 l« 1 1 |M |M Atsosiq in 1 l«l |M uapjy &: ei P ug HP I/j U pq pjBQ ;soj uBouauiy ^ Pi adcjj ueouaury lo 1 1 1 1 o i i xapuj uaiJBQ 1 1 l« 1 1 1 II pq i i 1 xapuj aa^ojaqQ pq pq xapuj ureAiESy a 1 1 1 pq 1 1 Ih > o O pjBpuBq.g o a 1 1 1 1 1 o aj^pjaAi-jj « m XOp-EJBJ pq pq 1 1 1 l«l 1 1 1 |«l 1 1 1 a^BTj uaAjy 1 1 |M 1 II |«| 1 II 1 1 UBamajajj 1 1 |« P3 |m| l« ap3iy,p appaQ 03 pq|pq a w O UOSUIjpiQ ^ Is ja;saq3 1 1 Ife 1 1 1 aqaag 1 1 li& 1* uoiqty Ifc l& 1 1 1 w ^! o o pq rpqsSSg UBOuauiy |rt ml I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 •m& 'Sug UBOuauiy 1 1 |£ 1 1 q-ef) jadns uBouauiy 1 1 l&= 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l£ auo^jrejj aAijjy 1 1 |« 1 1 1 |M| 1 1 i 1 1 1 l« jappjj pBOJUB-H 1 1 |m a 1 1 1 inl in Suisrmg UBouauiy 1 1 l£ N 1 1 Ml 1 1 1 1 ixar, uoiqjy |P9|«|PQ pq 1 1 1 1 |pq| 1 1 1 ;xaj, ajiqs^jaa: |PQ|«|« pq 1 1 1 1 i«i mn ll 9 A uBouauiy |M| |M pq 1 1 1 1 1 1 pq a[3iy,p appan & Ifc fc S PS 1 a '+3 u ■jfi uiox "IK T fe •yi ^an;ouo^j -%yi 1 1 I* 1 fe ■£ "3 uvSamv^ |o|o 1 1 1 O paq.uij v suosjBj 1 lo| 1 1 1 o •TA[ Jaisaqo pjo l£ ^ cs 1 Ifel o auoqdapx « Iffll 1 1 1 BUOlf) 1 1 |M 1 1 1 l«l 1 1 uoisuajxjj 1 1 |M i m mi i i ii 1 1 1 1 uauiq ^unoaoy 1 1 l£ i i i £1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 uauiq jjoiAisurug 1 1 l« i i i Ml 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ^uatuuaaAOQ S3 1 i pq 1 1 1 1 1 CO d B IBAi-g 1 1^ 1 1 1 ^ 1 1 1 ■enoog apiny 1 l£ i i i : 1 1 1 1 p3IUOpQ I l£ 1 1 1 lisi 1 1 •s-n &: 1 1 1 bs d O pq auoqdapj, pq 1 1 1 pq u-buijo^ S3 1 1 1 1 1 1 aouBidaooy 1 1 |M 1 1 1 1 1 |pq| l« 1 uojAaqQ l& IW 1 1 1 l£ 1 jsodjiy £ £1 1 I 1 1 &l 1 lOBJ^UOQ a 1 1 |pq M| 1 UBISJBjJ pq 1 1« pq 1 UTBAVeSy * W ^1 fe uodno^ a P3 g O fe KEY W — indicates that grade listed directly above the letter is stocked in White only in finish or formation shown at left. C — indicates that grade listed directly above the letter is stocked in colors only, in finish or formation shown at left. B — indicates that grade listed directly above the letter is stocked in both white and colors in finish or formation shown at left. Blank Space — indicates that grade listed directly above is not stocked in finish or formation shown at left. X s X H P « M ■_ w C CO W P X cs H C P w o w p < > o r w P3 g z <; P W iJ 14 O o o W X O w X o P w < o 8 H < o 3 2 < 3 5 o < 3 w a, 5 2 < X 2 « J < O o a X c w p^ w Q < o H Oh P X p W < c 5 w a w < o s J > a w H < a. " P3 J J > [59] Impress What Is Meant by "Impress" Impress designates the different hand and mechanical methods of applying to paper the reading matter, illustrations, decora- tions or rulings. Selecting Paper for a Definite Impress The finish of the paper largely determines its adaptability to any method of impress, but its quality of hardness or softness, whether it is laid or wove, its degree of expansion and contrac- tion under different atmospheric conditions, and its absorbency of ink, must also be taken into consideration. THE VARIOUS METHODS OF IMPRESS AND THE KINDS OF PAPER TO WHICH EACH IS BEST ADAPTED EAGLE-A PAPERS IN THE VARIOUS FORMS OF IMPRESS Letterpress Printing Eagle-A Papers have been developed for all methods of letterpress printing, which term as used in this Handbook represents printing in its general sense — from type, line cuts, wood cuts, tint blocks, Ben Day and half-tone engravings. Printing from Type, Line Cuts, Tint Blocks and Wood Cuts. All Eagle-A Papers are suitable to each of the above methods of impress, but it is generally considered that antique or rough surface papers give more legible and beautiful results. Printing from Fine Screen Half-tones. Super-calendered book papers have been essentially developed for this method of impress, yet ex- perienced printers are securing good results on many of the bonds and ledgers, although printing with fine screen half-tones on these papers requires special engravings and highly-developed skill in make-ready to produce acceptable results. Next to super-calendered book papers the satin-finished super-calendered writings are best adapted to fine screen half-tone printing. Printing from Coarse Screen Half-tones. Many of the smoother antique- surface covers, books and offsets, together with the bonds, linens, ledgers and writings, will take a coarse screen half-tone. The grades most particularly adapted to this method of impress are shown in the impress chart on pages 62 and 63. Printing from Ben Day Plates. Coarser papers can be used for Ben Day plates than for half-tones, and many of the papers that would not easily take fine screen half-tones will take successfully Ben Day plates of equally fine screen. From Color Plates. Any paper which will successfully print one color can be printed in two or more colors providing, as in the case of all Eagle-A Papers, it has been properly made so that it will resist, as much as possible, moisture conditions which cause shrinkage or increase the size of the sheet. From Steel Engravings or Copper Plates. Practically all Eagle-A Papers will take copper plate or steel engravings perfectly, but because of the high quality of this form of impress it is not advisable to use any but the highest grade of papers. Embossing and Die-Stamping The depth of the die in embossing and die-stamping determines the quality of the stock. All Eagle-A Papers can be used for these purposes, but where deep dies are used strong papers with soft finishes should be selected. An- tique papers, as a whole, give the best results. [60] Offset The offset papers of the Eagle-A Line have been primarily developed for this form of impress. However, many of the other papers can be used success- fully for this purpose. These are indicated in the chart on pages 62 and 63. Lithography Lithography usually requires a smoother finish than offset, but the finish necessary, of course, is determined by the fineness of the stipple, grain, or screen used on the stone. Those Eagle-A Papers which have been prepared to prevent shrinkage or expansion are adaptable for this form of impress. They are indicated in the chart on pages 62-63. Rotogravure This method of impress does not require a surface paper so highly calendered as for fine screen half-tones, to get equal results. Bonds, linens, ledgers, writings and the calendered books, offsets and covers can be used for roto- gravure. Multigraphing All Eagle-A Papers, with the exception of covers, are suitable for multi- graphing purposes, although the unglazed finishes are preferable due to their quick drying quality which this class of impress usually demands. Machine Ruling All Eagle-A Papers can be machine ruled, but the uses of this form of impress usually confine the selection to bonds, ledgers, linens and writings. Mimeographing Only the Eagle-A mimeographs, which are highly absorbent, are specially recommended for mimeographing, though other Eagle-A Papers can be used when quick drying is not demanded. Pen Writing Papers such as bonds, linens, ledgers and writings are especially adaptable to pen writing. Their hard, smooth surface does not allow the ink to spread, while at the same time these papers absorb just enough to allow the ink to dry fairly rapidly. D Di A Quick Way of Finding Papers Suitable to Each Method of Impress In order to enable the user of paper to find all the papers suitable to each method of impress, a chart has been compiled (see pages 62 and 63), which shows all the grades suitable for (U each of the various methods of impress. The foundation of this chart is the Eagle-A Line of Quality- Standard Papers in which kinds and grades have been developed to meet practically all the usual forms of impress. 61 *-• Oh , *-• g 0) *7S ft tfl ft g g 0) 0) .a ,G c o A '■§ ^ w fe 0) .9 5 ft a rG > to o u -§ ? _ o iu a> cd O _o "^ V, *& G . *s M "S u "8 a. (U 1/) H 6 Is 1 T4is a | <3 1 1 SSSUSSJ | < 1 1 (U9Uiq) q^JOMSUJB^ | < 1 1 (unqpA '1^0) qiJOMsnjBj | < < < 1 (preq) uo^Suijjoq | < (umnaA pa^td) uo;3utjjoq | < < < 1 W (umipA pa^Id) ABOsig < < < (uA\eq) Abosiq ] < CO I (rannaA a^g) uapjy < < < 1 (uAvsq) uspjy < CO 1 O ffl sdo^ uBousuiy < <; < 1 pjEQ }S0g UBOUOUiy '< <: co I XapUJ U3UBQ < <5 co | xgpuj aa^ojaqQ < < co | xapuy uremBSv | < < CO to 1-1 o O ( 8 ^ld) pj^puEig < < < (anbpuy) pj-epu-e^g < co 1 3p3pj3Ai-y; j < CO < \ (anbnuy) xopBJEjj < co I (a^EIfj) XOpBJtBfJ < <5 < 1 < 3}13Id USAjy < piQ < CO js^saqQ < CO sqsag < CO CO uoiq lV < CO CO to o o PQ qsmijj qsqSug UBOusury < < < pSJ3pU3|-BQ JSdng UB0U3UIV < < < 1 ,Z o ■" T) > H J-i •2 ' M .S a o £ = 3 *> 5 n M <3 ° c a« •C k. a c « a 0-, ' — ' m lis CD ■^ mo c rt a 'i- Q Pr, d,M IB c •5° & so co^3 ill a. — *• [62] < < < < CO <5 < < CO < to < < to < < < < < CO < < < to ■* X! Q a M o x; J o &.S u 5 o a T3 C a M c ■g M l-a «-» O COX! M O O XI CO _c 3 c 15 u a M c !5 a a _M 3 2 bo c !5 a ™ M o ai E s be a c c a. 63 Postage Rates PROBABLY the greatest percentage of printed pieces used as advertising go to their destination through the mails, and it is therefore well to consider sizes of printed pieces, weight of paper, etc., in reference to mailing costs. Advertising goes through the mail under four classifications: First-class Matter Includes written matter, namely: letters, post cards (private mailing cards), and all other matter wholly or partly in writing whether sealed or unsealed. (a) Cards, or letters (printed), bearing a written date, where the date is not the date of the card, but gives information as to when the sender will call or deliver something otherwise referred to, or is the date when something will occur or is acknowledged to have been received. (b) Imitations or reproductions of hand or typewritten matter not mailed at the post office window or other depository designated by the postmaster in a minimum number of twenty identical copies. (c) Price-lists (printed) containing written figures changing individual items. (d) Sealed matter of any class, or matter so wrapped as not to be easily examined. Rates of Postage on First-class Matter — 2 cents an ounce or fraction thereof. On private mailing cards (post-cards) conform- ing to the requirements for such cards — 1 cent each. Double or reply post cards are subject to 1 cent postage to be prepaid on the initial portion. The reply half, when detached and mailed, is also subject to 1 cent postage. The postage on the reply half need not be affixed thereto until it is detached from the initial half and mailed for return. Second-class Matter Includes newspapers and periodicals bearing notice of entry as second-class matter. No limit of weight is prescribed. Application for entry of a publication as second-class matter or registry as a news agent should be made through the post- master to the Third Assistant Postmaster General, Division of Classification. Third-class Matter Embraces circulars, newspapers and periodicals not admitted to the second-class, nor embraced in the term "book," miscel- laneous printed matter on paper not having the nature of an actual personal correspondence. 1641 Rate of Postage on Unsealed Third-class Matter — 1 cent for each 2 ounces or fraction thereof, on each individually addressed piece or package. There is no such rate of postage as 8 cents a pound on third-class matter. Letters Attached to Third-class Mail — Communications in en- velopes fully prepaid at the first-class rate may be attached to packages of third-class matter fully prepaid at the third-class rate, in the manner and under the conditions set forth in the preceding article. Packages of third-class matter to which such communications are attached shall in all cases be treated as third- class mail. Fourth-class Matter {Domestic Parcel Post) Embraces that known as domestic parcel post mail, and in- cludes merchandise, books (including catalogs), miscellaneous printed matter weighing more than four pounds, and all other mailable matter not embraced in the first, second and third classes. Rates of Postage on Fourth-class or Parcel Post Matter — (a) Parcels weighing 4 ounces or less, except books, seeds, plants, etc., 1 cent for each ounce or fraction thereof, any distance. (b) Parcels weighing 8 ounces or less, containing books, seeds, etc., 1 cent for each 2 ounces or fraction thereof, regardless of distance. (c) Parcels weighing more than 8 ounces, containing books, seeds, etc., parcels of miscellaneous printed matter weighing more than 4 pounds, and all other parcels of fourth-class matter weighing more than 4 ounces are chargeable, according to distance or zone, at the pound rates. Communications Attached to Parcels — When it is desired to send a communication with a parcel on which postage at the fourth-class rate has been fully prepaid, the communication may be placed in an envelope fully prepaid at the first-class rate and addressed to correspond with the address on the parcel and then be tied to or otherwise securely attached to the outside of the parcel in such manner as to prevent its separation therefrom and not to interfere with the address on the parcel. The stamps to cover the postage on the parcel must be affixed to the wrapper of the parcel, and those to pay the postage on the communication must be affixed to the envelope of the communication. Parcels to which such communications are attached are treated as fourth- class matter. Mailings of Matter Without Stamps Affixed Upon application to the postmaster at the office of mailing, permits may be issued to persons or concerns for mailing first- [65] class matter, quantities of not less than 300 identical pieces of third-class matter, and second-class matter at the transient rate or the rates applicable to copies mailed for local delivery by letter carriers at city delivery offices, and 250 identical pieces of matter of the fourth-class without stamps affixed, the postage thereon being paid in money. Precanceled Postage Stamps — Precanceled postage stamps may be used only by the persons or concerns which have been given a permit to use them. Such stamps are good for the payment of postage only on matter of the third and fourth class presented at the office where precanceled. Upon receipt of authority from the Third Assistant Postmaster General for the use of precanceled postage stamps, the question of obtaining an allowance to cover the expense of having the precanceling done by a printing establishment with an electro- plate furnished by the Department should be taken up with the First Assistant Postmaster General Division of Post Office Serv- ice. An electro-plate for use in precanceling stamps may be obtained by making requisition on the Fourth Assistant Post- master General, Division of Equipment and Supplies. When the number of stamps to be precanceled is not sufficiently large to justify the expense connected with the use of an electro-plate, the postmaster will be furnished a special hand-stamp for that purpose. Selecting the Right Weight of Paper to Reduce Mailing Costs. In determining weight of paper to use in order to reduce mail- ing costs, the four use-requirements of all printed matter should first be considered, namely, appearance, longevity, treatment and impress. After these factors have been considered use the lightest weight possible. Make up dummies in this weight and perhaps also in the next few weights heavier, allowing something for ink and stitching (if any). Always weigh pieces in their envelopes with any stuffer or other matter that is to be mailed with them. Getting the Most out of the Mailing Cost In most instances, statements, bills and ordinary business cor- respondence can carry with them other enclosures without in- creasing the mailing cost, as the actual weight of the original enclosure often does not reach the weight limit allowed for the amount of postage used. This margin of wasted weight can be utilized to great advantage for envelope stuffers, to describe and sell some new product, or to announce bargain sales, new policies or departments. These stuffers or enclosures can be used in many other ways at a minimum expense. [66]* What can be mailed for 2 cents, first-class postage. IN A NO. 10 ENVELOPE Size 4^" x 9V2— substance weight 17 x 22—20 lb. Combination No. 1 A billhead or single-page letter, size 83^" x 11" — substance weight 17 x 22 — 20 lb. with a booklet of any of the following specifications — Trim Size 3%" x 934" — 8 pages, self cover, substance weight 80 lbs. Trim Size 3Y% x 9^" — 16 pages, self cover, substance weight 60 lbs. Trim Size 3%" x 9 " — 8 pages and cover, substance weight of inside pages 25 x 38—60 lb— cover, 20 x 26—65 lb. Combination No. 2 A single-page letter or billhead, size 83^" x 1 1" — substance weight 17 x 22 — 20 lb. with a booklet of any of the following specifications — Trim Size V/% x 934" — 8 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38 — 80 lb. Trim Size 3]/g" x 9J4" — 16 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38 — 60 lb. Trim Size 33^" x 934" — 8 pages and cover, substance weight of inside pages 25 x 38—60 lb.— cover, 20 x 26—50 lb. and a 33^ x 53^" return post card equivalent in weight to the Government post card. Combination No. 3 A billhead or single-page letter and a four-sheet letter size 8J^"x 113^" — sub- stance weight 17 x 22 — 16 lb. Combination No. 4 A billhead or single-sheet letter and a three-sheet letter size 83^" x 113^" — substance weight 17 x 22 — 16 lb. and a 3J^" x 53^" return post card equivalent in weight to Government post card, IN A 6H" ENVELOPE Size 3%" x 6%"— substance weight 17 x 22—20 lb. Combination No. 1 A billhead or single-sheet letter — not exceeding 8J^"xll" in size — substance weight 17 x 22—20 lb. •_ with a booklet of any of the following specifications — Size 3K" x 634" — 16 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38 — 80 lb. UaL Size 3Y 2 " x 634"— 32 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38—50 lb. JJ Size 3Yi "x 6K" — 16 pages and cover, substance weight of inside pages 25 x 38 — 60 lb.— cover, 20 x 26—50 lb. Combination No. 2 A billhead or single-page letter — not exceeding 8J^"xll" in size — substance weight 17 x 22—20 lb.— with a booklet of any of the following specifications — Size 33^" x 634" — 16 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38 — 80 lb. Size 33^" x 634" — 32 pages, self cover, substance weight 25 x 38 — 50 lb. Size 33^" x 634" — 8 pages and cover, substance weight of inside pages 25x38 — 80 lb.— cover 20 x 26—65 lb. Size 33^" x 634" — 16 pages and cover, substance weight of inside pages 25 x 38 — 50 lb— cover 20 x 26—50 lb. and a return post card size 33^" x 53^" equivalent in weight to a Government post card. The combinations given above are a few suggestions. There are many other styles and sizes which can be used for stuffers. [671 Envelopes The Use of Envelopes Envelopes should be used in the mailing of all except very rare types of advertising pieces. Any message that is worth printing and mailing is worth protecting in a suitable envelope. The printed sheet is planned and laid out to create a definite impression on the recipient — but this recipient is affected, not by the condition of the piece as it is sent from the print shop, but by its condition as it comes to his hand. If the advertiser does not prize his message enough to protect it by providing a serviceable and harmonious envelope, his prospective customer certainly will not be favorably impressed. At best the effect- iveness of the message is impaired, and when the piece is muti- lated in the mails the effect is definitely adverse. On the other hand, a sturdy and harmonious envelope gives evidence that the sender places a value on the enclosure and creates in the mind of the recipient a feeling of appreciation even before the piece is opened. The Choice of Paper for Envelopes Choice of paper for envelopes for different sorts of printed matter demands careful consideration. Certain qualities and characteristics are essential to the production of envelopes which will carry their contents through to their destination in good con- dition. There are instances when special sizing, or other form of processing, is necessary before a paper is suitable for envelopes. First-grade Bond, Linen, Ledger and Cover Papers and Rope Bristols make the strongest envelopes in printing papers which can be relied on to travel anywhere and protect their messages. But many other papers can be used with economy and success when there are no extreme conditions to be met, or the contents not too heavy or bulky. The Appropriate Size of Envelope for a Printed Piece Size Envelopes should be made approximately J^" wider than the trim or folded size of the enclosure in the way the envelope opens and Y% the other way, except in cases where the bulk of the en- closure or enclosures exceeds }/$ of an inch. In this case, they must necessarily be made larger. Generally speaking, the en- closure should slip in and out easily. Printed Matter on Envelopes As much care should be used in the design of the printed matter on the envelope as is used in the make-up of the insert. There should not be too much printing, as this is apt to weaken the advertising and create a poor impression. Let the envelope tell the story in such a way that a desire is created to see what it contains. [68] Envelope Styles and Their Uses 1. Commercial and Official These sizes are the most generally used in correspondence, for business stationery, direct advertising, circularizing and gov- ernment official business. Supplied in all grades of papers — Manila, Bond, Linen, Ledger, Writing, Book, Off- set, Cover, Bristol, Wedding and Papeterie — to meet their specific requirements. The envelope should match the paper of the letterhead or other enclosure. 2. Baronial {Card or Bank) The size of these is nearly square. Many years ago the Baronial sizes were used ex- tensively for ladies' stationery. At pres- ent, however, they are used by printers and advertisers, in mailing announcements, booklets of season styles, catalogs for shoes, clothing, etc. It is unusually essential in these cases that the envelope match the enclosure. The grades generally used are: Bond, Linen, Writing, Offset, Wedding and Pape- terie papers. 3. Wallet Flap This style in fancy stationery followed the Baronial. It is still popular in the lower priced lines. Department stores use it in sending announcements of special sales to women customers. The grades generally used are: Bond, Linen, Offset, Wedding and Papeterie papers. 4. Gothic Flap A medium pointed flap envelope used in fancy, high-grade stationery — wedding an- nouncements, cards, etc. Some large firms who prefer a smart envelope are using several sizes of this style in their business stationery, such as 3%" x 6^", 4^" x 6^" and 3^"x7M". The grades generally used are: Bond, Linen, Wedding and Papeterie papers. [69] 5. Sector Flap The extreme of the gothic flap, the pointed flap coming down near the bottom of envelope. Used in social stationery. The grades, Linen, Vellum, Crash Finish, Wedding and Papeterie stock, are always the same as the paper to be enclosed and insisted on by the customer. 6. Souvenir A large advertising display envelope. It permits a picture or subject on the face; the address side is the back. The return address is placed on the flap which is one inch wide. It can be placed in the typewriter and addressed without any difficulty. The grade generally used is: Bond. Laid Linens and Writings can also be used. 7. Typewriter This envelope is similar to the Souvenir. The seal flap is 1^" wide. It may be used similarly to the Souvenir and as a regular envelope. The wider flap is an advantage to help the printer in his make- ready when impressing the corner card on the face of the envelope. Stock generally used is: Bond. 8. Outlook Used for all kinds of correspon- dence. It prevents mis - mailing, which is generally embarrassing and frequently expensive. The grades generally used are: Bonds, Linens, Ledgers and Writings. [70] 9. Postage Saver This style is used by mail-order houses, brokers, patent-medicine or any direct- mail advertisers. The stock is generally a low grade Manila or White Wood. The envelope is open one side for postal inspec- tion and is mailed at half the regular postage. B n w r t: A 10. Two -Compartment Mailing With this envelope the letter and cata- log are received together so that a customer is not put to the inconvenience of waiting for the catalog nor is it delivered to the wrong person. The letter is sent first class and the contents in the large envelope third or fourth class, according to proper classification. For this purpose a strong stock should be used and bear some form of clasp fas- tener. //. String and Button Fastener This is another style of fastener which is used for the same purpose as the Im- proved Columbian Clasp. 71 Making 12. Improved Columbian Clasp An open-end envelope with a steel fas- tener to engage the seal flap. This holds the catalog or samples securely and leaves the envelope open for inspection. No. 1 Jute is the grade that is generally used, but anything that is strong enough to withstand the wear and tear in the mail is suitable. Cover papers are the next grade. All high-class advertisers use a cover stock to match the cover of booklet enclosure. 13. Open End For coins, gloves, scarfs, photos, cata- logs. The class covers the greatest range of sizes having the seal flap at the narrow end of the envelope. Used by all classes of advertisers in the grades of paper to match the cover of the enclosure. Grades used are: Manila, Bond, Linen, Ledger, Writing, Book, Offset, Cover and Bristol. Special Styles of Envelopes Style of envelopes which are not standard (that is, not found in the styles listed here) should only be used where some extraor- dinary condition exists. It is a good plan to make up a rough dummy of special styled envelopes and send it to the envelope maker to see if it is practical to make, and then, if it is to be mailed, insert what it is to contain and have the Post Office authorities pass on it. Then send it with its contents to some friend in order to find out in what condition it arrives. Freak envelopes are, as a rule, not practical. Note — The information pertaining to these styles and uses of envelopes was furnished by the United States Envelope Company, Ithe authorized manufacturer of Eagle-A Envelopes. TO OBTAIN THE PROPER ENVELOPE In order to meet the growing demand for envelopes and to insure the choice of envelopes appropriate to use with each Eagle-A grade of paper, the American Writing Paper Company has — 1st. Made an arrangement with the United States Envelope Company, the largest envelope maker in the world, to manu- facture all the standard styles of envelopes in appropriate papers to use with each Eagle-A grade. 2d. Made it possible to obtain any of these envelopes in any practical size from each Eagle-A Service House. 3d. Made it possible to find easily the appropriate Eagle-A Paper to use in envelope form with each Eagle-A grade by means of a chart on page 75 of this Handbook. There is an Eagle-A Envelope to match each Eagle-A Paper. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manu- facturer. The Divisions of the United States Envelope Company are located as below: Division Location Logan, Swift & Brigham Envelope Co. Worcester, Mass. Whitcomb Envelope Co. Worcester, Mass. W. H. Hill Envelope Co. Worcester, Mass. United States Envelope Co. Holyoke, Mass. Morgan Envelope Co. Springfield, Mass. P. P. Kellogg & Co. Springfield, Mass. White, Corbin & Co. Rockville, Conn. Plimpton Manufacturing Co. Hartford, Conn. National Envelope Co. Waukegan, III. Central States Envelope Co. Indianapolis, Ind. Pacific Coast Envelope Co. San Francisco, Cal. Morgan Stationery Co. Springfield, Mass. Logan Drinking Cup Co. Worcester, Mass. Monarch Envelope Co. Philadelphia, Pa. How to Order Envelopes First, select the style that best fits the use-requirements of the printed piece. See pages 00. Secondly, call up an Eagle-A Service House, tell it the style and the quantity desired, and if possible furnish a complete dummy of printed piece showing the size and the exact grade and finish of the paper to be used. If this is not possible, give size and sample of paper in enclosure. Thirdly, consider if a large quantity of the envelope is to be printed, the advisability of letting the United States Envelope Company print them two or four on, before the paper stock is [73] die-cut, since the U. S. Envelope Company is prepared to print in sheets before the envelopes are made, or the U. S. Envelope Company will indicate layouts to printers who wish to do their own printing on the sheets before envelopes are cut. Fourthly, order envelopes when ordering the paper. It means having the envelopes ready when the job is completed. Use envelopes — they produce greater effectiveness in all kinds of printed advertising. [74] Envelope Papers Suitable for Each Grade— When ordering be sure to specify the same finish for both enclosure and envelope. Envelopes in these papers and weights to fit any printed piece may be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. Paper Used for Enclosure Papers Suitable for Envelopes to Match Weight of Paper for Envelopes (Pounds) Bonds Coupon* Agawam* Persian* Contract* Airpost* Chevron* Acceptance* Norman* Telephone* ■ Use same paper as en- closure. 20-24 Linens U. S. Linen* Colonial Linen* Aulde Scotia Lynene* Rival Linen* 1 1 Use same paper as en- closure. 20-24 Ledgers Government Record* Brunswick Linen* Account Linen* Extension* Gloria* Telephone* 1 Use same paper as en- closure. 24-28 Writings Old Chester Mills Parsons Tinted Wauregan Colored Flats Mt. Nonotuck Mills Mt. Tom Mills Old Chester Mills Parsons Tinted Wauregan Colored Flats 1 Acceptance Bond or any \ other Eagle-A Bond 20-24 20-24 24 20-24 Books Deckle d'Aigle American Vellum Berkshire Text Albion Text Railroad Folder Arrive Halftone American Bulking American Eggshell American Super. Cal. American Eng. Finish Deckle d'Aigle American Vellum Berkshire Text Albion Text Railroad Folder Arrive Halftone American Bulking American Eggshell American Super Cal. American Eng. Finish 40-50 60-80 60-80 60-80 60 60-80 60-70-80 60-70-80 60-70-80 60-70-80 Offsets Albion Beebe Chester Dickinson Albiori Offset Beebe Offset Chester Offset Dickinson Offset 60-70 60-70 60-70 60-70 Covers Deckle d'Aigle Herculean Arven Plate Paradox Standard Riverdale Deckle d'Aigle Herculean Cover Arven Plate Paradox Cover Standard Cover Riverdale Cover 64 65 100 50-60 35-50 80 Bristols Agawam Index Cherokee Index 1 Darien Index American Rope American Post Card Coupon Bondt Contract Bondt Acceptance Bondt Agawam Bondt Airpost Bondt Norman Bondt Persian Bondt Chevron Bondt Telephone Bondt American Rope Arrive Halftone 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 20-24 110 60-80 Weddings and Papeteries Arden Biscay Chesterfield Dorrington Farnsworth Arden Wedding Biscay Wedding Chesterfield Papeterie Dorrington Papeterie Farnsworth Papeterie 61-76 53-61-76 61 53-61 53-61 Mimeographs Peerless Delta [ Acceptance Bond j Norman Bond [ Telephone Bond 20-24 20-24 20-24 „ indicates envelopes made of these papers in all convenient sizes are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. twhite only. For bond colors to match bristol colors, see pages 56 and 57. 75 Specifications STANDARD VERSUS NON-STANDARD PAPERS 13APER Specifications may be considered as the sheet sizes, •*- weights, colors and finishes in which papers are made, as distinct from paper qualities, which embody the varying char- acteristics of life, folding, tearing, tensile, bursting strength, etc. Paper qualities and specifications may be either standard or non-standard. Papers Having Standard Qualities These are the papers which are made to a scientific formula in process and content based on given use-requirements in which the standard qualities are maintained with the greatest possible uniformity. The processing is usually confined to one machine and to operators experienced in making the grade of paper. Papers possessing standard qualities have all the essential grade levels within the kind or classification of the paper. Papers Having Standard Specifications These are papers which have been developed to meet most economically the conditions governing the making and market- ing of paper as they pertain to: 1. The ordinary use-requirements of paper. 2. The printers', lithographers' and stationers' equipment. 3. The paper mill manufacturing conditions. Papers of Non-Standard Qualities and Specifications Non-standard papers are those in which the paper qualities and specifications have not been standardized and cannot, there- fore, be uniform. Being non-standard they must be made with a certain amount of waste which invariably causes the paper to cost more yet have less value. Standard and TV T on-Standard Papers Standard papers have been developed at the demand of the greater proportion of buyers and users of paper to meet the ordinary use-requirements and to eliminate waste. Non-standard papers may seem to fit use-requirements but their qualities are in general unknown except by the manufacturer. Standard papers are tried, known, uniform products which have been tested by users. Non-standard papers are experiments. The standard papers are seasoned ready for printing. Non-standard papers are usually "green" and must be sea- soned or the printer assumes a risk in obtaining perfect register. Standard papers are carried in stock for immediate delivery. Non-standard papers mean delay since they have to be made to order. [76] What the Use of Standardized Papers Means The use of standardized papers insures getting real value and reduces cost to the printer's customer and the printer. It per- mits the paper mill to manufacture in quantity with the least amount of waste and at the lowest possible production costs. When the Use of Non-Standard Papers Is Necessary In commercial practice it is never necessary to use papers of non-standard paper qualities because standard papers have been developed to meet all the ordinary use-requirements of paper. However, the occasion sometimes arises when non-standard sizes, weights, colors and finishes must be used. In this case such non- standard specifications should be applied as far as possible to standard papers of known qualities. Making Orders Papers in standardized grades can be made to order to non- standard sizes, weights and colors from specifications in different minimum quantities according to the kind and grade of paper. In making paper in these minimum quantities, any or all of the non-standard specifications can be produced within certain limits as to size and substance weight, but it is advisable to limit the non-standard specifications as much as possible and call for only those most essential. When a Standard Grade Is Being Run Standard grades are made in different widths in standard weights, colors and finishes. If the requirement is for a non- standard sheet size, adjust, if possible, one of the dimensions to these standard widths. It means less delay and wastage in manufacture. Except in the case of colors, orders can be ac- cepted for smaller minimum quantities when the grade is being run than when special making orders are necessary. Papers of known standard value in the more popular weights, colors and finishes are being run continually and so it is sometimes advan- tageous to get in touch with the mill making the desired grade and plan to have the paper made to the non-standard specification when the grade is being run. Making it Easy to Find Conditions Controlling the Making of Standard Grades to Non-Standard Specifications In order to aid the user of paper to find the conditions which control the making of standard grades to non-standard specifi- cations, charts have been compiled for each kind of paper (see pages 78-94). These charts show the minimum quantities that can be obtained in special making orders when the grade is being run. They also show the range of widths, lengths and substance weights possible to make for each grade within a kind. [771 CO .2 'G CO I a o a3 4) 'o -G Oh "fl W >, oo Urtfl W Oh 00 *£^ ,G Oh >, 3.3 £-8 0:3 o rt g G, a "H 4J 00 c C3 O J> O 00 o * H >S J? aT £ 3 s COW +i 01 § oo O . w 3 oo G G 00 ■« OJ O +J 00 H .S fti*a g rt o cG .a o? o.'d Vh 0) Is ao IS "2- s s 6 m So S3 3 ifi 2 £ 3 SO wQ™_— i ■S o •a ■" is (0 o 3 h-" s| 11 2f e •a c S Si, SO O^Q O ^^ <;« HO w £ 2 MKKMXM £^"t~- o 01 2 2 £ 2 § 2 8 8 8 o s 8 8 ■*< ■"i ■«* Ttl 00 00 oo CM ■a a o White Blue Pink Primros Salmon Cherry Cafe Gray olden-R 4> 13 a) 2 £ (DM C H-< ^ ^ll ^ S g w o £ £ ^ mra l^s O 3 o O O eo eo CO eo ^ "* *** ** oo ca cm CM CM CM CM 8 o 8 8 g 8 CM ** "* CM »* 8 8 O 8 o 8 00 00 00 •** CM eotooTjf COCOO-"* rtrtCMCM »1CMCM ««Mcq rt-HCMCM rtCMCM •-l-HCMCM ca so * •* CM 00 ■* ■* OO ■** <* X X M X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X xxxxxxxx X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Pc^^cmoot* f~ CM t~ C» ■** 00 t» C» t~- CM ■* 00 f^t- O CM ^OOOO a> y a> 1 o 3 1 a S3 a O 1 o o < s a, Con O £ a> 2a S*3 CV- bfg .E-C -.2 oo "en • S><« o cu 3 ■MtQC g°S •* £"S *" O CJ •° c+> 9 ".5 s . $ a , 2fifl MP 1 * t«. •S-St -So *d k a) fj o-g •B "7^3 0) "> i/i ct! d Pi , S.2 Ih CX CO .S.3 to & O *3W u> a u tn ID ti-H CO J-l 03 o Qh I— I w J .£ w rj .y • %£ g »■ .a £ cva a ^"^ _4)N H S n In < "&& | a a 4-1 I a> rtT3 ^ cj MO , tO Q, «!< tO 0) Sic ^ n rt '3^ <: c — D 3^ ^ ag < a« (/) ■?■ O £ E ■d c c SO R •"£ rt .s§§~ °3 rt o S8 •sis cd rt g fi 3 S5 2° .Sg^ »S ESS >>-a Oh 3 3 Ol i-H CO to o ■* N-w a) 3^1 •o .a i3 *; -hfhmct o« ( SO a -a g- g rt.S a 3 NO^Tfl HHINM ^ O CD ° CJ ixi s CD Ci 4> rn rt «43t3 80 CO C .2 o ^3 — O CTJ <" ft «W Oh O to M.J2 £% a & a) IU-O ss tuO to H to is 2 c ft O oj CO 03 Cto .2 N Tn ."S'to to ■s 5 ^ "< +5 t«a tt.-S-fa o cS O g P in U « O *g u ^ &<»' 8"C m <2 r O p ° « -K to O I- to jh 42 «•- « g to o . £to £.9 bo •5 c ■S3 -D 6« rt 60 11 S3 |S to '5S SO l^S«S •S •a " ^3 nJ O So K 60 - ■° C C « ■■sis ■■8"as S° c Q § oj = c c S .Sgg - "g Q 5^ cDcDNNOOOi-HNM-*00 a - " if «* t-T CM C3 CD MO 3*" -.2 M •a •a •a >o SR c fl •2 •* ■* r-T CM """ »*00 ■*oo *noo ■«*< «\g'S NCI CM CM CM CM CM a) co CO CO CO 2 « S CM CM - t- oo 3 o o 5 — ax o n o CO to CO •o s CM "2 M 2 o o o o CJ"^*^ to IO to CO t3 S^ •a to CO CM of o o o o J3""^3 OOC4<-HCMCO^OO tONN«C»0^.(u 2S-SS- * ^o~ "S « a .2 o i.s '55 a u 15 g^ -s o < w 3 H 83] CO d .2 C3 CJ cd "u :i3 a> $£ g « 1/3 ° « 53 w O £• fi "Z rt W> a> g c ^ •2 §3. a Q < Q ■z < K °? 53 O z •p, M a! s O R 0) 3 H c ^ a< fl .5 3 E >> d m •S3 8* SO' 1 ' 3 tort .SU it el "|a OU is , o< fgp rt-3 L ~¥^" .5 ** ■a-g So £"- £2 fi-- ■5 o § o s„° "S.S § E 0-3 Offl K S5 -; ° Si •ill § Q O C8 O < j8S c ' < ° ,(« Canary Cherry Fawn Green Lilac Melon 9) B 2 8 3 11 ug o ^ WJ3 CO CO flfi. 41 1-1 oo oo eq .2 IB «> oo: o o o o •a 2 a) O J3TJ CO CO ■£ *" B CO CO ■sal g o oo o U "r*vi od o al-B CO t* 50O-*00 COO'* ^h cq 1* >n •*■ '55 w ^ CO OS CO -O.CU US o OO O .5*3.1% , ■8 §.2 60*^ I s 3 Ml CO o U3 o .ss-S CO CO -^'w-d. ~* ■ H S3 o'js ■S °* J3 • +3-w'-B U s o Q O 2 oi rt rt 00 o (3_c -4^ m 8-2 o o ■*4*Oo""oO ncoeo cq oo-*-** *ao =3=3 ^sbS CJCqeqcOCOCO "o o Being Rui " means tr t is necessa tive colum X X X So 5^ So NMcq X X X X X X t-~t~oVeq 00 «* -H -H .-< 45 t/3 ft 3 3.S u ft w W lo <°ft is » WJ+3 43 «•■§ d ggl 43 P<£. *|g 43 G'o . OS o s ■" S 1;" o w ^ .2? a * o tuO w PI p> rt .2 <0 O o -4-> 09 T) +J a o U 0) 43 d " ^"d £ 0~& fc te s £ CO HH -(J 03 •5 « 5 »H +J 0— ' 8 SS ° - " 3 dd oft t/1 -T 1 cd > i> < so '^3 "is III SO c ° a a Q i" 4) s?9-S o 3.2 >> 3-2 2 ii . r3 S B> 23 ."2 o 55 ^ ^J3 86 *2 T) a> in Mo ouooooo «* ^ lO CO i>. (X) ooooo K X K X X M W5»OOONOO ©q C<1 C-3 CO CO CO CO -*t< Tt< iO X X K X ooocq^^cooco COCO^^^^iO-^ iO-^COOOC^COOOcO ooeM ^ O CO •** ^ iO X X X X 33^ gCQPQ S3 -33 S3 3 « ctflO 87] c o +-» • 1—4 O & a! a) 'o r=3 w eg a T) •O co o eg *rj » 8 O w .S £ 6 £ a) o •s-§ -§"3 § 8. O CU CO CO •2.3 1 « o 2 u -a 0) l>i t/3 1 a 1-1 O 0) rn S > O u < o 1-1 n 0) ed W +-> G rG ■(-> £ rt s-s .8 8 8^ CO : > a> a) ^a^2 11 - a •OB S SO 0)S ^3 F' 3 ° S.S 3 So c 2 c 2 «i.S 3.2 a '■5.5^5 „ I S 2^°cq^m rt o cm ««* eo 00 S °5 *#00 00 CJCO S3 w [88] art .•2 M S*j I § S •a o 3 3 a « ■go TO 8 .12 go 2 § g g-a J3 O J (W O 9> «J 5 «o f S 3 13 .CO O>000 o s sss £3- £2 X K M a] H On ■3 G cd I it H-t «; 89 CO a o • <-* +-> OiKH-P Id to n h n § W O - Wo & -*o'o ■i » a •2 S ^ "©-8 2 6 a> V-i PQ u 0, <2 2 »- sT P.1 3 n> ed l — I Hi ^^ I

. « -•s ond o 3 loSo ■*occ (Meow 1 Q 90] o Not Made o cm OO o o 2.3 a C CV- So .5.ES CU .3 1 o oi-- °" cu C ES C jB o, o 00 o 3lB ill Bf'l ^ ° Pi CU C — J3T3 E >,cs «8 ™ 3 cu " C 5SS o cu cu wj5 •°C!" e— : ° 3 oo v-°a Sjh^ •0=305 t> o: •* i- - cu 5 cu *-> g Brown Cherry Dark Blue Green LawnGreen Light Blue Purple Red Russet Scarlet Steel Gray Tea Yellow a cd Si O o o o CM o o o CO o o o •W o (M 00 o o o © as C >.3 ca-Q-d o o *> rJ3 P. cu'5 to CO o U5 CM »f3 u g a on cu .2 =3 8*3 CftS cu 3t) T3 oi._. rt o-g «?■«** •E ^ cu oi M ta ca c^oo « £ +» w 3^5 S? E e «>"3 MjOO cSS u cu cu-- o ■a m >, o O CM»* o CO o US 00 o o o © 00 K CM c o Oh ctf Oh "d d c -a .a £ Ph 00 O ^H c! O O Oh 4} GO _-" ^ y o o W Oh GO OT lo <°o\ is « 1 !■§ g GO u u 5 ^ ,11 rrt s s.2 i-i go 05 2-s.a « ,gcS5 sj So id "' m £ 51 ' s s rt o (X SO c 2 : g s. p HO J3 CO 16 tic Vh *^ ^mmodH5> tootooo ^ 00 p* g-s-gj ^ T) V oj C 0) fO rrt u ^ Oh U [92] c 6 c5 « t!i-T5 d Si. g o O S 25W4J g * §*.§J "■gSg-s .-Sic 2 g ^'S nowrtoo Q 2S 5 a, cv=s CD .<« ° co 5 "- 1 m 3 a w S ^ ° a OS „r aj o o: Ui 4) CO ■*" CIS cd ^ a> aZ, o 2o!>, h c « .2 i; o V a> a) uH > •§ .2 "O to>2 * .co-S-a -B *j3 o ■^.tsS-o i-sll 3+2 co S -.. -^ -3 cu 4)--. o w, rt Mto : = "O „, * ^OJ3 3.S [93 CV5 a o « t-H u ss eo CL, CO "O d C 03 +-> CO Cj o .s GO tH > c a §S Oo at 11 .S o S* * t) s c 2'S 3 £ O ol 11 *"Grade Being Run" means that if the grade in color desired is being run when paper is wanted, orders can be taken for smaller minimum quantities. t" Range" means the widths it is possible to supply. These widths are not only determined by the rolls, but in some cases by the cutting and other finishing apparatus. Accordingly it is necessary to establish widths which will divide evenly into any of the widths listed under "Range," the minimum and maximum widths being those indicated in the respective columns so headed. M . S° £ o o o o o s o" o o o © o o 5 Q Pi < Q Z «u H CO 0) g o s cd G u CO _g IS o CU s O o o c p a I&.SJ8 Sa°<3 £ o g o o g © © U5 < Q Z < H CO 0) 0) CO 00 H n o 3 H O Z $ w PQ E> CO n a z < H ■9 Z o z S3 .2? u £■1 £ IS US £ oo oo to oo © V >"% +-> ca IS cd o 3 -" e| Ph # •O c 3 OPJ« £ o o CO eo" s CO CO o o CO CO co" 3 E SO £ o o o o s o" o o o © g © «o 4-Q oo SQ cn ooooo ooooo© lOCONWOW ©ooo©© tOCONCOON ooooo COt^OO OCM CO w CO P < Q Z < "? o z a> 3* CO eo CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO GS 1 O Pn 3 a CO CO CO CO s s J3 a M o o © •a -)- bo 3 P5 -3 a o 00 o i © oo o s o 00 o i © o CO © 0) a] o a« is a. D be c ■5.S § 2 •si ■si ^ CD (D h & ^a 5 p .Q CD 00 ih CO 00 00 ^05 10"* CM t> CO 05 toot^to CO >0 CO CM ■*-*coco O5t>CO00 P S 00C5O© Hrt N. CM 05 CO I> 00 CO 05 cooi>eo COl>I>00 O5C0O5>O »ototot> rHIOiHtO io io co co a) o P 03 U nj 0) a < HON'* OOliH 00 CO 10 00 05 CM-tfiocO IflHHN ooooo C5CMO00 Oho© I>C0NtH ■*io-*co t-00-HCO t-Ht-1 O00OCM rHiH C0 00OCM iHrH CDOOOO 1-1 C0t-05iH iH ll 8 '1 iHiHrHr-t HHt- 1 i-H oooo OOOO CO CO CO CO MMMCO 05 05 05 05 oooooooo 05 05 05 05 OOOOOOOO iHtHtHiH oooo oooooooo OOOOOOOO OOOOOOOO O <" 1— 1 T— 1 I— I T— I rHr-liHrH CO CO coco CO COCO CO C5O5 05O5 OOOOOOOO 05 05 05 05 OOOOOOOO r-tr= IHH iHr-(iHr-l iHr-liHrH tHiHiHtH oooooooo OOOOOOOO oooooooo CD CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO OOOO oooo oooooooo OOOO IN (MINIM oooo MMM» CO CO CO CO 1 — t i-H i— 1 r-1 coco coco CM CM CM CM (M(MlMCN! (MIMIMCN) 10101010 HiHHiH .P WJ P tu »-■ +-> m 2 "o OCD-*0 -*CCCOO r-ICOCOO t^coi-io cmooo tooiao CO t^ COO COtOOiO OOCONO OCOCOO ■ocoooo CM CO-* 10 iH CM CM CO iHrtlMCN rHiHl-HN TfCOCOO ■* cocoo CM to too C0O5'*iO CO»HH^|> O05r-IC0 oo too-* tOWt^OO CO CO CM 05 tHO0O0I> us so oo o iH ■*>Ot^C0 TjlTJ(tDN CO't'OtO coco-*»o CI CM 00 CO >H ■*coeoo ■*to>o-* 00 05-* 05 COTt.THiO OtOOrH cocot-o coi>-*o iHOCOCD lOCOOOO ■*iot>oo -tfiOt'OO ■* iO CO 00 TfiiOtOt^ M pq HCOCOCM ■tf toco© HtOC* ©iHt^CM Nt>.05(N totoo>o (MrHrHCN) O5 00OCM iH^t ■*iOt>00 CO ^ «D IS CO^iOCO Substance Weight Basis 17x22 C0C0O-* rHrHCNIN cocoo-* rHiHINCM co toe* ■HrHINlN co too-* HHNN co too-* rHtHCNCM a> o 1— 1 c o =3 o u 1— 1 1— 1 s bJO < 1— ( 1 l-H 1— 1 c 'co 0> Oh > 1— 1 +H o PS S-i G o o > co o &. < 110] OOOrHCO 00 00 rH CO OS CO * to lOCOOt>- IN •*■*■* COb"-itO Tjt-*iCiO »H * 05 CO •*-*-*iO toocoto (MIMCOCO (N^OO (M (MOM CO COCOO"5 COIN 00 CO OOOINO t-ICOtHCO MOHH ■*ooo •*to»o^ CO-* CO lOCINOl *-*tot> co*ioto COCO-*lC CM IN IN IN -Hr-liH CO CO CO CO oooo COCO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 1-I1H1H1H (NINININ coco coco co coco co t^CO-*i« CO-* U5 tO r^coiMO 00 o-*oto INC0-*lO NW*>0 NCOCO* IN (M CO CO 00 iO IN 00 t-tDOOO 00O»Ct>t> OS 10-* CO C0-*iCtO ■itifltON co-*oto IN C0-* "5 •*^H00rH (MOOO (N^rtOO (ONON ©00 10 IN lOOOOtO ot^ooo o*ot^ C0-*iOtO IN CO*-* IN CO CO-* (M IN CO CO MOO'* iHtHCNXN co too-* i-(iH(M(M co toe* iHr-l(NCq co too-* 1H1-KNN > C o u > 0) O 1— 1 Oh G a g o 1— 1 0) G o rrrrrr?!{rrTj7flflflf PERSIAN BOND is a paper of distinguished appearance, loft- dried, with a high rag content. It is made with medium finish in a good bluish-white and three colors. Persian Bond is a third-grade bond as shown in the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 110. GENERAL USES — Persian Bond's long life and ability to endure handling or folding are good reasons for using it when a paper with these qualities is necessary for— Stationery Documents Letterheads and Envelopes Contracts General Letters Bills and Statements IMPRESS— Sui, Advertising Price Lists Mortgages Booklets Checks Envelope Enclosures Purchase Orders Reports Permanent Office Forms able for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Engraving from steel dies or copper plates " Die Stamping " Ruling The various types of impress as given above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (17) x 22— 13 —16 —20 - (17) x 28— 16H— 20^— 2SY 2 (19) x 24— 16 — 19V 2 — 24H -24 22 x (34)— 26— 32— 40— 48 28x(34)— 33— 41— 51 24x(38)— 32— 39— 49 COLORS Blue, Green and Buff (17) x 22—16—20 22 x (34)— 32— 40 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Persian Bond can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Persian Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1161 Samples — Actual samples of Persian Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Persian Bond Typewriter Paper in standard weights in white only, regular sta- tionery sizes, is cataloged under Typewriter Papers, page 267, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Persian Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,950 pounds. BUT if Persian Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,950 pounds. Writings Books Offsets Covers NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Persian Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 72" to 88", but the minimum must be 16", and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in any lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Persian Bond is 28"x38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Persian Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. PERSIAN BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and \foiL to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6M 3^x5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4^ 4^x5^ 43^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x6% 3^x8^ 4^x9K NO. 11 12 14 4^ x 10^ 4%xll 5 xWA Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1171 miiimminmiimmiiiim/k Contract Bond The Fourth BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "contract bond") CONTRACT BOND has a much higher character and appearance than its moderate price indicates. It is a semi- permanent paper that will last well beyond the period of ordinary legal requirements and will withstand a considerable amount of handling and folding without deteriorating. Contract Bond is a medium rag-content bond, loft-dried and made in a medium finish. It is stocked in a bluish white and eight different colors. Contract Bond grades fourth as indicated by the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 110. GENERAL USES — Contract Bond is particularly recommended for the following uses when the above qualities are desired — Stationery Letterheads and Envelopes General Letters Bills and Statements Forms and Documents Acknowledgments Bill Heads Checks and Drafts Debit Memos Estimate Orders Mfg. Orders Inventory Sheets Advertising Invoices Notes Purchase Orders Inventory Slips Time Slips Booklets Folders Price Lists IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " " Engraving from steel dies or copper plates " " Die Stamping " Ruling The various types of impress as given above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS. Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) Trimmed WHITE -24 22 x (34)- 28 x (34)- 24 x (38)- -26—32—40—48 -33—41^51 -32—39-49 (17) x 22— 13 —16 —20 - (17) x 28—16^—20^—25^ (19) x 24— 16 — \9V 2 — 24^ COLORS Blue Pink Primrose Salmon Cherry Cafe Gray Goldenrod (17) x 22— 13— 16 —20 22 x (34)— 26— 32— 40 (17)x28— — —2SY 2 28x(34)— — —51 (19)x24— —19^ 24x(38)— —39 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Contract Bond can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. [1181 Where Stocked — Contract Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Contract Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Contract Bond in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Commercial Stationery Line, page 257, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Contract Bond Typewriter Paper in standard weights in white only, regular stationery sizes, is cataloged under Typewriter Papers, page 268, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Contract Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,400 pounds. BUT if Contract Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,400 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Contract Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16", and the maxi- mum 28". The sheets can be cut in any lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Contract Bond is 28" x 38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Contract Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. CONTRACT BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed }/£m and J^m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company commercial BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6H 3rVx5^ 3J^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4fi m^sy 8 VAxsy 2 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3%x6^ 3>gx8^ 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 iy 2 x 10^ 4^x11 5 xiiy 2 Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [119] wiiimmiiiiiiiiwuiimulm Airpost Bond The Fifth BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "airpost bond") mmmmmmnmam AIRPOST BOND is a good, loft-dried, rag-content paper. It is stocked in white only. It compares favorably in appear- ance with the higher Bond Grades, while its price is much lower. It is a semi-permanent Bond and will last well over fifteen years, and at the same time withstand a considerable amount of exposure, folding and handling. Made in white only. Airpost Bond grades fifth in the Bond Charts of Relative Quality- Standards as indicated on page 110. GENERAL USES — Airpost Bond is recommended for the following uses when a distinctive appearance, lasting qualities and a moderate price are desired. Stationery Letterheads and Envelopes Forms and Documents Statements Invoices Purchase Orders Advertising Booklets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) ' " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press ' " Engraving from steel dies or copper plates ' " Die Stamping " Ruling The various types of impress as given above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY (17) x 22—16 —20 —24 22 x (34)— 32-40— 48 (17) x 28— 20H— 2Sy 2 ■ 24 x (38)— 39-^9 (19) x 24—19^—243^ 28 x (34)— 41— 51 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Airpost Bond can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Airpost Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [120] Samples — Actual samples of Airpost Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper in standard weights in white only, regular sta- tionery sizes, is cataloged under Typewriter Papers, page 269, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Airpost Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,400 pounds. BUT if Airpost Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,400 pounds. Offsets Covers NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Airpost Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in any lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Airpost Bond is 28" x 38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Airpost Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AIRPOST BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and %u to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6M 6% 3tV*5K 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4H 4^x5K 4^x53^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x6^ 3^x8^ 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4H x 10% 4^x11 5 xllH Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1211 Chevron Bond The Sixth BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "chevron bond") CHEVRON BOND is a rag-content bond, air-dried in such manner as to give it the appearance of a loft-dried sheet. It is a semi-permanent paper that will last over the period covered by the legal statutes of limitations. It is made in white only, in a medium finish. Chevron Bond ranks sixth as determined by the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 111. GENERAL USES — Chevron Bond is recommended for the following uses when the above-named qualities are desired — Stationery Forms and Documents Advertising Letterheads and Envelopes Policies Bulletins Billheads Folders Statements Booklets Reports Estimates IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Ruling The various types of impress as given above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses) WHITE Basis — 17 x 22 sheet size (17) x 22— 13 —16— 20 —24 22 x (34)— 26— 32— 40— 48 (17) x 28— WA— 20y 2 — 2SV 2 24 x (38)— 32— 39— 49 (19) x 24— 16 —l9V 2 —24y 2 28 x (34)— 33— 41— 51 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Chevron Bond can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Chevron Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Chevron Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [122] Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper in standard weights in white only, regular stationery sizes, is cataloged under Typewriter Papers, page 270, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Chevron Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,800 pounds. BUT if Chevron Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but at least 2,200 pounds are required for special calender finishes. Under no condition can colors be made in quantities less than 8,800 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Chevron Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 72" to 88"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 44". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 58". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Chevron Bond is 44" x 58" with the grain parallel to the 58" dimension. Sheets 22", 24" and 28" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. ROLLS (SPECIAL) Chevron Bond can also be supplied in rolls not to exceed 30" diameter, wound on steel or strawboard cores, in widths (dimension across grain) as given for sheets, in quantities not less than 2,200 pounds. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Chevron Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Covers CHEVRON BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed %u and }4u to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6% 3tV*5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4f£ 4J^x5^ 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x63^ 3^x8^ 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4^x10^ 4^x11 5 xll^ Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [123] \Jmimmimmiiuwimiiml. Acceptance Bond The Seventh BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "acceptance bond") mumumuuumuuimmvu ACCEPTANCE BOND is the highest grade bond in the temporary class. For a short period, such as two or three years, it will withstand ordinary handling and folding. Accep- tance Bond is a rag-content paper, machine-dried. It is made in a medium finish in eight colors and white. It is also made in a linen finish in white and blue. Acceptance Bond grades seventh in the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards as shown on page 111. GENERAL USES — Acceptance Bond is particularly adapted for the following uses, bearing in mind its above-described qualifications — Stationery File Copies Advertising Letterheads and Inter-Department Letters Receiving Reports Booklets Envelopes Order Blanks Requisitions Bulletins Form Letters Receipts Time Slips Price Lists Reports IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way) white (17) x 22—13 —16 —20 —24 17 x (28)— 16M— 20M— 25^ (19) x 24—16 — 19M— 24^ 22 x(34)— 26 —32 —40 —48 24 x (38)— 32— 39^9 (28) x 34—33—41—51 (20) x (26)— 28 (20) x (28)— 30 COLORS Pink Russet Blue Buff Light Green Canary Golden Rod (17) x 22 —13 —16 —20—24 22 x (34)— 26— 32-^0-48 17 x (28)— 20^—25^ 24 x (38)— 39-^9 (19) x 24—193^—24^ (28)x34— 41— 51 BLUE and buff (20) x (26)— 28 (20) x (28)— 30 LINEN FINISH White Blue (17) x 22 —16—20 22 x(34)— 32— 40 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. [1241 Prices — Prices of Acceptance Bond can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Acceptance Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Acceptance Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be ob- tained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Acceptance Bond in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Commercial Stationery Line, page 258, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper in standard weights in white only, regular stationery sizes, is cataloged under Typewriter Papers, page 271, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Acceptance Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,800 pounds. BUT if Acceptance Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but at least 1,650 pounds are required for special calender finishes. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 8,800 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Acceptance Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16", and the maxi- mum 36". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Acceptance Bond is 36" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 22", 24" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. ROLLS (SPECIAL) Acceptance Bond can also be supplied in rolls not to exceed 30" diameter wound on steel or strawboard cores in widths (dimension across grain) as given for sheets in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds of a size. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Acceptance Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Covers ACCEPTANCE BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed 3^m and }4m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6% 3^x5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 6 3^x4H 4^x5^ 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x6% 3Kx8K 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4^x10^ 4^x11 5 xiiy 2 Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [125] A,,,,,iui,i,miuiiii>iiimmfc Norman Bond The Eighth BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "norman bond") NORMAN BOND is a sheet of good appearance made of the best grade of bleached sulphite. It is made in white and seven colors in a medium finish and will withstand a moderate amount of handling and folding for a period of two or three years. Norman Bond ranks as the eighth grade Bond as indicated by the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 111. GENERAL USES — Norman Bond is recommended for the following uses where a bond paper is desired that will not have to last for a long period of time or be subjected to severe handling or exposure. Stationery General Office Forms Factory Forms Advertising Letterheads and Order Blanks Inventory Slips Folders Envelopes Purchase Orders IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS, and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE Basis — 17 x 22 sheet (17) x 22 —16 —20 —24 24 x (38)— 39-49 17 x (28)— 20^—25^ (28) x 34—41—51 (19) x 24 —19y 2 —Uy 2 22 x (34)— 32— 40— 48 (34) x 44 —64—80—96 COLORS Pink Blue Buff Golden Rod Canary Salmon (17) x 22—16 —20 22 x (34)— 32— 40 17 x (28)— 20V 2 24 x (38)— 39 (19) x 24— 19^ (28) x 34—41 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Opaline Prices — Prices of Norman Bond can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Norman Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1261 Samples — Actual samples of Norman Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Norman Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,800 pounds. BUT if Norman Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds in white or colors. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities of 3,300 pounds in white or colors. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but at least 1,650 pounds are required for special calender finishes. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 8,800 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Norman Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 36". Sheets can be cut from these roll widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 61". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Norman Bond is 36" x 61" with the grain parallel to the 61" dimension.* Sheets 22", 24" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. ROLLS (SPECIAL) Norman Bond can also be supplied in rolls not to exceed 30" diameter wound on steel or strawboard cores in widths (dimension across grain) as given for sheets in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds of a size. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Norman Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Offsets NORMAN BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and y*& to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. LJM commercial baronial official no. 5 6H 3&xsy 2 3^x6 3^x6^ no. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4^ 4^x5^ VAxsy 2 5 x6 no. 7 9 10 3^x8% 4^x9^ no. 11 12 14 4M x \oy 8 4%xll 5 xUH Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [127] \J)iii>it»inii>iim»i>iimm>R Telephone Bond The Ninth BOND Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (rubber-stamped "telephone bond") TELEPHONE BOND is an excellent paper to select when price is a dominating consideration. It is made of chemical wood pulp in a medium finish in white and six colors. Telephone Bond is the ninth grade Bond as indicated by the Bond Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 111. GENERAL USES — Telephone Bond is recommended for the following uses, for which a range of colors may be required, when the pieces do not have to be preserved for any length of time or will not receive much handling or folding — Stationery General Office Forms Advertising Letterheads and Memo Slips Booklets Envelopes Telephone Call Slips Envelope Enclosures IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. Note: Expensive forms of impress are sometimes mistakenly applied to cheap bond papers. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the rubber stamp reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) Basis (17) x 22—13—16 —20—24 (17) x 28 ioy 2 — —2SV 2 (19)x(24) 19^ 243^ 22 x(34)— 26— 32 —40^8 Green WHITE 17 x 22 sheet size (24) x (38)— 39- 28 x(34)— 41- (34) x 44—52- -80—96 COLORS Buff Blue Pink Green Buff Canary Golden Rod (17) x 22—16—20 22 x (34)— 32— 40 (17) x 28 — 20K ' (24) x (38)— 39 (19) x (24)— 193^ 28 x(34)— 41 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Telephone Bond can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Telephone Bond is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Telephone Bond can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [1281 NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Telephone Bond can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 12,100 pounds. BUT if Telephone Bond in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds in white or colors. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but at least 2,200 pounds are required for special calender finishes. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities under 12,100 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Telephone Bond can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 72" to 88"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 44". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Telephone Bond is 44" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52". Sheets 22", 24", 28" and 44" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is some- times possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. ROLLS (SPECIAL) Telephone Bond can also be supplied in rolls not exceeding 30" diameter wound on steel or strawboard cores in widths (dimension across grain) as given for sheets in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds of a size. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Telephone Bond can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. TELEPHONE BOND ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed }/£m and J/±m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6M 3tVx5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4H 4^x5^ 43^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x63/4 3^x8% 4^x9H NO. 11 12 14 VA x 10$* 4^x11 5 xllH Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1291 Linen Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS THE word "Linen," as applied to paper, is misleading and excusable only by the antiquity of the term. Linens are not made of linen rags, nor should the term be confused with "Linen Finish," which refers to a surface finish resembling the appearance of linen fabric. Originally all papers were made by hand and the hand mould was of necessity so constructed as to give a "laid" mark. The raw material used was largely linen. The paper industry soon attained a stage where linen could no longer serve as the sole supply. Cotton was introduced as an additional material and went into papers in increasing amounts until linen ceased to be a factor in the industry. The substitution was complete a good many years ago, and today the laid formation and a firm surface are the only dis- tinguishing characteristics of Linen Papers. Because of the original raw material, linens are usually of cream color. The surface qualities and appearance which give linens their appeal are obtained at a sacrifice of the qualities of the paper which enable it to resist handling and abrasion but have no effect on longevity or its resistance to exposure. Thus a first grade linen paper can be rated with a first grade bond as regards longevity and exposure, while in folding, en- durance and resistance to abrasion it ranks with a bond of the third grade. The methods used for the development of the nine Quality- Standard bond grades of the Eagle-A Line have been applied to the field of linens. In the opinion of the paper-makers, mer- chants and printers who took part in this study, four grades ade- quately meet all possible use-requirements for linens. Paralleling in construction the Quality-Standard Chart of Bond Papers (pages 110-111) the chart on the opposite page has been prepared to show the relation of these linens to one another when considered in terms of their fundamental characteristics. Detailed descriptions of these papers are given on the follow- ing pages. Each paper is described in two ways — first, from its standpoint of appearance and content; and secondly, with reference to the chart of Relative Quality-Standards in Linen Papers. The four grades of the Eagle-A Line cover all requirements: Grade Watermark Color Permanent I U. S. Linen Cream Laid II Colonial White Laid Semi-Perm. Ill Aulde Scotia Lynene Cream Laid Temporary IV Rival Cream Laid LINEN PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to Linens are explained in detail on pages 306-310. [130] In OS S ri +- 1 d c3 (L> w w £<~ Oh Ph C 'So c o J2 '•£ "c3 cU c^ cu a> _2 +* c -1 o Nrt. 00 O NO O co NO OO C-JIO CN CN CO CO CU o a cd Ih cd cu a, a, < § CNCTmhco ^ON00t(< O cv) f~~ ?<-> O0 O CN u-i On ON i-H co •* 00 CO NO NflNO t-~ 00 i— i co u-> no t^ On CO -*i NOt~- CN CO ■* ui 1,3 a go nj S ■eg ---- OOOO oooo NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO oooo NO NO NO NO U"> U-! U-) U-l (S ~ r~— «-— - 1 — t~~ NO NO NO NO ^l^^l^H On On ON ON r-»r^t~.r^ NO NO NO NO £ 3 oooo 'T* ^T* ''^ ^f oooo OO OO OO OO OOOO O0 OO OO OO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO en CO i— 1 i— 1 CO co CM CV) CN CN TP Tt^ "*f TX* l-H l-H l-H l-H CO CO CO CO .3 M cu C/3 to ■* co ONMO CO NO O LO NO -*u-)l~^ CO TflU-J NO "TfH O0 CV) ^O i-H i— I CN CN fNt^tn'* iHlHCNCS u ca CO 0\NOO O co 0\>-0 NOONiri t— i O co u-> TH OO NO tH i-H N0>-0 TjH 00 i-H t-H i-H MOOtflCN m\ONO\ •*iO\ON i-H CO ^ lO CN CN CO •* 0) a CN CN CO 1*1 Substance Weight Basis 17x22 co VOO-* iHfHCNN co NO O ■* iHiHCSCNI CONOO-HH HHCNN cu o t— 1 CO 13 t-H l-H "S _o "o U Aulde Scotia Lynene III > t-H > Writings Weddings graphs Announce- ment Line Stationery Typewriter Papers Writing Tablets, Special Papers Eaglet [131] U. S. Linen The First LINEN Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "u. s. linen") Uimmmmmmiimimimmi US. LINEN is a beautiful cream laid sheet which has the • appearance of the old hand-made linens that are so restful to the eye. It is loft-dried and has a very high rag content — a paper that will last more than the span of the average human life without changing color and without cracking or breaking under severe treatment. U. S. Linen is the first Linen grade as indicated by the Linen Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 131. GENERAL USES — U. S. Linen is recommended for the following uses where a distinctive appearance coupled with long-lasting qualities is desired — Stationery Office Forms General Letterheads Executives' Letterheads Billheads Envelopes Advertising Announcements Envelope Stuffers Booklets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " " Engraving from steel dies or copper plates " " Die Stamping " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLOR— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as 'follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) The chain mark is parallel to the grain. CREAM LAID Basis — 17 x 22 sheet 17 x (22)— 9 —11—13 —16—20 —24 (22) x 34— 18— 22— 26— 32— 40— 48 17 x (26)— 103^—13— ISV 2 — 19— 23H (26) x 34—21—26—31—38—47 Prices — Prices of U. S. Linen can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — U. S. Linen is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [132] Samples — Actual samples of U. S. Linen can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. U. S. Linen Typewriter Paper in standard weights is cataloged under Typewriter Papers (Ne Plus Ultra), page 264, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of U. S. Linen can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. BUT if U. S. Linen in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,300 pounds. Writings NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE U. S. Linen can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in U. S. Linen is 28" x 38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which U. S. Linen can be made is 9 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. U. S. LINEN ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed 3^m and J^m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. LJDf m COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6% 3tVx5K 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 6 3V s xm VAxSVs v/% x sy 2 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3Mx6M 3^x8% 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4^x10^ 4%xll 5 xiiy 2 Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [133 1 Jimimim\nu}inum{iinriik Colonial Linen The Second LINEN Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "colonial linen") COLONIAL LINEN, a beautiful laid paper, has a bluish- white tone. It is a loft-dried linen with a very high rag content which gives it considerable durability and folding strength. Colonial Linen is the second grade of Linen of the Eagle-A Line as indicated by the Linen Chart of Relative Quality-Stand- ards on page 131. GENERAL USES — Colonial Linen is recommended for the following uses when a distinctive quality is desired, coupled with considerable strength and durability — Stationery General Letterheads Executive Letterheads Envelopes Office Forms Billheads Advertising Announcements Envelope Stuffers Booklets IMPRESS— Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " " Engraving from steel dies or copper plates " " Die Stamping " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) The chain mark is parallel to the grain. WHITE LAID Basis — 17 x 22 sheet •24 17x(22)— 9 17 x (26)— 10J4 -11- -13- -13 - -15K- -16- -19- -20 - -23M (22) x 34—18—22—26—32—40—48 (26) x 34—21—26—31—38—47 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Colonial Linen can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Colonial Linen is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1341 Samples — Actual samples of Colonial Linen can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Colonial Linen Typewriter Paper in standard weights is cataloged under Type- writer Papers (Ne Plus Ultra), page 267, and is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Colonial Linen can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. B UT if Colonial Linen in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,300 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Colonial Linen can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make Colonial Linen is 28" x 38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. Writings Covers graphs NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Colonial Linen can be made is 9 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. COLONIAL LINEN ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and %m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6M 3tV*5^ 3^x6 3^8 x6H NO. 4 5 6 3%x4ri 4^x5^ 4Hx5M 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 354 x6% 3^x8% Vi x 9V 2 NO. 11 12 14 4H x 10^ 454x11 5 xllM Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1351 J)ninmmini))l}i»im»i»lfH Aulde Scotia Lynene The Third LINEN Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "aulde scotia lynene" Wllll'lllllllmmimimmin AULDE SCOTIA LYNENE takes its name from its fine old- fashioned appearance. It is a creamy-tinted laid paper with a moderate rag content. Aulde Scotia Lynene is the third grade of linens of the Eagle-A Line as indicated by the Linen Chart of Relative Quality- Standards on page 131. GENERAL USES — Aulde Scotia Lynene is recommended for the following uses when appearance must be combined with durability and moderate price — Stationery General Letterheads Envelopes Office Forms Billheads Advertising Announcements Envelope Stuffers Booklets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) The chain mark is parallel to the grain. CREAM LAID Basis — 17 x 22 Sheet Size 17 x (22)— 13— 16— 20— 24 (22) x 34—26—32—40—48 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Aulde Scotia Lynene can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Aulde Scotia Lynene is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Aulde Scotia Lynene can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [1361 NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Aulde Scotia Lynene can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. BUT if Aulde Scotia Lynene in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,300 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Aulde Scotia Lynene can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 46" to 53"; but the minimum must be 17" and the maxi- mum 26H"- The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 38". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Aulde Scotia Lynene is 263/2" x 38" with the grain parallel to the 38" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Aulde Scotia Lynene can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AULDE SCOTIA LYNENE ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed A M and J^m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. tie, COMMERCIAL BARONIAL OFFICIAL NO. 5 6*4 6% 3tV*5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 6 3%x4H VA x sy 8 ^Axsy 2 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3%x6M 3^x8% 4^x9M NO. 11 12 14 4A x 10^ 4% x 11 5 xllj^ Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1371 Rival Linen \ftmnmmmmimmimmit, The Fourth LINEN Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "rival linen") RIVAL LINEN is a cream-white laid, machine-dried, rag- content paper. Whenever smart appearance must be combined with low price, but neither great strength nor wearing quality is required, this paper is to be recommended. Rival Linen is a fourth grade Linen as indicated by the Linen Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 131. GENERAL USES — With the above qualifications in mind Rival Linen is recom- mended for the following uses — Stationery General Letterheads Envelopes Office Forms Billheads Statements Advertising Announcements Envelope Stuffers Booklets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press (any number of colors) " Offset Press " " Engraving " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) CREAM LAID Basis — 17 x 22 Sheet Size 17 x (22)— 13— 16— 20— 24 (22) x 34—26—32—40—48 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Rival Linen can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Rival Linen is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Sam-pies — Actual samples of Rival Linen can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [138] NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Rival Linen can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 7,150 pounds. BUT if Rival Linen in the required weight and color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 7,150 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Rival Linen can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 75"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 37J^". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make Rival Linen is 37y," x 52", with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 17" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be made more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets in special lengths before the widths have been sheeted. Covers ROLLS (SPECIAL) Rival Linen can also be made in rolls not to exceed 30" in diameter wound on steel or strawboard cores in widths (dimension across the grain) as given for sheets in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds of a size. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Rival Linen can be made is 13 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. RIVAL LINEN ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and y,u to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial no. 5 6% 3V 2 x6 3%x6K baronial 4 5 6 3^x4x1 4^x5^ 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 NO. 3M*6% 11 WsxSVs 12 4y s x9y 2 14 4^ x ioy 8 4^x11 5 xiiy Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1391 Ledger Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS EDGER PAPERS receive their class name from their chief ■■— ' use as a Ledger book-filler. The important qualities desired are: even formation, smooth, uniform finish and good erasive and wearing qualities. A uni- form formation or "look-through" is obtained in the beating of the stock to form a "well-closed" sheet. The sizing is also an important factor. Although made from the same materials as Bond papers, a Ledger paper is more opaque and lower in strength, due to the method of manufacture necessary to obtain the particular Ledger qualities desired. On the other hand, the weights are heavier. The chief use of Ledger papers is where a heavy sheet which will lie flat is desired or where excellent erasive qualities are required. Generally speaking, weight not considered, the Ledger grades parallel the Bond grades in regard to paper qualities. That is, a first grade Ledger, though of heavier weight than the first grade Bond, is not much greater in strength. In selecting a Ledger paper rather than a Bond, it must be remembered that paper is sold by the pound and Ledger paper is more expensive per sheet than a Bond paper of similar strength qualities. Where Ledger qualities are desired in light weights and strength is not a factor, a Flat Writing will be satisfactory. In the following pages, which are devoted to detailed descrip- tions of the Eagle-A Quality-Standard Ledger Papers, each paper is described in two ways: first, in general terms from the standpoint of appearance and serviceability; secondly, specif- ically with reference to the Relative Chart of Quality-Standard Ledgers, page 141. The six grades of the Eagle-A line cover all Ledger require- ments: GRADE NAME COLOR Permanent I Government Record White, Buff, Blue II Brunswick Linen White, Buff, Blue Semi-Perm. III Account Linen White only IV Extension White, Buff, Blue Temporary V Gloria White and Buff VI Telephone White and Buff LEDGER PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade Customs pertaining to Ledgers are explained in detail on pages 306-310. [1401 Ih 03 G cU 03 tun tx 11 p CD era 03 CD CD CD The numerals given below are relative only. They indi- cate the relation between the paper qualities in each grade ho X ■H CO 00 t^t^oooo 05 CO 00 IN lOcocOt- mocooo cot* O ^ COCO^ tp O a aS Ih cfl CD ft ft -*o OOOO)© OJCOOOTti 000 0)0 O)CO00"# NOOO CO 00 0)0 -HCO^CO i-frHTH rH OCNTtHO i-HrHT-lrH OiHCOiO rHrHrHiH OOO-HCO iH-HrH OOOi-HCO iHiHrH COt^OOO «-2 3 Ph fH -Hr-lrH HHHH OOOO OOOO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO co CO co ^ *cH ^ ^ OOOO oooo oooo t^t»t>t» CO CO CO CO t^ ^1 y&y$ rt.g O V i— Ir-li-HrH OOOO OOOO oooo oooo 00 00 00 00 l>t>I>t> -H-Hi-It-H 'cH t|] ti^ tH ^ ^ ^ ^ 1-Hrtr-lrH OOOO rHrHi-HrH oooo Hi- 1 rHiH t>t^t>t^ CO CO CO CO ^ TJ^ ^ ^ £ 3 oooo oooo OOOO CO CO CO CO oooo lf5iC5>OiO CO CO CO CO IN CM CM (M CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO NNNN COCO COCO CM CM CM CM CM CM IN CM NNNN CO COCO CO iHrHrHiH ©o) O)© COCO CO CO bo a CD Sh 2 "3 fa COCOOCO COrHOOO 00 03 00 OCOCOO (>^ifl iCiOcOt^ >ht«000)00 OOCNO) t^cOI>iO c0t*-hO) NrtOOO CO-* -HO) CMrHOOO OOCMCO t~-OSO»H 1H1H coi>ooo> iQCOOOO iOcOC-t> iOCOt»t> 0) lOOOOCO C0t>rtiO OOOO COOtHtH ocooo OiHCOO -HcNiO"* MJ0O1O >HlO»Ot> iOt«C0000 OCOI>00 >OcOt*00 CO^OOO COt* i-H T* 00l>O00 OiH-*-* -HO) COO CO COCOtJ* •^HMO CNOO)t> Ot>05cO ONCOrt OCMCO'* !>C0O)lO OOCSHCM 00 0)0 IH 50 1^ 00 OS "5 CO CO t^ ■*Tt I-H c CO C eu W > .2 o a I-H > CU C O -C Oh CU H [141 Government Record Ledger The First LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "government record ledger") manna mmnnm aa GOVERNMENT RECORD LEDGER is a loft-dried paper made of the highest grade of rags and has the finest and most uniform hard-sized surface that can be obtained. Hard erasing does not mar the surface. Government Record Led- ger will stand a severe amount of handling and folding and has very great tensile strength. It is a permanent paper that will last longer than the span of a human life and will not change color. It comes in white, buff and blue. Government Record Ledger is the first Ledger Grade as indi- cated in Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Government Record Ledger is often used instead of a bond when a very heavy weight paper is wanted for letterheads. It is suited for any of the following uses which require exceptionally high quality — Office Forms Stationery Accounting Systems Diplomas Envelopes Checks — Notes Drafts — Mortgages Executive Letters Contracts Record Book Pages General Letters Deeds IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Litho Press (one color) " " Offset Press (one color) " " Die Stamping " " Steel or Copper Plate Engraving " " Pen Writing " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE (16) x 21 —25 — 28^ (19) x 24 —29^—34 — 39 — 44 16 x(42)— 57 21 x(32)— 50 —57 (17) x 22—24 —28 22 x (34)— 48 —56 (17) x 2S —30y 2 —3Sy 2 —40}4 23 x (36)— 71 (18) x 23 —353^ 24 x (38)— 59 —68—78—88 28 x(34)— 61 —71—81 (16) x 21—28J^ (17) x 22—24 —28* (17) x 28— 30J^*— 353^ (18) x 23—353^ (19) x 24—34 —44* *Not stocked in blue BLUE AND BUFF 21 x (32)— 57 22 x (34)— 48— 56* 23 x (36)— 71 24 x (38)— 68 —88* 28 x (34)— 61*— 71 *Not stocked in blue. Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. F1421 Prices — Prices of Government Record Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Government Record Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Government Record Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Government Record Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. BUT if Government Record Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet .sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,300 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Government Record Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Govern- ment Record Ledger is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Government Record Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Covers GOVERNMENT RECORD LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substances 20 and 24. Packed J^m and \i u t° box- Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial baronial official 5 6% 3tV*5K 3^x6 3^x6^ 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4fi 4^x5^ 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3% x 6% 3^x8^ 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4H x 10H 4%xll 5 xuy 2 Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [143 1 Brunswick Linen Ledger The Second LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (WATERMARKED "BRUNSWICK LINEN LEDGER") illlllllllliuiiiiminimmmnt BRUNSWICK LINEN LEDGER is a paper with remarkable strength and resistance to severe usage. It has a fine smooth surface for pen writing, machine ruling and printing, and takes erasing exceedingly well. It will not dog-ear from much handling and lasts practically the span of a human life without loss of color or deterioration. Brunswick Linen Ledger is a high rag-content, loft-dried ledger made in white, buff and blue. It is the second Ledger Grade as indicated by the Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Brunswick Linen Ledger is recommended for the following uses when the above-named qualities are desired, and when a paper heavier than the standard bond weights must be used for letterheads — Office Forms Accounting Systems Diplomas Drafts — Mortgages Checks — Notes Contracts Deeds IMPRESS Record Book Pages Stationery Envelopes Executive Letters General Letters Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Litho Press (one color) " " Offset Press (one color) " " Die Stamping " " Steel or Copper Plate Engraving " Pen Writing " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE Basis — 17 x 22 Sheet Size (16) x 21 —25 —2Sy 2 21 x(32)— 50— 57 16 x(42)— 57 22 x(34)— 48— 56 (17) x 22 —24 —28 23 x(36)— 71 (17) x 28—30^—35^-40^ 24 x(38)— 59— 68- -78 (18) x 23 — 3Sy 2 28 x(34)— 61— 71- -81 '19) x 24— 29V 2 — 34 - -39 —44 BUFF AND BLUE (16) x 21—283^ 21 x (32)— 57 (17) x 22—24 —28* 22 x (34)— 48 —56* (17) x 28— 30^*— 35K 23 x (36)— 71 (18) x 23— 35^ 24 x (38)— 68 (19) x 24—34 28 x (34)— 61*— 71 *Not stocked in blue. *Not stocked in blue. Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. [144] Prices — Prices of Brunswick Linen Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Brunswick Linen Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of price list. Samples — Actual samples of Brunswick Linen Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from Eagle-A Service Houses. Writings NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Brunswick Linen Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from a standard specification, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,850 pounds. BUT if Brunswick Linen Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,850 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Brunswick Linen Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Brunswick Linen Ledger is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Brunswick Linen Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Covers BRUNSWICK LINEN LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substance 24. Packed %m. and %m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company commercial no. 5 &A 6% 3tVx53^ 3^x6 3^x6^ BARONIAL 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4H 4^x5^ 4^x5J^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4H x 10^ 4%xll 5 xll^ Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [145] Lint Account Linen Ledger The Third LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "account linen ledger") ACCOUNT LINEN LEDGER has an excellent surface for pen writing and ruling, high resistance to tearing, and will stand considerable erasure. This ledger is in the semi-permanent group and will last many years with ordinary handling. It is a rag-content, loft-dried ledger made in white only. Account Linen Ledger is the third Ledger Grade as determined by the Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Account Linen Ledger is recommended for the following uses, bearing in mind the qualifications enumerated above — Office Forms Stationery Accounting Systems Envelopes Checks — Notes Executive Letters Contracts General Letters Drafts — Mortgages Record Book Pages IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Litho Press (one color) " " Offset Press (one color) " " Die Stamping " " Steel or Copper Plate Engraving " Pen Writing " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) white only Basis — 17 x 22 Sheet Size (16) x (21)— 25 —283^ 21 x (32)— 50— 57 16 x(42)— 57 % 22 x (34)— 48— 56 (17) x 22—24 —28 23 x (36)— 71 (17) x 28—30^—353^^0^ 24 x (38)— 59— 68— 78— 88 (18) x 23 —35^ 28 x (34)— 61— 71— 81 (19) x 24—293^—34 —39 —44 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Account Linen Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Account Linen Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1461 Samples — Actual samples of Account Linen Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Account Linen Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,950 pounds. BUT if Account Linen Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,950 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Account Linen Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Account Linen Ledger is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Account Linen Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ACCOUNT LINEN LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substances 24 and 28. Packed J^m and J^m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial baronial official no. 6% 3^*sy 2 33^x6 3^x6M no. 4 5 sy 2 6 3%x4H 4^x5M 4Hx5H 5 x6 no. 7 9 10 43^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4^ x 10H 4^x11 5 xllH Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. F1471 Extension Ledger The Fourth LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "extension ledger") UlliimmmmnmiiiiiwumiiH EXTENSION LEDGER, because it has a good surface for pen writing and ruling, strength and stiffness, is a good choice for accounting systems and office forms that are to be preserved for a few years only. It has a good surface for erasure. This is a loft-dried, rag-content ledger paper that is made in white, blue and buff. Extension Ledger is the fourth Ledger Grade as determined by the Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Extension Ledger is recommended for the following pur- poses when a good ledger is required that will not have to last over fifteen years — fjice Forms Record Book Pages D rafts — Mortga ges Checks — Notes Contracts Accounting Systems Stationery General Letters Envelopes IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Litho Press (one color) " " Offset Press (one color) " Pen Writing " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) white, buff, blue Basis — 17 : (16) x 21 —28^ (17) x 22—24 —28 (17) x 28 — 30M— 35^— 40^ (18) x 23 —35^—40 (19) x 24—29)^—34 —39 —44 (20) x 28—36 —54 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. 22 Sheet Size 21 x (32)— 57 22 x (34)— 48— 56 23 x (36)— 71— 80 24 x (38) — 59 — 68 — 78- 28 x (34)— 61— 71— 81 Prices — Prices of Extension Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Extension Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [148] Samples — Actual samples of Extension Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Extension Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,950 pounds. BUT if Extension Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no conditions can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,950 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Extension Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Extension Ledger is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Extension Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. EXTENSION LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substance 24. Packed J^m and J^m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company commercial baronial no. 5 6^ 3tV*5^ 3^x6 3^x6^ NO. 4 5 6 3^x4H 4^x5H 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3% x 6% NO. 11 12 14 4K x \m 4^x11 5 xll^ Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [149] Aiiiimimmiimimmimniti Gloria Ledger The Fifth LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) GLORIA LEDGER is a paper of temporary life that has an exceptional value among lower priced ledgers. It has a good surface for pen writing and ruling, will withstand moderate erasure and handling and folding, and is made in sizes for book- keeping machines in addition to regular ledger sizes. Gloria Ledger is a machine-dried, rag-content paper that is manu- factured only in white and buff. Gloria Ledger is the fifth Ledger Grade as indicated in the Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Gloria Ledger is adapted for the following uses when long life is not necessary, or where great resistance to handling and folding is not required — Office Forms Accounting Systems Checks Drafts Notes IMPRESS — Suitable /or Letterpress (type, line cuts, medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Litho Press (one color) " " Offset Press (one color) " " Bookkeeping Machines " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) 16 x(21)— 28^ 17 x(22)— 24 —28 17 x (28)— 30^—35^—403^ 18 x (23)— 353^ (19) x 24—29^—34 —39 (20) x (26)— 333^ 17 x (22)— 24 —28 17 x (28) — 303^—353^ 22 x 34 —48 —56 WHITE Basis — 17 x 22 Sheet Size (21) x 32 —57 (28) x 34—61 (23) x 36—71 24 x(38)— 59— 68 (22) x 34-48—56 71—81 78 (223^) x (22^)— 38— Am (28) x 34 —61—71 (24M) x {2AY 2 )-AS— 58 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Gloria Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Gloria Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1501 Samples — Actual samples of Gloria Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Gloria Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 7,150 pounds. BUT if Gloria Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 7,150 pounds. Covers NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Gloria Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 76"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 38". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Gloria Ledger is 38" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 24" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be made more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Gloria Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. GLORIA LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substance 24. Packed J^m and ]4m to box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial BARONIAL NO. 5 6M 3^x5^ 3^x6 3^x6K NO. 4 5 sy 2 6 3%x4H 43^x5^ 43^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3%x8% 4^x9^ NO. 11 12 14 4^ x ioy 8 4%xll 5 xiiy 2 Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. [1511 Aiiii)»ii>iini)i)»iHii)/mnfc Telephone Ledger The Sixth LEDGER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (rubber-stamped "telephone ledger") r.rrrr. • ■ -. .. -.— " TELEPHONE LEDGER is a temporary paper for records that are kept only a short time and receive slight handling. It has a good writing surface and gives exceptional value at a low price. Made in white and buff. Telephone Ledger is the sixth Ledger Grade as indicated in the Ledger Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 141. GENERAL USES — Telephone Ledger is suggested for the following uses, with the above qualifications in mind — Office Forms Temporary Accounting Forms . Drafts Checks Notes IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, medium screen Ben Day Plates) " " Offset Press (one color) " Pen Writing " " Bookkeeping Machines The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the rubber stamp reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Ba sis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) Basis- (17) x 22—24 (17) x 28—30^ (19) x (24)-29^ (19) x 28—34 (17) x (22)— 24 (17) x (28)-30^ (19) x (24)-29^ WHITE -17 x 22 Sheet Size 22 x(34)— 48 24 28 28 38—59 x (34)— 61 x (38)— 68 22 x (34)^8 (24) x (38)— 59 28 x(34)— 61 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Telephone Ledger can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Telephone Ledger is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [152] Samples — Actual samples of Telephone Ledger can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Telephone Ledger in which sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 12,100 pounds. BUT if Telephone Ledger in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 12,100 pounds. Covers NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Telephone Ledger can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 72" to 88"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 44". The sheets can be cut in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Telephone Ledger is 44" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 22", 24", 28" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be made more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Telephone Ledger can be made is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. TELEPHONE LEDGER ENVELOPES Made in substance 24. Packed ]/om and J^m i0 box. Carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Manufactured by United States Envelope Company. commercial baronial OFFICIAL no. 5 6H 3tVx5^ 3^x6 3^x6J^ no. 4 5 sy 2 6 3^x4H 4J^x5H 4^x5^ 5 x6 NO. 7 9 10 3^x634 3%x8% 4^x9H NO. 11 12 14 4K x 10% 4^x11 5 xllH Special Envelopes can also be obtained through the Service Houses. 1153 1 Flat Writing Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS PHE term "Writings" is often applied to all hard-sized A papers suitable for pen writing, and though sometimes used to include Bonds, Ledgers, Weddings and Papeteries, Fines and Flats, and Envelopes, it is used interchangeably with Flats and Fines. Flat or Fine writings are made of soft rags beaten to obtain uniform formation and a high degree of opacity in the finished product. They have a distinct softness that is not found in Bond or Ledger papers. While the grades range from practically all rag to all wood pulp, which are comparable with the Bond paper life factors, strength is less important and relatively lower. Flat writings are very largely used for inter-departmental letters and for office forms. They are supplied in a wide range of colors to meet the requirements. A writing should be selected only where appearance and pen writing (impress) are important factors, or as a substitute for a very light-weight Ledger where strength is not a governing condition. For these reasons the selection will usually be confined to the 20 and 24 pound substance weights. In the following pages, which are devoted to detailed descrip- tions of the Eagle-A Quality-Standard Writing Papers, each paper will be described in two ways: first, in general terms from the standpoint of appearance and serviceability; secondly, with reference specifically to the Relative Chart of Quality- Standards. The five writing grades of the Eagle-A line cover all Flat Writing requirements: GRADE WATERMARK WEIGHTS COLOR Permanent I Old Chester Mills 20-24 White Semi-Perm. II Parsons Tinted 20-24 Colors III Wauregan Colored Flats 24 Colors Temporary IV Mt. Nonotuck Mills 16-20-24-28 White V Mt. Tom Mills 16-20 White WRITING PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to Writings are explained in detail on pages 306-310. 154 >> X 00 O NN oo rv) HH N£) 00 H ^On t^. £ 0) 1— 1 CO \OvO CO c«-> to to to CO 0\Hijl 5^3 NO O to On to On "HH^NO NHTji C >ON to io rt< rjn CO CO CO ^f CM CO CO dards apers JS Hhno OO NOO N NO to to O to O •3 I— i ui TH HH 04 OO to HH CO CM N3NON noo u-i no to N£) CO -H^ to NO HH to NO H §^ o %M 1,3 r CO CO OO to to 00 OO 00 OO CM CM CM 4-J • _< t-c a) »1 NO no oo ON ON On On NO NO o\'o\ CO CO CO CO CO CO 00 00 NO NO NO •Sh 1_ Oh Sri, T— 4 i— 1 Qual -AW < w a* £ u CD n HO\ i-HON I-HON vONOOO NON CO cm O cm O cvi o Hh O NO co TfONO H ■* to TfH U-, ^ to CM CO CO HH CM CO CO 'So a ,3 o .3 '-3 a dj cd c3 CD £ 3 .3 0) O S-C CO cm no cm no i^-no MO0NH O0CON a Eh On On HHtO On On •HH to 1^ NO HHIO CM i—i O CO CO HH to to CM i-H O CO ^f to 03 H o Qh ON ON CO O NO N C\ to NON ON +3 ON ON ON i— iN co OO i— i N- co 3 T^HH ■*■*' <^1 CO CM CM CO CO CM CM CO bJD CQ C • ^H 3 4-J 5^ -4-J -1- 5 i2N • •»— i ohh Ohh O-* NO O HH 0O NOOHH J-H CM CM CM CN CM CN i— l CM CM CM ^H CM CM St GO l-H S-i t-H l-H l-H HH > l-H > - g3 5 4J CO C cu O +j ME o J2 o*=h B o rz« w C 3 aj .-^ ^j T3krH 1_ .-H 0h^ rt o S3 ^ Writings Offsets Covers graphs Typewrite Papers Specii 155 Vinmiminimim.minimM Old Chester Mills The First WRITING Grade of the EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (WATERMARKED "OLD CHESTER MILLS") OLD CHESTER MILLS is an extremely high-grade Writing made in wove and laid with two finishes — Antique and Satin. It has the clearest white color of any Eagle-A Line and takes pen writing very easily. It is made in both laid and wove materials consisting, in large part, of new white rags. Old Chester Mills is a permanent paper and will last more than the span of a human life, but it has not the resistance to with- stand the severe handling and folding of a bond of the same grade. Old Chester Mills is made in white only. Old Chester Mills is the first Writing Grade as indicated by the Writing Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 155. GENERAL USES — Old Chester Mills is recommended for the following pur- poses when pen writing is to be applied to the printed piece and when a permanent paper of distinctive appearance is desired — Stationery Letterheads Executive Letters Envelopes Office Forms Checks Reports Statements Contracts Advertising Booklets Announcements IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press " Offset Press " " Steel or Copper Plate The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLOR— Antique and Satin. Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY Wove and Laid Antique and Satin Finishes 17 x (22)— 20— 24 (22) x 34-^0—48 Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Old Chester Mills can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Old Chester Mills is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Old Chester Mills can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [156] NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of 3,300 pounds in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish and color differ from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. BUT if Old Chester Mills (white, only) is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in Rnnks minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in nw 4. minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. UllSBtS Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. fnvprc Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,300 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Old Chester Mills can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 44" to 63"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". Sheets can be cut from these roll widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Old Chester Mills is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimen- sion. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Old Chester Mills can be made is 16 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. OLD CHESTER MILLS ENVELOPES Old Chester Mills Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manufacturers. When ordering envelopes specify Old Chester Mills, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. Old Chester Mills in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color in cabinets cataloged on page 259, and packed also in boxes, page 248. [1571 Parsons Tinted Writings The Second WRITING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "parsons tinted writings") uniiiiiwiiiiwiiwiiiiiiiiiiiiiin ARSONS TINTED WRITINGS are made in a wide range of colors with an excellent surface for pen writing. They are laid calendered papers, contain a good proportion of new soft rags, and are semi-permanent papers that will serve for uses requiring a paper to outlast any legal period. Parsons Tinted Writings are the second Writing Grade as in- dicated by the Writing Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 155. GENERAL USES — Parsons Tinted Writings are recommended for the following uses where a pen-writing surface and a wide range of colors and semi-permanent life are the requirements — Stationery Office Forms Advertising Letterheads Price Lists Booklets Acknowledgment of Order Brochures Billheads Announcements Invoices Credit Memos IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Litho Press " Offset Press " " Die Stamping Press " " Copper Plate Press " Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) LAID ONLY Azurine Blue Dark Blue Dark Green Cherry Fawn Amber Pink Melon Canary (17) x 22— 20 —24 22 x (34)— 40— 48 (17) x 28— 30^ 28 x (34) —61 (19) x 24— 243^ 24x(38)-49 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Parsons Tinted Writings can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Parsons Tinted Writings are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1581 Samples — Actual samples of Parsons Tinted Writings can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Parsons Tinted Writings in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish and color differ from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 4,950 pounds. BUT if Parsons Tinted Writings in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 4,950 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Parsons Tinted Writings can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 56" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 28". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 42". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Parsons Tinted Writings is 28" x 42" with the grain parallel to the 42" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Parsons Tinted Writings can be made is 16 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. PARSONS TINTED WRITINGS ENVELOPES Parsons Tinted Writings Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manufacturers. When ordering envelopes specify Parsons Tinted Writings, weight, color finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [1591 Line Wauregan Colored Flats The Third WRITING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) WAUREGAN COLORED FLATS are made with a smooth surface suitable for pen writing in both laid and wove. The laid is made in ten colors, the wove in five colors. Wauregan Colored Flats have an exceptional appearance, although the price is very moderate. They are rag-content, semi-permanent papers. Wauregan Colored Flats are the third grade of Eagle-A Writings as indicated by the Writing Chart of Quality-Standards on page 155. GENERAL USES — Wauregan Colored Flats are suggested for the following uses when the requirements call for a pen-writing surface, a wide range of colors, a semi-permanent life and moderate price — Stationery Office Forms Advertising Envelopes Billheads Announcements Letterheads Invoices Memo Slips Receipts Reports Time Slips Checks Booklets Brochures Envelope Stuffers House Organs IMPRESS— Suitable fot Letterpress (type and line cuts) a a Offset Press « tt Pen Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WOVE Shell Rose Marguerite Canary (22) x 34—48 (28) x 34—61 24 x(38)— 59 (28) x (38)— 68 Blue Opaline 17 x(22)— 24 17 x(28)— 30^ (19) x 24—293/£ (19) x (28)— 34 Cherry Fawn Blue Opaline Shell Rose Marguerite Canary Green Lilac Melon 17 x(22)— 24 (22) x 34—48 17 x(28)— 30^ (28) x 34—61 (19) x 24— 29Y 2 24 x (38)— 59 Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Wauregan Colored Flats can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. [160] Where Stocked — Wauregan Colored Flats are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Wauregan Colored Flats can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Wauregan Colored Flats in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Wauregan Colored Flats in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Wauregan Colored Flats can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 36". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Wauregan Colored Flats is 36" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 24" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Wauregan Colored Flats can be made is 16 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. WAUREGAN COLORED FLATS ENVELOPES Wauregan Colored Flats Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manufacturers. When ordering envelopes specify Wauregan Colored Flats, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [1611 Covers Mt. Nonotuck Mills The Fourth WRITING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "mt. nonotuck mills") jBBHHZHBaBBHBBaflBBBa MT. NONOTUCK MILLS has the smooth surface charac- teristic of all writings that is so well adapted to pen writing. It is made in white only. Mt. Nonotuck Mills should be used only as a temporary paper although it contains a small proportion of rag. Mt. Nonotuck Mills is the fourth Writing Grade of the Eagle-A Line as indicated by the Writing Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 155. GENERAL USES — Mt. Nonotuck Mills is recommended for the following uses when a pen-writing surface is desired and only a temporary life factor is necessary — Stationery Blank Books Fillers for Loose Leaf Books School Papers Office Forms Memo Books Memo Slips Statements IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " Offset Press " Pen Ruling The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—SOO sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 17 x(22)— 16 —20 —24 —28 17 x (28)— 20^— 25^—30^— 35^ (19) x 24 —19H—24K— 29^—34 (22) x 34—32—40-^8—56 (28) x 34—41—51—61—71 24 x (38)— 39— 49— 59— 68 Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Mt. Nonotuck Mills can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Mt. Nonotuck Mills is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1621 Samples — Actual samples of Mt. Nonotuck Mills can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Mt. Nonotuck Mills in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs _____ from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,800 pounds. Books BUT if Mt. Nonotuck Mills (white, only) is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait -^ . until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. COVBfS Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities BflSl of 1,650 pounds. Under no conditions can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than WBQI 8,800 pounds. 311(1 NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE „ gra Mt. Nonotuck Mills can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 75"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- Afll mum 37J_". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel qjo to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Mt. Nonotuck Mills is 373^" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. „. Sheets 24" and 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often Ca be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut and it is sometimes possible - to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. 'W Papi NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Mt. Nonotuck Mills can be made is 16 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements r, more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. u MT. NONOTUCK MILLS ENVELOPES Mt. Nonotuck Mills Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manufacturers. This paper is not suitable for envelopes which have to withstand ordinary usage in the mails. Acceptance Bond Envelopes or those of any other Eagle-A Bond should be used. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [163] Ml Tom Mills The Fifth WRITING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) Ummmssmmmnmrnsm MT. TOM MILLS is a writing of a temporary nature pos- sessed of the smooth surface characteristic of this class of papers. It is made of chemical wood pulp and therefore long endurance cannot be expected from it. Mt. Tom Mills is the fifth Writing Grade as indicated by the Writing Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 155. GENERAL USES — Mt. Tom Mills is suggested for the following uses when a pen-writing surface is required and when the piece will have to last only a tem- porary period of time and meet with little or no handling or folding. Stationery Office Forms School Papers, Ruled and Plain Memo Books Fillers for Loose Leaf Books Memo Slips Tablets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " Offset Press " Ruling " " Pen or pencil The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. four sides, stocked as follows: Trimmed WHITE ONLY Stocked only in UV 2 " and 38^" rolls, Sub. Nos. 16, 20, 24. Can be furnished in sheets of any size that will cut from these rolls without waste. Trimmed four sides, packed flat in cases, markers between reams, 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Mt. Tom Mills can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Mt. Tom Mills is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Mt. Tom Mills can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [164] NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Mt. Tom Mills in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Mt. Tom Mills (white, only) is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. • Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Mt. Tom Mills can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 78"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 39". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Mt. Tom Mills is 39" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Mt. Tom Mills can be made is 16 pounds, the maximum 28 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. MT. TOM MILLS ENVELOPES Mt. Tom Mills Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. This paper is not suitable for envelopes that have to withstand ordinary usage in the mails. Acceptance Bond Envelopes, or those of any other Eagle-A bond should be used. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [165] Book Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS THE development of book papers has kept pace with improve- ments in the printer's art. As new methods have come into use and new processes have been invented there has been a call for special papers adapted to these developments. This ten- dency has naturally multiplied the number of book papers re- quired to bring out to the best advantage the effect sought from the method of printing employed. The most important characteristic of a book paper is suit- ability for the sort of impress for which it is designed. The requirements of different processes are so dissimilar that it is impossible to get any one book paper suited for all kinds of work. Nor is it fair to grade papers according to the nature of the print- ing requirements for which they are suited. To a larger extent their adaptability for various forms of impress is determined by the finish applied to them after they are made. A first grade book paper, in addition to possessing proper qualities of impress and freedom from dust and fuzz, must possess considerable strength so that it can be used for folders or an- nouncements where it does not have the protection of a cover. It should be possible to make envelopes from a first grade book. The materials used in a book paper of this class are high grade and will give to the paper a quality distinction not to be obtained where inferior materials are used. A first grade book paper must withstand exposure to light and air indefinitely so that books printed on it shall last without deterioration for many years. The Eagle-A Line of Quality-Standard Book Papers has been established according to this line of reasoning. The qualities required in papers of this class have been studied in the light of the factors of appearance, treatment and life, and analyzed to determine the degree in which they possess these characteristics, and graded according to the results. Two specially distinguished grades of these papers, Deckle d'Aigle and American Vellum, are classified as De Luxe grades. Six other grades are included in the book series, the sixth grade of which comprises three papers of practically equal quality but distinguished from one another by their finishes. These are American Eggshell, American Super Calendered Book, and American English Finish Book. On pages 168 and 169 will be found a chart showing the rela- tive qualities among the eight Book grades. [166] In the following pages devoted to detailed descriptions of the individual papers of the line, each paper is described in two ways: first, in general terms of its appearance character and with par- ticular reference to the types of impress to which it is best suited; secondly, according to its relative grade position in the chart of Quality-Standards in Book papers. The following grades of the Eagle-A line cover substantially all requirements: GRADE NAME COLOR Permanent I De Luxe Deckle d'Aigle Laid Natural White Temporary II De Luxe American Vellum White and two colors Semi-Perm. I Berkshire Text White and two colors II Albion Text White and one color III American Bulking Book White Temporary IV Railroad Folder White and eight colors V Arrive Halftone ( Amer. Super Calendered White and one color White VI -J American English Finish ( American Eggshell White White and one color Covers BOOK PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to book papers are explained in de- tail on pages 311-314. Weddini graph: iou Typewri Papers Tal Spi Pai Eagle [167] tHIO 00 CM CM CM 05 00 IN 05OOO 1-HlO OtHCM COIN ■*CO 00 05 00 05 cd'd WO 03COCM th'cS 00 CO IN 10 00 rH 3 a CNCO cot>oo 100 mm ■*-*-*iO O? 1-1 COCO '■sti OO 000 00 00 OO 000 00 00 do" UMOW do 00 CO WW IN CM CO COCO T-frH tHi-I *-d co 5° S « t»N !>!>!> coco M> NNNN ©O 000000 coco COCO COcOOCO lity-Sta: Book P COCO co co co ■*T)H coco coco coco .« l>t» i>t^t> 00 00 COCO CO CO '3 1H1-I 1-H1H1H 0000 00 00 10 10 10 10 2 ^ s nd CM CM CM T-irH 1-Hi-i 1H1H1H1H A*< OJi o ,M CO CM 00l>CO ON coo 00 00 IN t>- .a s 60 cS 13 a, Ph < *3 pq 05 C5 COTfl CM CO 1 * co-* 10 I>05 co** OSCM cod tH 05 00 CO -*i-*dd 2^ >. COM CO CO CO coco coco CM CO CO CO ..9 CM CO 05 CM CO 05 cq ©5 CM l>05OCM „K> to ft O OO IQ CO CO »od Ki<6 10 iO CO CO o.-y cu'rt 0) 5 5. a 1H1H iHi-HrH coco 00 rHi-Hi-liH •43 cr & 1H1H iHtHiH COCO COCO rHiHi-HlH - Si j2 1-1 iH 1-ItHi-H dd (6<6 tHi-4iHiH "3 *h a. CO 03 Q< *3 § aj a> OO CO coco coco 00 iO iO 10 iO r^ t+H OO CO COCO O5 05 ■*Tjf CO CO COO £^ J 1>I> CO CO CO CM CM t>l> 0000 .2 « coco 1H1-I rHTHiHl-t cu a> t^TjH lOt>05 05 CM (Nt> 05t^iOCO H CO 00 co cod r-l cod ■*d co Tjidd Vh co COLO CMOiH 00 cq CO 00 COt^NO 0) Oh C3 a 05 ■* OCON. 05O 00» O-*IN05 lO bJ Tjiiod CM-* CM CO COtHiOiO M Oh £ 00 CO COU5-* i-lOO 1HN -^oo^o "55 05 iH r-110 05 coo 00 COt^Nt^. 3 ■*CO Tiiio'd CMM NCX) IN IN CO CO « o ubstance Weight Basis 25x38 o 00 000 00 00 0000 000 iH CO 00O IH CO 00 CO 00 IO CD t~ 00 PQ CO 1— 1 \— I H-l l-H l-H HH l-H 1— 1 ~ C "7! CD c~ 0) co" u ■ Deckle d'Aigle (De Luxi America Vellum (De Lux( CO j_i l-i CD c ^ •a x America: Bulking <^ 168] 00 05 CO ^ ooj 38.33 40.27 41.97 43.51 30.67 33.91 36.99 40.29 32.69 35.04 37.37 39.73 41.98 29.19 31.21 33.33 35.36 37.48 oo oo c *°3 oo oo oooo oooo * * * * CO CO CO CO COCO CO CO co co co co ooooo ooooo ooooo ooooo « ««,*<* co coco co co 05 05 1010 oooo oooo oooo i— 1 rtH i— 1 CO CO CO CO oooo SI SI SI SI ooooo ooooo ooooo 1-i tH r-< tH i— 1 wmwrtio 050 05OO 51 SI SI SI SI t-o 05 CO t»»C(N05 00 (MOO i-i (MINN iHlfl^HCO t^-^sio co^ico Tff~OOiO 00*000 00 CO 00 COt' --HiHSisieo ih CM SI CO CO oco OlH CO (NC0OO t^OON ujiOOO SIC0OO NOIOM OiOOO ooooco TflOOOO'H osicooo OMSON OifJiOOO l£nOiOOO oo oo do oooo OcCCDCD OOOO T-I1-I1-I.H 1-Hr- trHiH 1-Hi-Hi-Hi-I i— 1 iH i— 1 i-H ?H i-H iH i-H i-H i-H ooooo O CO CD oo iHiHrHrHi-H ooooo coco coco CO CO COCO COCO CO CO CO CO co co co co CO CO CO CO CO cO coco CO COCO CO CO CO COCO CO CO CO CO coco CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO COCO CO CO CO COCO CO CO CO coco oo COCO CO CO oooo oooo ooooo SI SI SI SI SI ooooo 000 ■*05 O CO t^ i- I rtcooio si i si i co co SI-HTi<00 i-H05t^"5 rtl •*' iO o' OOOSICOO sioo-*oio OCOOOO-H rH SO i-l CO St SI SI CO-** SI SI CO CO 1 * 00 00 OS1 NC0 00 00 CO SI OSIOCO S1C0C0'*" NcOtOifl •*C0S1^H ■*iddt> oocot^sio ffit~-tf SIO ■* COCO CO 00 OCO 00-* 00 sico^ioio r^SISI CO CO *H00 C0t> si si lOOt^OO ooi-i-*i> i-00 ooooo -*lOCOt~00 OOOOO ■tfiOONOO > t-H O CD "c3 o > c c i— i > C 1 s. £ 3 1— 1 > c *-> ■— i C/3 oj OJ0--3 6 c.S 169] Deckle cP Aigle FOUR DECKLE EDGE (MOULD-MADE) The First DeLuxe BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "deckle d'aigle" and shield) ■■ ■■ "■■"'■' aa DECKLE d'AIGLE provides for modern use a paper of the richly beautiful appearance and sterling, old-time quality characteristic of the fine papers hand-fashioned by master crafts- men in the fifteenth century. Like them, it has a natural deckle on all four sides. Made from the highest quality of new, white rags, loft-dried, it possesses an elegance of finish and texture which make it a fitting background for the highest achieve- ment in craftsmanship. Its quality of endurance safeguards the value of priceless works. Deckle d'Aigle is the first DeLuxe Book grade, as indicated by the chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 168. GENERAL USES — Deckle d'Aigle expresses the highest achievement in fine paper-making, yet its cost is comparatively moderate. It can be recommended in any of the following cases where distinction and richness are desired — Advertising Annou ncements Booklets Calendars Catalogs Stationery High-grade Letterheads and Envelopes Books and Periodicals Editions de luxe IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts; coarse stipple and coarse screen Ben Day) " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. Fine screen half-tones can be applied after hot pressing. Through the process employed in producing Deckle d'Aigle, the surfaces on both sides of the sheet are alike. Unlike machine-made papers the "felt" and "wire" sides need not be considered. As a matter of form only, sheets should be printed with the watermark reading correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, stocked as follows: Deckle d'Aigle being mould-made, there is almost an entire absence of "grain" so that it folds equally well in either direction. LAID, NATURAL WHITE ONLY Light Weight \2V 2 x 19—20 19 x 25—40 Heavy Weight 12^x19—25 19x25—50 Packed: Sealed in half reams. [170] Prices — Prices of Deckle d'Aigle Book Paper can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Deckle d'Aigle is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, the list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Deckle d'Aigle book will be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from Eagle-A Service Houses. Deckle d'Aigle Cover Paper in white, gray and green, and in sizes to fit the Deckle d'Aigle book sizes is described on pages 202-203; it is carried in stock by- all Eagle-A Service Houses. Deckle d'Aigle in small sheets and cards with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 246, and in boxed station- ery, page 254. These are carried in stock by all Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DECKLE d'AIGLE Book can be made in any size from 11" x 17"to20"x30". Order for colors, and special whites, will be accepted in lots of not less than 1,650 pounds of an item, where the size specified is either of the two standard sizes listed. Orders for sizes in either white or colors, other than the two standard sizes listed, will be accepted in lots of not less than 2,000 pounds of an item. Where other than standard sizes are speci- fied, the manufacture of such special sizes necessitates the making of a complete new mould. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. DECKLE D'AIGLE ENVELOPES Deckle d'Aigle Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturer. When ordering envelopes specify Deckle d'Aigle, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [171] gjZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Z ZZZZB American Vellum (DECKLED EDGE) The Second DeLuxe BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (un watermarked) AMERICAN VELLUM is so named because its appearance recalls the rich, mottled look of old vellum paper. It is made with both antique and plate finishes, in white, gray and India, and with deckle edges running the long way of the sheet. The plate finish will take 120-line screen half-tones with excep- tional results. American Vellum is the second DeLuxe Book Grade as indi- cated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 168. GENERAL USES — American Vellum is recommended for the uses listed below when it is desired to render unmistakable the look and feel of quality — Advertising Announcements Broadsides Booklets House Organs Catalog Covers Catalog Pages Circulars Envelope Enclosures Mailing Folders Illustrated Letters Calendars Envelopes Books and Labels and Periodicals Wrappers Books Package Labels De Luxe Editions Catalog Con- Magazines tainers Brochures IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 and 133 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light dies) " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only. The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Glazed and Unglazed. Basis 25 x 38— 500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) white, india, gray (Deckle Edge) Plate and Antique Finishes Basis — 25 x 38 Sheet Size Plate Finish 25 x (38)— 60— 80— 100 Antique Finish 25 x (38)— 60— 80— 100 60 pounds sealed in reams, 80 and 100 pounds put up in half reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. [172] Prices — Prices of American Vellum can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — American Vellum is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American Vellum can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. American Vellum in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 248, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of American Vellum, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quan- tities of not less than 12,000 pounds. B U T if American Vellum in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 12,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Vellum can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 75" to 84"; but the minimum must be 25" and the maxi- mum 42". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 643^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Vellum is 42" x 64J^" with the grain parallel to the 64}^" dimension. However, the unglazed finish cannot be furnished in larger sizes than 26" x 40". Sheets 25" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American Vellum can be made in is 50 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN VELLUM ENVELOPES American Vellum Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify American Vellum, weight, color, finish, quan- tity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [173] Berkshire Text (DECKLED EDGE) The First BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (WATERMARKED "BERKSHIRE TEXT") BERKSHIRE TEXT is a book paper of excellent grade dis- tinguished by the soft richness of its antique finish. It has a high rag content and will not deteriorate with age — is made in both wove and laid; in three very desirable colors, white, India and French gray, and has a deckle edge the long way of the sheet. Berkshire Text is the first Book Grade as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 168. GENERAL USES — Berkshire Text is recommended for the following purposes, and particularly in booklets and other advertising pieces to the type matter or line cuts of which it is desired to give an air of scholarly taste and dignity. Advertising House Organs Announcements Booklets Brochures Circulars Mailing Folders Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Calendars Menus Books and Periodicals Magazines Children's Books Editions de Luxe Labels Package Labels IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 and 133 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light Dies) " " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only. The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Antique Finish. Basis 25 x 38- to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WOVE AND LAID 25 x (38)— 60— 80 -500 sheets COLORS WHITE, INDIA AND FRENCH GRAY 60 pounds sealed in reams, 80 pounds in half reams Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Berkshire Text can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Berkshire Text is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. f 1741 Samples — Actual samples of Berkshire Text can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Berkshire Text can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Berkshire Text in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Berkshire Text can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 75" to 84"; but the minimum must be 25" and the maximum 42". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 26" to 64J^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Berkshire Text is 42" x 64J^" with the grain parallel to the 64^2" dimension. Sheets 25" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Berkshire Text can be made in is 50 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. BERKSHIRE TEXT ENVELOPES Berkshire Text Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify Berkshire Text, weight, color, finish, quan- tity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [175] Ummsaannnmanssm Albion Text (DECKLED EDGE) The Second BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "albion text") ALBION TEXT has the distinction of a rich antique finish with deckle edges the long way of the sheet, and is made in white and India. A substantial rag content makes this a paper that will last a long time without deteriorating. Albion Text is the second Book Grade as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 168. GENERAL USES — Albion Text is recommended for the following uses when a distinctive quality is desired. It can be printed on from type and line cuts only — Advertising House Organs Announcements Booklets Brochures Circulars Mailing Folders Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Calendars Menus Books and Periodicals Magazines Children's Books Editions de Luxe Labels and Wrappers Catalog Containers IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, and line cuts) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Antique Finish. Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE AND INDIA Wove and Laid 25 x (38)— 60— 80 60 pounds put up in reams, 80 pounds in half reams Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Albion Text can be found in Price List at- tached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Albion Text is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [176] Samples — Actual samples of Albion Text can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Albion Text can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Albion Text in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Albion Text can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 72" to 76"; but the minimum must be 24" and the maximum 38". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 2S" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Albion Text is 38" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 25" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Albion Text can be made in is 50 pounds, the maximum 100 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ALBION TEXT ENVELOPES Albion Text Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify Albion Text, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [177] ^ American Bulking Book The Third BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) mmmnimmnmmmmma AMERICAN BULKING BOOK has been primarily devel- oped to fill the demand for a paper with exceptional thick- ness or bulk for its weight. This paper gives an impression of substance and value out of all proportion to its cost. The extra bulking, moreover, distinctly enhances the appearance of a printed sheet. American Bulking Book has a high rag con- tent and will not deteriorate with age. It is especially adapted for books and advertising pieces that do not carry fine line cuts and half-tones. American Bulking Book is the third grade Book as determined by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on pages 168-169. GENERAL USES — American Bulking Book is recommended for the following uses where extreme bulk and long life are the desirable features — House Organs Booklets Mailing Folders Announcements Advertising Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Calendars Menus Books and Periodicals Magazines Children's Books Popular Novels IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press " " Copper Plate Press The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis IS x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 25 x (38)— 50— 60— 70— 80 (28) x 42—62—74—86 (28) x 44—65—78—91 Basis— IS x 38 (30K) x 41— 66— 79— 92 (32) x 44— 74— 89—104 (38) x 50—100—120—140—160 25 x 38—50 bulk 376 pages per inch 25 x 38—70 bulk 270 pages per inch 25 x 38—60 bulk 316 pages per inch 25 x 38—80 bulk 236 pages per inch Packed flat, untrimmed, in cases, markers between reams. 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of American Bulking Book can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. [1781 Where Stocked — American Bulking Book is carried in stock by- all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American Bulking Book can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes and special substance weights of American Bulking Book can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 15,000 pounds. BUT if American Bulking Book is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard shades be made in quantities less than 15,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Bulking Book can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 96" to 110"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 55". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Bulking Book is 55" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 25", 44" and 50" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the ro'ls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American Bulking Book can be made in is 50 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN BULKING BOOK ENVELOPES American Bulking Book Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. When ordering envelopes specify American Bulking Book, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If pos- sible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [179] Railroad Folder The Fourth BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) RAILROAD FOLDER is a book paper that is manufactured in white and eight attractive colors in both a wove antique and a plate finish. Fine screen half-tones may be printed on the plate finish with entire success. When a wide range of colors is needed, this paper merits attention. Railroad Folder is the fourth Book Grade as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on pages 168-169. GENERAL USES — Railroad Folder is recommended for the following uses, bearing in mind the above qualifications — Booklets Circulars Mailing Folders Advertising Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Calendars Labels and Wrappers Package Labels IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 and 133 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light Dies) " " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only. The various types of impress as described above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Glazed and Unglazed. Basis 25 x 38— 500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) in white and colors colors Rose Apple Green Canary Granite R. E. Blue Nile Green India Tint Straw Basis — 25 x 38 Wove Plate (25) x (38)— 60 bulk 618 pages per inch Wove Plate 28 x (44)— 78 Wove Antique (25) x (38) — 60 bulk 390 pages per inch. Packed flat in cases, markers between reams. 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices on Railroad Folder can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Railroad Folder is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1801 Samples — Actual samples of Railroad Folder can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Railroad Folder can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Railroad Folder in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Railroad Folder can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 75" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 643^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Railroad Folder is 43" x 64}^" with the grain parallel to the 643^" dimension. Sheets 25", 28" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Railroad Folder can be made in is 40 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. RAILROAD FOLDER ENVELOPES Railroad Folder Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify Railroad Folder, weight, color, finish, quan- tity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [181] 'iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiimii/iimiiS Arrive Halftone The Fifth BOOK Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) nnannammmmnnnsa ARRIVfi HALFTONE is a high-grade book paper developed purposely for fine screen half-tone work. The nature of the paper and the fact that it is entirely free from coating give it exceptional wearing qualities and long life. Moreover, it has not the glaring reflections so objectionable in enamel paper. It is made in white and India with a high super-calendered finish. Arrive Halftone is the fifth Book Grade as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on pages 168-169. GENERAL USES — Arriv£ Halftone is recommended for the following purposes when a paper is desired that will print 133-line screen half-tones perfectly, having at the same time strength and durability not found in coated papers of the same substance weight. Advertising Books & Periodicals Labels E£ Wrappers Booklets Illustrated Letterheads Magazines Package Labels House Organs Catalog Covers Text Books Wrappers Catalog Pages Posters Children's Books Circulars Announcements Envelope Stuffers Mailing Folders Broadsides Calendars Envelopes Menus Brochures IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 and 133 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light Dies) " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Plate Finish. Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Stocks on hand with grain in either direction.) WHITE AND INDIA Basis— IS x 38 White High Plate Finish 25 x 38—50—60—70—80 India High Plate Finish 25 x 38—60—80 25 x 38 — 50 bulk 865 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 60 bulk 727 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 70 bulk 653 pages per inch 25 x 38—80 bulk 508 pages per inch Packed flat in cases, markers between reams, 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices on Arrive Halftone can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. [182] Where Stocked — Arrive Halftone is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List Samples — Actual samples of Arrive Halftone can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Arrive Halftone can be taken only for earliest possible delivery in quantities of 10,000 pounds or more. BUT if Arrive Halftone is being run in the required color at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities as low as 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Arrives Halftone can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 76" to 86"; but the minimum must be 19" and the maxi- mum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64J^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Arrive Halftone is 43" x 643^" with the grain parallel to the 643^" dimension. Sheets 25" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Arrive Halftone can be made in is 50 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ARRIVE HALFTONE ENVELOPES Arriv^ Halftone Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify Arrivts Halftone, weight, color, finish, quan- tity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [183] American Super Calendered Booh friiiiiiiiimwmiiiiiiiiwn, The Sixth BOOK Grade* of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) fill. II. Mill II ilS AMERICAN SUPER CALENDERED BOOK has, as its name implies, an excellent super calendered finish and will print fine screen half-tones especially well. It is distinguished for strength and uniformity. This paper is made in a creamy-white only. In many instances the character of this paper and its high finish make it a substitute for the regular enamel papers without their objectionable glaring surfaces. American Super Calendered is the sixth Book Grade as indi- cated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on pages 168-169. GENERAL USES — American Super Calendered Book is recommended for the following uses when fine screen half-tones are to be used and where exceptional strength for this type is demanded — Advertising House Organs Mailing Folders Brochures Catalog Covers Catalog Pages Circulars Announcements Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Posters Books and Periodicals Labels Magazines Package Children's Books Labels Text Books IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 and 133 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light Dies) " " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only. The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis IS x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, un- trimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WHITE ONLY Basis— -25 x 38 80 (32) x (44)- -59— 74— 89- -104—119 (38) x 50- -80—100—120- -140- -160 25 x (38)— 40— 50— 60— 70- 28 x (42)— 50— 62— 74— 86 28x(44)— —65—78 33x(46)— —80—96 25 x 38 — 40 bulk 914 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 50 bulk 762 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 60 bulk 640 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 70 bulk 542 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 80 bulk 470 pages per inch Packed flat in cases, markers between reams 500 to 600 pounds to case. *This grade is made in three finishes: English, Eggshell, and Super Calendered. [1841 Prices — Prices of American Super Calendered Book can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — American Super Calendered Book is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American Super Calendered Book can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights and special shades of American Super Calendered Book can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if American Super Calendered Book is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can befurnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes of this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard shades be made in quantities less than 15,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Super Calendered Book can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 96" to 110"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 55". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimen- sion parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Super Calendered Book is 55" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 25", 28", 32", 33," 44" and 50" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American Super Calen- dered Book can be made in is 40 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN SUPER CALENDERED ENVELOPES American Super Calendered Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manufacturers. When ordering envelopes specify American Super Calendered Book, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [185] Covers American English Finish Book The Sixth BOOK Grade* of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) ,111.11111111,11. iinmmiik AMERICAN ENGLISH FINISH BOOK combines with the charm of its creamy, natural-white color a finish like dull satin. It is free from lint and dust, economical of ink, and takes 120-line screen half-tones perfectly. American English Finish Book is the sixth Book Grade as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 169. GENERAL USES — American English Finish Book is unsurpassed for printing 120-line screen half-tones when a dull finish paper is desired, and is especially recommended for school and text-books, and for the other uses following — Advertising Books and Periodicals Labels Booklets Mailing Folders Popular Novels Package Brochures Circulars Children's Books Labels Catalog Insides House Organs Text-books Broadsides Calendars Newspapers Announcements Menus Magazines Envelope Stuffers Envelopes Posters IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120 screen half-tones) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping Press (Light Dies) " " Copper Plate Press " " Lithograph or Offset Press in one color only The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS. Basis 25x38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) (32) x 44 —59— 74— 89—104 33 x (46)— 80— 96 (38) x (50)— 80— 100— 120— 140— 160 (36) x (48)— 75— 82— 91—109 pages to 1 inch WHITE ONLY Basis — 25 x 38 (25) x (38)— 40— 45— 50— 60— 70— 80 (24) x (36)— 36— 41 — 45 — 55 (28) x 42 —50—62—74—86 (28) x 44—52—65—78—91 25 x 38-40 bulk 89 25 x 38—50 bulk 672 pages to 1 inch 25 x 38—60 bulk 546 pages to 1 inch 25 x 38—70 bulk 488 pages to 1 inch 25 x 38—80 bulk 422 pages to 1 inch Packed flat in cases, markers between reams. 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of American English Finish Book can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. This grade is made in three finishes: Super Calendered, Eggshell, and English. [1861 Where Stocked — American English Finish Book is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American English Finish Book can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special colors of American English Finish Book in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from stand- ard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if American English Finish Book is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 30,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 60,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American English Finish Book can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 125" to 138"; but the minimum must be 25" and the maximum 69". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimen- sion parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64H". Thus the maximum sheet size pos- sible to make in American English Finish Book is 69" x 64K" with the grain parallel to the 64J^" dimension. Sheets 24", 25", 33", 36," 38", 48" and 50" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American English Finish Book can be made in is 45 pounds, the maximum 100 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN ENGLISH FINISH ENVELOPES American English Finish Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, author- ized manufacturers. When ordering envelopes specify American English Finish Book, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [1871 /immiiiniHiiwiiiminrrm American Eggshell The Sixth BOOK Grade* of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked) mnnnmmnmnnnnmnm AMERICAN EGGSHELL is a blue-white antique book paper of high quality, with a smooth, suede-like finish that beautifies any type layout. It is distinctly economical for long runs. American Eggshell is the sixth Book Grade of the Eagle-A Line as indicated by the Book Chart of Relative Quality-Stand- ards on page 169. GENERAL USES — American Eggshell is recommended for production in quantity that calls for a paper of fine appearance. Advertising House Organs Announcements Booklets Envelope Stuffers Brochures Calendars Circulars Magazines Books and Periodicals Magazines Children's Books Novels Private Editions IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (with type, line cuts and coarse stipple or screen Ben Day plates and wood cuts) " " Offset in one color The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of im- press is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for impressing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Antique. Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, untrimmed, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) white 25 x (38)— 50— 60— 70— 80 28 x (42)— 62— 74— 86 28 x (44)— 65— 78— 91 (32) x (44)— 74— 89—104 (38) x 50 —100—120—140—160 INDIA 25 x (38)— 50— 60— 70 28 x (42)— — 74— 86 28 x (44)— 65— 78 (32) x (44)— — 89—104 (38) x 50—100—120—140 25 x 38 — 50 bulk 438 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 60 bulk 356 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 70 bulk 314 pages per inch 25 x 38 — 80 bulk 280 pages per inch Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of American Eggshell Book can be found in Price List attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — American Eggshell Book is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. *This grade is made in three finishes: Super Calendered, English, and Eggshell. [188] Samples — Actual samples of American Eggshell Book can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples of dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of American Eggshell in which the sheet size, substance weight or color differs from standard specification, as given on opposite page, can be taken only for earliest possible delivery in quantities of 15,000 pounds or more. BUT if American Eggshell Book is being run in the required color at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no conditions can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 15,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Eggshell Book can only be made in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 96" to 110"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 55". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Eggshell Book is 55" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimen- sion. Sheets 25", 28", 32" and 50" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is some- times possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American Eggshell Book can be made in is 40 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN EGGSHELL ENVELOPES American Eggshell Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify American Eggshell Book, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [189] Offset Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS OFFSET papers are designed primarily for use in offset presses, where special qualities are demanded in papers if they are to give satisfactory results at a high operating speed. More- Over, they are also suitable for letterpress printing. The characteristics demanded in an offset paper are: first, uniform, smooth surface which must not pick; second, uniformity of texture with strength as nearly as possible equal with and across the grain. The paper should have a minimum of con- traction and expansion when exposed to moisture. These char- acteristics are vitally necessary to secure maximum press pro- duction and perfect register. The first Offset grade has a good color and a smooth, uniform surface, free from any tendency to pick. The dimensions of a sheet when wet should differ but slightly from those of a dry paper and there must be no tendency of the paper to curl during the printing process. In fact, it should be so made as to lie perfectly flat under practically all conditions of storage in order that it may feed properly into the press. Offset papers must in general meet the same use-requirements as book papers. Because of their texture and pure white color offsets are interchangeable for many purposes with weddings and papeteries. On page 191 will be found a chart showing the relative qualities among the four offset grades. The following grades of Offset papers cover all requirements: GRADE NAME COLOR Semi-Perm. I Albion White II Beebe White III Chester White Temporary IV Dickinson White OFFSET PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to Offsets are explained in detail on page 314. [190] T3 l-H C3 "O en Ch ' m £ Cfl C3 qj +3 O JS P4 CD >* OOOOINt^ CO ©5 CO CM OS o-* oo oo in to INO51ON00© OOCMOtOCMt^ OlJfrHt^OO CSO^Ht~ rH05. osmooooeo t~ o ■* -h t>. co t)(tj4 io m lOt^OCOOO^ CO CO *#'*'* »0 05 CM i-H t>- CO 00 CM CO COCO *^ ^ NONOO«3 oi co co co i* 1 if o a fS ID a. < IH *o O 00 00 00 00 00 oooooo ©ooooo CO CO coco coco COCO CO CO CO CO t~ t^ t- ^ t> t^ oooooo COCO CO CO CO ^^^^^^ co co co co co co IN IN CM IN IN CM J3 •a OIOIOC^O) os os os os os os OS OS 05 OS OS OS 05 OS Os OS OS OS CM CM CO •* NOCOOO-* OrHt^CMCMCO •* N> O CO 00 Tf O-Ht^lNCMCO CO CO if "SO CM CO CO <* "5 O N CO CO •* "5 » CMCOCOTHlOO 43 '3 0] 0. O C0O^t»l> CO^iOOO OS CO to tJ( t- t>. i-i CO Tfiirs to to os co o i+i t- b- HW*iOCOIO OS CO O •* t- t>- i-HCOTjiiOOO to to to to to to to to too to oooooo OOOOOO a o 3 0) M-H 13 CO CO CO CO CO COCO COCO CO 10 10*0*010^5 IN IN IN CM IN CM oooooo t^l>t^Ot>t^ CO CO coco coco coco coco coco COCO CO CO CO 00 00 00 00 00 00 co coco coco co co co co co co co ^3 Pi 0) t-l w en "o &h iOOt~000 OOOOH THioot^OOO OOOOOH i+iioor^ooo OOOOOrH TfiCOt^OOO OOOOO'H t-c rt V H Or« tocoooocot^ ooooosot^t^ ocoooocot> CO IO 000005 CO OS CO IN l> 00 iOOI>000 CO'+KOiOt^OO co-*ioiot^oo COCOTtllOOt* C 0) H rH CO "5 05 CO t>. CM O i-l U5 tJ( OOOCOrHt^CM CMlXNOiO-* t^-* IN OS-* OS l> ■* (N 05 ■* OS t^odes^-* iH-H coTtnoot^os eo-*ioioi>oo coTtiioiot^oo M C m CMOsOOi* 1 OCOi-Ht^lN CO-^tOCMiOOi OsiOiHOOOO 00 05 iO t^ i# CtOt>0> CM CO ■>*<•* "5 1» CM CO CO 1 * 10IO IN CM CO •* ■* IO 0) y + £.! to t ■§& u fflio ooooo Ot>00O l-H c o CO u B 191 Jiiimiimmiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii). Albion Offset The First OFFSET Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) ALBION OFFSET is exceptionally strong and therefore is adapted for special offset requirements where strength and wearing qualities are to be considered. It is especially desirable for work in eight or ten colors. The paper is so made that perfect register results even under the most exacting conditions. The surface is exceptionally clear and free from fuzz. Albion Offset is the first Offset Grade as indicated by the Offset Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 191. GENERAL USES — With the above qualifications in mind Albion Offset can be recommended for the following — Advertising Announcements Booklets Broadsides Brochures Calendars Catalog Covers Envelopes Books y Periodicals Children's Books De Luxe Editions Magazines Folders Greeting Cards House Organs Inserts Menus Pictures Posters Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, coarse stipple Ben Day, coarse screen Ben Day) " " Offset Press or Lithography " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis IS x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 25 x (38)— 60— 70— 80—100—120 28 x (42)— 74— 86— 99—124 32 x (44)— 89—104—119—148 36x(48)— 109— 127— 146 38 x (50)— 120— 160— 200 Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Albion Offset can be found in Price List at- tached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Albion Offset is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Albion Offset can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [192 1 NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Albion Offset can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Albion Offset is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in mini- mum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Albion Offset can only be made in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 80"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 40". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 63)4". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Albion Offset is 40" x 63}/£" with the grain parallel to the 633^" dimension. Sheets 25", 28", 32", 36" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is some- times possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Albion Offset can be made in is 45 pounds, the maximum 185 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ALBION OFFSET ENVELOPES Albion Offset Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Albion Offset, weight, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. Covers 193 AmiimimlllwiiwiiDliiillSa Beebe Offset The Second OFFSET Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY -STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) BEEBE OFFSET bulks better for its weight than do most Offset Papers. It also possesses unusual strength and smoothness of surface. Eight to ten colors can be successfully impressed on this paper. Beebe Offset is the second Offset Grade as indicated by the Offset Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 191. GENERAL USES — With the above qualifications in mind Beebe Offset can be recommended in the following cases: Advertising Announcements Booklets Broadsides Brochures Calendars Catalog Covers Catalog Insides Envelopes Envelope Stuffers Folders Greeting Cards House Organs Inserts Mailing Cards Menus Pictures Posters Tickets Books and Periodicals Children's Books De Luxe Editions Magazines IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, coarse stipple Ben Day, coarse screen Ben Day) " " Offset Press or Lithography " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. four sides, stocked as follows: Flat sheets trimmed (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 22Y 2 x (343^) — 40— 48 25 x (38) —50—60—70—80—100—120 28 x(42) — —74—86—99—124 32 x (44)— 89—104—119—148 36 x (48)— 109— 127— 146 38 x (50)— 120— —160—200 Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Beebe Offset can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Beebe Offset is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Beebe Offset can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [194] NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Beebe Offset can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Beebe Offset is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Beebe Offset can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 80"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 40". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 63J^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Beebe Offset is 40" x 63^" with the grain parallel to the 633^" dimension. Sheets 22^", 25", 28", 32", 36" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Beebe Offset can be made in is 45 pounds, the maximum 185 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. BEEBE OFFSET ENVELOPES Beebe Offset Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Beebe Offset, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. 195] Chester Offset The Third OFFSET Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) CHESTER OFFSET is suitable for eight- or ten-color work. Its strength is sufficient to meet the ordinary requirements for a paper of this class. The surface is clear so that little trouble is experienced from fuzz in the presses. Chester Offset is the third Offset Grade as indicated by the Offset Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 191. GENERAL USES — In addition to regular offset work Chester Offset may be used for: Advertising Announcements Folders Booklets Broadsides Brochures Calendars Catalog Covers Catalog Insides Circulars Envelopes Envelope Stuffers Greeting Cards House Organs Inserts Mailing Cards Menus Pictures Posters Tickets Books y Periodicals Children's Books De Luxe Editions Magazines Labels & Wrappers Package Labels IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, coarse stipple Ben Day, coarse screen Ben Day) " " Offset Press and Lithography " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. four sides, stocked as follows: Flat sheets, trimmed (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 22^ x (34^ )— 40— 48 25 x (38) — 50— 60— 70— 80—100—120 28 x (42) — 74— 86— 99—124 32 x (44) — 89—104—119—148 36 x (48) —109—127—146 38 x (50) —120—160—200 Flat in cases, markers between reams. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Chester Offset can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Chester Offset is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [1961 Samples — Actual samples of Chester Offset can be found in the Eagle-A cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Chester Offset can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Chester Offset is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities as low as 3,300 pounds. COVEIS Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. gfj s j NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Weill Chester Offset can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multi- '""' pie of which equals 64" to 80"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 40". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) Mil from 16" to 63}^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Chester org Offset is 40" x 63J^" with the grain parallel to the 633^" dimension. Sheets 223^", 25", 28", 32", 36" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given Am above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these rflg are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut and it is some- times possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have «. been sheeted. ™" Ca NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE y y p, The minimum substance weight that Chester Offset can be Papt made in is 45 pounds, the maximum 185 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. CHESTER OFFSET ENVELOPES Chester Offset Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Chester Offset, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [197] UiiiiiiiiimifiimimiiimmS Dickinson Offset The Fourth OFFSET Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) Auhiiiii/iinhrhnnimmmii, DICKINSON OFFSET is suitable for offset work where only one or two colors are to be used. It is not recom- mended, however, for more elaborate types of printing. Dickinson Offset is the fourth Grade as indicated by the Offset Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 191. GENERAL USES — With the above qualifications in mind Dickinson Offset can be recommended in the following cases: Advertising Announcements Envelope Stuffers Booklets Broadsides Brochures Calendars Catalog Covers Catalog Insides Circulars Envelopes House Organs Inserts Mailing Cards Menus Pictures Posters Tickets Books y Periodicals Children's Books De Luxe Editions Magazines Text Books Labels y Wrappers Package Labels IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts; coarse screen and coarse stipple Ben Day) " " Offset Press and Lithography " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as described above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 25 x 38—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 25 x (38)— 60— 70— 80—100—120 28 x (42)— 74— 86— 99—124 32 x (44)— 89— 104— 119— 148 Flat in cases, markers between reams. 36 x (48)- 38 x (50)- -109—127—146 -120—160—200 Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Dickinson Offset can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Dickinson Offset is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [198] Samples — Actual samples of Dickinson Offset can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Dickinson Offset can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 15,000 pounds. BUT if Dickinson Offset is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 15,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Dickinson Offset can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 96" to 110"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 55". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 633^". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Dickinson Offset is 55" x 633^" with the grain parallel to the 633^" dimension. Sheets 25", 28", 32", 36" and 38" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is some- times possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Dickinson Offset can be made in is 45 pounds, the maximum 120 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because condi- tions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. DICKINSON OFFSET ENVELOPES Dickinson Offset Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Dickinson Offset, weight, color, finish, quan- tity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [1991 Cover Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS 'T 1 HE term "covers" is applied to a great variety of papers used for covers for booklets, price lists, for box covers and sometimes photograph albums and mounts as well as for a multi- plicity of other purposes almost impossible to classify. A wide variety of colors is very necessary and a range of sur- face finishes is also essential because almost any type of impress may be used on these papers. Although for the most part longevity is not an important factor because of the temporary nature of most cover paper requirements, a high resistance to handling is a requisite in almost all cases. Folding qualities and appearance are particularly important, the latter because the cover creates the first impression on the recipient of a printed piece. Consequently, it is generally desirable that one of the higher grades of covers be used. Unusual types have a legitimate use for certain limited pur- poses, but they are not included in the standard line of cover papers for the reason that the particular quality which makes them in demand to-day would be out of style to-morrow and necessitate a complete change in manufacturing conditions. Eagle-A Cover papers have been graded according to their use-requirements and qualities in a manner similar to other Quality-Standard Papers. The standard for the Relative Chart of Cover Paper qualities (on page 201) has been considered to be the first grade cover, which possesses strength and a distinctive and attractive appear- ance and is suitable for many types of impress, including die- stamping and embossing. The fact that it is supplied in a range of attractive colors and finishes, and possesses the necessary durability to withstand considerable use over a rather long period, further justifies its use as a basis of comparison. The following grades of the Eagle-A Line meet all requirements of cover papers: GRADE NAME COLOR Permanent I De Luxe Deckle d'Aigle White and two colors Semi-Perm. I Herculean White and ten colors II Arven Plate White and four colors III Paradox White and six colors Temporary IV Riverdale White and eight colors V Standard Twelve colors COVER PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to cover papers are explained in detail on pages 315 and 316. [200] >> tx! oo to COft ■*t^ON IO1H1H ■*C0"5 ■ti o to t>co rt031>CM C0NO ONt> to OtO ON OOCO^'iH >OCN05 IOO5C0 M CO ifltO UJIO •*iO(0 05 CO*^ "^ CNCNCO CD ., 'P .5 «-■ o o o C/3 +j rt >o t^t> c CM CNCN N-t~ NCMCNCM (NCNKN ^«ji^ «1 CD fHcoco c_, cti " 4) >> N NS NN t>NN-l> l>t>N 05 CO CO 'o a! CD to to to to CO to to to (OtO CO 05 CO 1 * . S3 CO COCO coco to to to to 0(0(0 irjtoto >>'~ O Ai w w a) a iH co co coco CO CO CO CO CO CO CO COCO CO & coco coco CO CO CO CO cOcoco CO CO CO 4J CJ 1 o "S . coco coco CO CO CO CO CO coco COCO CO T! I-i u 0) 0) 2 o. § O coco coco CO to to 1> t>N-N I>t>N ^ O CN t)<0 00 >H OOOC0 'oo iHNcO OOrH we o JES--Z3 ci cd •h -t! tH CN ON- IC5C0 l>0o>o t>OTji NC01O r-l iHtH i-l rH T— 1 T— 1 C/5 0) 0) CD J-H t -1 o w iH 05 CM ION.00-* IH lOCON- CNC0-* cs .2 Ph o CN00 (0U5 TJHCO^N- 05t>05 1OC0C5 In ■* (OO T-H00 CNO5CO00 COrt^ CO CO-* CO H t^ ■*t> COI> ifltdodco COtfiO tHMCO s-h pq rt CD -2 .If'JS * CO (OO r-l lOCO lO to 00 CO IOCO00 CNC01C5 o U C/2 1— 1 t— 1 t— i »— 1 > > 0) 0) Dp ■M "a? J*f T3 "3 1 ctj Oi.lP'S? E T3 -S C3 --■ o eckl d'A .ntiqu "3| !-l '-' > PS CU < T3 5i a 4J Q s X < PL| S tV3 [201 „„,!,,, „„,,,„,,,„,,,,,, ,„,„Ti Deckle d? Aigle FOUR DECKLE EDGE (MOULD-MADE) The First DeLuxe COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "deckle d'aigle" and shield) mnmasmsmnnnnnsm DECKLE D'AIGLE Cover has the appearance of old-time quality papers, such as were hand-fashioned by master craftsmen in the fifteenth century, and, like them, it has a natural deckle on all four sides. It is manufactured from the highest quality of new white rags. The sheets are loft-dried and possess a superb finish and texture that make this paper a suitable background for the highest type of printing craftsman- ship. Deckle d'Aigle Cover is the first line of four deckle edge, mould-made paper to be made in this country in book and cover papers to match. It is produced in white, green and gray, in one weight only. Deckle d'Aigle Cover is the first De Luxe Cover grade, as indicated by the cover chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — Deckle d'Aigle Cover expresses the highest achievement in fine paper-making, yet its cost is comparatively moderate. It can be recom- mended in any of the following cases where distinction and richness are desired — Advertising Announcements Booklet Covers Calendars Catalog Covers Stationery Greeting Cards Social Cards Books and Periodicals Editions de luxe IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line cuts; coarse stipple and coarse screen Ben Day) " " Die Stamping Press " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. Fine screen half-tones can be applied after hot-pressing. Through the process employed in producing Deckle d'Aigle, the surfaces on both sides of the sheet are alike. Unlike machine-made papers the "felt" and "wire" sides need not be considered. As a matter of form only, sheets should be printed with the watermark reading correctly from left to right. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, stocked as follows: COLORS Laid Natural White Green Gray. 13 x 19%— 32 \9% x 26—64 Deckle d'Aigle being mould-made, there is almost an entire absence of "grain" so that it folds equally well in either direction. Packed: Sealed in half reams. [2021 Deckle d'Aigle book paper in white, and in sizes to fit the Deckle d'Aigle Cover sizes can be found on page 170; carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. Deckle d'Aigle in small sheets and cards with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 246, and in boxed stationery, page 254. These are carried in stock by all Service Houses. Prices — Prices of Deckle d'Aigle Cover Paper can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Deckle d'Aigle Cover is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, the list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Deckle d'Aigle Cover will be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DECKLE D'AIGLE Cover can be made in any size from n—j ll"xl7"to20"x30' , . Orders for colors, other than those carried in stock, will be ac- m j cepted in lots of not less than 1,650 pounds of an item, where ^a the size specified is either of the two standard sizes listed. Orders for sizes in either white or colors, other than the two Mil standard sizes listed, will be accepted in lots of not less than gra 2,000 pounds of an item. Where other than standard sizes are specified, the manufacture of such special sizes necessitates the making of a complete new mould. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. DECKLE D'AIGLE ENVELOPES Deckle d'Aigle Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company, authorized manu- facturers. When ordering envelopes specify Deckle d'Aigle, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. me [203 Herculean Cover The First COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) iiiiiiillliiiiiiiiiliiiiiiira HERCULEAN COVER has been developed primarily to meet the demand for a cover paper of exceptional strength. Herculean Cover possesses strength and wearing qualities suitable for the most exacting requirements. The rich Antique Finish and wide range of colors adapt it particularly for use when attention value is desired. The Ripple and Linen Finishes in which this cover is also supplied are particularly suited where a distinctive appearance is called for. Herculean Cover is furnished in ten colors and white. Herculean Cover is the first Cover Grade of the Eagle-A Line of Cover Papers as indicated by the Cover Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — Herculean Cover can be recommended for the following uses when a cover paper of great strength and endurance is required in a wide range of colors — Advertising Announcements Greeting Cards Calendars Mailing Cards Car and Show Cards Mailing Folders Catalog Covers Menus Envelope Stuffers Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, coarse stipple and screen Ben Day) " " Die Stamping " " Embossing The various types of impress as described above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 20 x 26—500 sheets to ream. Stocked as follows : (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WHITE AND COLORS Antique Finish Army Brown Olive Green Oxford Gray Cadet Blue Shamrock Green Colonial Buff Nubian Black Columbia Blue White Pompeian Red Havana Brown (20) x (26)— 65— 100 (23) x (33)— 95— 146 65 pound sealed in half reams, 2 reams to a bundle. 95 pound in half reams, \y% reams to a bundle. 100 pound in J/*j reams, \}/2 reams to a bundle. 146 pound in }/% reams, i ream to a bundle. Prices — Prices of Herculean Cover can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Herculean Cover is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [204] Samples — Actual samples of Herculean Cover can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Herculean Cover can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Herculean Cover in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,000 pounds; however, calender finishes require a mini- mum of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Herculean Cover can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 34" to 41", or 58" to 66", or 78" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Herculean Cover is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. However, the largest possible size in non-standard plater finishes is 26" x 40". Sheets 20", 23", 26", 33" and 40" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Herculean Cover can be made in is 25 pounds, the maximum 130 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Ann HERCULEAN COVER ENVELOPES Herculean Cover Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the author- ized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Herculean Cover, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes is given on pages 68-75. 205 Arven Plate The Second COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) mmmsmmmnnnnnnsm ARVEN PLATE has a high plate finish made especially for half-tone work. With this paper 133-line screens may be successfully used. It also possesses great strength, which gives it the necessary qualities to allow for folding with or against the grain. The colors are subdued, as they must be to bring out the details in the half-tones. It is furnished in four colors and white. Arven Plate is the second Cover Grade as indicated by the Cover Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — Arven Plate can be recommended in the following cases, and especially for fine half-tone printing — Announcements Broadsides Calendars Catalog Covers Envelopes Advertising Envelope Stuffers Mailing Cards Mailing Folders Menus Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type; line cuts; 120, 110, 85 screen half- tones on plate finish; fine and coarse screen and stipple Ben Day.) " " Lithograph Press " " Rotogravure " Die Stamping " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHT and COLORS— Basis 20 x 26—500 sheets to ream. Stocked as follows: (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WHITE AND COLORS Super Finish Only White Gray Pearl Green (26) x (40)— 100— 130 India (Sealed in half reams, 100 pounds, 1}^ reams to bundle; 130 pounds, 1 ream to bundle.) Prices — Prices of Arven Plate can be found in Price List at- tached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Arven Plate is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [2061 Samples — Actual samples of Arven Plate can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service HouseSo NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Arven Plate can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Arven Plate in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Arven Plate can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 34" to 41" or 58" to 66", or 78" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Arven Plate is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 26" and 40" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Arven Plate can be made in is 25 pounds, the maximum 130 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ARVEN PLATE ENVELOPES Arven Plate Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manu- facturer. When ordering envelopes specify Arven Plate, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [2071 Mmiimmmiinimimiiim/ia Paradox Cover The Third COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) mmninimmnmiimmk PARADOX COVER is a medium grade of paper furnished in both Antique and Plate Finishes, the latter to allow for 120- line half-tone work. Where distinctive effects are desired Para- dox Cover in Ripple Finish gives very satisfactory results. This paper is well adapted for broadsides, as it comes in sufficiently heavy weights to mail without the use of stifFeners. It has the necessary folding endurance and is well adapted for embossing. It is supplied in white and six colors and in a variety of substance weights. Paradox Cover is the third grade of Eagle-A Line of Cover Papers, as indicated by the Cover Chart of Relative Quality- Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — With the above qualifications in mind Paradox Cover can be recommended in the following cases — Wrappers and Labels Catalog Containers Envelopes Package Labels Advertising Announcements Booklet Covers Broadsides Business Cards Calendars, Mounts and Pads Car and Show Cards Catalog Covers Magazines Magazine Inserts Mailing Cards (Double thick) Mailing Folders Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120, 110 screen squared up half-tones (plate finish only) ; coarse screen and stipple, fine screen and stipple, Ben Day Plates (plate finish only) The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 20 x 26—500 sheets to ream. Stocked as follows: (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WHITE AND COLORS White India Green Buff Brown Fibril Granite Blue Antique, Plate, Ripple, Linen and Crash Finishes (20) x (26)— 50— 65— 80— 130 (23) x (33)— 73— 95— 117— 190 Sealed as follows: in half reams, 2J/£ reams to the bundle. in half reams, 2 reams to the bundle. in half reams, 2 reams to the bundle. in half reams, \ x /i reams to the bundle. in half reams, V/2 reams to the bundle. in half reams, 1 ream to the bundle. in 100 sheet packages, 1 ream to the bundle. in 100 sheet packages, 400 sheets to the bundle. [208] 50 pound substance weight 65 pound substance weight 73 pound substance weight 80 pound substance weight 95 pound substance weight 117 pound substance weight 130 pound substance weight 190 pound substance weight Prices — Prices of Paradox Cover can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Paradox Cover is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Paradox Cover can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Paradox Cover can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Paradox Cover in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut from rolls in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,000 pounds. Non-standard plate finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Paradox Cover can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 34" to 41", or 58" to 66, or 78" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Paradox Cover is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. However, the largest possible size in special Plater Finish is 26" x 40". Sheets 20", 23", 26", 33", and 40" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Paradox Cover can be made in is 25 pounds, the maximum 130 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. PARADOX COVER ENVELOPES Paradox Cover Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Paradox Cover, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. r 2091 Jimmiimminwiiwimrm Riverdale Cover The Fourth COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) litiiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiittiiiiitaiiinm RIVERDALE COVER is designed particularly for use in advertising matter of a temporary character in which good appearance is important. It is supplied in eight colors and white in Antique Finish only. Fancy finishes, as well as Linen, Ripple and Crash, can be furnished on special order. Riverdale Cover is the fourth Cover Grade as indicated by the Cover Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — Riverdale Cover can be used in the following cases with exceptionally good results when distinctive appearance and moderate price govern the choice — Advertising Labels and Wrappers Broadsides Envelopes Package Labels Calendars Mailing Folders Catalog Containers Menus Catalog Covers Tickets Circulars IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 120, 110, 85 screen half-tones, coarse stipple and coarse screen Ben Day) " " Die Stamping (light) The various types of impress as described above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS- as follows: -Basis 20 x 26 — 500 sheets to ream. Stocked (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) WHITE AND COLORS White (20) (20) (20) (23) (23) (26) (23) (26) (26) Antique Finish Only Gold Fawn Steel Gray Brown Green x (26) — 50 pounds sealed x (26) — 65 pounds sealed x (26) — 80 pounds sealed x (33) — 73 pounds sealed x (33) — 95 pounds sealed x (40) — 100 pounds sealed x (33) — 117 pounds sealed x (40) — 130 pounds sealed x (40) — 160 pounds sealed n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, n half reams, Blue Granite Blue Red 2J^2 reams to bundle. 2 reams to bundle. \}/2 reams to bundle. 2 reams to bundle. \}/2 reams to bundle. 13^ reams to bundle. 1 ream to bundle. 1 ream to bundle. 1 ream to bundle. Prices — Prices of Riverdale Cover can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Riverdale Cover is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [210] Samples — Actual samples of Riverdale Cover can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Riverdale Cover in which the sheet size, substance weight, finish or color differs from standard specifications, as given above, can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Riverdale Cover in the required weight, color and finish is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,000 pounds. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 550 pounds; however, special calender finishes require a minimum of 2,000 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Riverdale Cover can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 34" to 41", or 58" to 66", or 78" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 43". However, the largest possible size in special plate finishes is 26" x 40". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths j\[)[|l (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Riverdale Cover is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 20", 23", 26", 33" and 40" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Riverdale Cover can be made in is 25 pounds, the maximum 130 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. RIVERDALE COVER ENVELOPES Riverdale Cover Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Riverdale Cover, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [2111 men Standard Cover The Fifth COVER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) Munimiiiiiiiiiiiiniiimmh STANDARD COVER is a light-weight cover paper well adapt- ed for labels, fliers and posters, as well as for covers of book- lets or catalogs of a temporary nature. Standard Cover in Super Calendered Finish is supplied in twelve distinctive colors, while six colors are available in Antique. Standard Cover is the fifth Cover Grade as indicated by the Cover Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 201. GENERAL USES — Standard Cover, bearing in mind the characteristics in- dicated above, can be used as follows — Advertising Labels and Wrappers Broadsides Envelope Stuffers Package Labels Calendars Mailing Folders Circulars Menus Envelopes IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type; line cuts; 110, 85 screen half-tones; coarse stipple and coarse screen Ben Day.) " " Rotogravure Press " " Die Stamping (light) " " Embossing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 20 x 26—500 sheets to ream. Stocked as follows: (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) COLORS ONLY Super Wove Apple Green, Buff, Cherry, Canary, Fawn, Gold, Blue Granite, Blue, Mandarin, R. E. Blue, Scarlet, Steel Gray. (20) x (26)— 25— 35— 50 (23) x (33)— 51— 73 Antique Wove Fawn, Gold, Mandarin, R. E. Blue, Blue Granite, Steel Gray (20) x (26)— 50 (20) x (26) — 25 pounds sealed in reams, 5 reams to the bundle (20) x (26) — 35 pounds sealed in reams, 4 reams to the bundle (20) x (26) — 50 pounds sealed in reams, 3 reams to the bundle — Super Finish (23) x (33) — 51 pounds sealed in reams, 3 reams to the bundle (23) x (33) — 73 pounds sealed in reams, 2 reams to the bundle (20) x (26) — 50 pounds sealed in reams, 2 reams to the bundle — Antique Finish Prices — Prices of Standard Cover can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Standard Cover is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service House, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [2121 Samples — Actual samples of Standard Cover can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Standard Cover can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Standard Cover in the required weight, color and finish is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,000 pounds. Non-standard plater finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Standard Cover can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multi- MM! pie of which equals 34" to 41", or 58" to 66", or 78" to 86"; but the minimum must be gf3| 16" and the maximum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size Ann possible to make in Standard Cover is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Mfil Sheets 20", 23", 26", 33", and 40" wide by any length between the limits given above Ct« can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are pi the widths of rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes ""' possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. Twnn NON-STOCK SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Standard Cover can be made is 25 pounds, the maximum 130 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. STANDARD COVER ENVELOPES Standard Cover Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Standard Cover, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74). If possible, send sample [ dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. 1213 1 Bristols OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS *T)RISTOL" was originally applied to a high-class, light- ■*-' weight cardboard first made at Bristol, England. Numer- ous papers of this general type, all known as "Bristols," are in wide use at present. The higher grades are known to the trade as "Index Bristols." They are used almost exclusively in card index systems. The others are known as "Bristols" or "Mill Blanks." The characteristics of an Index Bristol in the order of their importance are: (1) snap; (2) erasive qualities; (3) writing surface; (4) thickness; (5) color; (6) strength. A first grade must possess snap and stiffness to such a degree that it has almost a metallic ring when the corner of it is bent and allowed to snap back. Repeated several times, such a test should not develop any wrinkle in the paper. When tested by erasing with a knife the paper should not peel but must dust off" in very small particles and leave the surface smooth and well sized so that it may again be written upon without feathering the ink. The surface of a first grade should be smooth but not glossy enough to cause the pen to skip. The thickness must not vary more than one-half a point from the proper thickness for the particular weight. A range of colors is essential, as classification by colors is often a part of the filing system. Often considerable folding resistance is demanded. Its use in files frequently consulted over a long period of time also calls for good strength. Other Bristol grades besides serving for index purposes may be used for posters, display cards, sample cards and similar advertising uses. In the following pages, which are devoted to detailed descrip- tions of the Eagle-A Quality-Standard Bristols, each paper is described in two ways: first in general terms of appearance and serviceability; secondly, with specific reference to the chart of relative qualities on page 215. The following grades of the Eagle-A Line cover all the re- quirements for Bristols: GRADE NAME COLOR Permanent I Agawam White and six colors Semi-Perm. II Cherokee White and five colors III Darien White and three colors Temporary IV American Rope Thirteen colors V American Post Card Cream BRISTOL PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS Trade customs pertaining to Bristols are explained in detail on pages 316-318. [214] momo OOlN-H© ■"tfWCiOO 00 £3 0) dard stols >d OOOO ooooo 00 (MOO o o WhOO «)O^H O^^-H N 00 9MOM MOSS (NOOtJ*^ (NfO<*iO INCOME (NINCO^ CO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oooo us a Q< '-I ive Qua agle-A I o-£ S?^ .£ s +-> Q" c3 to 2 (ONHffl OCO^O OiHt)<00 rH o *o5 s "- 1 a fHSDiHN ■HiHtH iH O-Hr-lrH 00 "5 O-h^OO „, «s rHrHrH 2 a 03 n) .2 a M OfflN'* lOtOiflN mOiOO N 10 o 4) M NINCO'* HHHN .HtHrHlN IN S" 'Sic o G wrt 4-a co .2 ONffiO OOl>00 oocmco -i>O00CO CO IH C/5 rHr-lCMCO rHrti-HCq i-lr*l-l(N IH "o at H o ho c 12 3 pq CD •*•* O00 OOi-HOO rHONlN O^HCOO OOOO t>0O0OTf< o 00 CO OOOOOO •H>H IN vn ubstan Weigh Basis 5^x30 OOOO rHrHrHCq oooo rH"*t^ > HH >—t T3 a) s M < ") in which Cherokee Index Bristol can be made is 110 pounds, the maximum 220 Mimeo- pounds. PPhS Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ENVELOPES The following Eagle-A papers in envelope form are suitable for use with Darien Index Bristol: Persian Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 116. Chevron Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 122. Telephone Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 128. Envelopes made of these papers to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. Weddings 219 Darien Index Bristol The Third BRISTOL Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS iiiiiiiiiiimimnnnmmminl DARIEN INDEX BRISTOL is satisfactory for temporary index uses or for employment where it will not be sub- jected to a great amount of handling. In addition to index use, Darien is particularly well adapted for poster work, and in some cases may be recommended for gelatine printing of the type used for moving-picture advertising. Darien Index Bristol is the third Bristol Grade as indicated by the Bristol Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 215. GENERAL USES — Darien Index Bristol is recommended for the following purposes, bearing in mind its characteristics as stated above — Advertising Calendars Filing Cards Mailing Cards Posters Impress — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, squared-up half-tones, 110-line screen half-tones, coarse stipple, Ben Day) " Litho Press The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 2S l / 2 x 30^—500 sheets to ream. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) (Both dimensions in parentheses indicate grain may run either way.) (20V 2 ) x (24^)- (22^) x (28J0- (2sy 2 ) x (3oy 2 y - 72— 91 - 91—115 -110—140 20J/£x(24%)— 111 22^ x (28y 2 )— 140 2Sy 2 x (30y 2 )— 170 BUFF, SALMON, BLUE 203^ x (24M)— 72— 91—111 25y 2 x (30^)— 110— 140— 170 All weights are solid. Sealed in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Darien Index Bristol can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Darien Index Bristol is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Darien Index Bristol can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be ob- tained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special shades of Darien Index Bristol, white, from 110 to 140 pounds, basis 253 / 2" x 30/^", can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 90,000 [220] pounds. Order for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special shades of Darien Index Bristol, white, 170 pounds, basis 25/^"x 303^", and all colors in all weights can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 12,000 pounds. BUT if Darien Index Bristol in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds of 110 pound and 140 pound white, and 2,200 pounds of 170 pound white and all weights in colors. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 45,000 pounds from 110 pound to 140 pound white and 4,400 pounds from 140 pound to 170 pound white and all weights in colors. Non-standards finishes in Darien Index Bristol are not made. Under no condition can non-standard white shades be made in quantities less than 90,000 pounds in 110 and 140 basis, or 12,000 in 170 basis, or 12,000 of all weights of all colors. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Darien Index Bristol, white, 110 and 140, basis 25^" x 303^", can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 125" to 138"; but the minimum must be 20}^" and the maximum 46". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Darien Index Bristol is 46" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. ^ ■ ,. In colors (all weights) and 170 pound, white, basis 25J^" x 30J^", Darien Index .j Don. Bristol can be made in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 76" to 86"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 43". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" MiniGO- to 64". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Darien Index Bristol Pf3DhS is 43" x 64" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimension. Sheets 20J^" and 253^" wide by any length between the limits given above can AnnQI ,r often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because they are the II18QK widths of the rolls from which the standard sizes sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight in which Darien Index Bristol can be made is 110 pounds* the maximum 170 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ENVELOPES The following Eagle-A Papers in envelope form are suitable for use with Darien Index Bristol paper. Persian Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 116. Chevron Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 122. Telephone Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 128. Envelopes made of these papers to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify one of the above papers, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [221] American Rope Bristol The Fourth BRISTOL Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS AMERICAN ROPE BRISTOL is designed particularly for posters, display cards and sample cards. It is supplied in thirteen colors for display purposes. The surface is soft enough to allow for pasting of "swatches" but at the same time hard enough so that it will not pick when the ordinary forms of print- ing are employed. American Rope Bristol is the fourth Bristol Grade as indi- cated by the Bristol Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 215. GENERAL USES — American Rope Bristol has qualities that recommend it particularly for the following purposes — Labels and Wrappers Package Labels Advertising Calendars Filing Cards Catalog Containers Tags Catalog Covers Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, 110-line screen half-tones, coarse stipple, Ben Day) The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 22 ^ x 28^—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) COLORS ONLY Brown Cherry Dark Blue Green Lawn Green Light Blue Purple Red Russet Scarlet Steel Gray Tea Yellow 22Kx(28J^)— 110 Sealed in packages of 100 sheets, one ream to a bundle. Prices — Prices of American Rope Bristol can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — American Rope Bristol is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American Rope Bristol can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of American Rope Bristol can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,250 pounds. BUT if American Rope Bristol [222 1 in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any length or width described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard plater and embossed finishes can be furnished under the same con- ditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but 3,300 pounds are required for other special finishes. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 8,250 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Rope Bristol can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 673^" to 80"; but the minimum must be 17" and the maximum 40". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 50". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Rope Bristol is 40" x 50" with the grain parallel to the 50" dimension. Sheets 22^" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. ROLLS (SPECIAL) American Rope Bristol can be made in rolls not to exceed 30" diameter wound on steel or strawboard cores in widths (dimension across grain) as given for sheets in minimum widths of 1,650 pounds of a size. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight (basis 223^" x 28/^") in which American Rope Bristol can be made is 110 pounds; the maximum 220 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. AMERICAN ROPE BRISTOL ENVELOPES American Rope Bristol Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify American Rope Bristol, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. graphs 223 American Post Card The Fifth BRISTOL Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS HHilmmmimiiiinimmmk AMERICAN POST CARD is made to the specifications drafted by the United States Government for its post card stock. It is, therefore, the ideal paper to use for post cards as well as being suitable for poster work where colors are not essential. It is also adapted for use in connection with the gelatine printing process. American Post Card is furnished in cream only. American Post Card is the fifth Bristol Grade as indicated by the Bristol Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 215. GENERAL USES — American Post Card is adapted for the following uses when colors are not required — Advertising Calendars Mailing Folders Tickets Filing Cards Menus Mailing Cards Tags IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type; line cuts; squared-up half-tones; 110-line screen half-tones; Ben Day plates — coarse stipple) The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success-, fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 22^x28^—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) CREAM COLOR ONLY 22 x (28)— 100 22^ x (283/0— 105 (28) x 44—200 Sealed in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of American Post Card can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — American Post Card is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of American Post Card can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of American Post Card can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 90,000 pounds. BUT if American Post Card is being [224] run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 6,000 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 45,000 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 90,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE American Post Card can only be made in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 125" to 138", but the minimum must be 20^" and the maximum 46". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in American Post Card is 46" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 64" dimen- sion. Sheets 22", 22J^", 44" and 45" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because these are the widths of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that American Post Card can be made in is 110 pounds, the maximum 140 pounds, basis 253^x3034 Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ENVELOPES The following Eagle-A paper in envelope form is suitable for use with American Post Card: Arrive Halftone, Sub. 60-80— Page 182. Envelopes made of this paper to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the author- ized manufacturer. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [225 Weddings and Papeteries OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS THE term "Weddings" applies to papers primarily designed for engraved announcements, invitations and cards. Appearance is the sole factor to be considered. If furnished in white the stock must have neither a blue nor a yellow cast. If in colors the shade must be delicate, yet bright and pleasing. Two finishes — lawn and plated vellum — are used almost exclusively. Two grades are adequate. To obtain the proper color and appearance only high-grade materials can be used. The first grade, the purest white obtainable, is finished with the greatest care. All but perfect sheets are rejected in sorting. The second grade is made with the same care and attention to detail but from a different grade of material. PAPETERIES The term "Papeteries" applies to papers for boxed stationery for social and business requirements. These papers are primarily adapted for pen writing and for various other forms of impress. Appearance is their dominant quality. They are supplied in a range of finishes and colors, as dis- tinctive shades are often very desirable. The three Eagle-A Papeteries are graded according to the factors of appearance, strength and life as shown in the Relative Chart of Quality- Standard Weddings and Papeteries on page 227. The following grades of the Eagle-A Line meet all require- ments of Weddings and Papeteries: COLOR White White and six colors White and six colors White and six colors White and six colors GRADE NAME Permanent I II Arden Wedding Biscay Wedding Semi-Perm. I II Temporary III Chesterfield Papeterie Dorrington Papeterie Farnsworth Papeterie 226 >>* co io i— ( io NO t-^ tN ^^o O ON en to cn •-- 1 ro 00 NO ON OO NOOON ITN O c<-> r-1 u-i On t^ OO OO NO NO NO 'HH-'f a 1-1 o 8 co co <» 5 t^- r^» »— ■ >-o •3 ooon ^h i— i co o» r-i I_l d »-H t^ 00'— I t^ O0ON t^ OO OS 03 0) o 3.2 o OO CO OO VO >-o cS ui ON On On NO NO csi rv) c3 P On OO OO OO _; t-~ t-~ t^I^ ■•-> d — i »-l i— < I— 1 i— i i—i rH ^-H ■S1 U5 ti > H $ 03 o OOO o OO OO CD o OO CO CO LO iy-> U-) r-~ r~- C^ 03 w 4-1 3 1^ t^-r-- t-^ 00 OO OO m <^» r— ; t/2 co MCSN ~ o •— " »H n 0, a! H NO t~- t^- CO NO NO"") NO LO ^3 'Si a o C fe t^ NNm ll CO ^h u-i -hO^hh l-O C~l l» r-j c-i t~» t^- VhQ to OO NO C~l NO c^ T3 Eh t>! VONON NO ■*in Tflfl fi 0) 0) c -1 o <3 60 C/5 _g NO uriNUI On CO -HH tr> ■* w t^^< ^t 1 NO CO -HH 't 1 ON 3 vd ■*ioN tH tn ■* f<-> CO C pq T3 T3 ubstan Weigh Basis 17x22 c^ CO <"N> O CS oo r-J 00 CN to CS m TJH c<-> cN m CN CO > CO > 1— 1 •-H J= ID I 1 bJD H-J Ih O c l-l t-l o >> o C u- O O ^ < s U Q fe Weddings and Paps. graphs Annjr Stationery Typewriter Papers Writing Special Papers Eagle-A Line 227 / flrfTunimmTTnmrmrrrrmm Arden Wedding The First WEDDING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (un watermarked) ARDEN WEDDING has the purest white color that it is possible to obtain in paper. It is made of all new white rags in order to provide a base stock capable of meeting the most exacting appearance requirement that may be demanded of paper for engraved announcements and invitations. It is supplied both in lawn and plated vellum finishes in single or pasted sheets. Arden Wedding is the first grade of the Eagle-A Line of Weddings, as indicated by the Wedding Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 227. GENERAL USE — Arden Wedding is adapted to the following uses when a paper of highest quality is required — Stationery Envelopes Social Stationery Wedding Announcements Advertising Announcements Catalog Containers Greeting Cards Mailing Cards Menus Programs Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Rotogravure " Die Stamping " Wood Cuts The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms 'of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 21^ x 33—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE ONLY 2\y 2 x (33)— 60^— 76 LAWN FINISH PLATED VELLUM PASTED STOCK 21^ x (33)— 2-60^'s— 3-60^'s Sealed in Yi reams, pasted stock in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Arden Wedding can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Arden Wedding is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [228] Samples — Actual samples of Arden Wedding can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Arden Wedding in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 247, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, and special colors of Arden Wedding can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 2,750 pounds. BUT if Arden Wedding (white only) is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 2,750 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Arden Wedding can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 58" to 66"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 22". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 34". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Arden Wedding is 22" x 34" with the grain parallel to the 34" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Arden Wedding can be made in is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ARDEN WEDDING ENVELOPES Arden Wedding Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Arden Wedding, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [2291 Typewriter Papers Eagle-A Line Biscay Wedding The Second WEDDING Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) Uliiimimiimmiim.iimmmk BISCAY WEDDING is made with the same care and atten- tion as Arden, but from materials slightly lower in grade. It is supplied in six colors and white in lawn or plated vellum finishes, either single or pasted sheets. Biscay is the second grade of the Eagle-A Line of Weddings, as indicated by Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 227. GENERAL USES — Biscay Wedding is an excellent choice for any of the following purposes and especially when a variety of colors is desired — Advertising Announcements Menus Envelopes Programs Greeting Cards Tickets Mailing Cards Stationery Envelopes Social Stationery Wedding Announcements IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Rotogravure " Die Stamping " Wood Cuts The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and_ COLORS— Basis 21 ^ x 33—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE 2\y 2 x (33)— 53— 60^—76 Buff Blue Gray Pink Green Lavender 223^ x (33)— 60>£ LAWN FINISH PLATED VELLUM PASTED STOCK 21^ x (33)— 2-60^'s— 3-60^'s Sealed in J^ reams, pasted stock in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Biscay Wedding can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Biscay Wedding is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [2301 Samples — Actual samples of Biscay Wedding can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Biscay Wedding in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 247, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, and special colors of Biscay Wedding can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,300 pounds. BUT if Biscay Wedding in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities of less than 3,300 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Biscay Wedding can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multi- ple of which equals 58" to 66"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maximum 22". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 34". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Biscay Wedding is 22" x 34" with the grain parallel to the 34" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Biscay Wedding can be made in is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. BISCAY WEDDING ENVELOPES Papers Biscay Wedding Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized Eagl6-/l manufacturer. Ijg When ordering envelopes specify Biscay Wedding, weight, color, finish, quantity Dpi and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74). If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. ""' Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. 231 Chesterfield Papeterie The First PAPETERIE Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) 'mmnnmnnmmnmmrflfc CHESTERFIELD PAPETERIE is designed to meet the most exacting requirements for social stationery. The colors are clear and delicate and the various finishes are designed to give a quality appearance containing nothing of the bizarre. Chesterfield Papeterie is supplied in white and seven colors in lawn or plated vellum. Pasted stock for cards in either finish is also available. Chesterfield Papeterie is the first Papeterie Grade as indi- cated by the Papeterie Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 227. GENERAL USES — Chesterfield Papeterie can be recommended for the following — Advertising Stationery Announcements Menus Envelopes Greeting Cards Programs Social Stationery- Mailing Cards Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Rotogravure " " Die Stamping " Wood Cuts The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 2V/ 2 x 33—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE AND COLORS White Pink Violet Blue Buff Gray Green l\y 2 x (33)— 60^ LAWN FINISH PLATED VELLUM PASTED STOCK 2VA x (33) — 2-603^'s— 3-60^'s Sealed in J^ reams, pasted stock in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Chesterfield Papeterie can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. [232 1 Where Stocked — Chesterfield Papeterie is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Chesterfield Papeterie can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Chesterfield Pape- terie can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 3,850 pounds. BUT if Chesterfield Papeterie in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 3,850 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Chesterfield Papeterie can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 43" to 63"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 22". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 34". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Chesterfield Papeterie is 22" x 34" with the grain parallel to the 34" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Chesterfield Papeterie can be made in is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. CHESTERFIELD PAPETERIE ENVELOPES Chesterfield Papeterie Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Chesterfield Papeterie, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [2331 graphs fur Dorrington Papeterie The Second PAPETERIE Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UN WATERMARKED ) •liminiiimiiiiiiiiiiiiiimiink DORRINGTON PAPETERIE is a high-grade paper suitable for almost all papeterie requirements. It is supplied in seven colors and in lawn and plated vellum finishes. Pasted sheets of Dorrington Papeterie in white and colors are also available. Dorrington Papeterie is the second Papeterie Grade as indicated by the Papeterie Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 227. GENERAL USES — Dorrington Papeterie offers a wide range of colors that adapts it particularly for the following uses — Advertising Announcements Menus Greeting Cards Programs Mailing Cards Tickets Stationery Envelopes Social Stationery Wedding Announcements IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Rotogravure " " Die Stamping " Wood Cuts The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis IV/2 x 33—SOO sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE AND COLORS White Blue Violet Buff Pink Green Gray 21^x(33)— 53— 60J^ FINISHES Plated Vellum, Lawn PASTED BRISTOL (WHITE AND COLORS) 2\Y 2 x (33)— 2-53's— 3-53's 2iy 2 x (33)— 2-60^'s— 3-60^'s Sealed in Y 2 reams, pasted stock in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Dorrington Papeterie can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Dorrington Papeterie is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [234] Samples — Actual samples of Dorrington Papeterie can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Dorrington Papeterie in cut sheets with envelopes to match in size and color can be found in the Announcement Line, page 247, carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Dorrington Papeterie can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 7,500 pounds. BUT if Dorrington Papeterie in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,100 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard finishes can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 550 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 7,500 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE DORRINGTON PAPETERIE ENVELOPES Dorrington Papeterie Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Dorrington Papeterie, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [2351 graphs Dorrington Papeterie can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 72"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- DIGO mum 22". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 34". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Dorrington Papeterie is 22" x 34" with the grain parallel to the 34" dimension. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Dorrington Papeterie can be made in is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. Eagle-A Farnsworth Papeterie The Third PAPETERIE Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (unwatermarked) llMmn.inmmiimiimm. FARNSWORTH PAPETERIE is recommended for many of the less exacting social stationery requirements, especially where economy is a consideration. It is supplied in a range of white and seven colors in sectional linen or calender vellum finishes. White and colors are available in pasted sheets. Farnsworth Papeterie is the third Papeterie Grade as indi- cated by the Papeterie Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 227. GENERAL USES — Farnsworth Papeterie is adapted for the following pur- poses — Advertising Stationery Announcements Menus Envelopes Greeting Cards Programs Social Stationery- Mailing Cards Tickets IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Rotogravure " " Die Stamping " Wood Cuts The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 1\Y 2 x 33—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) WHITE AND COLORS White Buff Blue Green Gray Pink Lavender 2\y 2 x (33)— S3— 6oy 2 SECTIONAL linen CALENDER VELLUM PASTED STOCK (White and Colors) 2\y 2 x (33)— 2-53's— 3-53's— 2-60^'s— 3-60^'s Sealed in }/% reams, pasted stock in packages of 100 sheets. Packed 600 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Farnsworth Papeterie can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Farnsworth Papeterie is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. [236] Samples — Actual samples of Farnsworth Papeterie can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Farnsworth Pape- terie can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 10,000 pounds. BUT if Farnsworth Papeterie in the required color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard plate finishes can be furnished in minimum quantities of 550 pounds, but calendered finishes require at least 1,650 pounds. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities of less than 10,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE. Farnsworth Papeterie can only be made in rolls in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 64" to 72", but the minimum must be 16" MilUGO- and maximum 36". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Farnsworth Papeterie is 36" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. However, the maximum size possible in plate finished sheets is 22" x 34", with the grain parallel to the 34" dimension. Sheets 21J^" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be de- livered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Farnsworth Papeterie can be made in is 20 pounds, the maximum 40 pounds. . Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. FARNSWORTH PAPETERIE ENVELOPES Farnsworth Papeterie Envelopes to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify Farnsworth Papeterie, weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. [237] graphs Anno Mimeograph Papers OF EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS MIMEOGRAPH paper, as the term implies, has been de- veloped for use in connection with the mimeograph dupli- cating machine. The principal characteristic of these papers is a high degree of absorbency. This is demanded in order that the sheets as mimeographed may stack without any blurring of the ink. Ink must strike into the surface at once. For mimeograph papers of a better class which may be used for mailing purposes or for preservation, some attention must be given to appearance. Great strength cannot be expected in papers of this type because the proper absorbency can be obtained only at a sacrifice of strength in the paper. The requirements to be met by mimeograph papers are, there- fore, much more limited than for most other papers. Conse- quently, the Eagle-A Line of Mimeograph Papers contains but two grades. Both of these papers have the same degree of absorbency, but the first grade possesses also a high color and exceptionally uniform texture which give it the necessary appear- ance demanded for high-class mimeograph work. In the following pages, which are devoted to detailed descrip- tions of the Eagle-A Mimeograph Papers and include a relative Chart on page 239, the proper distinction between these grades is drawn and recommendations for specific uses are made. These two Mimeograph grades of the Eagle-A Line meet all requirements: GRADE Semi-Perm. I Temporary II NAME COLOR Peerless White Delta White and three colors [238] •^ P C-) to 3 c r-H l^ CO VO C-l oo MD OS co co CN C^) 0» M C0 a) Ih I— 1 T*< ^H -^H «5 g a r- ~h t^ ^H •8 & rt n ui t«» vy-1 (-». OJPL, (U o a 4-> TO 3 w> 10 u-1 u-i >» o ft §3 co co VO VO CO CO VO vd 4-> 3 CO CO CO CO CO CO •43 o< .3 *H 0) CD Ih CO I-H CO i-H nj U VO to VO ui 1h H CN co CN CO cti .9 a CD CD .Q CD & "3 CI ■* CO ■* C/5 g"B O O o o $M I" J3 Ph en OO CO VO ■* CN CO CD 0) JH t -1 o Oh 60 rt _g o vo 1^ .— 1 O VO t^ ^H Uh w bJO 3 1—1 (V) i— 1 CN O CD s -P -in 2 * VO o VO O PH m i) ~r i-H CN I— 1 (-si • ¥-H CO HH t— 1 I— 1 0) *d cd (4 C/3 CO o CD Ih Q graphs Stationery Typewriter Papers Writing Special Papers Eagle-A Line Refere [239 Peerless Mimeograph The First MIMEOGRAPH Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (watermarked "peerless mimeograph") utiiiiiiti'iiiiititiu'iiiiiitmiim PEERLESS MIMEOGRAPH is a mimeograph paper pos- sessed of the degree of absorbency required for this specialized use. It is made under conditions that insure uniformity of surface and ability to furnish an exceptional number of good, clear copies from a single stencil. It is supplied in laid formation and a clear white color only. The paper is especially attractive in appearance. Peerless Mimeograph is the first grade of the Eagle-A Line of Mimeograph Papers as indicated in the Mimeograph Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 239. GENERAL USES — Peerless Mimeograph is recommended for use in the follow- ing cases where mimeographed matter is to be mailed to outside addresses or to be subjected to more than ordinary handling and exposure — IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Mimeographing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. The right side of the sheet for printing (or felt side) faces the reader when the watermark reads correctly from left to right. SIZES and WEIGHTS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets. Trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) white laid only 17 x (28)— 2oy 2 —2sy 2 (22) x 34 —32 —40 16x(26)— —22 17 x (22)— 16— 20 17x(26)— —233^ Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Peerless Mimeograph can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Peerless Mimeograph is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Peerless Mimeograph can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. [2401 NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Peerless Mimeo- graph can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 8,000 pounds. BUT if Peerless Mimeograph (white only) is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 1,650 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 3,300 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities of less than 8,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Peerless Mimeograph can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 66" to 75"; but the minimum must be 17" and the maxi- mum 37%". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Peerless Mimeograph is 37J^" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Peerless Mimeograph can be made in is 16 pounds, the maximum 24 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ENVELOPES The following Eagle-A papers in envelope form are suitable for use with Peerless Mimeograph paper: Acceptance Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 124 Norman Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 126 Telephone Bond, Sub. 20-24— Page 128 Envelopes made of these papers to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify any one of the papers above with the weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. 241 fiumnnmnuiimmmmftfa Delta Mimeograph The Second MIMEOGRAPH Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY- STANDARDS (UNWATERMARKED ) DELTA MIMEOGRAPH possesses the required absorbency for mimeograph use. It is supplied in laid formation in white, pink, blue and buff". Delta Mimeograph is the second grade of the Eagle-A Line of Mimeograph Papers as indicated on the Mimeograph Chart of Relative Quality-Standards on page 239. GENERAL USES — Delta Mimeograph is recommended for uses as a mimeo- graph paper for intra-company work, or for special bulletins where the printed matter is of a temporary nature — IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type, line cuts, Ben Day plates, coarse stipple) " " Mimeographing The various types of impress as indicated above are those which can be success- fully applied under ordinary conditions. The application of other forms of impress is left to the judgment of the printer. SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS— Basis 17 x 22—500 sheets to ream. Flat sheets, trimmed four sides, stocked as follows: (Grain runs parallel to dimension in parentheses.) white, pink, buff and blue laid 17 x (22)— 16 —20 (22) x 34— 32— 40 17x(28)— 20^—25^ Sealed in reams, packed 500 to 600 pounds to case. Prices — Prices of Delta Mimeograph can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. Where Stocked — Delta Mimeograph is carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given on the first inside page of Price List. Samples — Actual samples of Delta Mimeograph can be found in the Eagle-A Cabinet of Sample Books. This cabinet, or samples for dummies, can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. NON-STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ORDERS for special sheet sizes, special substance weights, special finishes and special colors of Delta Mimeograph can be taken only for a definite delivery in quantities of not less than 15,000 pounds. BUT if Delta Mimeograph in the re- [242] quired color is being run at the mill at the time the paper is desired, or if the buyer can wait until it is to be run, then — Non-standard sheet sizes can be cut in any lengths or widths described below in minimum quantities of 2,200 pounds. Non-standard substance weights can be furnished under the same conditions in minimum quantities of 4,400 pounds. Non-standard finishes in this grade are not made. Under no condition can non-standard colors be made in quantities less than 12,000 pounds. NON-STANDARD SHEET SIZES POSSIBLE TO MAKE Delta Mimeograph can be made only in widths (dimension across the grain) a multiple of which equals 80" to 88"; but the minimum must be 16" and the maxi- mum 44". Sheets can be cut from these widths in lengths (dimension parallel to the grain) from 16" to 52". Thus the maximum sheet size possible to make in Delta Mimeograph, in colors, is 44" x 52" with the grain parallel to the 52" dimension. Sheets 34" wide by any length between the limits given above can often be delivered more quickly than sheets in other widths, because this is the width of the rolls from which the standard size sheets are cut, and it is sometimes possible to cut sheets from these rolls in special lengths before the rolls have been sheeted. NON-STANDARD SUBSTANCE WEIGHTS POSSIBLE TO MAKE The minimum substance weight that Delta Mimeograph can be made in is 16 pounds, the maximum 24 pounds. Important Notice: When an order is ready to be placed for making paper, it is always advisable to get in touch with an Eagle-A Service House because conditions at the mill may permit the company to meet the buyer's requirements more closely than the provisions set forth above would indicate. ENVELOPES The following Eagle-A papers in envelope form are suitable for use with Delta Mimeograph paper: Acceptance Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 124 Norman Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 126 Telephone Bond, Sub. 20-24 — Page 128 Envelopes made of these papers to fit any printed piece can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. When ordering envelopes specify any one of the papers above with the weight, color, finish, quantity and style. (Envelope styles shown on pages 71-74.) If possible, send sample dummy showing the above. Important: Complete information regarding Envelopes given on pages 68-75. 243 Converted Forms of Ragle- A Papers SMALL SHEETS AND CARDS WITH ENVELOPES TO MATCH — BOXED STATIONERY — TYPEWRITER PAPERS — WRITING TABLETS Several of the various kinds and grades of Eagle-A Quality- Standard Papers are available in convenient and attractive forms for formal, social and commercial use. These converted papers are divided into the following. Eagle-A Announcement Papery Folded and flat sheets and cards — plain and paneled — with envelopes to match in both color and size 246-249 Wedding Announcements in Cabinets 250 Stork Announcements 251 Visiting Cards 252 Mourning Stationery 253 Boxed Stationery 254 Commercial Stationery Cabinets of sheets and envelopes to match 255-259 Typewriter Papers A grade for each requirement 260-273 Writing Tablets Nine grades 274 Eagle-A Quality-Standard Announcement Papers and Commer- cial Stationery are obtainable from Eagle-A Service Houses, stationers, printers, lithographers, engravers and from the sta- tionery departments of the better class of department stores. All grades of Quality-Standard Typewriter Papers are sold by stationers, and may also be obtained from Service Houses, printers, lithographers and engravers. Eagle-A Writing Tablets, in convenient sizes, are regularly stocked by the leading stationers, department stores and drug stores. 244 The Ragle- A Announcement Line CONSISTING OF FOLDED AND FLAT SHEETS AND CARDS (PLAIN AND PANELED), WITH MATCHED ENVELOPES IN COLOR AND SIZE, IN POPULAR SIZES FOR SOCIAL STA- TIONERY AND COMMERCIAL USES THE Eagle-A Announcement Line has been developed to give the printer, engraver and stationer a complete range of sheets and cards with envelopes to match made from Eagle-A Quality-Standard Papers, each of which has been carefully graded and standardized in content and process of making to produce the greatest possible uniformity and at the lowest cost. GENERAL USES A line such as this Announcement Line can be used, not only for social and station- ery purposes, but also with great effectiveness for advertising, business announce- ments, folders, envelope stuffers, mailing cards, menus, programs, tickets, etc., when the piece must express quality and conditions are such that it can be printed one at a time. Any single item in the Eagle-A Announcement Line can be obtained in bulk, packed separately in boxes, with the exception of Stork Announcements. A special feature of this line is the cabinets of Wedding Announcements and Stork Announcements which have been developed for printers and stationers to meet the occasions when comparatively small quantities are required. The cabi- nets are original in design and appearance and express taste and quality even to the most critical judgment. There are two general classes of paper into which this line may be divided — the first and a de luxe grade, the distinctive Deckle d'Aigle, a hand-fashioned paper, each piece of which, whether card or envelope, is deckled on all four edges. This paper is the extreme of quality and has strength and wearing surpassed only by the first grade of Eagle-A Bonds. The second class consists of fine quality-standard machine-made papers, care- fully graded in quality and price to fit all use-requirements. Printers and stationers may obtain a complete sample book, "Eagle-A An- nouncements for Social and Commercial Purposes," from their Service Houses on request. This book contains actual samples of every item in the Announcement Line, showing quality, styles and finishes. It is a book that will be found dis- tinctly helpful and convenient for anyone who buys this class of paper. [245] T3 D _r'o £•- ^ CO Ph cu rtW C/5 u -d CO E -d "o fa Xi.o o o *B ^1+4 Is S- 3 w .-B^ls 1 n m+3 a a U o g « 1-1 ° a_, ^ a tsSg 3 B -t> <»\Z w (D -H m*0 UM J;0 Bfl^V _ Q"g£ M §w 8 83 S SSP. O CU i *3 +J "S Oh jjj.o «••-; fcri co\~ Sh-i hH 3*a* § 8 ggB/sSfti ftilW 0+3 a&! £> .2*. a) c 3 ca 5 So* •2 m! S3 -a: M O. S^sp|? m a 2 S*d S o n! B 5*^— ' .« a m B CO bi) • o53.!2 >*aS^ co.B uuitCv CU B J3 _ .-2*S^ ft gC"i*dg^ oB OS§^ d »*3-2 ■8 o|2 1 §2 H*d ►J J> i*j -m ■a a S » K P b ^ B 3 «) fe w^ss-g-SI' -^ta c-9 <8 S ft .^k> a - +3 b c b a fa 2 T3 R B - -"^ B O O O <« «- jJ-4 fc-'TI-BW cs tu*>, c ..Q o c3 2»5 8 H | J S k s o*" k b*3 wx*3xt;'a «*j<»S 0^,0 ^_ C0>°C0 g CJ O B co M M ^42 M~T3 S^J a^-ss aH §o p.a " » ° . S B B B I •: 3 cu cu cu :w a g a a S-2 cu a b S-§c5 §11 B.S ooeeseoes cMeNicNicqcNeNicNicqeq X K M M CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO aw E a §"2 CO CO CO CO CO CO s ;\*^? *T3 - Ll — cu o a fx. jo 2b NC*S^I t- 1- 1~ t^ r- P. MMMMKH t& IO "^ "3 t~ t^ ^ CU l^.a -0 3 J" a W -a (73 U CO N i ^H CO vOt>0 oooo X X K X -^COCOCM asnsx X X X X xx-ex CO *0 c© W5 X X X X X XX X X X X XXX35 -<* cocoes CO CO CO CO =M!X X X X X ■^ CO CO CM CO CO CO CO CO ,._1C>1C^1CMC^C^C<1C<1C^<^C^CS1C^C^CNJCMCN1C t>-r-l> t-» C*- !>• t*» t- t*- WD iXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx; CO0000C0CO000000Q00000t>-t^I>-I>-I>-t>-l^r»I^F Stationery Typewriter Papers Writing Special Papers Eagle-A 0£ (a : 3: pq : .eg: a so o a SI'S* -_, a) 3t) 9"«s o « - "J o«S/-n ■e„+J '2'a'"S: .S a oS ■«*.„ r! * u *~i c n t>oo O* &> O O 1 ©* ^ CO CO CO CO CO CO u Oh _o > W 1/3 S-H 1) CO GO d C/3 ■M CO oJ. ,fl Ot3 ■^ ^f CO CO W5 1/3 lO U5 W3 H3 lOioioicccncoM IJ to i N*\^ CO 00 lOiOifliOSNNN < (3 D CU^ 2 . a a-a-a-S ■■S as t;x> ts.2 e g * IP xl OJ i-. o o c3 >«> »i S i • £ She .cdtri'a rt a^-g ""'S sua £ H QIU B »oS H W o s +3 2 9 cu: :=!.q o +j v o a "3 3 Pi tS'Scfl 5 C Q Pi o o 03 *o3 o "^ 3 S- O S M ™ ™ s a 2 n>1n & 43"S fl d O 8 a) m a. a -*> fla p ■ -* ■" i-g'S •2-s.a S3-- 6.2.3 T3 3-S O °'o O-g „r o o o o) «) x! "ltd fp n S-2 iS a ^_ "5S w") 5: lo o t-; o X X X X CO CO ^t* ^ t* CD 00 00 X X M M as x W5 kO iC CD d-d « J) o wra'G (US ft ^-s t3.S(N U — - at > Pi X X X X a x t* CD 00 00 X X X X XX X O WD ift CO l>.eO O0OO X X X X »3 a a S CO ^n c^ M .^< — ' CO is ft X-12^ to CO lO CO X X X X 35S5XX CO CO ^ Th CO CO "^ tH X X t~ to 00 00 K M X K ITS W3 W5 CO X X r* co 00 00 X X X X XX X CO CD CO CO CT3 Jj '" §w tu OJ 3 c c3 u tn .S8S a m5 o c^ CO ft.H Q I ft ^ 'la ^ oi.5•>■'•:• PAC a boxe cards, enve d1 ribl I 1 Si s C/5 \ #1 *« 4-» K 1 c '•?' \ OJ CKED s are each irvice P \ 6 v'SvX 0> u 8 g*s /•:-:•:■:- a HERE All it ocked agle-A ouse. 3 :^s o ': CI £ »Wffi each ained gle-A listed tn +? ra +? In o MPLE: les of y be ob ny E House rice Lis — _ — SA Samp ece ma Dm a :rvice itheP QJ CO 6 1 E 1-H >* > CM C3 . +a w N Gj tfl P5 & B ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 9 "o •o CO CO CO CO CO g ^ id ^ jg X ^ ^ o Ss > ft* o a) o O pq o pq a ►J 0) rM 4J *c3 '3 'J3 2 3 s s S s g Stationery Typewriter Papers Writing Special Papers Eagle-A 1 251] id u^C" Oh O «— -H !> a w a CO Id u > ^4 0i C S fe S S £ ft— 5 nlXi o « IO ft : -d > V O K Ph n .. o ^"2 o O o 4J Q W M O 01 h « — *4 u „: (jo) i oO of MS M CO o * <* W o-SWcjft £j Sg^ 3 >>h2 £3 3 ftS d 8 co S t 1 « w E i—i 2 tJoi « rr o ™ W o T3 D-d a> i-. «j rj _j w Jh Ctf tf I-. U 3 i-j i»oi^ija«)«i O o-d: J> iu-2^ 03 a BH cs C^ X) " O fc o "> rt » B"s c O . N li r< ."V r! ' a 0) ■ ' (U Oh O > w a CO J-. u bJD a '5 u S o s 2w •s« o > a W a CO u dn l>>Oll)Tll«(Si« CO CC CO CO CO C3 •* X !«! X « X H M tH (M N CM (N N IN CM CO CO CO CO CO "st*' X K X M t* X X ^^^^ B 3- . « B g w oooeooe i> \o m ti< «5 * X « X X X X X ^ N W (N (N N (N OJ CO CO CO CO CO ^ X X X X X X X i-H CM Cq CM ?3 CM C-l i-H CM CM CM CM CM CM fl 2 w to"*" 3 w 73 .S goo T3 <3 "On °S^ a) ^2 S'd v U O. to rtCO 252 CO a o M "& o. M OJ ■*>,g p o.oj ^ja ■g a S'-'o'c a w d CO J-i u d W d co u u bJO d > bJO d "3 V-i d o •H .2 o > ■S« CO CO CO CO CO CO -^ X X X X X X X ^-i CM Sjs o 2 2 2 H f.SP-d 4_) +> cowco'co ^ ^ ? ? ^ ^ ^H 9 d "P 6 pq d d d 1 d 1 d d-« a> ^ CO 1 n M < pq Ji pq f? p? pq PQ writer Pa column) indicat .t head of columr. Ji Ji Ji i Ji Ji Ji 9 9 9 9 f=l 9 7 1 t$ 7 1 O d i pq d i 6 i pq 6 i pq d 1 pq l d i d i d i d i pq | Ji «? 7 1 ? I CD -^ ^O Q 6 i d 1 i i i d i d i d i d i d i 1 ■ 4-a « pq P5 pq pq pq pq PQ pq pq I < i < 4j i < i < 1 < 1 <1 1 "<1 Ji w E-" w o w 9 9 ^ => Q ^ ^ 7 1 ^ m d i PQ 6 i pq 6 i pq d i pq d i pq d i pq d i p? d i pq d i pq 1 o & « — i a ■4 Ji ^ Ji Ji A i — 1 O In oo pq i >— i > > i— i i— i > nd Not diffe U S3 CO a 8 s h «-" P-llD Si cdOn & > Png o.SP M" Wz" Z A" 8^x13 20 520 613 6M" W%" y%" 8J^x 13 24 524 613 6M» m" w Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Coupon Bond Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in the Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices Prices are shown in Price List. Samples Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. Envelopes Envelopes to match Coupon Bond Typewriter Paper may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. In Ordering Always specify grade name and stock number. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for covers of briefs, manuscripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Coupon Bond in standard sheet sizes, weights and colors is stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see page 112 for details. [263 1 Eagle-A Agawam Parchment and U. S. Linen Typewriter Papers fimmm mfUTnmrmtmmfi The Second TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of fj EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS (watermarked) mmnimmmnmminiminn TN this grade there are two papers from which to select. The ■*■ strength is relatively equal but the appearances differ. As indicated in the respective names, Agawam Parchment has a parchment finish, while U. S. Linen has the usual laid ^nish characteristic of linen papers. General Uses The papers in the second grade can be used when distinctive appearance, long life and great wearing qualities are required. Agawam Parchment Typewriter Paper (Ne Plus Ultra Line) Agawam Parchment Typewriter Paper consists of the second grade of Bond papers, "Agawam Bond" (described in detail on pages 114-115), in parchment finish, cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is made in white only. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Unruled Ruled or Jnruled Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Substance Sheet Substance Distance Left-hand Right-hand Size Weight Size Weight Lines Margin Margin 8 x 10H 7 8 x 13 7 6V 2 " lYs" %" 8 xlO^ 9 8 xl3 9 6V 2 " \w Vs" 8 x 10^ 11 8 x 13 11 6V 2 " w%" X" 8 xlO^ 13 8 x 13 13 6V2" m" X" 8 xlO^ 16 8 xl3 16 6V 2 " \y%" %" 8 xlOJ^ 20 8 x 13 20 6y 2 " iy s " Vs" 8 xlO^ 24 8 x 13 24 6V 2 " \y s " X" 8^x11 7 83^x13 7 7" w S A" 8^x11 9 83^ x 13 9 7" m" X" 8J^xll 11 8J^xl3 11 7" w Vs" 8^x11 13 8^x13 13 7" \y%" Vs" 8^x11 16 8^x13 16 7" IX" X" 8J^xll 20 8J^xl3 20 7" IX" Vs" 8Hx 11 24 8^x 13 24 7" ix" X" Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Information regarding samples, prices, where stocked, etc., is given on page 265. 264] U. S. Linen Typewriter Paper (Ne Plus Ultra Line) U. S. Linen Typewriter Paper consists of the first grade of linen papers, "U. S. Linen" (described in detail on pages 132-133), cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is a laid paper of very distinctive appearance and furnished in a cream white only. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Unruled Ruled or Unruled Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Substance Sheet Substance Distance Left-hand Right-hand Size Weight Size Weight Between Lines Margin Margin 8 x \0}4 9 8 x 13 9 6V 2 " W H" 8 x 10^ 11 8 xl3 11 6V 2 " W Vs" 8 x \0H 13 8 xl3 13 W iy s " Vs" 8 x 10J-3 16 8 xl3 16 6W IK" 3 A" 8 x 10}4 20 8 xl3 20 6H" \w %" 8 x 10}^ 24 8^x13 9 7" Ws" %" 83^x11 9 8^x13 11 7" \y%" H" 8J^xll 11 8^x13 13 7" Di" 3 A" 8^x11 13 8J^xl3 16 7" W Vs" 8^x11 16 8^x13 20 7" IK" K" 8^x11 20 83^x11 24 Packed 500 sheets to a box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Agawam Parchment and U. S. Linen Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in the Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices Prices are shown in Price List. Samples Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In Ordering Always specify grade name, size and substance weight, and whether ruled or unruled. Envelopes Envelopes to match Agawam Parchment and U. S. Linen Typezvriter Papers may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for covers of briefs, manuscripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Agawam Parchment and U. S. Linen in standard sheet sizes and weights are stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see pages 114 and 132 for details. [265] Eagle-A Line Roman, Persian Bond and Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Papers The Third TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS Umilllllllliimimiiiiimimnk The three papers in this grade are permanent papers, with good resistance to folding and tearing. They differ in appear- ance, Colonial Pro and Con being a laid paper while the other two are wove. General Uses This grade is recommended for use when permanency is essen- tial and a moderate resistance to handling is required. Roman Typewriter Paper (Ne Plus Ultra Line) Roman Typewriter Paper has been developed primarily as a typewriter paper and is made in very light weights so that it is especially adapted for use when many carbon copies are desired. It is furnished in white only. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Unruled Ruled or Unruled Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Substance Sheet Substance Distance Left-hand Right-hand Size Weight Size Weight Between Lines Margin Margin 8 x \0A 7 8 x 13 7 6H" Wi" H" 8 x \oy 2 9 8 x 13 9 6V 2 " W 3 A" 8 x 103^ 11 8 x 13 11 (>A" w Vs" 8 x \0A 13 8 x 13 13 6A" w Vs" 8 7L\0y 2 16 8 x 13 16 6V 2 " w Vs" 8 xlOJ^ 20 8 x 13 20 6y 2 " w%" Vs" 8 x \0A 24 8 x 13 24 6V 2 " m" H" 8^x11 7 8^x13 7 7" \y%" Vs" 8^x11 9 8^x13 9 7" IVs" Vs" 8^x11 11 8^x 13 11 7" Hi" y%" 8J^x 11 13 8^x13 13 7" \y%" Vs" 8^x11 16 8^x13 16 7" w Vs" 8^x11 20 8Hx 13 20 7" w H" 8J^x 11 24 8Jixl3 24 7" w H" Packed 500 sheets to a box. Two boxes to a package. Information regarding samples, prices, where stocked, etc., is given on page 267. Persian Bond Typewriter Paper (Light Gray Box Line) Persian Bond Typewriter Paper consists of the third bond grade of Eagle-A Quality-Standards — "Persian" (described in detail on pages 116-117) cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is furnished in white only. [266] Sizes, Weights and Ruling Substance Weight Stock No. Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Size Unruled Ruled Distance Between Lines Left-hand Margin Right-hand Margin 8 x 10K 8 xlOH 8 x 10K 8 xlO^ 8K* 11 8^x11 8Kxll 8^x11 8^x13 8^x13 8^x13 8^x13 8 xl3 8 xl3 8 x 13 8 x 13 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 313 316 320 324 413 416 420 424 513 516 520 524 713 716 720 724 613 616 620 624 813 816 820 824 6M" 6M" 6M" 6%" 6X" 6H" 6M" 6H" IK" m" w m" K" K" K" Vs" K" K" K" %" Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Paper (Ne Plus Ultra Line) Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Paper consists of the second linen grade of Eagle-A Quality-Standards, "Colonial Linen" (described in detail on pages 134-135), cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is a laid paper furnished in white. Sizes, Weights and Ruling. Unruled Ruled or Unruled Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Substance Sheet Substance Distance Left-hand Right-hand Size Weight Size Weight Lines Margin Margin 8 x 103^ 9 8 x 13 9 6V 2 " IK" K" 8 x 10H 11 8 x 13 11 6V 2 " IK" K" 8 xlO^ 13 8 x 13 13 6Y 2 " w K" 8 xlOJ^ 16 8 x 13 16 6y 2 " IX" H" 8 xlOJ^ 20 8 x 13 20 6K" w y%" 8 x!03^ 24 8 x 13 8K* 11 9 8^x13 9 7" IK" w 8^x11 11 8^x 13 11 7" iK" K" 8^x11 13 83^x13 13 7" w%" K" 8^x11 16 8^x13 16 7" ik" K" 8^x11 20 8K x 13 20 7" IK" K" /8Mx 11 24 Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked — Roman Typewriter Paper, Persian Bond, and Colonial Pro and Con are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in first page of Price List between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices are shown in Price List. Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In ordering, always specify grade name, size and substance weight, and whether ruled or unruled. Envelopes to match Roman, Persian Bond and Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Papers may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers — Manuscript Cover suitable as covers of briefs, manu- scripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Roman Typewriter Paper, Persian Bond and Colonial Pro and Con are stocked in standard sheet sizes, weights and colors by all Eagle-A Service Houses, see page 116, Persian Bond; page 134, Colonial Pro and Con (Colonial Linen). 12671 Eagle-A Line Contract Bond Typewriter Paper (DARK GREEN BOX LINE) The Fourth TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS (watermarked) CONTRACT BOND Typewriter Paper consists of the fourth bond grade — "Contract" (described in detail on page 118) cut in suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is furnished in white only. General Uses Contract Bond Typewriter Paper is recommended for use when a semi-permanent paper is required that will withstand a moderate amount of handling. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Substance Weight Stock No. Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Size Unruled Ruled Distance Between Lines Left-hand Margin Right-hand Margin 8 xl034 8 xl034 8 xlO}^ 8 xl0}4 81^x11 8J^xll 83^x11 83^x11 83^x13 83^x13 83^x13 83^x13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 xl3 8 x 13 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 313 316 320 324 413 416 420 424 513 516 520 524 713 716 720 724 613 616 620 624 813 816 820 824 6H" 6%" e%" 634" 634" 614" 6M" IK" m" w m" m» i% a m" w Vs" Vs" Vs" Vs" Vs" Vs" Vs" H" Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Contract Bond Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in first page of Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices are shown in Price List. Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In ordering, always specify grade name and stock number. Envelopes Envelopes to match Contract Bond Typewriter Paper may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for use as covers of briefs, manu- scripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Contract Bond in standard sheet sizes, weights and colors is stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see page 118 for details. [268] Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper (ORANGE BOX LINE) The Fifth TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS (watermarked) AIRPOST BOND Typewriter Paper consists of the fifth bond grade — "Airpost" (described in detail on page 120) cut in suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is furnished in white only. General Uses It is recommended for use when unusual appearance is de- manded and when a semi-permanent paper meets the use-re- quirements. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Sheet Substance Weight Stock No. Ruling — in red ink only Size Unruled Ruled Distance Between Lines Left-hand Margin Right-hand Margin 8 xlO^ 8 xlOJ^ 8 xl03^ 8 xlOJ^ 8^x11 8}ixll 8^x11 8^x11 8J^x 13 8J^xl3 8^x13 8J^xl3 8 x 13 8 xl3 8 xl3 8 x 13 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 313 316 320 324 413 416 420 424 513 516 520 524 713 716 720 724 613 616 620 624 813 816 820 824 6H" 6H" 6H" 6U" 6H" 6M" 6M" m" m" w W" Vs" %" Vs" Vs" Vs" %" Vs" w Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Airpost Bond Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in first page of Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices are shown in Price List. Samples Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In Ordering Always specify grade name and stock number. Envelopes Envelopes to match Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for use as covers of briefs, manu- scripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Airpost Bond in standard sheet sizes and weights is stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see page 120 for details. [269] Eagle-A Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper (ARMY BROWN BOX LINE) | The Sixth TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS (watermarked) CHEVRON BOND Typewriter Paper consists of the sixth bond grade — "Chevron" (described in detail on pages 122-123) cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is furnished in white only. General Uses Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper is recommended for use when special quality appearance is desired for semi-permanent use. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Sheet Size Substance Weight Stock No. Ruling — in red ink only Unruled Ruled Distance Between Lines Left-hand Margin Right-hand Margin 8 x 10^ 8 x 103-£ 8 xl0}4 8 xlOJ^ 83^x11 8^x11 8^x11 83^x11 83^x13 83^x13 83-3x13 83^x13 8 xl3 8 xl3 8 xl3 8 x 13 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 13 16 20 24 313 316 320 324 413 416 420 424 513 516 520 524 713 716 720 724 613 616 620 624 813 816 820 824 6%" 6%" 6H" 6%» 6M" 6M" 634" w Vs" Vs" Vs" %" K K Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Chevron Bond Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in first page of Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices are shown in the Price List. Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In Ordering always specify grade name and stock number. Envelopes Envelopes to match Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for covers of briefs, manuscripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Chevron Bond in standard sheet sizes and weights is stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see page 122 for details. [270] Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper (DARK GRAY BOX LINE) The Seventh TYPEWRITER PAPER Grade of EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS (watermarked) Uummmmmnmmimmmto ACCEPTANCE BOND Typewriter Paper consists of the seventh bond grade — "Acceptance" (described in detail on page 124) cut to suitable sizes and boxed for typewriter use. It is furnished in white only. General Uses Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper is recommended when a paper of good appearance is desired for temporary use. Sizes, Weights and Ruling Substance Stock No. Ruling — in red ink only Sheet Size Weight Unruled Ruled Between Lines Left-hand Margin Right-hand Margin 8 x 10M 13 313 8 x 10H 16 316 8 x 103^ 20 320 8 x 10H 24 324 8^x11 13 413 8^x11 16 416 &y 2 % 11 20 420 83^ xll 24 424 8J^xl3 13 513 613 6M" m* Vs" 83^x13 16 516 616 6M" Wt" %" 83^x13 20 520 620 &A" W&" w 83^x13 24 524 624 6%" m* 3 A" 8 x 13 13 713 ' 813 6M" m» Vs" 8 xl3 16 716 816 6X" \w Vs" 8 xl3 20 720 820 6H" m" 3 A" 8 x 13 24 724 824 6H" w Vs" Packed 500 sheets to box. Two boxes to a package. Where Stocked Acceptance Bond Typewriter Papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in the Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices are shown in Price List. Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. In ordering, always specify grade name and stock number. Envelopes to match Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper may be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses. Covers Manuscript Cover suitable for covers of briefs, manuscripts and documents is described in detail on page 273. Note: Acceptance Bond in standard sheet sizes, weights and colors is stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses — see page 124 for details. [271] Special Papers Eagle-A Quality Manifold Typewriter Paper EAGLE-A QUALITY-STANDARDS QUALITY MANIFOLD is cut from "Quality Manifold" paper made especially for typewriter use, in suitable sizes and boxed for convenience. It is an all-sulphite pulp sheet made in 8-pound substance weight only, in unglazed finish, in white and six colors. General Uses Quality Manifold is designed to serve where a large number of typewritten copies must be obtained and where a high degree of permanence is not a factor. Substance Weights Sizes, Weights, Colors Sheet Sizes 8 x 103^ 8 8*^x11 . 8 &A x 13 8 8 at 13 8 . COLORS White, Blue, Canary, Cherry, Green, Pink and Goldenrod. Packed 500 sheets to box — 2 boxes to package. Where Stocked Quality Manifold papers are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which can be found in first page of Price List, between back cover and end leaf of this book. Prices Prices are shown in Price List. Samples Samples can be obtained from any Eagle-A Service House. Quality Manifold, in basis weights 17" x 22" — 8, in the colors listed above, is obtainable in the following sheet sizes and weights: 24 x 34—16 ) 24 x 38—19^ \ Basis 17 x 22—8 28 x 34— 20}4 J Quality Manifold Typewriter Paper and standard sheet sizes are stocked by all Eagle-A Service Houses. [272] Manuscript Cover MANUSCRIPT COVER has been primarily developed for use as covers for briefs, typewritten manuscripts and other documents. It is an extremely tough, long lasting paper which resists much folding and hard usage. GENERAL USES — Manuscript Cover is recommended for uses which demand dignity of appearance, considerable handling and permanence, as follows: Legal Briefs Contracts Manuscripts Bids Typewritten Specifications IMPRESS — Suitable for Letterpress (type and line-cuts) " Offset press " " Steel plate, die stamping " " Typewriting " " Pen writing SIZES, WEIGHTS and COLORS — Manuscript Cover is stocked in legal sizes and weights as follows: 8V 2 x \Sy 2 —9K 9 x ISH—IO COLORS White, Primrose, Pink, Canary, Emerald, Chocolate, Blue, and Terra Cotta Put up in 100-sheet packages. Prices Prices of Manuscript Cover can be found in price list attached to this book between the last page and cover. Where Stocked Manuscript Cover can be obtained from all Eagle-A Service Houses and leading stationers. Eagle-A Line * Manuscript Cover can be obtained in sizes 17" x 31" — 37 pounds and 18" x 31° — 40 pounds through any Eagle-A Service House. [273] Writing Tablets IN deference to many requests which have come for Eagle-A bonds in tablet form the American Writing Paper Company has placed upon the market a series of writing tablets made in three sizes— 5^" x 8^", 7^' x 10^" and 8%" x 11". These are bound the short way in good cover stock hand- somely printed in two colors and contain a ruled sheet, blotter, and from 50 to 100 sheets of paper. A gauze cloth and a special glue hold the sheets firmly together, so that the annoyance of loose sheets is eliminated, a feature that will commend itself to every user of writing pads. The stock used comprises the nine grades of Eagle-A bonds; a different colored cover distinguishes each grade. The sizes and distinguishing cover colors of the Eagle-A Writing Tablets are shown as follows: Grade Weight Cover Colors Sizes Coupon Bond 201b. Columbia Blue PAxVA, 7H* 10J4 8^x11 Agawam Bond 201b. Green 5^x8M, 7^x10^,8^x11 Persian Bond 201b. Granite 5y 2 xsy 2 ,7Hxioy 2 ,8y 2 xn Contract Bond 201b. Shamrock Green 5y 2 x8y 2 ,7yxioy 2 ,8y 2 xii Airpost Bond 201b. Mandarin 5y 2 x8y 2 ,sy 2 xii Chevron Bond 201b. Army Brown sy 2 x8y 2 ,8y 2 x\\ Acceptance Bond 201b. Oxford Gray Sy x 8y, plain and ruled Norman Bond 201b. Fawn Sy 2 x 834 Plain Telephone Bond 201b. Gold Sy x 8y, plain and ruled The tablets are wrapped 12 to a package and labeled with quantity, grade and size. Eagle-A Writing Tablets are carried in stock by all Eagle-A Service Houses, a list of which is given in the Price List. Envelopes for use with the writing tablet sheets are made from Eagle-A bonds in commercial, baronial and official styles. These can be obtained from each Eagle-A Service House. The United States Envelope Company is the authorized manufacturer. Prices of Eagle-A Writing Tablets can be found in Price List attached to this book, between the last page and cover. [274] Specialties and Industrial Papers The successful manufacture of Specialties and Industrial Papers depends very largely on close co-operation between the user and a manufacturer possessing widely diversified equip- ment, a corps of experts in all the problems of paper manufacture, an operating personnel especially trained in the production of paper possessing unusual qualities, and a laboratory completely equipped and efficiently manned. Papers for specialty and industrial uses are either satisfactory or virtually useless. There is no middle ground in many cases. In order to insure a margin of safety for his operation, the user will often demand that his paper be made according to definite specifications which he arbitrarily establishes. This does not always result satisfactorily to either party concerned because of the numerous factors to be considered in the manu- facture of the paper. The user is interested in performance, not in specifications. The translation of use-requirements into terms of definite tests is extremely difficult and should not be attempted save by experts both in the interpretation of tests and in actual paper-making. THE CORRECT USE OF SPECIFICATIONS All specifications must be drafted in the light of complete knowledge of the use-requirements, the raw materials that go into the paper, the manufacturing equipment and the methods of processing. This means that both maker and user must pool their knowledge of requirements, raw materials and manu- facturing methods in order to develop a paper suitable for the purpose. When this point has been reached it is proper to draft specifi- cations to control manufacture. The indeterminate factors dependent on manufacturing equipment and the human element will be the same in all future orders, for the paper will always be made in the same mill. Specifications will then be used only to insure uniformity of product. In this way, there is no temptation for the manufacturer to be satisfied by meeting certain tests and to consider his work com- plete when that stage is reached. His interest in the product does not end until the paper has successfully fulfilled the purpose for which it was designed. DEVELOPMENT OF SPECIAL AND TECHNICAL PAPERS Specialty and industrial papers must be developed by the users coming into close contact with the men who will make the paper. There is no place for a distributor in this relation- [2751 ship except for specialties of more general use. His lack of familiarity with either manufacturer or user will only be a handicap, no matter how good his intent may be. For this reason negotiations concerning manufacture of these papers are conducted by the manufacturing department and the technical stafF of the American Writing Paper Company. The ordinary salesman is not concerned with this, for there is little he can do. The successful development of paper for these uses can be secured with the least delay when the manufacturer is allowed to make a complete study of the operations which the paper must undergo. His knowledge of paper materials and methods, plus the knowledge of particular use-requirements, will enable him to outline the entire manufacturing process and establish such specifications as will insure satisfactory performance. EXPERIMENTAL EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIALTY AND INDUSTRIAL PAPERS Many paper-makers hesitate over the development of new specialties because of the experimental nature of the first orders. These destroy the balance of a mill and in some cases do not lead to any further business. For such purposes the American Writing Paper Company has available an experimental paper machine arranged to make any grade of paper that may be called for. On this machine the operating details are worked out and trial orders are made until the right sort of product has been developed. The orders are then transferred to the mill best suited for making them and this mill is furnished with a full set of instructions as to the exact procedure to be followed during manufacture. Each specialty made by this company is confined to a particu- lar mill and almost always to a single machine in that mill. Since a specialty which may only amount to one per cent, of the company's business will keep a machine running six months of the year, the mill is able to establish a definite practice for every step of the operation and to train the workmen so that to all intents and purposes the paper is standardized as much as any item of the Primary Line. The more important specialties made by the American Writing Paper Company to meet the requirements of different classes of manufacturers are described below. No two manufacturers in these classes will require identical qualities in the paper that is made for them because their operating conditions will differ. Consequently, no complete description of any of these papers can be published. In the following pages are brief descriptions of the more familiar specialties which are made by the American Writing Paper [276] Company. The Manufacturing Department and the Depart- ment of Technical Control of the American Writing Paper Com- pany are always ready to co-operate with a user in the drafting of specifications for a particular requirement or to assist in the development of new papers for new uses. Album Papers These papers are made in solid colors, particularly in black and gray. They are designed primarily for making up albums for photographs. A soft surface which will take paste without cockling is essential. The paper must be free of impurities which would discolor the print. Bag Paper Paper for bags must be quite well sized and at the same time have a surface that will take paste readily. A high tensile strength is also necessary for most purposes. All sorts of bags are made for numerous requirements, and consequently a variety of raw materials is used. Candy bags are usually made from materials similar to those used in a low grade bond because good color and appearance are required. For cement bags, strength is the only consideration. These represent the two extremes. Box Boards Single and double white patent coated, news and chip board, used for paper boxes. Box Covers Fancy boxes are made by pasting sheets of special high-grade paper to a box board base. These papers come in a variety of surfaces and numerous colors. Several contrasting colors often appear in the same sheet, giving unusual and striking effects. Papers for Chemical Processes and Operations Filter Paper, used by pharmacists, photographers, chemists and chemical manufacturers for clarifying solutions. Hard Fiber Paper is the base paper used in the manufacture of various kinds of vulcanized fiber. The paper is subjected to chemical processes during conversion into the finished product. Nitrating Paper is treated with nitric and sulphuric acid to form cellulose nitrate as a preliminary step in the manufacture of celluloid. Chart Papers The various grades of these papers are used by lithographers for map and chart printing. The paper must have a minimum of distortion when subjected to the action of moisture. Coating Papers Specia | Include a variety of papers designed for the application of coating com- PaOfifS pounds to obtain a glossy surface or other effect. Construction Paper Eagle-A This is a soft paper supplied in a wide range of colors. It is used for cheap , LlflB mounts and in kindergarten work for the construction of a variety of paper n objects. J Gi Calender Roll Paper Is a soft, long-fibered paper, readily laminated by the application of pressure and used in the construction of pressure finishing rolls. ||)|j| Drawing Paper Is a fairly absorbent paper with sharp tooth for pencil work. It must be of good color, cream white rather than blue white being preferred. Its name describes its principal use. [277] Duplex Papers Where a paper having two surfaces different in color, formation and appear- ance is required, the American Writing Paper Company is equipped to produce this effect upon a special combination of cylinder and Fourdrinier machines. Greater uniformity of results is obtained with a paper con- structed in this manner as the defects of one type of machine are offset by the other. Facing Paper Is a soft paper of very uniform formation and surface, made in white and colors. Appearance is more essential than strength because the paper is usually pasted to a cardboard or similar base. For many purposes where a pasted sheet of three or more ply is required the inside sheets may be of inferior quality, serving only to add thickness and stiffness to the card. Facing paper is designed for use where it can be reinforced in this way. The sheet is made so as to take paste readily while showing no tendency to curl after pasting. It must reflect light uniformly. Food Containers Paper is used for a variety of food containers. Among the more important are those designed for conversion into Butter Dishes Coffee Bags Ice Cream Pails Cake Circles Drinking Cups Oyster Pails Gumming Papers Paper made primarily for the application of an adhesive. In addition to this characteristic, certain gumming papers must have high tensile strength — sealing tape being an example. Made in white and colors. Jute Bristols A sheet of unusual toughness, having high tearing strength and used for shipping tags and job forms, etc. Map Papers These are - light-weight papers having all the properties of chart paper and in addition considerable folding endurance, necessary in their use in books and folders. Music Roll Paper As the name indicates, this paper is used for the manufacture of player-piano rolls. It must be strong and tough and subject to a minimum of stretch or shrinkage with changes of atmospheric moisture. Pattern Paper The paper used for patterns is light in weight in order to reduce the bulk. The sheet must be well closed and extremely tough and strong in order to resist handling. High-grade materials are required to meet these require- ments. Pencil Paper Is used for the manufacture of paper lead pencils. It must have a well closed formation, free from lumps. When cut, it should present a true, fine edge. Papers for Printing Processes These papers are not printed upon but are used in connection with certain methods of printing. Prominent among them are: Chalk Overlay Paper Medio Board Photo Mounts These are demanded in a variety of styles. They may be solid or pasted stock, possibly with deckle edges. Photo mounts are usually in colors and may be plain or mottled. They are made in numerous finishes from antique to plated and embossed. [2781 Special Printing Papers Certain methods of printing of a specialized nature require a printing surface out of the ordinary. Two examples of this class follow: Gelatine Board must possess a smooth surface which is hard enough to stand the use of tacky inks without picking. It must change in dimen- sion but slightly when wet. Ticker Paper is designed for use with news or stock tickers and cash registers. Safety Paper Checks and railroad tickets, among other similar types, are printed on a special paper impregnated with chemicals which render alteration or erasure impossible without detection. These papers are made according to special formulae. Usually some part of the chemicals used for protection is added by the paper-maker. The rest of the formulae is applied by the converter. Sand Paper Base An especially strong and durable paper is required for the base paper for sand or emery paper because of the severe use to which it is subjected. Paper for Sensitizing Processes Blueprint Paper is the most widely used paper of this class. The develop- ment of semi-automatic printing machinery for making blueprints has called for the development of a paper of exceptional strength when wet and the general use-requirements demand great resistance to wear under all condi- tions. The paper is supplied generally in three grades and in various weights, all of which are made on a basis of definite physical tests. Brown Print Paper. The brown print process requires that the paper be printed through in order to make a positive of the original drawing. This necessitates a thin sheet of high transparency. The severe handling which this paper receives, together with the transparency required, limits it to one grade, an all rag paper made from the highest quality of raw materials throughout. Photographic Paper. The paper which after coating and sensitizing is used for photographs presents more difficulties than are encountered in making almost any other sort of paper. The highest grades of material are used and every care exerted that the surface may be just right to coat properly. The most skillful workmanship is required throughout the manufacture. Photostat Papers are a variety of photographic papers but less rigorous in their demands, for absolute perfection of surface is not so essential. Shado-Craft Watermarking This method of watermarking is a combination of the old-style outline method together with its reverse. The design on the old-style dandy roll is raised and thins the sheet at the points of contact. Consequently, when the sheet is held to the light, the design appears lighter than the surrounding paper. In Shado-Craft watermarking, the design is chiefly intaglio — that is, lower than the surface of the dandy roll, and thickens the sheet at the points of contact. Consequently, the mark appears darker in the finished sheet, and Eagle shading effects are possible. j ling These marks find their chief demand among large users who desire a special letterhead, or other form, bearing their own trade mark or identification. The marks are localized — that is, centered in the final cut sheet. By means of this process, the beautiful shaded effects heretofore produced only in imported hand-made papers can be secured in machine-made papers. The marks are of the same character as those appearing in the documents of our Department of State, Bank of England notes, French notes, and in practically all the paper money and stamps of foreign countries. It is an absolute safeguard and positively cannot be counterfeited. Since each demand requires special consideration, depending on the com- plexity of the design and other factors, those desiring such marks should see any Eagle-A Service House. [2791 Special Wrapping Papers The papers used for wrapping many manufactured articles must meet re- quirements that are often both unusual -and rigid. For these special pur- poses, strength, normally the prime requisite in wrapping paper, may be of minor importance. A whole list of papers that are made to meet special requirements in this class would be formidable. The following selections show the variety of qualities demanded. Acid or Alkali Proof Papers. This term is given to colored papers which must not fade or change color when exposed to acid or alkali. The range of dyes that can be used for such papers is quite limited. Anti-Rust Papers are required for wrapping objects of polished steel like ball bearings and fine tools. These papers are made of carefully selected materials free of traces of any corrosive compounds. Anti-Tarnish Paper. The paper used for wrapping silverware must not contain any compound that will induce tarnishing. Here again the raw materials, including the chemicals used in the manufacture, must be closely inspected. Black Wrapping Papers. A black wrapping paper is chosen whenever a light-proof wrapper is required. As this is most often essential in the case of photographic goods the principal requirement is absence of any material which would injure the delicate surface of dry plates, films or photographic paper. Obviously the paper must be uniform in texture and free from pin holes. Druggists' Wrapping. This is a high-grade wrapping paper often sup- plied in colors and in general partaking of the appearance and strength of a bond paper of the lower grades. These papers are often glazed on one side. Duplex Wrapping. Special colored wrappers are sometimes used to distinguish quickly between grades, weights, etc., of a commodity. To secure this effect and yet to obtain economy, the desired color is made upon one side only — the other side being invariably natural or lightly colored. Waxing Paper The general requirements to be met with in the manufacture of paper which is to be waxed are light weight, strength and a fair degree of transparency. Permanence is not a factor so that this paper is largely made from chemical wood pulp. Wrapper Special Mailing. These wrappers are used for mailing magazines, pamphlets and newspapers. [280] How to Plan Printed Salesmanship FORTUNATE indeed is the modern printer who has seized the strategic points of power in his business by developing creative rather than competitive effort. Under present-day- conditions, the field of printers seeking merely mechanical excellence is seen to be overcrowded. This situation is reflected in a state of price-cutting competition that has fathered a long line of evils, and induced pessimism and a lowered morale in printers who have fallen under its limitation. PRINTING DEPENDING ON BUSINESS Sales and circulation of money are the lifeblood of business. In conditions of business health, printing has always found its strength. When business drooped, printing has always suffered. Renewed impetus for business is the only logical remedy. BUSINESS DEPENDING ON PRINTING The restoration of both lies in the intelligent application of creative selling ability. The printer who has proved that he can produce vital, constructive printed salesmanship can supply a crying need. He is a man of power — no longer a mechanical tool to be used or flung aside as occasion serves. If business suffers, if sales fall away, he is the man who will be eagerly sought. The value of his services rises when business assets jail. The sales of his client are his chief concern — not keeping his own shop busy. That happens automatically as his clients sell and want to sell more. THE FIRST STEP Printers realize that they cannot create such printed salesman- ship — or control it — without giving time and attention to master- ing its principles. They must adjust their minds to an entirely new angle. In this crisis they turn instinctively to seek the man who has actually demonstrated these principles — who has himself built up a printing business by means of printed salesman- ship — as their authority and guide. In the person of Robert Ruxton, who after years of successful experience (as a writer salesman associated with a printer) has been induced to write a course in preparing and selling printed salesmanship, such an authority has happily been found. This course, published under the supervision of Joseph A. Borden, director of the Department of General Service of the American Writing Paper Company, is not for sale but is distributed to printers through the United Typothetae of America. [281] INVESTIGATION AND ANALYSIS Before printed salesmanship can be prepared for any business, the exact needs and situation of that business must be discovered. Something presumably is wrong that can be righted. These preliminary steps correspond to the investigations of a medical specialist before venturing upon diagnosis. The business specialist, likewise, must completely examine before he prescribes. He does not accept as final the conclusions or theories of the men who are conducting the business. By patient and persistent questioning, he analyzes a complicated situation as a mechanic takes apart a physical mechanism with his tools. Eventually he finds parts that are not functioning correctly, and traces a mass of miscellaneous symptoms to a few fundamental causes. THE PLAN OUTLINED Assured that the causes are thoroughly understood, he is in a position to decide what further course to follow. This decision may involve a large amount of printed literature or less; but it is in no sense to be judged from that point of view by the printer. Outlining the plan is the most important part of the whole work, and should have a separate charge — not be given as free service. Remember that errors made here cannot be remedied later by fine printing or carefully managed distribution. Confidence and reputation as a business adviser must be won by the printer and actual results obtained at any cost, for the statements of clients that his printed salesmanship has improved their business are the foundations of the future he is building. Clients' sales must be primary considerations and his own presses secondary — printing orders will automatically follow successful selling. PRINCIPLES, NOT METHODS, UNDERLIE PLAN A printing house can undertake the planning of printed sales- manship on a large scale, with a department of writer salesmen headed by a business analyst of tested ability. In this case, the printer may not possess the necessary skill and experience to do the work himself, but must understand and control it as he understands and controls composition or presswork, or any other necessary process. On the other hand, the small printer, ambitious to apply the same ideas, is limited only by his own energy and resourcefulness in demonstrating the fundamental principles of advertising- selling. Years ago one of the pioneers of printed salesmanship began by taking letters, circulars, and other kinds of advertising matter [282] out of various waste-baskets and studying thern critically. When he saw an obvious chance for improvement, he returned the mailing piece to the sender with comments and suggestions attached. By so demonstrating his power constructively to improve their selling plans, he won new customers, because they naturally asked him to print the revised matter; this opened oppor- tunities that soon led to the study of his customers' problems on a larger and more impressive scale, carrying substantial fees for the work in addition to the cost of the actual printing. SPECIFYING THE MEDIA The Plan naturally concludes by determining the number of pieces in the campaign and the exact form these shall take. Assume for purposes of illustration that a canvassing letter with two printed enclosures is to be sent first to get requests for booklet from those interested. A series of trade paper adver- tisements are also arranged to stimulate further requests for the booklet, and to reinforce the campaign from other angles. Twelve follow-up letters are to be sent to prospects who have received the booklet. All details are significant in the light of facts previously discovered. The canvassing letter, we will say, is to be multigraphed and carefully filled in on the firm's letterhead, with a genuine signature. The booklet, plates for trade papers, and envelope enclosures constitute the printer's work; while the letters will go direct to the client for mailing by him under definitely fixed conditions prescribed by the Plan. THE EXECUTION OF THE PLAN The Copy The Copy must now be written, either by the same man who made the Investigation, Analysis and Plan or by another writer in co-operation with him. Methods of doing this cannot satis- factorily be indicated, but principles of procedure have been admirably outlined in the Typothetae Course previously referred to. Truth and reasoning are fundamental; clearness of presen- tation is all-important; salesmanship that will react to tests must inhere in this copy. It must "show an advantage through positive, moving words that demonstrate the desirability of seizing such advantage" — by attracting attention, developing interest, inducing desire and compelling action. The Design The right time for the layout and dummy is after copy has been approved. Then the commercial artist may faithfully use his skill to interpret the written word and to visualize and extend [283] its significance. Printed salesmanship must be attractive. Here the printer, skilled in the use of type and white space, is squarely on his own ground. Proportion must be carefully maintained, however — the basic sales message must not be subordinated to attention-getting elements. Printing or Multi-plying This is the last stage in preparing printed salesmanship — a purely physical process where the experienced printer is in his natural element and looks for no outside guidance. Here fine technique may add the last touch of perfection — and the finished product is attained. AN IMPORTANT STEP Realizing that many printers will be inspired by the hope of increased profits to undertake for the first time the preparation of printed salesmanship, the American Writing Paper Company has taken steps to make these efforts successful. As previously stated, the Typothetae Lesson Booklets have been prepared at great expense by a specialist solely for this purpose; they offer a practical working manual to those intending to handle any phase of printed salesmanship. They are available without expense to all printers; nothing else at all like them is anywhere obtainable. A KEY TO THE LESSON BOOKLETS The key or index is to enable any student of the Course to trace quickly through the series any word or subject of interest and to find all those pages in the lessons where it is discussed or referred to. For looking up ordinary terms its value is obvious. And if perhaps some phrase or expression used exclusively in a special sense lingers in the mind, and the reader desires to follow up this clue, it will be found possible to do so by again using the reference index. For instance the reader may recall that refer- ence was made with particular significance to "affirmative copy," and may wish to read again all that has been said about it. By using the key index this may quickly be done. This index (which follows on the next pages) will prove of great practical help to printers who undertake to prepare any kind of printed salesmanship. 284 The Key TO A COURSE IN WRITING PRINTED SALESMANSHIP FOR U. T. A. PRINTERS WRITTEN BY ROBERT RUXTON DEDICATED TO THE UNITED TYPOTHETAE OF AMERICA BY THE AMERICAN WRITING PAPER COMPANY HOLYOKE, MASS., 1922 Explanatory Note: — This is a cross index to all the sub- jects treated in the twenty-four books comprising the course re- ferred to above. Its purpose is to enable the reader of the books to find instantly references to all the questions that arise in Writing Printing Salesmanship. This will prove to be a time- saver and will also enable the user to get the full benefit of this course. Each book of the course is called a "Lesson"; in this index the letter "L" will mean the lesson or book number; and the letter "P" will mean page number. For example: L2, P4, means refer to Lesson Book Two, Page 4. L2, P8, 11, 16, means Lesson 2, pages 8, 11, 16. L2, P6-1S, means Lesson 2, pages 6 to 15 inclusive. It should be noted that the exact words of the Index may not be in the reference actually stated, as often the principle or thought conveyed will be given. It has been the intent to guide the reader to the principle, no matter what the form of the question in the reader's mind. Action in Advertising LI, Pll; L4, P4, 5; L14, P12 Advantage in Selling L7, P5 Advertisements Criticised L3, PS, 13, 14; L4, P9, IS; L13, P6; L14, P8, 12; LIS, P5-15; L16, P5-15; L17, P5-15; L19, P6, 8, 11, 13; L20, Pll, 16. Advertising — ■ Agencies L2, P12 Aim of L2, P7 Analysis L3, P4 Approach — In Presentation L13, P6, 7; L14, P12 A Science L3, P10 Campaign L14, P8; L23, P14, IS; L24, P8 Circular L19, P8, 14 Claims L7, Pll Classified L24, P5 Construction L4, P8 Continuously" L21, P10 Copy L8, P8-15; L9, P6, 7, 8, 14; L12, P6, 7, 10; L13, PS; LIS, P3, 15; L16, P3, 12; L17, P6-12; L18, P5, 11; L23, P12, 13, 14, 15. Costs L18, PS; L23, P9 Coupon L14, P14; L16, P10 Death Rate L22, P15 Definition L1,P13; L2,P3,4, 11, 12, 13; L3,P4,5; L4,P9; L23,P16 [285] ! < Manning Stationery Freight Rates Trade Customs Paper Brands HowP Is Mai Stockini Paper Glossal Referer Guide Advertising — continued Department L22, PIS Display L23, P15, 16; L24, P5 Index L3, P9, 11 Logic L2, P12; L3, P3; L9, P6; L12, P10; L13, P3, 14; L15, P12; L22, P8, IS. Losses LI, P14; L19, P15; L23, P8, 9; L24, P6 Magazines L2, PIS; L14, P8; L22, P7 Mass L18, Pll Mistakes LI, P14; L2, P12, 14; L3, P12; L4, P3, 7, 8; L13, Pll; L14, P10; L19, P7; L20, P8, 10; L22, P7, 8, 9, 13, 14; L24, P6. Morgue L22, PIS Mortality L22, P15 Needs LI, P14; L2, P3, 9, 14; L3, P10, 11; L10, PS Of Today LI, P14; L2, P3, 4, 14; L3. P10; L22, P13 Principles L2, P15; L3, P3; L18, P6; L22, P13, IS Proof L7, P12; L8, P5, 15; LIS, P4, 5 Salesmanship LI, P14; L3, P4; L22, P13 Stunts L2, P6 Trade Papers L14, P8 Wastes LI, P14; L2, P14; L3, P13; L19, P15; L22, P6, 13, 14; L23, P7, 8, 9; L24, P6. Worth L2, P7 Affirm — To L7, P10 Its Strength L7, P10; L8, P5-15 Affirmation — Defined L7, P10 In Advertising L7, P10 In Printed Matter L7, P10 In Selling L7, P10 Its Use L7, P10; L8, PS, 13 Its Value L7, P10; L8, P9 vs. Claims L7, Pll; L8, P5-15 vs. Declarations L7, P12; L8, P5-15 When To Use L7, P10; L8, P9 Affirmative Copy. L8, P10-15; L17, P6, 7 American Engineering Co. Adv't L19, Pll Analysis L3, P4 And Plan LS, P14 Of Business L22, P12 Analyst, The LS, P13 Analyzing Advertisements L13, Pll; L14, P10 Announcement Advertisements LI, Pll; L2, P10; L3, P5-13 Appeal of Beauty L2, P8, 9 Appeal, The Universal L14, P12 Argument L13, P9 Art- Defined L4, P8 In Advertising... L2, P8, 10; L4, P8; L9, P13; L15, P8; L16, P10; L17, P5 In Business L2, P8; L16, P10 In Selling. . . L5, P10, 11; L17, PS Art Work- Defined L4, P8 In Advertising L4, P8; L16, P10 Its Purpose L2, P8, 9; L4, P8; L16, P10 Its Value L2, P8, 9; L4, P8; L17, P5 When Used L2, P8; L4, P8 Where Used L3, P12 Assertion, Defined L7, Pll, 13; L8, P3 Assertive Copy L8, P10, 11 Asset, Potential L21, Pll Atmosphere — Artistic L2, P8 Selling L2, P7; L3, P4 Attention in Advertising LI, P10; L3, P12, 15; L4, P3, 7-15; L14, P12; L23, P9. In Booklets LI, P8 [2861 Attention — continued In Business LI, PS Display Advertising L14, P12 Salesmanship LI PS Its Value LI, P5; L14, P12 Attraction, Power of L9, P12; L16, P5; L19, P12 Attractive Element L16, PS Audience, How to reach L18, P10 Authority on Definitions LI, P8 Author's Press Adv't L16, P5 Average, The Law of LS, P6 Axioms As Truths L12, P14 B Bad Copy L9, PS Baltimore & Ohio R. R. Co. Adv't L16, P6, 7 Bargain Advertising L16, P10, 11 Basic Facts L16, P5 Basis of Argument L13, P9 Beauty in Advertising L2, P8, 9 Beginning Copy L13, P6, 7 Writing L13, P6, 7 Being Brief L18, P15 Belief, Firm L9, P5 Bluff L8, P7 Blunders in Advertising LI, P14; L2, P12, 14; L3, P12; L4, P3, 7, 8; L13, Pll; L14, P10; L19, P7; L20, P8, 10; L22, P7, 8, 9, 13, 14; L23, P7, 8; L24, P6. Boasting, Defined L8, P6 Booklet, The, Defined L14, P8 Booklets — How To Arrange L13, P6 ™ ni "g Begin Li3, P6, 7 Stationery Form L22, P6, 7 Make up L22, P6, 7 Freight Plan L22, P6, 7; Lll, P6, 7 p at ot In Advertising L14, P8; L15, P6, 10, 15; L16, P6, 7, 9; L19, P5, IS; Mua L20, PS, 7; L22, P6; L24, P6, 8. U In the Follow-up L14, P8; L15, P6, 10, 15; L16, P6, 7, 9; L19, P5, 15; Trade L20, PS, 7; L22, P6; L24, P6. fJllStOmS Their Use L2, P15; L14, P8; L15, P6, 10, IS; L16, P6, 7, 9; L19, P5-15; L20,PS,7; L22, P6; L24, P6, 8. Books on English L10, P6 p anD r Brag— Definition L8, P6 "™J Braggadocio L8, P7 Brands Brainwork and the Diet Lll, P13 u , Breaking Ground L18, P3, 5 How ' Breaking up Paragraphs L10, P9, 10 Is Ms Brenlin Adv't L17, P7 Brevity L18, P3, 11, 14 Bridging the Gap . .L16, P6,.10; L19, PS, 12; L20, P5, 10; L21, P7, 12; L22,P6 Brisbane, Arthur L15, PIS Bulletins L19, P10, 14 Business — Analysis L22, P12 Definition LI, P12; L2, P8, 14; L22, Pll Fiction L17, P13 Its Purpose L2, P8, 14 Knowing the Customer's L22, P12 Your L22, P12 Mistakes L22, P9. 13 Needs L22, P12 Of Today L2, P8, 14 Plans LI, P4; L2, P8 Policies LI, P4; L2, P8 Profits L24, P12 Prospects L2, P14; L21, P7, 10; L22, P8, 10; L23, PS 287] / Bu siness — continued The Story - L17, P13 Tools L21, P13 Writers.. L10, P5; L22, P12 Buyer, Convincing The L22, PS Buyer's Market. L2, P4; L22, P8 Buying, The, Instinct L2, P10 Buying Point L22, P6 c Cadence in Expression L10, P14 Campaign — Advertising L14, P8; L23, P14, IS; L24, P8 Direct Mail. L23, P14; L24, P8, 9, 10 Canvassing the Mailing List L23, P10 Cartoon in Advertising L4, P4, 7 Cartoonist, The, in Advertising L4, P4, 7 Cash Sales L16, PIS Catalog in Selling L16, Pll Catalogs, Their Use L16, Pll Cause and Effect L22, P15 Cause of Doubt L9, PS Chapter, Value of the L10, P12 Charging — A Fee. . LI, P4 For Service LI, P4 Cheap Products L20, P6 Circular, The L19, P8, 14 Circumlocution LI 8, P8 Citations, Evidential L16, P13 Classified Advertising L24, P5 Clearness. . L9, P14; L10, PS; Lll, PIS, 16; L12, PS Cleverness, in Advertising L2, P10 Close, The L6, P12; L13, P10 Collecting Data L9, P9 Color in Advertising. . L2, P8; L16, P12; L17, P5 Comparison of Advertising and Selling LI, P7 Competition L3, P7; L20, P7, 9 Conclusion, in Copy L13, PS, 10; L14, P5, 6 Concrete Presentation L13, PS Conditions in Selling L5, PS Confidence Inspired L16, P10, 13 Conscious Mind in Writing Lll, P6, 7, 13 Construction of an Advertisement L4, P8 Continuous Advertising L21, P10 Converse Tire Adv't L17, P8 Conviction, Defined L9, PS Convincing the Buyer L22, PS Cooper-Wells Adv't L3, PIS Copy Definition and Kinds of. L8, P8-1S; L9, P6, 7, 8, 14; L12, PS, 6, 7, 10; L13, P5; LIS, P3, IS; L16, P3, 12; L17, P6-12; L18, P5, 11; L23, P12, 13, 14, IS. Copy Style L9, P9 Costs of Advertising L18, P5; L23, P9 Coupon, The L14, P14 Creating Conviction L9, PS Doubt L9, PS Criticising Advertisements. ...L4, P9, IS; L5, P14; L13, P6; L14, P8, 12; L15, P5, 15; L16, P5, IS; L17, P5, 14; L19, 9-13; L20, Pll. 16. Criticising Advertising L2, P7; L3, P6, 7; L5, P14 Cultivating Space L3, P8, 9 Customer — Holding the New L22, P10 Holding the Old L22, P10 Getting the New L22, P10 The New L22, P10; L23, PS [288] D Danger of Brevity LIS, P3, 11, 14 Data— How to Collect L9, P9 Death Rate of Advertising L22, P15 Declaration vs. Claim L7, P12; L8, PS, 15 Deduction L15, P12; L21, P7 Definition of — Advantage L7, P5 Advertising LI, P13; L2, P3-1S; L3, PS; L4, P9; L22, P13; L23, P16 Affirm L7, P10 Art L4, P8 Artwork L4, P8 Assertion L7, Pll Attractive L9, P12 Bluff L8, P6 Boasting L8, P6 Brag L8, P6 Braggadocio L8, P6 Business LI, P12 Cadence L10, P14 Circumlocution L18, P8 Conviction L9, PS Copy L16, P3 Criticise LS, P14 Demonstrate LS, P12; L12, P6 Direct Mail L2, PIS Disbelief L7, P12 Doubt L9, P5 Education L12, P6 Emphasis L10, P14 Explanation L12, P6 Evident L8, P9; L12, P6 Evidential L8, P9; L12, P6 Evidently L8, P9; L12, P6 Expect. : .us, P6 Stationery Fiction L17, P13 General LI, P9 Freight Honest L6, P6 y es Hybrid. LI, P9 Implication L18, P12 Implicit L18, P12 Incredulity L7, P12 Information L12, P6 Interest L9, P12 Logic L9, P6; L12, P6 Manual L19, P14 Mind L7, P8 Motif L17, P10 Move L6, P7, 11 Particular LI, P9 Peroration L14, P6 Perspicuity L9, P14 Persuade L6, P8, 10 Positive L6, P5 Positivism ■ US, PS, 6 Possibility L23, PS Potential LS. P3 Premise L13, P9 Presentation L14, P5 Proposition L13, P9 Prospect L23, P5 Reason L12, P6 Recapitulate L14, P6 Recapitulation L14, P6 Sale LI, P14 Salesmanship LS, PS, 11 Selling L16, P3 Short L18, Pll Show LS, P12 [289] Planning Trade Definition of — continued Skeptical L7, P12 Stimulus LI, P13 Story L17, Pll Strong L7, P8 Truth L6, P6 Vain. L8, P6 Vainglorious L8, P6 Vaunt L8, P6 Verisimilitude LIS, P8 Weak. . . L7, P7 Degrees in Selling L12, P9 Demonstrate, To L5, P12; L13, P7; LIS, Pll; L16, P12; L17, P6 Demonstrator L5, P12; L13, P7; L14, P8, 9; L15, Pll Densmore Co., J. M. Adv't L19, PS Department, The Advertising L22, P15 Description and Uses of Punctuation L10, P7 Desire L3, P12; L4, P4-1S; L17, PS Dictating Your Copy Lll, P8 Dictionary — Authority LI, P8 Funk & Wagnalls LI, P8 The Value of LI, P8 Diet, The, in Writing Lll, P12 Difficulties in Writing Lll, P8 Diffuseness L18, P9 Diluted Salesmanship L2, P5, 6 Direct Mail — Campaign L23, P14; L24, P8, 9, 10 Copy. L23, P12, 13, 14, 15 Costs L23, P7, 8, 9; L24, P9, 10 Definition L2, P14; L23, P16 Failures L23, P9; L24, P6 Its Use L22, P8; LS, P14; L22, P6-13; L24, P8 Its Value L22, P8; L24, P8 Losses L23, P7, 8, 9, 10; L24, P6, 10 Magazines L2, PIS Plans L24, P9-14 Postage L24, P9, 10 Principles L23, Pll Success L24, P13 Wastes L23, P7, 8, 9; L24, P6, 9, 10 Direct Sales from Advertising L16, P15 Display Advertising L23, P15; L24, PS Displays. L23, P15 Disproportioned Advertisements L3, P12 Dissuasion L14, Pll Distributors L20, P6, 7; L22, Pll Dodger, The L19, P8 Doubt, Defined L9, PS E Education— Defined L12, P6 Effect and Cause L22, PIS Elements of — Attraction L16, P5 Selling LI, P10 Elgin Watch Co. Adv't LIS, P6, 7 Eliminating Media L21, P10 Emotion L6, P9 Emphasis in Writing L10, P14 End of the Copy L13, P5, 13; L14, PS, 6 English — ■ Books L10, P6 Construction L10, P7 Errors in Advertising LI, P14; L2, P12, 14; L3, P12; L4, P3, 7, 8; L13, Pll; L14, P10; L19, P7; L20, P8, 10; L22, P8, 9, 13, 14; L23, P7, 8; L24, P6 [290] Essex Motors Adv't LIS, P5, 7 Ethics L24, P13 Evident, Denned L8, P9; L12, P6, 7 Evidential Copy L8, P10, IS; L9, P7, 9; L13, P8; LIS, PS, 6; L16, P5, 13; L18. P5 Evidential, Defined L8, P9; L12, P6, 7 Evidently, Defined L8, P10 Exactness L6, P6 Examples of Advertisements L3, Pl-15 Explanation, Defined L12, P6 Expression of Thought L10, P14; L18, P14 Eye Habits L3, P12 F Fac-Simile Reproductions L2, P14 Factors of Selling LI, P10; L9, P13 Facts in Your Copy L9, P9; L16, P5 Failing in Direct Mail Advertising L23, P9 Failures in Direct Mail L23, P9; L24, P6 False Promise L2, P9 Fee Charging LI, P4 Fee, The, in Advertising LI, P4 Fiction, Defined L17, P13 Finish, The L13, P5-10; L14, PS, 6 Firm Belief, How Caused L9, P9 Folder, The L2, PIS; L19, P7 Folders, Their Use L2, P15 Follow-up, The L21, P13; L22, P9; L23, P6, 12, 13; L24, P8 Forming the Booklet L22, P6 Foundation of Advertising L14, P8 Four Balanced Parts L3, P12; L4, P4, 5, 9-15 Four Main Types of Advertising Copy L8, P10 ni Free Offers... ..,..7. L16, P7, 13 Manning Free Service LI, P4 Stationery Friction L19, P15 Fundamental, The, of All Salesmanship L6, P6; L9, P13; L14, P8 Freight Rates G Trade Gamble, When People Will L20, P5 CustomS Gap, The, in Advertising L14, P8; L16, P6, 10; L19, PS, 12; L20, P6; L21, P7, 12; L22, P7. General — Paper Advertising LI, P9; L22, P14 Brands The Market L22, P12 Presentation L13, PS, 13, 14; L20, P16; L21, PS HOW I Terms LI, P9, 10; L13, P12 Is Mj Generalize, To LI, P9, 10; L20, P16 Getting the New Customer L22, P10 Getting Your Facts L9, P9 Gift Advertising 1,16, P7 Good Copy L9, P8 Ground Breaking L18, P3, S Guarantee, The L17, P9 H Habits of the Eye L3, P12 Hammond Typewriter Advertisement L15, Pll, 12 Hartman Furniture Co. Advertisement L16, P10, 11 Headlines — When to Write Lll, P5 Heeken Co. Advertisement L17, P9 Honest Abe (Lincoln) L6, P6 Honesty — Its Value L6, P6 House Organs L2, PIS [2911 How To — Begin Copy L13, P6, 7 Close L6, P12; L13, P10 Collect Data L9, P9 Collect Facts L9, P9 Collect Information L9, P9 Construct an Advertisement L4, P8 Convince L9, P5; L16, P10, 13; L22, PS Criticise Advertising L2, P7; L3, P6. 7; L5, P14 Demonstrate L5, P12; L13, P7; LIS, Pll; L16, P12; L17, P6 Judge Advertising L2, P8, 9, 11; L3, P3 Judge Copy L2, P8, 9, 11 Persuade L6, P8, 9, 10 Plan a Booklet Lll, P6, 7; L22, P6 Prepare Material Lll, P6, 7 To Prove Your Case L7, P12, 13; L8, P5-1S; L15, P4, S, 6 Punctuate L10, P5, 7 Regulate the Diet Lll, P12 Sell by the Printed Word LI, P10; L3, P3; L4, P9; LS, PS, 8, 9, 11; L6, P7; L9, P13, L12, P6, 8; L22, P 13, 16. Use Logic L9, P6; L13, P3-14; L14, P3-14 To Use Letters L2, PIS; L23, P12, 13; L24, P7 Write L10, PS; Lll, P8 Write Titles Lll, P6 Human Mind Study Lll, P14; L22, P5 Human Nature, How Governed L7, PS; L22, PS Huxley's Illustration on Chalk L13, P14 Hybrid. LI, P8; L2, P3 Hypothesis LIS, P12 I Ignorance L13, Pll "I Had Six Honest Serving Men," by Kipling L17, P3 Illustration on Chalk, by Huxley L13, P14 Illustration, Its Use L17, P6-12 Implication, Defined L18, P12 Implicit, Defined L18, P12 Importance of the Message L3, P4 Important, The, Part of Advertising L14, P8 Incentive L19, P12 Incredulity, Defined L7, P12 Indecision — Its Cause L9, PS Index Advertising L3, P8, 11 Indirectness L18, P8 Inference in Copy. L15, P15; L18, P12, 13; L21, P7 Information Collecting L9, P9 Inquiry — Answering The L20, PS; L22, P7, 8 Bring'ing Letters L23, Pll Bringing Space L23, P16 Inspiring Confidence L16, P10, 13 Instinct, The Buying L2, P10 Intellect, The Perfect L12, P10 Intensive Selling L5, P7 Interest - " - Arousing L9, P12; L13, P13; L23, P6; L24, P9 In Advertising LI, Pll; L9, P12, 13; L23, P9; L24, P9 Its Value LI, Pll; L3, P12; L4, P3, IS; L9, P12, 13; L23, P9 Sustaining L9, P12; L13, P13 Interesting the Prospect L23, P6; L24, P9 Inter Woven Hose Advertisement L3, P13 Introduction, In Copy L13, PS, 6, 7; L14, P5, 12; L15, P6; L18, P3, 5 Introductory to Lessons LI, P3 Iron Clad Hose Advertisement L3, P14 J Jarvis, Benj. E., Advertisement L19, P9 Tello Advertisement L17, P5 Jevons on Logic L9, P6; L12, P10; L13, P3; L14, P3; LIS, P12; L21, PS [292] Judging— Advertising L2, P8, 9, 11; L3, P3 Copy L2, P8, 9, 11 Judgment Suspended L9, PS K Knowing — The Customer L22, P12 Your Business L22, P12 Knowledge of Business L22, P12 L LaSalle Extension Uni. Advertisement L17, Pll, 14 Law of Average , L5, P6 Laws of Advertising L22, P15 Leading the Mind L13, PIS Leavitt, J. Franklin, Advertisement L16, PIS Length of Sentences and Paragraphs L10, Pll Lesson Subjects (in this Course) — Lesson 1. What Is Advertising 2. Advertising Described 3. Criticism of Current Advertisements A CC CC CC " S. Analysis of Sales and Salesmanship z~ cc cc cc cc cc 7. The Value of Proof in Salesmanship 8. Description of Copy 9. Good Copy and Bad Copy 10. English Composition and Expression 11. Planning Your Work 12. Methods in Writing 13. Three Phases of Copy Presentation Frfiifhl 14. Criticising Advertisements — Copy Presentation n.i.„ 15_ « « « cc KaiBS 16! " " 17. " " " « Trade }|; " " " I Custon 20! " " " " 91 cc cc cc cc 22. The Master Salesman — Advertising Mistakes "LOU« I KENTUCKY _ ^1 . «-- -.T^Tu CP.» oUS • X/""' KENTUCKY ^* --— *~T? C.I i >-/ .•' 1 ARKANSAS / MEKAPH » (~ NEW ORLEANS^ Trade Paper Rates TIME MAP OF THE UNITED STATES Boston overnight Chicago 4 days Cincinnati 4 days Cleveland 4 days Dallas 9 days Denver 9 days Des Moines 5 days Detroit 4 days ' Houston 8 days Indianapolis 4 days Jacksonville 8 days Kansas City 6 days Lincoln 7 days Los Angeles 15 days Louisville 5 days Memphis 7 days Note : _ To Pacific Ports- raised as it is out of line with .40-.41 .34 1.60}^ all rail .79J^ ocean and rail 1.21-1.22 .67- .68 .36- .37 1.17 all rail .71 ocean and rail .43- .44 .56 via rail A&Yi via boat .77- .78 .88H--89H 1.87 j| .46V 2 -A7y 2 .90 -By boat, port to port, rail rate and is caused Milwaukee 5 days New Orleans 7 days New York overnight Omaha 6 days Philadelphia 2 days Pittsburgh 4 days Portland 3 days Providence 2 days Richmond 3 days Rochester 3 days Salt Lake City. ... 13 days San Francisco. . . .15 days Seattle 19 days Spokane 21 days St. Louis 5 days St. Paul 6 days 10 days Troy 2 days S0.46H- .47^ .97 all rail .49 ocean and rail .22 .77- .78 .27 .30 .24 .23 .38 ' •28^ 1.87H 1.87^ 1.87 H 1.87^ •54^- .55^ .64- .65 all rail .50 rail and lake MX Glossa So cents, 21-35 days, by rail war. This rate will undoubtedly be [305] Paper Trade Customs for the Eagle- A Line GENERAL REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE MANUFACTURE AND SALE OF PAPERS FOR COMMERCIAL USE OPERATING and trading conditions have brought about certain customs that govern the making, packing, dis- tributing and selling of every class of product. These practices are called Trade Customs. Having resulted from practical and economic conditions which affect the manufacture and marketing of any class of products, trade customs are usually accepted by all those doing business in an industry. The following trade paper customs are those adhered to by the American Writing Paper Company. WRITINGS SUBSTANCE NUMBER PLAN FOR BONDS, FINES, FLATS, ETC. Table showing revised weights which the National Paper Trade Association, under date of April 17, 1917, requested the Manufacturers to mark on reams of Bonds and Linens, Flat Writings and Ledger Papers made to Substances. Special Sizes On special sizes, an additional charge shall be made for lots of less than one ton. The following sizes may be considered as regular: FLATS AND BONDS 14x17 26x34 17x26 17x28 19x24 18x23 28x34 24x38 23x36 16x21 19x26 21x33 21x32 26x38 30x38 16x26 19x28 20x28 17x22 28x38 28x40 22x34 19x30 28 x 42^ 22x2S}4 306] LEDGERS 14x17 21x32 18x46 17 x 28 16 x 42 19 x 24 28 x 34 17 x 22 19 x 48 15x19 22x34 24x38 19x30 18x23 20x28 16x21 23x36 28x40 LOOSE-LEAF \6\ixl\M 22 x38 23 x 24^ 17^*22% 22^x22^ 23^x28^ 19M x 24M 22^ x 28^ 24^ x 24^ 19& x 28^ 22^ x 34 24^ x 28^ 21^x31^ 22*^x253^ ^4^x29 22 x 34 22^4 x 35M 24^ x 36^ 24J^ x 38^ Any of the above sizes not regularly stocked by the mill in the grade ordered may be considered special sizes, but these and any other sizesmay be con- sidered regular if stocked by the mill or buyer; but all special orders for sizes other than those mentioned, unless regularly stocked, shall be billed at an additional charge in lots of less than one ton. Special Colors On special colors, or colors not regularly made in the grade ordered, an additional charge shall be made where such orders are less than two tons. The quantities mentioned in this and the preceding rule are understood to be the quantities named in the original order or inquiry and not the quan- tities that may be arrived at by adding the 10 or 15% over-run provided for in the rule under "Over-runs and Under-runs." For example, an order for say 1,900 pounds is an order for less than one ton and shall be billed and accepted with the additional charge, although when made the allowed over-run may make the shipment aggregate more than 2,000 pounds. Under the custom in this paragraph mills may make in any established grade for a customer buying said grade regularly, without additional charge, such colors as may be decided upon as constituting the regular colors of such customer's line. Color Differential On all writing papers, namely Fines, Flats, Ledgers, Bonds, Linens, and special finishes, and Typewriter Papers, there shall be an additional charge for colors in said grades and lines. Over-runs and Under-runs On special orders of one ton or less, over-runs and under-runs not greater than 15% shall be considered good deliveries. On orders for more than one ton, over-runs and under-runs not greater than 10% shall be considered good deliveries. Broken Packages On orders for less than a full package, an additional charge shall be made. A full package shall be construed as that number of sheets which it is the custom of the mill to use in wrapping and selling the item of paper in question. This does not apply to orders for one or more full packages and a fraction; for example, an order for Z\i packages. Stenciling uing No paper made one weight and stenciled another. Actual and Nominal Weight Paper, the average actual weight of which, including wrappers, does not exceed 2]4.% above or below the nominal weight, shall constitute a good delivery and shall be billed at the nominal weight. The above shall be based on items of one size and weight on individual invoices. [3071 / f Claims No claims allowed after paper is cut, ruled, or printed. Experience has shown that exceptional cases occasionally arise where the fault is clearly with the mill and where an absolutely literal enforcement of this custom would work injustice and hardship to the merchants. It is, therefore, understood that mills will enforce the spirit of this custom, deciding exceptional cases upon their merits and according to the rules of equity. Samples No paper of private watermarks or brands to be supplied for sampling pur- poses, nor allowance made on account of watermarks or brands. Shipping Date All "make and hold" orders must specify an ultimate date for shipment at which date goods are to be billed and the invoices taken to account by customer, whether ordered shipped or not. Special Packages Where unruled paper is to be cut and folded in ream bundles or quarter ream and pound packages, the paper in the flat shall first be charged for at the regular flat price and an additional charge shall be made for cutting and folding. Ruling An additional charge shall be made for faint ruling, such as letterheads, etc., and for struck ruling, such as billheads, statements, etc. This charge is to apply on paper basis 17" x 22" — 16, and over; 13 pound paper to be charged on the basis of 16 pound, and on papers of less than 13 pound weight, the charge to be at the option of the mill doing the work. Cutting There shall be an additional charge wherever the regular sizes and weights of unruled paper of the mill are to be cut to smaller sizes. (a) This charge to be made when cutting any regular size containing not less than 336 square inches (16" x 21") down to and including a size containing not less than 84 square inches (8" x 10J^"), and an additional charge to be made for cutting sheets containing less than 84 square inches down to and including a sheet containing 42 square inches. (b) When cut to small sizes, the charge shall be the same whether the packages are sealed, banded, or merely divided by markers. Untrimmed Paper Paper shipped untrimmed is to be billed at proportionate weight, and there shall be no allowance made for paper untrimmed instead of trimmed, nor unsealed instead of sealed, nor for both. Paper such as Envelope paper, sold on basis of cut and trim on the machine, to be considered as trimmed paper. Special Watermarks Merchants, manufacturers, or converters desiring special watermarks for their customers must pay the cost of dandy roll, and no credit will be given on account of the number of cases ordered. [3081 Private and Mill Brands The charge for private watermarks in standard grades shall be commensurate with the increased cost of producing such watermarks as compared with mill stock watermarks. Light JV eights For weights lighter than basis 17" x 22" — 16, 500 sheets, an additional price to be charged. All Bond and Writing paper, including ledgers, linens and special finishes, basis 15, 14, 13 pound folio, to be charged for at ream prices, 16 pound basis. Terms of Sale Terms of sale shall be cash 30 days, less 3%. No discount after 30 days and no time option. Thirty days shall be construed to mean 30 days from date of invoice, and where several invoices fall in one month, 30 days from the average date of said invoices, or if a definite settlement date is preferred, said settlement date at which settlements are to be mailed shall be not later than the 20th day of the month next succeeding the date of the invoices. Substance Weights New orders for Bonds and Linens, and special finishes, Flat Writings and Ledgers will be entered and manufactured only in conformity with the follow- ing list of substances and to the conditions appended thereto. See List on Following Page For convenience in merchandising, reams will be marked (in addition to their respective substances) with their approximate weights, the table to be used being that compiled by the National Paper Trade Association and embodied in its request under date of April 17, 1917. The substance may be omitted from the reams on private watermarks or brands, if so requested by the owner thereof. (a) Intermediate substances carry same ream price as next higher substance. Trade Custom under "Light Weights" governs on substances below 16. (b) Trade Custom under "Special Sizes" governs on odd sizes. (c) Beginning October 1, 1918, this Trade Custom shall apply to all grades of Writing Paper from above 10 pound folio basis, to and including 44 pound folio basis. Exception: Grades below No. 2 Rag Envelope. 309] WRITINGS SUBSTANCE NUMBER PLAN For Bonds, Fines, Flats, etc. Table showing revised weights which the National Paper Trade Association, under date of April 17, 1917, requests the Manufacturers to mark on reams of Bonds and Linens, Flat Writings, and Ledger Papers made to Substances No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. 13 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 14 x34 16H 2oy 2 25 K 30^ 35 y 2 40^ 46 51 56 16 x21 uy 2 uy 2 18 2iy 2 25 28^ 32^ 36 39H 16 x26 uy 2 18 22 26y 2 31 35^ 40 44H 49 16 x42 23 29 36 43 50 57 65 72 79 16J^x21Ji 12 15 18K 22 26 29^ 33 37 40^ 17 x22 13 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 17 x26 i5y 2 19 23J^ 2%y 2 33 38 42 y 2 47 y 2 52 17 x28 16H 2oy 2 25^ 30% 35^ 40^ 46 51 56 17 x44 26 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 17 x56 33 41 51 61 71 81 92 102 112 17^x22% 14 ny 2 2iy 2 26 30 34^ 39 43 47^ 19 x23 uy 2 ny 2 22 26^ 31 35^ 40 uy 2 48J^ 19 x46 19 19 x24 29 35 44 53 62 71 80 89 97 16 WM 24^ 29^ 34 39 44 49 53}4 19 x26 17 21 26^ 31 y 2 37 42 y 2 47 y 2 53 58 19 x28 18^ 23 28^ 34 40 45 y 2 51 57 62^ 19 x30 20 24H 30y 2 36^ 42 y 2 49 55 61 67 19 x48 32 39 49 59 68 78 88 98 107 19Mx24M 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 19^x28J^ 19 23J^ 29^ 35 41 47 53 ssy 2 64^ 20 x28 19M 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 20 x56 39 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 21 x32 23 29 36 43 50 57 65 72 79 21 x33 24 29^ 37 uy 2 52 59^ 66H 74 8iy 2 21J^x31^ 23M 29 36 43^ 5oy 2 58 65 72J^ wa 22 x25H i9y 2 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 22 x34 26 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 22 x38 29 36 44^ 53^ 62 y 2 71H 80H 89K 98^ 22y 2 %22]4 ny* 21^ 27 32 y 2 38 43^ 48^ 54 591^ 22y 2 x2&y 2 22y 2 27J^ 34^ 41 48 55 61 14 68^ 75 y 2 22^x34 26y 2 32^ 41 49 57J^ 65 y 2 73J^ 82 90 22Ux2S% 2oy 2 25 31^ 37^ 44 50 sey 2 62 y 2 69 22%x35y 2 28 34M 43 52 6oy 2 69 77 y 2 &6y 2 95 23 x 24H 19^ 24 30 36 42 48 54 6oy 2 66y 2 23 x28 22^ 27H 34^ 41 y 2 48 55 62 69 76 23 x31 25 30y 2 38 45^ 53 y 2 61 683^ 76 84 23 x34 27 33^ 42 50 5sy 2 67 75 y 2 83^ 92 23 x36 29 35 44 53 62 71 80 89 97 23Mx28H 23 283^ 35^ 42 y 2 49 y 2 56^ 64 71 78 24 x38 32 39 49 59 68 78 88 98 107 24 x48 40 49J^ 61 H 74 86 98H 111 123 135J^ 24^ x 24^ 21 25^ 32 38^ 45 51^ 58 64 7oy 2 24Hx28J^ 24^ 30 37^ 45 52^ 593^ 67 74H 82 24}^ x 29 24H 30^ 38 45^ 53 61 68^ 76 83^ 24 y 2 x 36 H 31 38^ 48 57^ 67 76J^ 86 95 y 2 105 2iy 2 x3sy 2 33 4oy 2 5oy 2 60^ 70^ 80}4 91 101 111 26 x32 29 36 44 53 62 71 80 89 98 26 x33 30 36^ 46 55 64 7314 82 y 2 92 101 26 x34 31 38 47 57 66 76 85 95 104 26 x38 34 42 53 63 74 85 95 106 116 27 x40 37^ 46 58 69^ 81 92 y 2 104 H5J^ 127 28 x34 33 41 51 61 71 81 92 102 112 28 x38 37 46 57 68 80 91 102 114 125 28 x40 39 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 28 x42^ 41^ 51 63 y 2 76^ 89 102 114K my 2 140 30 x38 40 49 61 73 85 98 110 122 134 31 xS3 57 7oy 2 88 105 y 2 123 140M 158 175H 193H 34 x44 52 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 310 BOOK PAPERS APPLYING TO UNCOATED AND COATED PAPERS Standard Ream and Sales Basis (a) Five hundred (500) sheets shall constitute a standard ream of paper unless otherwise specified. (b) The basic size shall be 25" x 38". (c) The minimum basic weight for machine-finished paper shall be 45 pounds, for supercalendered paper 50 pounds, and for paper coated on one side 60 pounds, and on two sides 70 pounds. (d) The basic selling price shall be for paper packed for domestic use in ordinary wooden cases, untrimmed, with customary ream markers, or for paper similarly packed in skeleton frames. Regular Stock Substance Weights and Sizes (a) Regular Substance Weights The following are established as regular standard substance weights: Machine Finish and Supercalendered Papers — 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100 pounds. Coated Paper— 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120 pounds. (b) Regular Stock Sizes The following are established as regular standard stock sizes and sub- stance weights : BOOKS PAPERS Applying to Uncoated and Coated Papers Standard Ream and Sales Size Weight 25 x38 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 * 100 120* 22 x32 22 26 30 34 37 45 52 60 67 74 89 24 x36 27 32 36 41 45 55 64 73 82 91 109 25 x38 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 26 x29 24 28 32 36 40 48 56 64 72 80 95 26 x40 33 38 44 49 55 66 76 88 98 110 131 28 x42 37 43 50 56 62 74 86 99 111 124 148 28 x44 39 45 52 58 65 78 91 104 116 130 155 29 x52 48 56 63 71 79 95 111 127 143 159 190 30^x41 40 46 53 59 66 79 92 105 119 132 158 32 x44 44 52 59 67 74 89 104 119 133 148 178 33 x46 48 56 64 72 80 96 112 128 144 160 192 34 x44 47 55 63 71 79 95 110 126 142 157 189 35 x45 50 58 66 75 83 100 116 132 149 166 199 36 x48 55 64 73 82 91 109 127 146 164 182 218 38 x50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200 240 41 x61 79 92 105 118 132 158 184 211 237 263 316 42 x56 74 87 99 111 124 149 173 198 223 248 297 44 x56 78 91 104 117 130 156 182 207 233 259 311 44 x64 88 104 118 134 148 178 208 238 266 296 356 *Applies only to Coated Papers. Making Orders (a) Orders for 2,000 pounds or more for one regular size, one color and regular substance weight shall be made without extra charge. (b) Orders for 5,000 pounds or more for one irregular size and one regular color and substance weight shall be made without extra charge. Orders for 2,000 pounds to less than than 5,000 pounds shall take an additional charge of 10% (to be added to the selling price). [311] (c) Orders for 10,000 pounds or more for one regular size in an irregular substance weight, or for one irregular size in an irregular substance weight shall be made without extra charge. If ordered in less quantity, an additional charge shall be added to the selling price, as follows: Orders for 5,000 pounds to less than 10,000 pounds — add 5%. Orders for 2,000 pounds to less than 5,000 pounds — add 10%. Additional Charge for Light Weights Percentages of selling price, irrespective of packing, shall be added for each pound or fraction thereof below the minimum basic weight, as follows: (a) Machine Finish The basic weight of Machine Finish paper shall be 25" x 38" — 45 pounds — 500 sheets. For lighter weights an additional charge shall be made and computed as follows: Add 1% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 45 pounds down to and including 35 pounds. Add 2% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 35 pounds down to and including 30 pounds. Add 3% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 30 pounds down to and including 25 pounds. Example: Assuming paper at $10.00 per cwt. 45 pounds— $10.00 35 pounds— $11.00— 10 pounds at 1% equals 10% or $1.00 per cwt. 30 pounds— $12.00— 5 pounds at 2% equals 10% or $1.00 per cwt. 25 pounds — $13.50 — 5 pounds at 3% equals 15% or $1.50 per cwt. (b) Supercalendered The basic weight of Supercalendered paper shall be 25" x 38" — 50 pounds — 500 sheets. For lighter weights an additional charge shall be made and computed as follows: Add 1% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 50 pounds down to and including 40 pounds. Add 2% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 40 pounds down to and including 35 pounds. Add 3% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 35 pounds down to and including 30 pounds. Example: Assuming paper at $10.00 per cwt. 50 pounds— $10.00 40 pounds— $11.00— 10 pounds at 1% equals 10% or $1.00 per cwt. 35 pounds— $12.00— 5 pounds at 2% equals 10% or $1.00 per cwt. 30 pounds — 313.50 — 5 pounds at 3% equals 15% or $1.50 per cwt. (c) Coated The basic weight of Coated paper (coated two sides) shall be 25" x 38" — 70 pounds — 500 sheets. For lighter weights an additional charge shall be made and computed as follows: Add 1% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 70 pounds down to and including 45 pounds. Add 2% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 45 pounds down to and including 35 pounds. Example: Assuming paper at $10.00 per cwt. 70 pounds— $10.00 45 pounds — $12.50 — 25 pounds at 1% equals 25% or $2.50 per cwt. 35 pounds— $14.50— 10 pounds at 2% equals 20% or $2.00 per cwt. The basic weight of Lithograph and Coated paper (coated one side) is 25" x 38" — 60 pounds — 500 sheets. For lighter weights an additional charge shall be made and computed as follows: Add 1% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 60 pounds down to and including 40 pounds. Add 2% of selling price for each pound or fraction thereof below 40 pounds down to and including 35 pounds. Example: Assuming paper at $10.00 per cwt. 60 pounds— $10.00 40 pounds— $12.00— 20 pounds at 1% equals 20% or $2.00 per cwt. 35 pounds — $13.00 — 5 pounds at 2% equals 10% or $1.00 per cwt. [312] ' Finishing Charges (a) Super calendering. An additional charge shall be made for supercalen- dering. (b) Special Sizing. An additional charge shall be made for special sizing of not less than 25 cents per cwt. above the selling price. (c) Laid. An additional charge shall be made for laid Book paper of not less than 25 cents per cwt. above the selling price. (d) Watermarking. An additional charge shall be made for watermarking Book paper of not less than 50 cents per cwt. above the selling price. Wrapping and Packing The basic selling price shall be for paper packed for domestic use in ordinary wooden cases, untrimmed, with customary ream markers, or for paper similarly packed in skeleton frames. (a) If lapped in bundles deduct 25 cents per 100 pounds (b) If in rolls deduct 50 cents per 100 pounds (c) If sealed in reams add not less than 25 cents per 100 pounds (d) If trimmed add not less than 5 cents per 100 pounds per side (e) There shall be an additional charge for export packing according to customer's requirements. Colors An additional charge shall be made for all colors other than white or natural. Variation in Quantity Ordered Over-runs and under-runs shall be accepted subject to the following possible variations, which shall constitute a good delivery and be accepted by pur- chaser as such: Less than 5,000 pounds — 15% over or under. 5,000 pounds and not exceeding 10,000 pounds — 10% over or under. Over 10,000 pounds and not exceeding 40,000 pounds — 5% over or under. Over 40,000 pounds — 3% over or under. Weights (a) Wrappers. Case linings, bundle wrappers and twine shall not be in- cluded in the scale or ream weight. Paper in rolls shall be gross weight, including wrappers not exceeding 2J^%. (b) Variations. Paper shall be as close as possible to the weight ordered, subject to a variation in the nominal weight not exceeding 5% above or below the ordered weight when between 45 pounds and 100 pounds basic weights, and 8% when below 45 pounds or above 100 pounds basic weights. Paper within this range shall constitute a good delivery. PapBI (c) Stenciling. Paper shall be stenciled by the manufacturer with the Brant weight ordered. There shall be no evasion by substituting letters or symbols for figures. nO 1 (d) Billing. Paper shall be billed at the ordered weight unless there is a IS shortage in excess of 2J^% for uncoated or of 5% for coated, in which case the paper shall be billed at the actual scale weight. £" shall be 100, 120, 160, 180, and 200 pounds to a ream of 500 sheets. All orders for special weights shall be for 3 tons or more. Such special weights, whether regular size or odd size, to be charged at base price. Special Colors Minimum quantity at base price for odd colors shall be for not less than five tons; smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with increased cost. Method of Packing Regular sizes shall be sealed in packages of 100 sheets. Odd sizes, unless otherwise agreed upon, shall be packed in lined cases, unwrapped, with markers between each 100 sheets. All packages to be marked with the weight per 500 sheets. [3161 Weight Variation A variation of 5% above or below the nominal weight shall be accepted. All Bristols will be billed at the nominal weight with the following excep- tions: 1 — Bristol on a regular stock basis weight running over 2^% light will be billed at the scale weight. 2 — Bristol on a special basis of weight not more than 5% light to be billed at ordered weight. Over-runs and Under-runs Orders up to 5,000 pounds special sizes, weights or colors, 10% over-run and under-run to constitute a good delivery; orders for 5,000 pounds or more, 5% over-run and under-run to constitute a good delivery. Claims All claims must be made promptly upon receipt and examination of goods. No claims can be allowed on goods which have been cut or printed. (Ex- perience has shown that exceptional cases occasionally arise where the fault is clearly with the mill and where an absolutely literal enforcement of this article would work injustice and hardship to the merchants. It is, there- fore, understood that mills will enforce the spirit of this article, deciding ex- ceptional cases upon their merits and according to the rules of equity.) Terms Terms of sale shall be cash in 30 days less 3%. No discount after 30 days. Note: 30 days shall be construed to mean 30 days from date of invoice, and where several invoices fall in one month, 30 days from the average date of said invoice. INDEX BRISTOLS Method of Packing Sealed in packages of 100 sheets for all sizes not larger than 25^* x 30J^". Price All Index Bristols shall be priced per pound. Stock Sizes The Trade Customs Stock Sizes shall be: 20y 2 x 24% 223^ x 28^ 25^ x 30^ Any order other than in a stock size must be for not less than one ton in an equivalent weight and regular color. Weights Index Bristols shall be made in the following weight basis: 25^ x 30^—110—140—170—220 22^x28^— 91—115—140—181 20^x24%— 72— 91—111—143 Weight Variation The variation of 5% in weight to constitute a good delivery. Standard stock sizes to be billed at nominal weight. Special Weights Special weights lighter than 25^" x 30J^"— 110-pound base weight, and all intermediate special weights shall carry same ream price as next heavier base weight and shall not be made in lots of less than 3 tons. For lots of 25,000 pounds or more of one basis weight this rule does not apply. [317] / f CARDBOARDS, PLAIN AND COATED Standard Plain and Coated Blanks 2 ply .012 3 ply .015 Tough Check 3 ply .012 4 ply 5 ply 4 ply .018 .021 14 ply .018 6 ply 8 ply .048 6 ply .024 .030 .024 10 ply 12 ply 8 ply .036 .042 .030 Translucents 2 ply .008 3 ply .010 4 ply .012 5 ply .015 Railroads 2 ply .012 4 ply .018 6 ply .024 8 ply .030 Thick China .011 Variation in Thickness .008 to .029-. 001 above or below ordered thicknesses. .030 to .042-. 002 above or below ordered thicknesses. .043 and heavier 5% above or below ordered thicknesses. Standard Stock Sizes For Railroads, Tough Check, Thick China and Blanks— 22" x 28*. For Translucents— 22^" x 28^". Standard Stock Colors For Railroads and Tough Check: Blue Coral Orange Salmon Buff Green Red Yellow In addition to White and Black. For Thick China add: Gray Fawn Pearl For Translucents and Tinted Litho Blanks: Flesh India Tint Primrose Green Pearl Rose In addition to White. Special Sizes and Thicknesses (a) Minimum quantity at base price for sizes which cut without waste from standard stock rolls will be not less than the equivalent of 5,000 sheets 22" x 28". Smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with the increased cost. (b) Minimum quantity at base price for odd sizes and thicknesses which will not cut without waste from standard stock rolls will be not less than the equivalent of 10,000 sheets 22" x 28" regardless of coating. Minimum Stock Orders Minimum quantity at base price of stock items will be not less than one standard case. Less than standard case quantities subject to increased charges commensurate with the extra costs involved. Special Colors Minimum quantity at base price for odd colors will be not less than equiva- lent of 25,000 sheets 22" x 28" single coated one side. Smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with the increased cost. Over-runs and Under-runs All special orders subject to over-run of 10%; where maximum quantity is specified, an under-run of 10% will constitute a good delivery. 13181 Claims All claims must be made promptly upon receipt and examination of goods. No claims can be allowed on goods which have been cut or printed. Experience has shown that exceptional cases occasionally arise where the fault is clearly with the mill and where an absolutely literal enforcement of this article would work injustice and hardship to the merchants. It is, therefore, understood that mills will enforce the spirit of this article, decid- ing exceptional cases upon their merits and according to the rules of equity. COATED FOLDING BOX BOARDS Standard Stock Size and Thickness The following may be considered the standard stock size and thickness: 28x44 .016 Standard Stock Colors Blue, Canary, Coral, Green, Orange, Red, Salmon, Yellow — in addition to White. Minimum Stock Orders Minimum quantity of stock items will be not less than one standard case of a color. Variation in Thickness .001 above or below ordered thickness. Special Sizes in Standard Stock Colors (a) Minimum quantity at base price for sizes which cut without waste from standard stock rolls will be not less than the equivalent of 5,000 sheets 28" x 44". Smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with the increased cost. (b) Minimum quantity for odd sizes and thicknesses which will not cut without waste from standard stock rolls will be not less than the equiva- lent of 15,000 sheets 28" x 44". Smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with the increased cost. Note — Item (b), specifying minimum quantity of orders which cannot be cut from standard stock rolls without waste, shall be interpreted as the equivalent of 10,000 sheets, 28* x 28*. regardless of the coating. Special Colors Minimum quantity for odd colors will be not less than the equivalent of 20,000 sheets 28" x 44" single-coated one side. Smaller quantities may be made at a price commensurate with the increased cost. Over-runs and Under-runs All special orders subject to over-run of 10%; where maximum quantity is specified, an under-run of 10% will constitute a good delivery. Claims All claims must be made promptly upon receipt and examination of goods. No claims can be allowed on goods which have been cut or printed. BINDERS BOARD Bundle A bundle of Binders Board is a standard package weighing 50 pounds. Number The "Number" of board indicates the number of sheets in a bundle weigh- ing 50 pounds. Count By "Count" is meant the number of sheets of any size in a bundle of 50 pounds. [3191 Regular Number The "Regular Number" indicates the number of sheets, 20" x 30" in size, in a bundle of 50 pounds. Reservations 1 — Prices quoted are subject to change without notice. 2 — Orders are not subject to cancellation or changes after acceptance with- out written consent. 3 — Orders should always be in the form of specifications of quantity, sizes, and weights or count, with a date for shipment. Specifications may be changed if provided for when order is placed, and if stock has not been made. 4 — All promises of shipment are approximate and made subject to unfore- seen or unavoidable delays. 5 — A variation of 3 % in weight either over or under SO pounds per bundle, but in all cases full sheetage to prevail, is allowable and considered commercial delivery. 6 — A variation in thickness of 5 points over or under the specified caliper is allowable on all binders board. 7 — No claims, allowances, or damages will be entertained unless reported on arrival of goods and before using any portion thereof. 8 — Quotations for all binders board and special products are based on cutting off at the machine to approximate length, and shipping in unprotected bundles, unless otherwise specified herein. Squaring, trimming, or special packing must be clearly specified, for which an extra charge is made. Directions for Ordering If purchasers will follow these directions, it will greatly assist in giving the best possible service, without delays and errors. Size In all cases, whether ordering regular stock or special sizes, state sizes wanted in inches. Weight or Thickness Specify the number of sheets wanted of the size ordered in each 30 pound bundle, or the caliper thickness. If the special size which may be ordered is to be made on the basis of a regular number or weight, state that fact clearly. If in doubt about the number, weight or thickness desired, send a sample showing exactly what is wanted. Special Requirements State clearly all special requirements for each item, and when convenient describe any unusual or special use for which the product is wanted. Shipping Instructions Give name of consignee and destination. Mills reserve the right to route all goods sold at delivered prices. Give date of shipment desired. For shipment to points in any territory where arbitrary or local freight rates are charged, such additional charges will be added to the price quoted for deliveries in said territory. Terms All accounts are due net in thirty days from dates of shipments. Two per cent cash discount if paid within fifteen days from dates of shipment. Any freight deductions made are conditional on the surrender of paid ex- pense bills. [320] Extra Charges All quotations for Binders Board are made subject to the following extra charges, except when otherwise clearly stated: On all boards thicker than a No. 12 — 20" x 30", or thinner than a No. SO — 20" x 30", 35.00 per ton or more. Trimming to size, 15% or more. ENVELOPES Substances All Envelope Papers shall be manufactured in 17" x 22" substance numbers, 500 count. The following substance numbers are established for envelopes: Grades Bonds 17 x 22—16, 20, 24 Writings 17 x 22—20, 24, 28, 32 Ledgers 17 x 22—20, 24, 28, 32 No. 1 and No. 2 Rag 17 x 22—20, 24, 28, 32 White Wood 17 x 22—20, 24, 28, 32 Manila 17x22—16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 40 (and heavier, to meet requirements of trade) Jute and Rope ._ 17 x 22—20, 28, 32, 36, 40 (and heavier, to meet requirements of trade) Unbleached Sulphite 17 x 22—16, 20, 28, 32, 40 (and heavier, to meet requirements of trade) Kraft 17 x 22—16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40 (and heavier, to meet requirements of trade) No envelopes shall be made one weight and labeled another. Colors The manufacture of all colored (Commercial, Official, Open Side arid Open End) envelopes shall be limited to six colors and white; the colors shall be the standard colors adopted by the manufacturers of the paper. BLUE PRINT PAPER Cores of wood or iron on which Blue Print or other roll papers are shipped shall „ be charged as a separate item on the same invoice as the paper. When returned *V& by the purchaser, he shall be credited at the price charged. Brands Freight on cores returned shall be prepaid by the purchaser. llnyy Donor If mill is required to case rolls, an extra charge shall be made for cases; the cases Is Made not to be returnable. Stocking WRAPPING PAPER Paper / Glossary i MACHINE GLAZED Uses of Paper All orders for wrapping paper are accepted for wrapping purposes only. Basis of Manufacture All wrapping paper will be made on a basis of 24* x 36" — 480 sheets only. | n( j p)( Billing Weight - » i All wrapping paper will be billed at actual scale weight, including twine „ ■ and wrappers. All cores, except iron, will be charged for and are not l,! returnable. HOUSI [3211 Commercial Delivery Five per cent, over or under ordered weight basis will be considered good delivery. On special orders of 5 tons or less, over-runs or under-runs not exceeding 10% will be considered good delivery. On special orders ex- ceeding 5 tons, over-runs or under-runs not exceeding 5% will be considered good delivery. Untruthful Markings No package will be marked, stenciled or labeled by manufacturers with other than the actual dimensions, weights or contents. Base Price The base price for wrapping papers shall be upon counter rolls 6" to 36" wide, regular 9" diameter, 25 to 60 pounds. Terms of Sale F. O. B. mill, 3%, 30 days. Cutting Charges (Sheets) 150 sq. in. and larger, 25 cents per cwt. 108 to 150 sq. in., 40 cents per cwt. Under 108 sq. in. to 72 sq. in., 65 cents per cwt. Under 72 sq. in., price on application. Cutting Charges (Rolls) Rolls 9" diameter or greater 1 »■>■ Rolls 6" width or greater / iNlone - Smaller diameters and widths on application. Packing Charges Ream tying, 10 cents cwt. Skeleton frames, 25 cents cwt. Solid board frames, 35 cents cwt. Solid cases, 50 cents cwt. (No case for less than #2.00.) Ream banding, 25 cents. Unusual Conditions Orders are accepted subject to delays due to strikes, accidents, fires or other causes beyond the control of the manufacturer. Special Colors No special colors will be furnished for less than 25 cents per cwt., advance over basic price. Special colors — minimum 5 tons. Special Sizes Must be for machine trimming 96". Minimum orders for stock size, pattern, color, weight and pattern. MANILA The following may be considered regular stock sizes (480 sheets to ream): 15 x 20—103^ 30 x 40—28, 42, 50, 60, 70 to 125 18 x 26—20, 25 36 x 40—120 20 x 30—21, 25, 35 40 x 48—135, 150, 180, 200 24 x 36—20, 25, 30, 40 to 70 48 x 64—215, 250, 285, 320 CUTTER ROLLS 9" in diameter Basis 24x36— 30 Basis 24 x 36 — 35 and heavier 6-inch basis 30 20-inch basis 30, 40, 50 9-inch basis 30 24-inch basis 30 to 60, 90 12-inch basis 30, 40 30-inch basis 30 to 60, 90 15-inch basis 30, 40, 50 36-inch basis 50, 60, 90 18-inch basis 30, 40, 50 [322] All orders accepted for wrapping purposes only, unless otherwise specifically mentioned. All bills to include in the weight all twine and wrappers, with a leeway of 5% over or under ordered weight; but under these circumstances to be billed actual scale weight. Wood or iron cores billed by weight or piece and returnable if agreed. Paper cores to be weighed with the paper and not returnable. In weighing, no paper to be made one weight and stenciled otherwise. GLAZED AND FANCY Basis of Prices (a) All prices, unless otherwise specified, are to be based for paper in rolls on a ream of 500 sheets of the following standard sizes: 1 — Ordinary Glazed, Plated and Printed Papers, basis 20* x 24". 2 — Extra Fine Glazed, Waterproof Finished, and Embossed, basis 20" x 25*. Standard Rolls (a) Widths 1 — Ordinary Glazed, Plated and Printed Papers, 24* or 26* wide. 2 — Extra Fine Glazed, Waterproof Finished and Embossed, 25* wide. (b) Contents 1 — Glazed, Plated, Printed or any flat-surfaced paper: (a) Weighing not over 30 pounds to ream 20" x 24", not less than 3 reams to a roll. (b) Weighing over 30 pounds to ream 20" x 24", not less than 2 reams to a roll. 2 — All papers with embossed surface, not less than 1 ream to a roll. Note: Extra packing charges; all rolls, contents less than standard, 25 cents per roll minimum charge. Extra Charges — Sheeting — Slitting, etc. All extra charges are based on a ream of 500 sheets of a standard width by 20 inches in length. Standard sizes are 24 x 20 when cut from 24* rolls « « a 25x20 " '* " 25" " " " " 26x20 " " " 26" " Sheeting To lengths greater than 20 inches, a charge proportionate to basic rate applies. To lengths less than 20 inches, the same charge as for the 20-inch cut applies. On rolls narrower than 24 inches, charges shall be the same as for the standard width. On all rolls other than standard, charges shall be on a basis of 24* x 20". (a) On Making Orders 1 — Packing. Rolls, contents other than standard, 25 cents per roll. 2 — Sheeting. 25 ream lots or more, not less than 25 cents per ream. Less than 25 ream lots, not less than 35 cents per ream. 3 — Slitting. 25 ream lots or more, not less than 35 cents per ream. Less than 25 ream lots, not less than 45 cents per ream. (b) Orders from Stock Rolls 1 — Rewinding or Sheeting. 25 ream lots or more, not less than 35 cents per ream. Less than 25 ream lots, not less than 45 cents per ream. 2 — Slitting. 25 ream lots or more, not less than 45 cents per ream. Less than 25 ream lots, not less than 55 cents per ream. Note: Orders for sheeting, slitting, or rewinding, which do not use entire contents of a standard or stock roll, are subject to an additional charge of 35 cents per roll, minimum, to cover cost of extra repacking, etc. 323] Standard Stock Colors The number of standard stock colors and shades that may be manufactured shall be limited to the forty (40) colors (and White and India), adopted by the Association and accepted by the War Industries Board, November IS, 1918. Special Colors The minimum quantity of a paper of a special color for which an order may be accepted at regular rates must be for the equivalent of 1,000 pounds finished weight. Orders for not less than 1,000 pounds, but not less than 800 pounds, finished weight may be accepted at an advance in price — (on account of the increased cost of production). "Make and Hold" Orders All "make and hold" orders are to be accepted only on condition that a spec- ified date for the entire delivery be given, at which date the goods are to be charged and the invoice accepted whether or not goods are ordered shipped. Variations On all special runs the usual normal variations in quality and shade shall be accepted. Such orders shall be subject to over-runs and under-runs as follows: Orders of 49 reams and under 15% " " 50 " to 99 reams 10% " " 100 " and over 5% and deliveries so made shall be considered as an execution of the order. Exceptional Quantities Special prices for exceptional quantities shall not apply to small quantities or ream prices for broken lots from stock. Claims All claims must be made within ten days from receipt of goods. No claims will be allowed on goods cut, printed, soiled or damaged. This paragraph shall not apply to claims based on apparent manufacturing defects. Delivery (a) All goods shipped at buyer's risk. (b) Express and parcel post deliveries to be at cost of the receiver. (c) All prices quoted F. O. B. mill. Terms Terms of sale shall be cash in 30 days less 2%. No discount after 30 days from date of invoice, and where several invoices fall in one month, 30 days from the average date of said invoices. Quotations Prices and quotations subject to change without notice. All orders, con- tracts and agreements are contingent upon strikes, fires, accidents or causes beyond our control. TISSUE PAPER TRADE CUSTOMS ADOPTED BY THE TISSUE PAPER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION Count 480 sheets shall constitute a standard ream of tissue paper. [324] Sizes On special sizes there shall be an additional price for lots of less than the equivalent of 200 reams, basis 24" x 36", 10 pounds — 480. The following sizes may be considered as regular for all wrapping tissue paper: 10x15 18x24 12 x 18 20 x 30 15x20 24x36 No sizes shall be manufactured between 20" x 30" and 24" x 36" unless paid for on the basis of 24" x 36". Note: The above does not apply to special orders, such as those for speci- fied manufacturing purposes, where odd sizes are used to conform to the special requirements of one particular manufacturer. Special Sizes and Weights On special sizes or special weights of regular colors there shall be an addi- tional price for lots of less than the equivalent of 200 reams, basis 24" x 36", 10 pounds— 480. Orders for Colors On orders for special sizes or colors 10% above or below the quantity ordered shall be considered a good delivery and accepted by the purchaser. Small Orders On orders for less than 10 reams an extra charge shall be made. Package Markings All packages shall be plainly marked outside and inside with the official Association label stating exact size, count and contents. Paper sold by the pound to be billed at gross weight. Where wrapper and string do not exceed 2J^% it shall be accepted as a good delivery. Frames and Cases Where paper is ordered in frames or cases, then frames and cases shall be extra and billed at cost. Claims No claims allowed after paper is cut or printed. Note: Exceptional cases occasionally arise where the fault is clearly with the mill and where absolute literal enforcement of this rule would work in- justice and hardship to the jobbers. It is therefore understood that mills will enforce the spirit of this rule, deciding exceptional cases on their merits and according to the rules of equity. "Make and Hold" Orders All "Make and Hold" orders must specify an ultimate date for shipment, at which date goods are to be billed and the invoice taken to account by customer whether ordered shipped or not. Rolls and Cores If paper is shipped in rolls, wound on wooden or iron cores, the paper shall be removed therefrom by purchaser and the cores returned to the manufac- turer at the invoice price, freight paid by the mill. Cores not weighing over 13 ounces to the foot shall not be returnable. Counting and Folding For counting and folding sizes smaller than 150 square inches, an extra charge shall be made in addition to the base price of 24" x 36" — £80. Finishing Charges For finishing in large sheets for toilet paper an extra charge per hundred- weight shall be made above the price for the same weight of paper in jumbo rolls. 13251 / * Basis Weight Jumbo Rolls A variation of 5% either above or below basis ordered shall constitute a good delivery in so far as individual rolls are concerned, but entire ship- ments should average within 2%% of basis ordered. BLOTTING PAPER Standard Sizes and Weights The following may be considered the standard sizes and weights : 19 x 24—60 to 120 19 x 24—140 Put up in half-ream packages. Put up in quarter-ream packages. Charges for Cutting Charges for cutting when re-wrapped in original package are as follows: Cutting 19 x 24 into J^'s or larger 15c. per ream Cutting 19 x 24 to 4 x 9^ up to 9^ x 12 35c. " " Cutting 19 x 24 to smaller than 4x9^ 50c. " " For assorted colors in bundle add 15c. to above. Banding Charges Charges for banding (in addition to above prices) are as follows: Banding in packages of 100 or more #0.25 " 50 to 99 0.35 " 25 " 49 0.60 " 12 " 24 0.75 " 8 " 11 1.00 "less than 8 1.50 For assorted colors in each package add 15c. per ream. Casing Charge Charge for casing, one-half cent per pound will be the charge for casing, with a minimum charge of #2.00. (This does not apply to Enamel Blotting.) Wooden Frames Charge for wooden frames will be one-quarter cent per pound, additional. Rolls in Crates Charge for rolls in crates will be one-half cent per pound, additional. Special Sizes and Weights Charges for special sizes and weights in quantities of 100 to 500 pounds of one color, size and weight (100 pound and 500 pound are "inclusive"), will be not less than 1 cent per pound additional. Same in quantities of less than 100 pounds to be charged at not less than 2 cents per pound additional. For the purposes of this rule, regular sizes are taken as 19" x 24" and 24" x 38". Broken Packages Charge for broken packages will be one cent per pound additional, on orders for less than 5 reams, except on embossed blottings. Printed Samples No free printed samples will be furnished, except on mill brands. Terms of Sale Terms of sale to be 2% discount for cash, 30 days. After 30 days, no dis- counts to be allowed. 326] ONION SKINS AND MANIFOLDS Regular Stock Sizes Included under this head are Manifolds and Thin Bonds. Regular stock sizes may be considered as comprising the following (500 sheets to ream): 14x17 17x22 17x28 19x24 22x34 Weights are based on the substance number plan, usually ranging from 7J^ pound folio to 13 pound folio. Colors Colors and tints are standard. Finishes Finishes are glazed and unglazed. Over-runs and Under-runs Over-runs and under-runs not in excess of 10% shall apply in all orders for special sizes or colors, and in this case to be considered good delivery and accepted by purchaser. Price by Weight All paper heavier than 10 pounds to the ream (basis 24" x 36") to be sold by the pound, weight to include wrappers and twine. Small Sizes In small and not regular sizes, not exceeding V/2 inches smaller than regular sizes, to be charged for as regular sizes. Ream Weight Limit Limit of weight to the ream shall be considered as 17 pounds (basis 24" x 36"). Paper in excess of this weight to be classified as Light Weight Manila. VEGETABLE PARCHMENT The following trade customs are now in use by a majority of the manufacturers of Genuine Vegetable Parchment Paper: Acceptances Of orders are contingent upon uncontrollable causes of delay or prevention. Basis Weight The standard ream is 24" x 36" — 500 sheets. Unless otherwise expressly stated, the weight named in the order will be the weight for the standard ream and not for the size specified. Ream Standard Ream weights are subject to a variation not exceeding 5% above or below the nominal ream weight. Paper made within these variations constitutes a good delivery. Standard Ream Weights Are 30, 40 and 50 pounds for 500 sheets 24" x 36". All other weights are to be considered special weights. Quotations Unless otherwise stated are for prompt acceptance within ten days and for present delivery only. Pound Base Quotations made per pound are for base prices only, and are subject to all differentials for weights, sizes, packing and baling. [3271 How Pape Is Made Stocking Paper , Glossary Reference Guide j Index Ser Hoi r Sizes (a) Only sheets and rolls will be made which will cut without waste from a width of finished roll not less than 90% of maximum roll trim. (b) Sizes 10" x 20" and under are quoted from the "Standard Cut Size List." Sizes intermediate between listed cut sizes are charged at the price of the next larger listed cut size. STANDARD CUT SIZE LIST 5x6 8x12 10 x 13 6x6 8x13 10x14 6x7 9x9 10x15 6x8 9 x 10 10 x 16 6x9 9x11 10x18 7x9 9x12 10x19 8x9 9x13 10 x 20 8x11 10x12 12x12 (c) Sizes of which the smaller dimension is less than 66% of the larger dimension are subject to special prices. Rolls Pony (5" D) and standard (9" D) rolls will be made in widths which with rolls of same diameter and any standard faces take the full width of the trimmed mill roll. Jumbo rolls are all rolls of larger diameter than 9", and are made in widths taking up not less than 90% of the maximum roll trim. Deliveries (a) Shipments will be routed at carrier's option unless specified by customer. (b) Deliveries are subject to variation of 10% above or below the quantity ordered. Paper made within these variations constitutes a good delivery. (c) Deliveries are on the basis of F. O. B. mill. Samples Samples of current runs are furnished subject to variations in weight and color. Claims (a) No claims for allowance will be considered unless made within ten days of receipt of shipment and before paper is used. (b) Claims for damage in transit or shortage in delivery will be entertained only if accompanied by the original bill of lading and the paid freight bill showing that shipment was receipted for short or in a damaged condi- tion. (c) When paper is sold F. O. B. Mill (whether with or without freight allowance) claims for loss or shortage in railroad delivery or damage in transit will be made by the shipper only for account and risk of the consignee. (d) Where paper is to be cut or printed by the customer, no claim for allowance will be entertained after the paper is cut or printed. "Make and Hold" Orders All "make and hold" orders must specify an ultimate date of shipment, at which date goods are to be billed and the invoice taken to account by customer, whether goods are ordered shipped or not. Printing Printed Parchment is charged according to quantity of each brand, each label, and each size ordered. New designs requiring drawings and plates are charged to the customer at cost. The plates will be the property of the customer. [328] Cancellation After an order is received, no change or cancellation will be allowed unless the buyer pays for all paper cut or printed up to the date the change or cancellation is accepted on the basis of the quantity printed and completed At such time. Cores, Plugs and Wrappers No allowance will be made for weight of cores, plugs or wrappers on Vegetable Parchment paper in packages. WAXED PAPER Count A ream of waxed paper shall consist of 480 sheets. Weight Basis The basis of weight shall be on size 24" x 36" — 480 after waxing. The weight after waxing shall be used in designating the weight of the paper. Markings No package shall be marked, stenciled or labeled by the manufacturer with other than the actual size, weight, count or contents. Cancellation or Change After acceptance and acknowledgment of an order, the right is retained by the manufacturer to refuse to permit changes or cancellation. Net Weight No allowance to be made for weight of cores, plugs or wrappers on roll waxed paper, and quotations are to specify that price includes the weight of such cores, plugs and wrappers. Commercial Delivery (a) A delivery which averages not more than 7J^% over or under specified basis weight shall constitute a good delivery on an order, and is not subject to rejection or allowance on that account. (b) All orders are to be accepted subject to a variation of the quantity ordered — no less than 10% and no more than 25%. (c) All deliveries shall be on the basis of F. O. B. mill. Claims For the mutual protection of both buyer and seller, claims must be made within ten (10) days after receipt of goods. No paper on which claim has been made may be used or returned until seller has had opportunity to inspect it or until adjustment has been made. Returns No allowance will be made for the return of rolls with 1 inch or less in thickness unused, whether plain or printed waxed paper. Caramel and Kiss Wrappers Waxed papers cut to caramel or kiss size are to be packed in cartons or packages holding not less than ten pounds net. Lunch Rolls All Lunch Rolls in sheets are to be put up and sold as follows: Sizes 12 x 10, in 20, 24 and 40 count " 12 x IS, in IS, 18, 20, 30 and 40 count " 12 x 18, in 15, 18, 20, 24, 30 and 40 count Except for special requirements of the syndicate stores, the continuous rolls shall be put up and sold in rolls 12" wide and in 36 and 72 feet lengths. [329] / Waxed Paper by the Pound From and after April 1, 1920, all Waxed Paper except Lunch Rolls, shall be sold by the pound, except all light weight Tissue under 18 pounds weight, base 24" x 36" — 480 count, which may be sold by the sheet in the following sizes: 24 x 36 480 count 20 x 30 480 " 18 x 24 480 " IS x 20 480 " 14x18 480 " 12x18 480 " 9x12 480 " Butter Wrappers in all sizes shall be sold by the package, but odd sizes of plain waxed tissue paper are to be sold by the pound. GLASSINE AND GREASEPROOF PAPERS Adopted by the Glassine and Greaseproof Manufacturers Association and approved by the National Paper Trade Association, April 11, 1922 Substance Number The term "Substance" as used herein shall be defined as: The weight in pounds of 500 sheets of a size 24" x 36". Marking Each package shall be marked, stenciled or labeled by the manufacturer with the actual contents, size, substance and count. Cores, Plugs and Wrappers On ream wrapped paper, the weight of the paper including the ream wrapper shall be taken as the net weight. No allowance shall be made for the weight of cores, plugs and wrappers on glassine and greaseproof paper in rolls or bundles, except in the case of iron or special fiber cores, frames and cases. Acceptances Acceptances of orders are contingent upon uncontrollable causes of delay or prevention. Quotations Quotations, unless otherwise stated, are for prompt acceptance and are subject to change without notice. Pound Basis Quotations made per pound are for base prices only and are subject to all differentials of the quoting manufacturer, for weights, sizes, packing and baling. Carload Lots Unless otherwise specified, a carload of paper shall be considered as 36,000 pounds. "Make and Hold" Orders All "make and hold" orders must specify an ultimate date of shipment, at which date goods are to be billed and the invoice taken to account by customer, whether goods are ordered shipped or not. Commercial Delivery (a) Shipments will be routed at carrier's option unless specified by customer. (b) A delivery which averages not more than 5% over or under the specified substance shall constitute a good delivery on an order, and shall not be subject to rejection or allowance on that account. (c) All orders are to be accepted as good delivery without claim by cus- tomer when shipment is not more than 10% over or 10% under the quantity ordered. (d) All deliveries shall be on the basis of F. 0. B. mill. [3301 Cancellation or Change Changes or cancellation on any paper being specially made to order will be accepted if the paper is not actually on the paper machine. Cancellation will not be accepted in the case of a special color or paper other than standard. Claims For the mutual protection of both buyer and seller the following will apply to claims: (a) No claim for allowance will be considered unless made within 30 days of the receipt of shipment and before the paper in question is used. (b) On the F. O. B. mill basis (whether with or without freight allowance) claims for loss, shortage or damage in transit will be made by the shipper, only for account and risk of the buyer. (c) Where paper is to be cut or printed by or for the customer, no claim for allowance will be entertained after the paper has been cut or printed. ROLL NEWS PRINT Tonnage Purchaser shall order a definite tonnage of paper to be taken over the contract period and in equal monthly instalments of the total contract tonnage. Basis of Weight Five per cent. (5%) over or under the contract basis of weight shall be considered good delivery. Widths The widths of rolls mentioned in a contract are permanent unless the seller agrees to change. Specifications for Shipments The purchaser shall furnish to the seller by the 15th day of each month complete specifications for the shipments to be made the succeeding month. Weight The weight of roll news print paper shall be gross weight less only the weight of cores. Delivery Point Delivery point is on board cars at place of manufacture. Terms Terms net cash thirty days from date of invoice or not later than the 15th day of the month for all paper shipped the previous month. Legal rate of interest to be paid on all amounts remaining unpaid on due dates. Cores Cores shall be charged to the purchaser at one cent per inch if paper and three cents per inch if iron, and shall be returned promptly, freight prepaid, when they shall be credited to the purchaser at invoice price. Claims (a) No allowance shall be made for waste, damage or paper left on cores. (b) In case of claim of any nature applying upon any shipment of paper made under a contract, the seller shall be notified immediately, but no claim shall be allowed for consequential damage. [3311 / f Contingencies In case the seller shall be unable and fail at any time to make and supply, or the purchaser shall be unable and fail to take and use said paper in consequence of strikes, fire, explosion, lock-outs, combinations of workmen, flood, drought, embargoes, war, the acts o iGod, the public enemy or any cause beyond the control of either party hereto, the seller shall not be liable to the purchaser for failure to supply such paper, nor shall the pur- chaser be liable to the seller for failure to take such paper during the period of such disability. Cancellation If the purchaser shall fail to pay any amounts when due under this contract, or fail to make settlements as provided herein, the seller may, at its option, cancel this contract, refuse to furnish any more paper thereunder, and declare the obligations of the purchaser for all paper furnished hereunder due forth- with^ notwithstanding the terms hereof, but the purchaser shall remain liable to the seller for all loss and damage sustained by reason of such failure. Domicile All sales shall be governed by the laws of the place of legal domicile of the seller. SHEET NEWS Trade Customs for Publishers' Supplies Minimum Basis: 24" x 36" — 33, including wrappers and twine. . Minimum Size: 24" x 36". The following shall be standard publishers' sizes: 24x36 28x42 35x45 38x48 27x41 30x44 35x48 42x56 Where sizes other than these are required and where they can be accepted by the mill, an extra charge for cutting shall be made as follows: 2 or more tons, $3.50 per ton Cars (20 tons or over), $2.00 per ton Not less than two tons of any odd size shall be cut. All papers put up lapped. ; 332] Paper Brand Names OWNED BY THE AMERICAN WRITING PAPER COMPANY Those in italics represent the 'papers of the Eagle-A Line of Quality-Standards and their grade position. They are stocked by each Service House. After the others is placed the grade number of each of the Quality-Standard papers of its kind which it most nearly approximates. For example: "Aberdeen Linen — 3rd grade" means that this approximates the third Quality-Standard grade Linen paper, Aulde Scotia Lynene, so indicated in the list. Aberdeen Linen — 3rd grade Acorn Linen — 1st grade Acceptance Bond — Grade VII Acceptance Linen Ledger Account Linen Ledger — Grade III Agawam Paper Co. (Writing) — 1st grade Agawam Bond — Grade II Agawam Superfine (Writing) — 1st grade Agawam Extra Superfine (Writing) — 1st grade Agawam Index Bristol — Grade I Air post Bond — Grade V Alberta Bond — 4th grade Albion Offset — Grade I Albion Super Book — 6th grade Albion Text — Grade II Aldine Flax Linen (Writing) — 4th grade Alhambra Allies Bond A. W. P. Co. Bond— 4th grade American Bond — 2nd grade American Linen Bond — 1st grade American Flax Linen — 1st grade American Bulking Book — Grade III American English Finish Book — Grade VI American Eggshell — Grade VI American M. F. Book — 6th grade American Super Cal. Book — Grade VI American # 10 Blue Print American # 20 Blue Print American # 30 Blue Print American #10 Drawing American # 20 Drawing American # 30 Drawing American Gelatin Process Board American # 10 Index Record Bristol — 1st grade American # 20 Index Record Bristol American #30 Index Record Bristol — 2nd grade American # 40 Index Record Bristol — 3rd grade American Menu Bristol — 3rd grade American # 10 Offset — 1st grade American Extra # 10 Offset — 1st grade American #20 Offset — 2nd grade American # 30 Offset — 3rd grade American # 40 Offset — 4th grade American Post Card (Eagle-A) — Grade VI American Railroad Folder American Rope Bristol — Grade IV American Specialties American Star # 1 Jute American Vellum—Grade II Anchor (Writing) — 4th grade Anchor Linen — 3rd grade Antique Flax Linen (Writing) 1st grade Antique Vellum Archive Bond — 2nd grade Archive Linen — 1st grade Archive Linen Ledger — 1st grade Archive Mills (Writing) — 2nd grade Arcadia Mills Superfine (Writing) — 1st grade Arden Wedding — Grade I Arrive Halftone — Grade V Arrive Medio Arven Plate — Grade II Assurance Bond — 4th grade Atlas — 8th grade Aulde Scotia Lynene — Grade III Author's Linen Autograph Kraft A-l Drawing Amer. # 10 Drawing Bamboo Bank Parchment (Bond) — 4th grade Bank Record Parchment (Bond) — 4th grade Bank Record Ledger — 1st grade Bankers Bond — 4th grade Bankers Linen Ledger — 3rd grade Bankers Record (Ledger) — 3rd grade Bankers Superfine — 1st grade Bedford Linen Beebe Offset — Grade II Beechwood Berkshire Cover — 1st grade Berkshire Text — Grade I Beverley Mills (Writing) — 4th grade Bicycle Bond Big Chief Index Bristol Biscay Wedding — Grade II Blendwell Cover Bond of Commerce Bond d'Aigle A — 1st grade Bordeaux Cover — 3rd grade Brixton Wedding — 2nd grade Brixworth Wedding — 2nd grade | Brokers Bond — 8th grade Brokers Ledger — 5th grade Brokers Linen — 4th grade Brookhurst Congress Cap Brunswick Linen Ledger — Grade II Cambridge Superfine (Writing) — 1st grade Capitol Ledger — 2nd grade Capitol Linen — 2nd grade Celtic Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Century Linen — 2nd grade Champion Superfine (Writing) — 1st grade Cheriton Wedding — 2nd grade Stocking [ 333 ] Cherokee Index Bristol — Grade II Cherokee Linen Ledger Chester Mills Extra Superfine — 1st grade Chester Offset — Grade III Chesterfield Mills (Writing) — 1st grade Chesterfield Papeterie — Grade IV Chevron Bond — Grade VI Chromatic (two tone) Announcements Clarence Clearwater (Book) — 2nd grade Climax Ledger Climax Mills Clover Mills (Four Leaf Clover Design) (Writing) — 4th grade Colonial Linen — Grade II Columbian Bond — 4th grade Columbian Ledger — 3rd grade Commission Bond Consols Bond — 3rd grade Contract Bond — Grade IV Contract Ledger — 3rd grade Coronet Coupon Bond — Grade I Covenant Bond — 6th grade Crestline Antique Book — 3rd grade Crocker's E-G-H Crocker's Cover — 5th grade Crown Imperial Linen — 1st grade Crown Ledger Crown Leghorn Linen — 1st grade Crown Leghorn Linen Bond Crown Royal Bond Crown Royal Extra Superfine — 1st grade Crown Royal Linen — 2nd grade Crystal Springs Superfine — 1st grade Currency Bond — 8th grade Darien Index — Grade IV Dartmoor Wedding — 5th grade Dartworth Wedding — 5th grade Debenture Bond — 4th grade Deckle d'Aigle (de luxe) — Grade I Defiance (Writing) — 4th grade Delta Mills (Writing) — 2nd grade Delta Mimeograph — Grade II Democracy Bond De Pere Bond De Pere Linen De Pere Linen Record De Pere Oriental Linen De Pere Superfine De Pere Mills Ledger De Pere Mills Superfine Deerfield Derby Bond — 7th grade Derby Royal Linen Mills (Linen) — 3rd grade Derby Mills Royal Linen — 3rd grade Design — Battle-ax, Spears and Shield Design — Maltese Cross Design — Pompeiian Lamp Detail Drawing — Amer. # 10 Diana Mills (Writing) — 4th grade Diagonal Check (Wedding) — 3rd grade Dickinson Offset — Grade IV Dorchester Pure Linen Dorrington Papeterie — Grade IV Dublin Linen — 3rd grade Dundee Bond — 2nd grade Dundee Linen Dundee Record (Ledger) — 2nd grade Dundee Record Ledger — 2nd grade Eagle- A — Letter A with outline of Eagle. Used on all watermarked papers made by the American Writing Paper Company, Holyoke. Mass. Eagle- A American Post Card Eclipse Drawing — Amer. # 20 Elite Cover — 3rd grade Empire Linen Endora Papeterie — 5th grade Essex Extra Fine (Writing) — 1st grade Eton Ledger Excello Mills (Writing) — 4th grade Excelsior Extra Superfine — 1st grade Exeter Bond Exeter Linen Exhibit Bond Exmoor Bond Extension Ledger — Grade IV Extra Linen Extra Super Laid Extra Super Wove Fabric Bond — 4th grade Fairview (Writings) — 5th grade Falcon Cover Faneuil Farnsworth Papeterie — Grade V Federal Bond — 2nd grade Ferndale Linen Fernside Fin de Siecle Bond Franklin Bond French Bond Freedom Bond — 9th grade Gal-A-Ton Boxboard Genuine Flax Linen Genuine Irish Linen Gladstone Flats Glendale (Writing) — 4th grade Globe Linen Fabric Gloria Bond — 7th grade Gloria Ledger — Grade V Golden Fleece Government Bond — 2nd grade Government Linen — 1st grade Government Record Ledger — Grade I Granada Special Linen Ledger Griffin Linen Hamilton Hampden Superfine Hand- Craft Text — 1st grade Harding Paper Co. Superfine — 1st grade Harding Linen Record Ledger Hawthorn Linen Ledger — 3rd grade Hazelton Hector Linen '> Herald Bond — 4th grade Herculean Cover — Grade I Herculean Box Cover Hickory Bond — 3rd grade Hickory Ledger Holyoke Paper Co. Ledger Holyoke Paper Co. Linen Holyoke Paper Co. Superfine Holyoke Paper Co. Standard (design) Holyoke Loft Dried Ledger Honest Linen — 3rd grade Hornet Linen — 1st grade Huntington Mills Homespun Linen Hurlbut's Authors Linen Hurlbut Bank Bond 1822 — 1st grade Hurlbut Paper Mfg. Co. — Superfine Hurlbut's Extra Superfine Hurlbut's French Linen Hurlbut's Linen Ledger — 1st grade Imperial Bond — 2nd grade Imperial Linen — 1st grade Imperial Vellum (Writing) — 4th grade Indenture Bond— -4th grade Indemnity India Linen 334] Indian Princess Inlaid Insurance Bond Invincible Linen Bond Irish Linen Fabric — 4th grade Irish Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Irving Mills Islington Superfine Ivory Ivorine Japan Bond — 4th grade Japan Linen Keene Mills Kingston Bond Kingston Linen Kingston Superfine Kimono — Cover — 3rd grade Knickerbocker — Cover Legal Linen Ledger — 5th grade Legend Linen Ledger Lenox Superfine — 1st grade Lenox Extra Superfine — 1st grade Lexington Linen — 3rd grade Linden Paper Co. Bond Linden Paper Co. Linen Ledger Linden Paper Co. Superfine Linden Extra Superfine Linden Linen Linen Ledger Linen Record Londonderry Linen Lotus Linen Luson Linen Lyons Parchment Magna Charta Bond — 2nd grade Maidstone Bond Maltese Linen — 2nd grade Maltese Linen Pure Linen — 2nd grade Manchester Linen Marguerite Linen Manhattan Linen Manhattan Linen Ledger — 3rd grade Manifold Bond Marion Mills Marseilles Linen Marseilles Linen Ledger Massasoit Co. Bond Massasoit Linen Ledger Melrose (Writing) — 4th grade Melton Mills Merrimac Merchants Bond — 2nd grade Merchants Linen Ledger — 3rd grade Milan Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Minerva Linen — 3rd grade Mohican Linen Mohican Extra Linen Monarch Superfine Monona Linen Fabric Montrose Linen Mt. Holyoke Mills Alt. Nonotuck Mills Mt. Tom Mills Mulberry Linen Mystic Bond National Ledger National Linen Niagara Linen Ne Plus Ultra — Agawam Parchment — and U. S. Linen Ne Plus Ultra — Manuscript Cover Ne Plus Ultra — Roman Bond Ne Plus Ultra — Typewriter Nonpar iel Norman Bond — Grade VII Norman Linen Ledger Fines Grade IV Grade V Norman Superfine No. 2 Bond No. 6 Bond No. 40 Bond — 9th grade Oakland Linen — 4th grade Oak Leaf Linen — 3rd grade Oak Ridge Official Bond — 4th grade Old Bay State Mills Old Cheshire Mills Old Chester Mills — Grade I Old Colony Linen Old Colony Mills Old Crown Linen — 4th grade Old English Linen Old Hempstead Bond — 3rd grade Old Ivanshire Old Oaken Bucket Linen Old Parchment Bond Olympia Ledger — 4th grade Oneida Ontario Mills Option Bond — 8th grade Overland Oriental Bond — 4th grade Oriental Linen Parchment Original County Record — 2nd grade Original County Record Ledger — 2nd grade Pansy Paradox — Cover — Grade III Parchment Bond Parchment Ledger Parchment Linen Parchment Extra Superfine Parchment Universal Parsons Paper Co. — Extra Fines — 2nd grade Parsons Paper Co. — Superfine — 2nd grade Parsons Tinted Writings — Grade II Penelope (Linen) — 3rd grade Perfection Bond — 4th grade Persian Bond — Grade III Persian Ledger Persian Linen Perth Linen Ledger Peerless Mimeograph — Grade I Peerless (Writing) — 4th grade Plaid Platner & Porter, First Quality Platner & Porter Linen Platner & Porter Superfine Postal Ledger Paper Preferred Bond — 4th grade Premier Linen Bond Priority Bond Pristine Linen — 2nd grade Pure Belfast Linen Pure Flax Pure Linen — 2nd grade Pure Linen Fabric (Wedding) — 3rd grade Pure Linen Rag Fiber Pure Linen Stock (Wedding) — 2nd grade Pure Thistle Linen Putnam Mills Quadrille Quaker Linen — 3rd grade Quality Bond — 7th grade Quality Manifold Queen Anne Linen Queen Irish Linen Railroad Folder — Grade IV Record Bond — 7th grade Record Ledger — 4th grade Regal Wove How Paper Is Made Stocking I Paper / Glossary / Servi 335] Reliance Bond — 4th grade Reliance Ledger — 1st grade Reliance Linen Ledger — 1st grade Revenue Bond — 7th grade Rialto Mills — 4th grade Rival Bond — 4th grade Rival Linen — Grade IV Riverside Paper Co. Riverside Bond Riverside Linen Ledger River dale Cover — Grade IV Rolleston Mills Roman Bond — 3rd grade Royal Berkshire Bond Royal Berkshire Linen Royal Scotch Linen Royal Scotch Pure Fabric Russian Linen Ledger — 1st grade Samurai — Cover — 3rd grade Saranac Bond — 4th grade Saxon Linen Bond Saxon Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Saxony Linen — 2nd grade Scotch Plaid Security Trust Bond — 4th grade Seminole Bond Senate Linen Ledger Servia Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Shado-Craft Bond Papers Shylock Bond Sioux Linen Bond Skeleton Sovereign Bond — 8th grade Sovereign Linen Spartan Bond — 4th grade Special Ledger — 4th grade Spider Web Springdale Paper Co. Springdale Bond Springdale Linen Ledger Standard Cover — Grade V Standard Mills (Writing) — 4th grade Standard Bond — 7th grade Standard Ledger — 5th grade Standard Linen Standard Mimeograph — 2nd grade Stanley Mills Stationers Linen Ledger — 2nd grade Statute Bond — 7th grade Sterling Mills (Writings) — 2nd grade Stockbridge Linen — 2nd grade Superior Mills (Writing) — 4th grade Slogan: A Catalog is no better than its Cover. Standardized from Rag to Ream Taconic Bond Taconic Linen — 2nd grade Telephone Bond — Grade IX Telephone Ledger — Grade VI Texo Bond The American Linen Paper The Century Linen — 2nd grade The Imperial Bond — 2nd grade The Legal Bond The Official Bond— 4th grade The Standard Ledger — 5th grade Treasury Ledger — 2nd grade Treasury Linen Treasury Vellum — 2nd grade Tuffenuff — Cover — 3rd grade Tunxis Bond Tunxis Mills Linen Ledger Tuxedo Linen Typewriter Linen Ulster Linen Union Linen Ledger Universal Bond — 4th grade U. S. Bond U. S. Linen Bond U. S. Linen — Grade I Vellum Bond Vellum Linen Vendome Bond — 4th grade Vendome Linen Venetian Bond Venetian — Cover Victor Bond — 4th grade Victor Ledger Victory Bond — 4th grade Victoria Bond — 4th grade Vienna Linen Vigilant Bond — 6th grade Warwick Mills Warwick Superfine Washington Mills (Writing) — 5th grade^ Wauregan Bond Wauregan Colored Flats — Grade III White House Whittier Extra Superfine Whitewater (Writing) — 4th grade Wicker Windsor — Cover Windsor Castle Windsor Mills Windsor Linen Wisconsin Bond — 5th grade Wove Parchment Wove Parchment Bond 336] How Paper Is Made A JOURNEY THROUGH THE WORLD'S LARGEST PAPER MAKING INSTITUTION THE making of Eagle-A Quality Standard Papers is inter- esting because a process which transforms one substance into a new and entirely different form is always fascinating, be- cause the American Writing Paper Company is the largest organi- zation of its kind in the world, and because the methods used in producing these papers have direct bearing on the quality of the papers themselves. Standardized papers can only be produced by the most efficient and highly standardized methods if uniform quality, combined with economy, is to be maintained. Starting with the raw materials — the rags, the wood pulp, the cotton linters, the chemi- cals and the dyes that are used in Eagle-A Papers are bought on specification, depending on their intended use, and laboratory tests are made to see that these specifications are adhered to. The sixty gallons of water used in making each pound of Eagle-A Paper must come up to specifications, too, and so the water supply for each mill is under close inspection at all times. Since the exact kind and amount of each raw material is known, the equipment for each step in the manufacturing process is al- ways in balance, thus avoiding the periods when one unit is idle and another over-taxed. A standardized product can only be made with standardized equipment. It might be possible to make newsprint on the machines designed to make Coupon Bond, but it would be im- possible to make Coupon Bond on the big, fast-running machines designed for news or book paper. An artist does not paint with a whitewash brush.' H ow y m Each of the fifty-four Eagle-A machines makes the grade of j s lyyg product for which it is best adapted. The wide variety of equipment, producing 450 tons daily, makes possible the effi- ciencies of standardized manufacture for a paper for each print- ing and stationery requirement. Continual and rigid inspec- tion at every stage of its manufacture keeps the Eagle-A Paper uniform in quality. The American Writing Paper Company has the largest and most extensively equipped paper laboratory in the world, where chemists analyze and test the raw materials to see that the specifications are adhered to. Inspectors ex- amine every sheet of Eagle-A Paper, and in addition to continu- ous inspection in the mill, samples are regularly sent to the laboratory where check-tests are made and the product compared with the established standard. 13371 / THE RAGS — The rags arrive at the mil! in bales of about one thousand pounds each wrapped in burlap and tied with wire. These rags range from new white shirt cut- tings and various colored rags down to old rags collected by the junkman. THE RAG ROOM— After the bales are opened the rags are taken to the rag room. Here buttons, hooks, rubber and other superfluous materials are taken out and sewed seams are ripped. THE RAG CUTTER— From the rag room the sorted rags are taken to the cutter, where they are reduced to pieces of a fairly uniform size. From the cutter they are carried on a canvas belt to the duster. THE RAG DUSTER — The dusters contained in the small house in the background consist of wire-covered drums provided inside with blades to slir up the rags. The mesh of the wire is such that dirt falls through while the rags are retained. The lint that is sifted out is sold and used for roofing materials. [3381 THE BLEACH BOILERS — After being dusted the rags are put into large revolving iron boilers of about five tons capacity. Here they are boiled under steam pressure with diluted alkali. This treatment serves to take out the color and loosen the dirt and other impurities which may be present. THE WASHERS — The rags next go to the washer, a tub provided with a roll and equipped with blunt bars or knives which brush against similar bars at the bottom. Running water discharges the dirt through an octagonal drum. Bleach is added unning afterward. THE BEATER — In the beater the stock is reduced into fine cotton fibers which have been cut and frayed by means of a roll and plate similar to those of a washer. Rosin, size, alum, and color are added in the beater. Stocking Glossary THE JORDAN OR REFINING ENGINE— The large cone-shaped shell is lined with steel or bronze bars set lengthwise. A conical plug with similar bars fitted into the shell rotates at high speed and the stock passing through the two sets of bars is cut fine, [3391 Sei Ho THE PAPER MACHINE— WET END— From the Jordan the now diluted stock goes to the paper machine. Here it is first passed through screens of bronze plates with narrow slots permitting passage of fiber but not of dirt and knots. ANOTHER VIEW OF PAPER MACHINE— From the screen the stock flows on to a fine sieve-like wire where the water drains away the felted fibers remaining. Deckled straps bordering the sides prevent overflowing. The dandy roll leaves the water- mark on the newly formed paper. DRYING DRUMS — From the wire the sheet passes through several sets of rolls under heavy pressure, which serve to remove more water and to compact the sheet, then over iron drums heated with steam. The paper is now practically air dry. SIZING — On leaving the drying rolls the paper is cut into strips and passed through a bath of animal size or glue to increase the strength and improve the writing surface, then passes through a cutler, ihe sheets piled by a lay-boy THE LOFT — The paper is hung on poles in the drying loft. Here it is left for several days to contract or expand in all directions. No method of drying has been found which will give results equal to the loft. CALENDERING AND INSPECTING— The paper comes rough dry from the loft and must be ironed smooth. This is done by passing it between heavy iron rollers. It is then sorted and any imperfect sheets are thrown out. TRIMMING — The paper passes from the sorters to the counters, where the_ sheets are counted by hand. It then goes to the cutters to be trimmed to uniform sizes. Stocking Glossary SEALING — After being trimmed the paper is wrapped and sealed in ream packages and labeled. It is now ready to be cased and shipped. The standardization of manu- facture of Eagle-A Papers is carried even to the boards for the cases and the size of the nails, thus insuring effective containers. 11341] How Ragle- A Quality Is Maintained IT is the obligation of the manufacturer to be re- sponsible for the performance of his goods when put to the uses for which they were designed. The Ameri- can Writing Paper Company insures itself and its customers in this regard by establishing for each paper a set of definite tests that must be conformed to. No one test is self-sufficient, nor is any one test of equal importance when applied to different grades of paper. Significant tests can only be arrived at and their mean- ings properly interpreted by experts who know both the use the paper is intended for and the possibilities and limitations of the manufacturing process. The ideal place for the use of these paper tests is in the hands of the technical staff of the mill where they are interpreted as guides in manufacturing and as checks on quality. On the next page are shown a small number of the regular tests applied to Eagle-A Papers. [3421 THE MICROSCOPE Paper is analyzed by defibering, treating the fibers in a microscope slide with stains which develop contrasting colors on rag fibers, chemical wood and ground wood, and then estimating the percentage of each constituent. The quality of beating and the grade of stock used can be told at a glance, noting the appearance of the fibers and their length. THE SCHOPPER FOLDER MACHINE This machine registers the number of times a sheet of paper_ may be folded back and forth before breaking. This is the severest test to which a sheet of paper can be subjected. Bank note paper, blue print paper, paper for life insurance policies and for legal documents should have a high folding test. This test is always made across the grain of the sheet. THE MULLEN TESTER The United States Government standard paper tester. This instrument, found in all Eagle-A mills as well as in the American Writing Paper Com- pany's laboratory, is in continual use, as all standard Eagle-A Papers have a specified Mullen test which must be met. The Mullen tester gives the pressure required to rupture a sheet of paper. THE TENSILE TESTER Instrument for determining tensile strength. A narrow strip of paper, cut against the grain, is clamped in place, and the hand wheel is revolved until the paper breaks. Indicators show the actual tension to which the paper is subjected and the per- centage of stretch. 343 Watermarking and Rubberstamp Marking Figure 1 ON PAGE 340 is an illustration of a dandy roll, which runs lightly over the paper being formed. An outline mark is left in the sheet. In all Eagle-A mills, letters on the rolls are in reversed type, so that the mark reads correctly from the top or printing side of the paper. In the method described, there is no crushing or deforming of the fibers. This is true watermarking. In very cheap papers, the machine is run so rapidly that a true watermark can not be formed. A rubber band bearing the outline letters is substituted and is placed on one of the press rolls between which the wet, formed sheet passes. This marks the paper just as a tire marks an asphalt pavement on a hot day. The fibers here are often deformed. Rubber stamping always shows that the paper was rapidly run, which usually means that there was not the oppor- tunity for producing uniformity in the grain and cross-grain directions. Compare Coupon Bond and Telephone Bond marks. LAID AND WOVE FORMATION :.~ — -^ Figure 2 The dandy roll also impresses the laid or wove formation. If the roll is covered with wires woven like those of a window screen, a wove formation results. If the roll consists of thin disks of wires running lengthwise of the dandy, a laid formation is produced. The parallel marks farthest apart are formed by the disks and are called the "chain" marks. The marks across these are the wire marks. [344] What Papers the Printer Should Stock MOST printers recognize the advisability of carrying a cer- tain amount of paper in stock. Briefly, the advantages are as follows: The printer is able to buy paper in larger quantities, thus obtaining lower prices. Any apparent saving in investment when paper is not carried in stock is more than offset by the loss of discounts due to small orders and scattered buying. It is easier for a printer who carries stocks to concentrate his buying on a small number of brands, taking larger orders of each. He saves time and trouble and profits by the at- tendant discounts. He betters his standing with his trade when he becomes a retailer, rather than a broker of paper; and the very fact that he has invested his money in it is evidence of his con- fidence in the paper that he keeps in stock. A stock of paper insures the printer's ability to give prompt service to his customer, as well as a capacity to provide economical and uniform paper for repeat orders — two fea- tures that are always appreciated by his customers. When, as is uniformly the case, the printer stocks nationally advertised mill brands of a favorably well known manu- facturer, he can advertise this fact with excellent results, and benefit by the prestige of the manufacturer.* Obviously, the average printer can not carry a stock that will meet all his demands, nor can he stock more than a limited num- ber of brands. What, then, are the general considerations that determine whether a paper is suitable for stocking? Here are a few: It must be standardized paper. Assured uniformity and quality of successive orders depend on this. It must be a Mill Brand paper. Such a paper alone com- bines uniform quality with the utmost economy. (See pages 1-7.) It must be a paper which the maker advertises to the con- sumer. This makes it easier for the printer to sell. * Many printers all over the country are advertising that they stock Eagle-A Papers, and are reporting much benefit therefrom. A card to the American Writing Paper Company will bring suggestions and co-operation in such advertising. [345] / ( To enable the printer to show his customer that he is offer- ing the proper paper, and not merely one that he wishes to sell, he should have the manufacturer's statement as to the use for which the paper is intended. It must be easily available and continuously stocked by both merchant and mill to insure an unfailing supply. It must be available in every form in which this paper is normally used — flat sheets, rolls, announcements, envelopes, etc. It must be one of a wide line of papers, so that the prestige established by the successful use of any one may benefit the others. Obviously the papers of the Eagle-A Lines are well adapted to the printer's stock shelves. (See page 97-103.) However, a printer can not profitably stock more than comparatively few of the items in the line — only those on which he can get rapid turn- over. Since conditions are individual to each printer, it is im- possible in a book of this sort to recommend specific brands to stock. The American Writing Paper Company, through its Service Men co-operating with its Department of Technical Service and its General Technical Staff, is prepared to help any printer or any printer's customer analyze his real paper needs, determine the smallest number of papers consistent with these needs, and work out the list of grades and items that he can profitably stock. Every representative of the Department of General Service is especially trained for this work and his advice and co-operation can be depended upon. His service may be secured by going to him directly, by asking for him through any Service House or by writing the American Writing Paper Company. [346] Glossary OF WORDS AND TERMS USED IN THIS HANDBOOK OF QUALITY-STANDARD PAPERS THIS glossary contains a list of words used in both the paper and printing industries and employed in the text of this handbook, with a brief definition of each term. As will be understood, many of the terms defined have other significations which cannot be treated here. Since many industrial papers are described or defined in the section of the text devoted to Specialty Papers it was not deemed necessary to include them in this glossary. (See pages 275-280.) Abrasion A rubbing or wearing away of the surface. Absorbency Absorption; the capacity of paper to take in or retain ink or other liquid. Acid-proof Paper Paper that has been subjected to treatment to resist acid or its fumes. Aigle {French) Eagle. Air-dried Said of paper dried rapidly by warm air, after surface sizing is applied while in a continuous web, as distinguished from machine-dried (dried rapidly on the steam-heated drums of the paper machine) and loft or pole dried (after the paper is cut into sheets while wet with the surface sizing and hung over poles in a loft to dry and season slowly). (See pages 337-343.) Alkali A compound of alkaline reaction in solution; the opposite of an acid. Ex- amples, carbonate of soda, caustic soda or potash, ammonia, etc. Alkali-proof Paper Paper that is treated to resist the corrosive action of alkali. « Animal-sized Sized on the surface with glue or gelatine made from hides or hoofs to effect a better quality of sheet. Paper is passed through a solution of the above after it leaves the driers on the paper machine. (See pages 337-343.) Announcements Notices, social messages, etc., usually engraved or printed; also the paper stock used for such purposes. Antique Finish A light, soft, uncalendered finish; characteristic of certain bulky book and drawing papers. Anti-rust Paper — Anti-tarnish Paper Paper treated for use in wrapping metal articles to prevent rusting or tarnish- ing; it is free from acid or alkali. [3471 Appearance As applied to paper; the appeal to the senses as made by its color, brilliancy or lack of it, crackle, etc. Ash Content The mineral residue contained; ascertained by burning a sheet of paper and weighing ash after combustible matter is consumed. Azure Azure is sometimes referred to as including the class of laids and woves irre- spective of their color. Azure-laid Said of certain laid writing papers in a shade of characteristic light blue. Azure wove A wove writing, the characteristics of which, except for the laid mark, are similar to azure-laid. Barber-dried Dried by means of the Barber-driers. The moist paper in the web is passed, after tub-sizing, over rolls and dried by hot air. Basis Weight The weight given to a sheet of paper in terms of the weight of a ream of that paper in the size represented by its class. The sizes of different classes of papers on which basis weights are dependent are as follows: Book 25 x38 —500 Blotting 19x24—500 Bristol 22^ x 28^—500 Tissue 20 x 38—450 Cover 20 x 26 —500 News 24 x 36—500 Writing 17 x 22 —500 Wrapping 24 x 36—480 Beater A tank with an equipment of a roll and bedplate, containing fly-bars set edgewise, through which is circulated the paper-making stock to reduce its fibers to suitable condition for running over the paper machine. See pages 337-343. Ben Day A process of stippling and shading, etc., by means of screen designs trans- ferred to a plate; effected by means of a machine named after its inventor, Benjamin Day. Bible Paper A light-weight printing paper, the chief characteristics of which are opacity and strength; used for bibles or other books to reduce bulkiness. Binders' Board A heavy board usually made of a low grade of raw materials, used for book covers. Black Wrapping Paper Black paper made impervious to light, for wrapping sensitized photographic papers, etc. Blank-book Papers Papers suitable for blank books; may be bonds, ledgers, or writings. Bleaching The process of whitening the fibrous material and removing impurities, coloring matter, etc. Blotting A heavy, unsized, and highly absorbent paper used mainly for drying fresh ink writing. [3481 Blue Print Paper A paper for sensitizing for making blue prints. Blue print paper should be of a good folding endurance and a strength to withstand handling while wet. Bond A term which was formerly applied to an all-rag paper intended for govern- ment bonds, but now applied to a strong and rattly, more or less translucent paper with a hard surface, made of rag or sulphite or both, and used largely for letterheads and for typewriter and other important purposes. Booklet A small book, commonly bound in paper covers, and used principally for advertising purposes. Book Paper A general term to indicate a class of papers used for books, catalogs, periodi- cals and the like as distinct from writings, ledgers, etc. Box Board A board, usually made from wood pulp or straw, and of good bursting strength, used for cartons. Box Cover A coated or uncoated, plain or decorative cover paper of light weight. Breaking Length (See Tensile Strength.) Bristol A board, either filled or plied (pasted), usually high-grade, and used com- mercially for many purposes, such as business cards, show cards, etc. (See foreword on pages 337-343.) Broadside A large printed sheet intended as a circular, folded into a size convenient for mailing. Distinguished from a folder by the fact that its printed matter runs across the sheet regardless of folds. Brochure A treatise or pamphlet bound and stitched in booklet form. Brown Print Paper A paper for sensitizing to produce a brown and white effect in the reproduc- tion of drawings, etc. Bulk The degree of thickness of paper especially when judged by a number of sheets together. Bursting Strength Resistance to pressure which paper is capable of withstanding; as deter- mined by means of special testing instruments and computed by pounds of pressure per square inch. Cabinet {Eagle-A Sample) A handy receptacle partitioned to contain three sample books and this Hand- book: produced by the American Writing Paper Company. Calendar dmanac; a card or other dates of the months. [349] An almanac; a card or other stock on which is impressed a table of days and dates of the months. / ( Calender A machine consisting of a series of rotating rolls or cylinders for smoothing the surface of paper. (See page 341.) Calendered Glazed or smoothed by passing through calenders. Carbon Paper A tissue paper coated with carbon, used for making duplicate copies of typewritten or other matter. Car Card A large card bearing an advertisement used in trolley-cars, etc. Cardboard See Bristol*. Cartridge Paper A thick, strong paper for making shot-gun cartridges. Catalog An enumeration or list of goods, usually with detailed explanation and printed in book form. May be either loose-leaf or of solid binding. Catalog Container Any container, as an envelope, wrapper, etc., used to enclose a catalog. Catalog Cover The cover or stock in wnicn a catalog is bound. Cellulose A solid carbohydrate, fundamental in the structure of plants, which is the fiber used in paper-making; occurs in pure form in cotton fibers and mixed with equal amounts of impurities in wood. Mechanical wood pulp as used in news print is ground wood only; chemical wood pulp contains only traces — injurious, however — of impurities. Chain Mark One of the wider parallel lines of a laid watermark. Chalk Overlay Paper A heavy, hard surfaced paper coated with chalk, which is used by pressmen in making-ready half-tones. Chart Paper A strong, pliable, durable paper, tub-sized, with good printing surface, used for charts, maps, etc. Circular A printed letter or other form of advertising circulated usually through the mails. Clasp Envelope An envelope attached with a special clasp. (See page 73.) Coarse Papers A class of papers such as the cheaper books, boards, wrappings, and the like; distinct from fine papers. Coating Paper Any paper, usually a book, used as a base for coating. Cockle The pucker naturally or artificially produced in paper during the drying process. [350] Converter {Paper) One who manufactures goods, such as envelopes, etc., from paper stock. Cooking The treatment of rags in boilers with steam pressure and with diluted alkali or other chemicals, for cleaning and softening purposes. Core The reel on which a web of paper is wound; a tube made of board or the like, employed as a central support for a roll of toweling, toilet paper, etc. Correspondence Paper Fine stationery used for personal correspondence. Cotton Linters The short linters or lint which remain on the cotton seed after the cotton has been ginned, now removed and used as a raw material in paper manu- facture. Cover Paper Paper used for covering booklets, catalogs, and the like; usually of heavy weight and in numerous colors and finishes. Crackle A desirable crackling sound produced in a sheet of paper when held by the fingers and waved quickly. Crash Finish A finish resembling a coarse linen fabric, applied by pressure. Cream A natural, light yellow hue. Cylinder-dried Dried on the cylinder paper-making machine. Cylinder Machine A paper-making machine the wire of which is wound about a cylinder, as distinguished from the Fourdrinier which has a flat wire. Dandy or Dandy Roll A hollow roll covered with wire cloth on the face of which is woven a design or pattern. It revolves on a paper machine above the wire between the suction-boxes, and impresses its outline, known as the watermark, on the wet paper. (See page 340.) Deckle The rough, uneven edge of paper as formed in a hand mold or by the deckle strap on a machine. Deckle-edged Rough-edged, as of hand-made paper. De-ink To remove the ink from. De Luxe Of luxury (French) ; of special elegance and refinement; high class. Die-stamping The process of stamping or impressing In relief by means of dies, usually of steel or other metal. [3511 Direct-by-Mail Campaign An advertising campaign, the pieces of which are sent direct to the prospec- tive customer; distinct from general newspaper or other advertising. Display Cards Printed cards or posters used for display in shop windows, as car signs, etc. Document A record, or other piece of impressed matter, usually of a legal character and of more or less permanent nature. Dodger A small handbill for hand distribution. Drafting Paper A fine, white or cream, hard-surfaced paper of good erasure quality to make drawings upon. Drawing Paper Paper used for drawings or sketches. Druggists* Wrapping (See Special Wrapping Papers on page 280.) Dull Finish An uncalendered finish. Dummy A preliminary form, as of a booklet or catalog, made up to indicate or sug- gest in size, shape, etc., the appearance of the finished product; sometimes referred to as a layout, though the latter more correctly indicates a type plan or arrangement for the printer to follow. Duplex Paper 1. Paper each side of which bears a different color. 2. A machine-finished paper which is highly glazed on one side and left rough on the other. 3. A paper plied with two layers of different colors or stocks. Duplicating Papers Papers for use in duplicating work, as mimeographs, manifolds, etc. Duster A dusting machine; an equipment of huge, hollow, meshed-wire drums provided with revolving blades for stirring up rags and sifting out the dirt. Eagle-A Trade-mark and watermark of the American Writing Paper Company. Egg-shell Finish A dull, rough finish, in imitation of the shell of a hen's egg: said of certain book papers. Embossing The production of relief effects on paper or cloth by means of dies subjected to pressure. Engine-size Sizing material, commoniy rosin, added in the beater so as to permeate evenly through the paper. English Finish A special dull yet smooth finish produced on book papers while on the paper machine. [352] Envelope Paper Paper of especially good folding quality used for the manufacture of en- velopes. Envelope Stuff er Any printed piece, as a small circular, which is enclosed with letters in an envelope. Exposure Subjection to action of light. Factory Forms Printed forms used for record purposes in factories. Feather-edge Deckle A rough, tapered edge. Feathering The blurred effect of ink which has spread thickly over certain kinds of unsized paper after writing. It indicates improper sizing for writing pur- poses. "Feel" The characteristic finish and general quality of a sheet of paper as deter- mined or judged by contact with the fingers. Felt A web, usually of a textile fabric, which acts as a carrier of the newly formed sheet of paper over paper machines. Felt Side The smooth side of a sheet of paper, as distinguished from the wire side. See also Wire. Festoon Drying A method of drying paper in a uniformly warm room; the sheets are hung and conveyed by means of a series of loops. Fiber, Fibre A filament or plant cell largely composed of cellulose, the basic element of paper-making material. Fill (of machine) The width between the deckle straps of a paper-making machine. (See page 340.) Filler A substance such as china clay or other mineral matter used for filling the interstices between the fibers, to add weight and opacity to paper as well as to give it a better surface. Filter Paper An unsized porous paper, used for filtering purposes. Fine Papers A class of high-grade papers such as bonds, linens, ledgers, writings, etc.; distinct from coarse papers (which see). Finish The surface or general characteristics and appearance of a paper. Flats and Fines Various kinds of paper designed for pen and ink writing and of a well closed, even formation and high finish: a general term. [353 1 Flat Sheets Sheets packed flat; as distinguished from rolls or sheets packed foldeu Fliers (Flyers) Small circulars, containing advertising material, for inserting in envelopes with letters. Folded Writings Writing papers, folded once; distinct from Flat Writings. Folder A circular or other piece of direct advertising, folded, frequently, in an un- usual manner, in which the printed matter is confined to the space within, never across, the folds. Folio 1. The size 17 x 22 inches. 2. A book size indicating a sheet folded once. 3. A page number. Food Container (Paper) (See Specialties and Industrial Papers, page 278.) F01 1. Type matter and electros, etc., locked up in a printer's chase. 2. Sometimes, Format. IP Format The style or make-up of a book or printing piece. Formation As applied to a sheet of paper, the fixed disposition of its fibers. In this Handbook the term is used to include all effects produced in the paper before passing over the drying rolls, as wove or laid marks put in by the dandy-roll. Formula A rule or form set as a working guide. Fourdrinier A paper-making machine, named after the brothers Fourdrinier, French stationers in England, who, in 1804 or 1806, improved the original invention of Louis Robert, Frenchman, made in 1799. (Its four principal portions are: (1) the wet end containing the flow box on which the watery pulp flows, the wire screen, the deckle, suction boxes, and dandy roll; (2) the presses — a series of revolving rolls covered by felt; (3) dryers, rolls equipped with felts, and heated; (4) winder end (dry end) containing calenders, winding felts, cutters, etc. (See page 340.) French Folio A smooth manifold or light-weight writing paper, in white or colors, used for taking printers' proofs. Furnish The specified ingredients comprising the half-stock which is placed in the beater. Fuzz Loose particles of paper or other material. [3541 Gang (1) A form or group of plates or type arranged to run off together at one impression; (2) A sheet thus printed. Gelatine Printing A method of copying and multiplying a writing or drawing by tracing or impressing the original on paper, in an oily, diffusible anilin ink, then trans- ferring this to a surface of a compound of gelatin, glycerin, etc. The color- ing-matter sinks into the gelatin surface, which may be used as a printing surface by simple pressure of paper against it, as with the hand. — From the New Standard Dictionary. Glassine A thin, supercalendered, transparent paper, the fiber of which has been hyd rated in the beater. Glazed Highly polished or calendered. Grade As applied to papers, the relative position in regard to quality as compared with others in the same class. Grain Direction (1) The direction in which the fibers flow on the paper-making machine. (2) Its appearance as indicated in the sheet. Machine direction, with the grain. Cross direction, against the grain. (See page 64.) Greeting Card A card used for a printed message, as a Christmas or Easter card. Gummed Paper Paper which has been gummed on one side with an adhesive, used for labels, etc. Half-tone A metal plate bearing in relief a photograph or other illustration in reverse for printing by the letterpress method. Half-tones are produced by the process known as photo-engraving. The original illustration or object is photographed through a cross-line screen on a sensitized copper or zinc plate. The plate is then etched and its surface is left covered with fine dots. The gradations of tone (dark and light effects) appear according to the greater or lesser number of these dots. Fine half-tones range from 120 to 200 line screen (indicating the number of parallel lines of dots to the inch); 60 screen half-tones are used for coarse paper such as newsprint. Half-tone Paper A highly calendered book or other paper suitable for impressions of half-tone cuts. Handgravure A method of copper-plate printing. Before each impression is taken th& surface of the plate is wiped by hand. Hand-made Paper A deckle-edged paper made on a hand mould. [355] / ( Hard Fiber Paper Specially treated paper used as a base in the manufacture of various kinds of vulcanized fiber and converted by chemical or other processes. Hard-sized Sized by a special hardening process due to increased proportions of rosin or other ingredients. Hectographing • A method of duplicating drawings and the like, effected by means of a gelatin pad on which the design has been made with a special ink. The ■ sheet to be printed is placed over the pad and is lightly pressed by the hand. House Organ A publication issued : regularly by a business concern to its employees, salesmen or customers. Impress The process of making marks or impressions; the impression. Impressibility ■„•, ,r ... The. capability of being marked or impressed. Index Bristol Strong bristol board, sometimes pasted stock, used for index cards and : ..similar records. . « India Tint A light buff. Japanese Vellum A sheet of rather wild or uneven formation with a feel and appearance quite like an animal parchment. While the real Japanese Vellum is made only of Japanese fiber, chiefly mitsumati fibers, the inner bark of a mulberry tree, close imitations at a much lower price are available in America. (See American Vellum, page 172.) Jobber The middleman; a merchant who buys goods from the manufacturer and sells them to the retailer; paper merchant. Job Ticket A ticket accompanying a job, usually bearing instructions. Jute Board A board made principally from jute. Jute Manila A manila wrapping paper produced from jute and manila clippings. Kid Finish A smooth finish resembling kid leather. Kraft ■■ • A natural colored, strong paper made from sulphate pulp, used mainly for wrappings. Label A slip of paper gummed or ungummed, to be affixed to packages, etc. [356] Laboratory (Paper) Laid A place in which chemical or other tests are made and where experimental work is undertaken. Watermarked with close, fine, parallel lines crossed with other less frequent lines at right angles. Lawn A finish imitating linen cambric, applied by pressure to paper. Layout (See Dummy.) Ledger A strong paper, usually heavy, with a smooth, dull finish, and possessing good erasure qualities, used for account books. Letterhead A sheet of writing paper bearing a printed heading. Letterpress Printing Printing which is executed on job, cylinder or web presses from type, electro- types, stereotypes, or the like. Lignin A name given to the impurities found mixed or combined with cellulose In wood in amounts approximately equal to the cellulose. All save a trace, which is, however, injurious, [is removed in the preparatory cooking of of chemical wood pulp. Line-cut A zinc or copper plate made from a drawing or print which has been photor graphed, transferred, and etched. Linen Paper originally made from linen rags, but term is now applied to various papers that simulate the original appearance. They bear a large water- mark of rather ornate design. Linen Finish A finish impressed to resemble linen; usually effected by placing paper between sheets of linen and zinc plates and subjecting it to pressure. ;• Lithography A form of printing from a flat surface such as stone or metal on which the design or subject has been etched or transferred. Litho or Lithograph Paper A well finished, soft-sized book paper for lithographic and color printing. Loading A substance used as a filler or to add weight. (See Filler.) Loft-drying A method of drying the highest grades of paper. The paper while wet from the surface size is cut into sheets and hung over poles in a warm loft to dry and season. (See page 341.) Longevity Length of life; as applied to paper, its enduring quality under. ordinary usage. [357] Long Run A long period of operation, as of a paper machine or printing press. Loose-leaf Paper Paper, especially a bond or ledger, suitable for use in [books or binders, the leaves of which are easily removed or inserted. Machine-dried Dried on the paper machine by passing the damp paper over steam-heated drums. Machine Finish 1. A finish secured by pressing the sheet through the calender stacks at the end of the paper machine. 2. Uncalendered paper as it comes off the last drier. Machine Ruling (See Ruling.) Mailing Card A card bearing advertising matter used for mailing; the stock so used. Mailing Envelopes Envelopes made for mailing purposes. Mailing Folder A folded circular used for mailing. Magazine Paper Book paper suitable for printing and illustrating; used for magazines and other periodicals. Magazine Stock Stock consisting of old magazines which are to be de-inked and mixed with other fibers for making paper. Make and Hold Said of a manufacturing order for goods which are to be held at the mill until customer orders their delivery. Make-ready The method of making a form ready on the press by means of overlays and underlays, etc., to secure the proper results in printing. Manifold Books Books of manifold or other light-weight copying paper for duplicate records. Manifold Paper A paper, usually of light weight, for copying or duplicating purposes. Manila 1. A strong grade of paper used for tags, wrappers, and the like. 2. A loose term indicating color, strength, and finish. Manuscript Cover A cover stock of bond quality to bind and protect manuscripts, briefs, etc. Map Paper A strong, high finished paper possessed of good folding quality, suitable for the printing or lithographing of maps. Marking The placing of distinguishing marks on bundles or packages. [358] Medium Finish A finish that is neither highly calendered nor antique but intermediate between the two extremes. Menu Bill of fare. M. G. Paper Machine-glazed paper; one side glazed, the other rough. Micrometer A gauge used to measure thickness. Mill Blank (Bristol). (See Bristol.) Mill Brand The trademark and brand name belonging to the manufacturer and so iden- tified, as distinguished from a private or jobber's brand where the goods bears the jobber's identification but not the manufacturer's. Mimeograph Paper A rough finished, semi-absorbent paper, usually laid, for use on mimeograph printing machines. Mimeographing A method of duplicating by means of typewriting on a specially prepared, waxed stencil. The stencil is placed on the drum of a machine known as the mimeographing machine, where with each revolution of the cylinder it is automatically inked and an impression made. Mold A wooden frame enclosing a wire screen on which pulp is formed into paper sheets; used in making paper by hand. Mold-made Paper A deckle-edged paper resembling that made by hand but produced on a machine. Monotype Paper A white book paper, made up in rolls and perforated at edges, used on monotype keyboard and casting machines. M . Paper Paper not up to the standard required in the first sorting. Multigraphing A method of printing used especially for form letters. The matter to be printed is set up from individual types and locked in the grooves of a curved steel plate called a "segment." Curved electrotypes are also used. The segment or plate is placed on a small cylinder press, called a multigraph printer. Practically no make-ready is required, and 5,000 impressions an hour can be made. Music Roll Paper Paper, usually manila, and resistant to expansion and contraction, for use in player-pianos. Natural Said of an India or light buff tint. News A soft-sized paper made principally of ground wood, used for newspapers and other printing purposes; newsprint. [359] / Nitrating Paper A paper of light weight used in the process of manufacturing cellulose nitrate. N. Paper Paper discarded during sorting through imperfections of dirt spots, wrinkles, etc. Odd Not according to regular or standard sizes, weights, colors, finishes, etc. Offset A book paper made specially for offset or other lithographic printing; has a uniform surface on both sides and is free from loose fiber. Offset Printing An improved process of litnographic printing. The subject or design is usually made first on a stone and then transferred to a plate of zinc or aluminum, curved to fit the cylinder of the press. The imprint is made from the plate on a rubber blanket from which the wet impression is offset on the paper. Onion Skin A thin, transparent, highly glazed paper made of rag and sulphite, used for manifolding. Opacity ""he property of being non-transparent. Overlapping As referred to grades of paper, those which are almost similar in quality and include most if not all of the characteristics of others. Over-run An excessive quantity of paper made on an order. Package Label A slip of paper, usually gummed, for pasting on packages. Paper Trade Customs Customs or rules adopted by paper trade associations or similar groups and mutually agreed upon as equitable in the conduct of the manufacture, de- 'ivery, and sale of papers. (See pages 306-332.) Papeteries High-grade writing papers for boxed stationery use. Papyrus An Egyptian reed-plant the stems of which, when beaten and laid' crosswise, formed a sheet for writing purposes. Parchment A sheet of writing material prepared from the skins of goats, sheep, and other animals. Parchment Finish A finish simulating parchment. Pasted Stock Bristols, weddings, or other stock which have been pasted together in two or more thicknesses; known as two-ply, three-ply, etc., according to the number of sheets pasted together; pasteboard. [360] Pencil Paper A strong paper used in the manufacture of paper pencils. Called also Lead Pencil Pa-per. Permanent Enduring. When attributed to papers referred to in the Handbook it signi- fies a period of durable use approximating a century. Cotton fibers pre- dominate in permanent papers. Photographic Paper A paper for sensitizing, strong to withstand handling when water-soaked; used for photographic printing purposes. Photogravure A process of printing by means of copper plates, the design to be impressed being in intaglio. See Rotogravure. Photogravure Paper An English-finished book paper suitable for photogravure printing. Photo Mount Cover, or board, or other heavy stock for use as photograph mountings. Photostat Paper A gelatine-sized paper for reproducing the facsimiles which are obtained by the photostat machine; it has the same characteristics as photographic paper. Plated Vellum A smooth finish to imitate the appearance of vellum, producea by pressure. Plate Finish A smooth finish made on paper by running through a super calendering machine. Plater Finish A high, smooth finish produced by pressure. Plug A wooden pin or wedge used to protect a roll of paper at each end of the core on which the paper is wound. Ply A thickness or layer; said of a sheet which is pasted to another as in certain boards. Postal Card Stock A manila board with a smooth writing surface, used for post cards. Poster A paper used for printing advertising matter to be displayed on walls, boards, store windows, etc. Primary Line A chief, fundamental, or basic line. Printings A printers' term to indicate various grades of book papers. Program Paper A soft paper, free from rattle, for concert or other program uses. [3611 / Proofing Paper A book paper used by printers for galley proofs. Pulp 1. A wet mass of rag or wood fibers or other cellulose stock which has been beaten and otherwise prepared ready for the paper-making machine. 2. The dry mass of cellulose fibers pressed in laps. Quality-Standard A term used exclusively by the American Writing Paper Company and applied only to its Eagle-A Papers. It indicates that each paper is of stand- ard and uniform quality and that each represents a definite grade level within its class. Quire A unit of twenty-four (or twenty-five) sheets. Rags Cotton or other textiles such as cuttings from shirt, linen and other textile factories, discarded garments, etc., used as a raw material for paper-making. Rag Stock Material composed of rags for use in paper-making. _ _ \ Paper which contains some quantity of rag. Rag Content Paper) Railroad Board A white-lined board, usually In several plies, used for show cards and the like. "Rattle" A rattling sound. Ream The unit of a certain number of sheets of paper, varying according to the different standards adopted. Long ream 500 sheets Short ream 480 sheets Printers' ream 516 sheets Register The fitting in or correspondence of color forms in printing. Repped Said of paper which has been given a ribbed effect by impression from steel rollers. Retrees Imperfect sheets withdrawn after mill sorting. Ripple Finish A fretted finish similar to the ripples on water. Roll A continuous web of paper rolled up in cylindrical form; distinct from flat (which see.) Rotogravure A process of intaglio printing, usually on rotary presses, from an etching made on a copper cylinder revolving in ink. The ink is scraped off the surface by a knife and left in the intaglio to print the image. [3621 Rotogravure Paper A highly finished book paper used for rotogravure printing. Rubber-stamp mark A mark similar to a watermark but impressed in the damp paper on the machine from a rubber band on the press rolls, usually on grades made rapidly. Ruling The ruling of lines as for statements, account books, etc., by means of a special machine. The paper to be ruled is conveyed on an endless cloth to meet contact with pens suspended, at the intervals desired, on a cross bar above and fed with ink. , Safety Paper A strong, fine paper used for checks, drafts, and the like, treated with chemicals so that erasures cannot be made without detection. Sample Cards Cards such as bristols, etc., used for pasting on samples such as tailors' cloths, etc. Sand Paper Base A pliable and strong paper, usually manila, used as a base for sand paper. Satin Finish A smooth finish resembling satin. Screen The formation of "dots" in half-tone cuts, indicated by the number of parallel lines of these "dots" to the inch; as, 133-line screen, etc. Sealing Tape A narrow strip of paper gummed on one side and put up in rolls. Seconds Sheets which have been discarded as inferior. Semi-permanent Lasting for a period covered by legal statutes of limitations, as considered of papers so attributed in the handbook. Semi-permanent papers are made of mixtures of cotton and chemical wood fibers. Service House The warehouse 01 a paper merchant stocked adequately to give ready service to customers in his territory. Term originated by the American Writing Paper Company and applied to its 100% agents. Sheeting The process of cutting into sheets. Short Run A short period of operation as of a paper machine or printing press; a small making-order. Show Card A card ior window or counter display purposes. Shrinkage Contraction or decrease in size or bulk. Signature A form, or printed sheet containing a number of pages which after folding is to be assembled with others to make up a book. [363] / i Simplification Reduction and modification of grades from a multiplicity of overlapping varieties to a well defined series. Sizing 1. A treatment to which paper or its ingredients are subjected during manufacture to give strength to the product and make it impervious to ink. 2. A gluey or resinous compound mixed with the stock in the beater (the process known as engine sizing) or applied to the paper as it passes through a sizing tub (known as top or tub sizing). Slitting Cutting the paper sheet at the dry end of the machine either by rotary or straight knives. Snap Said of a sheet of hard paper that emits a sharp, crisp sound when handled. Soda Pulp Wood pulp which has been cooked by the soda process. Soft-sized Having or containing less than an ordinary quantity of sizing; slack-sized. Sorting The separating of perfect from defective sheets. Specialties Such papers as are made, usually on order, in special colors or texture for special commercial or other purposes; such as black wrapping, acid proof papers, etc. (See Specialties and Industrial Papers, pages 275-280.) Specifications Specific requirements as of paper, an order or a contract. Standardization Conformation, particularly in manufacture, to definite standards of uni- formity. Standardization, to be complete, should embrace (a) raw materials; (b) process; (c) product; (d) line (grade classification); (e) distribution of product; (f) price; and (g) uses of the product. Standard Sheet Sizes Sizes that have been adopted as standards and are conformed to by the paper trade. Statute of Limitations A statute which assigns a certain period of time after which no legal action can be taken. Steel and Copper Engraving The process of printing from steel or copper plates, the designs on which are intaglio. Stiffener A stout sheet, usually of board, placed in envelopes to protect the enclosure from creasing or crushing. Stock 1. Paper for a job. 2. Half-stuff or pulp ready for the paper machine. 3. Product or material on hand. Stock Sizes Standard sizes carried by manufacturers, merchants, or consumers. [364] Strength As applied to paper: the degree of capability to resist wear and tear, handling and folding, etc. Stretch {wet and dry) Extension or expansion as caused by moisture or dryness. Stuff A pulpy mixture ready for the paper machine. Substance — Number, Weight The basis of weight as determined of certain sizes by the number of pounds to a ream. The following are the standard sizes of various papers upon which substance numbers are based: Books 25 x 38 Bristols. 22^ x 283^ Writings 17 x 22 Papeteries 21 J^ x 33 Covers 20 x 26 etc. Sulphate Pulp Pulp produced from wood chips by cooking under pressure in a solution of caustic soda. Sulphite Bond A machine-dried bond made of sulphite pulp. Sulphite Pulp Pulp made from wood chips cooked under pressure in a solution of bisulphite of lime. Super calendered As finished by extra calendering. Super Finish A high, glossy finish given to an uncoated paper. Tablet A pad (of paper). Tag 1. A label for tying or nailing on packages or cases. 2. The stock, either of board or manila, used for tags. Tearing Resistance Ability to withstand tearing. Temporary Durable for a period of from three to five years; as considered of papers thus qualified in this Handbook. Temporary papers are made predom- inantly or wholly of wood fibers. Tensile Strength The weight necessary to apply to a given strip of paper to break it. Text Paper A high-class, rough surfaced book paper, frequently deckle edged, suitable for fine books. Ticker Paper A white book paper which is used in rolls for ticker machines. Ticket A card of admission; as, a theater ticket. [365] / f p Tissues A class of light-weight papers. Toned Shaded or tinted in a light buff. Tooth A "bite"; said of a paper surface which readily takes ink and pencil marks or other impress. Trade Customs (See Paper Trade Customs, pages 306-332.) Translucent Dully transparent or semi-transparent. Treatment Mode of handling. Tub-shed Surface sized; said of the formed and dried paper which has been sub- jected to a bath of glue or starch or other sizing ingredients. Typewriter Papers Papers, generally bonds, linens, and light-weight writings, cut to sizes for convenient use on typewriting machines. Unbleached Implying papers made from unbleached pulp, as kraft. Under-run A quantity made by the manufacturer which is below that ordered. Unglazed Finish A dull finish. Up On: said of the number of duplications in type matter, plates, etc., imposed in a job form for the printing press; as, four up. Vellum A strong, high-grade, natural or cream-colored paper made to resemble the fine parchment originally made from calf skin. Vellum Finish A finish simulating the appearance of vellum, obtained by plating. Watermark The distinctive mark or design made by the dandy-roll in the wet paper during its progress through the paper-making machine. (See page 344.) Wedding A papeterie usually of heavy white writing or a bristol, plate finished, and used for wedding or similar announcements. Wedding Bristol A fine grade of bristol, of high rag content, often pasted and plated, used for visiting cards, wedding announcements, etc. Wild Formation formation of the fi 366] An irregular formation of the fibers producing a mottled appearance in the sheet. Wire The wire web on which paper is formed in the machine. (See page 340.) Wire Side The side of a sheet of paper which rested on the wire during its manufacture: opposite to felt side (which see) . Wood Cut 1. An engraving, usually made by hand, on wood. 2. An illustration printed from a wood cut. Wood-Pulp Pulp made from wood and suitable for paper-making: ground wood-pulp is prepared by mechanical means; soda, sulphate, and sulphite pulps, all from wood, are produced chemically. Wove A bond or writing paper that has a woven appearance on both sides: dis- tinct from laid (which see). Wrapping Paper A coarse paper made of burlap, ground wood, old magazines, or like ma- terials: a general term. Wrinkle A pucker, crease, or slight corrugation. Writings Hard-sized papers suitable for pen- writing. 367 The Stock Used in This Handbook Cover American Embossed Cover, steel gray. (The new Cover grade of the Eagle-A Line.) End Leaves Paradox Cover, the third Cover grade of the Eagle-A Line, Antique Finish, Fibril Granite — 20 x 26 — 50. Illustrated Frontispiece Arrive Halftone, the fifth Book grade of the Eagle-A Line, White— 25 x 38—80. Contents Section Arrive Halftone, the fifth Book grade of the Eagle-A Line, White— 25 x 38—70. Pink, White, Buff, and Green Sections Acceptance Bond, the seventh Bond grade of the Eagle-A Line, 24 x 38—59. Illustrated Section {How Paper is Made) Arrive Halftone, the fifth Book grade of the Eagle-A Line, White— 25 x 38—70. Service House Insert Paradox Cover, the third Cover grade of the Eagle-A Line, Antique Finish, Fibril Granite, 20 x 26 — 60. Price List Cover Paradox Cover, the third Cover grade of the Eagle-A Line, Antique Finish, Fibril Granite, 20 x 26 — 65. Inside Pages of Price List Government Record Ledger, first Ledger grade of the Eagle-A Line, White, 17 x 22—28. Binder for Price List Paradox Cover, the third Cover grade of the Eagle-A Line, Antique Finish, Fibril Granite, 20 x 26 — 80. [3681 Index Acceptance Bond— Page Colors. . 56-57, 124 Commercial Cabinets 258 Description 124 Envelopes 75, 125 Finishes 59 Grade Level 124 Grain, directions of ; 124 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 124 Non-standard specifications 78-79, 125 Packing 104, 124 Pricn Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 125 Sizes 48-49, 124 Stocked, where obtainable 52-54, 124 Typewriter Papers 271 Uses, general 124 Weights 52-54, 124 Writing Tablets Acceptance Bond Stationery Cabinets 258 Contents of Cabinet 258 Grade Level '. 258 Packing 255, 258 Prices Price List Samples 258 Sizes 258 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Acceptance Bond 48-49, 124 Styles 258 Typewriter Paper 271 Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper — Covers . 271 Description 271 Envelopes 271 Grade Level 271 Ordering, in 271 Packing 271 Prices Price List Ruling 271 Samples 271 Sizes 262, 271 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Acceptance Bond 124 Stocked, where obtainable 271 Uses, general 271 Weights 52-54, 271 Account Linen Ledger — Colors 56-57, 146 Description 146 Envelopes 75 , 147 Finishes 59 Grade Level 146 Grain, directions of 146 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 146 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 147 Packing 104, 146 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 147 Sizes 48-49, 146 Stocked, where obtainable , 146 Uses, general 146 Weights 52-54, 146 Acid or Alkali Proof Papers 280 Agawam Bond — Colors 56-57, 1 14 Description 114 Envelopes 75, 115 Finishes 59,114 Grade Level 114 Grain, directions of 114 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 1 14 Non-standard specifications 78-79, 115 Packing 104, 114 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 1 10-1 1 1 Samples 115 Sizes 48-49, 114 Stocked, where obtainable 114 Typewriter Papers 260-262, 264 Uses, general 114 Weights 52, 54, 1 14 Writing Tablets 274 [369] Agawam Index Bristol — Page Colors 56-57, 216 Description 216 Envelopes 75, 217 Finishes 59 Grade Level 216 Grain, directions of 216 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 216 Non-standard specifications 90-91 , 217 Packing 104, 216 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bristol grades 215, 214 Samples 217 Sizes 48-49, 216 Stocked, where obtainable 216 Uses, general 216 Weights 52-54, 216 Agawam Parchment Typewriter Paper 264 Covers 265, 273 Description 264 Envelopes 75, 265 Finishes 264 Grade Level 264 Ordering, in 265 Packing 264 Prices Price List Ruling 264 Samples 265 Sizes 262, 264 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Agawam Bond 48—49, 1 14 Stocked, where obtainable 265 Uses, general 264 Weights 264 Airpost Bond — Colors 56-57, 120 Description 120 Envelopes 75, 121 Finishes 59 Grade Level. 120 Grain, directions of 120 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 120 Non-standard specifications 78-79, 121 Packing 104, 120 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 121 Sizes 48-49, 120 Stocked, where obtainable 120 Typewriter Papers 269 Uses, general 120 Weights 52-54, 120 Writing Tablets 274 Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper 269 Covers . 269 Description 269 Envelopes 75, 269 Grade Level 269 Ordering, in 269 Packing 269 Prices Price List Ruling 269 Samples 269 Sizes 262, 269 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Airpost Bond , 48-49, 120 Stocked, where obtainable 269 Uses, general 269 Weights 1 52-54, 269 Albion Offset — Colors. 56-57, 192 Description 192 Envelopes 75, 193 Finishes 59 Grade Level 192 Grain, directions of 192 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 192 Non-standard specifications 94. 193 Packing 104, 192 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Offset grades. . 190, 191 Samples 192 Sizes 48-49, 192 Stocked, where obtainable 192 Uses, general 192 Weights 52-54, 192 Albion Text — Colors 56-57, 176 Description 75,176 Envelopes 177 Finishes 59, 176 Grade Level 176 Grain, directions of 176 [370] Albion Text — Continued o age Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63*^176 Non-standard specifications 86-87* 177 pS 1 * :::::::::::::::::::.. iwim races.. Price List Qualities relative to other Book grades 168 16° Samples 177 Sizes. .'.'.'.'.' .".' .'." .'.' .' " 48^49, 176 btocked, where obtainable 176 Uses, general J76 weights '.'::::: ::::::::::::;::;:;;:;;;:;;;;;.'; "52-54, 176 Album Papers 277 American Bankers Association, Recommendation of 302 American Bulking Book — £ olors ?- ;.• 56-57, 178 Description 178 Envelopes 75 179 Finishes ' 59 Grade Level 178 Grain, directions of '.'.'.'.'. 178 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 178 Non-standard specifications 86-87* 179 P a . ckin g .'.."..".."..'..".."..".."..".'... 104* 178 .Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples ' 1 79 Sizes 4g_49 170 Stocked, where obtainable 179 Uses, general 178 Weights ...'.'.'.'.'.' .'.'.'.'.".".'.".'.' .".'.'.'.'' ii-54, 178 American Eggshell — Colors. 56-57, 188 Description 188 Envelopes 75, 189 Finishes ........'.'.'....[..'.'. 59' 188 Grade Level 1 88 Grain, directions of 1 88 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 188 Non-standard specifications 86-87* 189 Packing ..'.'.'.. '.'.'.'.'.'.'.. . 104' 188 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples ' 187 Sizes. ............. ...."."..'.'.'.'.*.'.'.".'.'.'.'* '48^49, 188 Stocked, where obtainable 1 88 Uses, general !!.!"! 1 88 Weights .........'.'.'.'." '52-54, 188 American English Finish Book — Colors 56-57, 186 Description 1 86 Envelopes 75 t 187 Finishes .[.... 59,' 186 Grade Level 186 Crain, directions of 186 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 186 Non-standard specifications 86-87, 187 Packing 104, 186 Prices. Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples ' 187 Sizes 48-49, 186 Stocked, where obtainable 1 87 Uses, general ....'. 1 86 Weights .....'...."' '52-54, 186 American Post Card — Color 56-57, 224 Description 224 Envelopes 75, 225 Finishes 59 Grade Level 224 Grain, directions of 224 Impress, various forms to which adapted . 62-63, 224 Non-standard specifications 90-9 1 , 225 Packing 104, 224 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bristol grades 215 Samples 224 Sizes 48-49, 224 Stocked, where obtainable 224 Uses, general 224 Weights 52-54, 224 American Rope Bristol — Colors 56-57,222 Description 222 Envelopes 75, 223 Finishes 59 Grade Level 222 Grain, directions of 222 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 225 Non-standard specifications 90-91 , 222-223 Packing 104, 222 [3711 / American Rope Bristol — Continued Page Prices. p r j ce L j s t Qualities, relative to other Bristol grades 2 14, 215 Samples , . ' 222 Sizes '......' 48-^-49, 222 Stocked, where obtainable ' 222 Uses, general ' ' ' 222 Weights ....'.'.'.'.'.'.' .'.".'." .'.' .'.' .'.' .' ' '52-54, 222 American Super Calendered Book — Colors. 56-57, 184 Description ■. 184 Envelopes ...'.'..'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'!' 75, 185 Finishes 59, 1 84 Grade Level ' 184 Grain, directions of ' 184 Impress, various forms to which adapted .'.'....' 62-63, 184 Non-standard Specifications !!!!!! 86-87^ 185 Packing ...!."!!.".. 104^ 184 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples .....'..'..'.'.'. 185 Sizes 48-49, 184 Uses general 184 Weights .......'.' '52-54, 184 Stocked, where obtainable 185 American Vellum — Announcement Line 248 Colors ......'.'.'.'.'. '56-57, 172 Description 172 Envelopes 75, 173 Finishes 59, 172 Grade Level 172 Grain, directions of 1 72 Impress 1 72 Non-standard specifications 86-87, 173 Packing 104, 172 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples 173 Sizes 48-49, 172 Stocked, where obtainable 173 Uses, general 172 Weights 52-54, 172 American Writing Paper Company — Department of Technical Control of 4, 342 Distribution of papers of 3 Eagle-A Line made by 1 Location of mills 1 Manufacturing equipment of 2 Output of 1 Personnel of 2 Purchasing policy of 2 Scope of 1 Analysis of Use-Requirements of Paper 98 Appearance, definition of 98-99 Impress, definition of 99 Longevity, definition of 98 Treatment, definition of 98-99 Announcement Line 245-254 Cabinets of Wedding Announcements 250 Folded and Flat Sheets and Cards 246-248 General Uses 245 Mourning Stationery 253 Papeteries 254 Purpose 245 Stork Announcements ' 251 Visiting Cards and Envelopes 252 Anti-Rust Papers 280 Anti-Tarnish Paper 280 Appearance — Definition 8, 98 How obtained 99 Relation to paper use 8 Arden Wedding — Announcement Line 247 Colors 56-57, 228 Description 228 Envelopes 75, 229 Finishes 3y • " 8 Grade Level 228 Grain, directions of 228 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 228 Non-standard specifications 92-93, 229 Packing 104. 228 prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Wedding grades 227 Samples ■ ■ ■ ■ 229 Sizes 48-19, 228 Stocked, where obtainable 228 Uses, general • •■• 228 Weights 52-54, 228 372] Page Army Brown Box Line 270 Arrive Halftone — Colors 56-57, 182 Description 1 82 Envelopes 75, 183 Finishes 59, 182 Grade Level 182 Grain, directions of 1 82 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 182 Non-standard specifications 86-87 , 1 83 Packing 104, 182 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples 1 83 Sizes 48-49, 182 Uses, general 1 82 Stocked, where obtainable 1 83 Weights 52-54, 182 Arven Plate — Colors 56-57, 206 Description ■ 206 Envelopes 75, 207 Finishes 206, 59 Grade Level 206 Grain, directions of 206 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 206 Non-standard specifications 88-89, 207 Packing 104, 206 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Cover grades 200, 201 Samples 207 Sizes 48-49, 206 Stocked, where obtainable 206 Uses, general 206 Weights 52-54, 206 Association of National Advertisers 4, 97 Associations, Seven National, Demanding Standardized Lines 97 Aulde Scotia Lynene — Colors 56-57, 136 Description 136 Envelopes 75, 137 Finishes 59, 136 Grade Level : 136 Grain, directions of 136 Impress 136 Non-standard specifications 80, 137 Packing 104, 136 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Linen grades 130, 131 Samples 136 Sizes 48^9, 136 Stocked, where obtainable 136 Uses, general 136 Weights 52-54, 136 Bag Paper 277 Beater, The 339 Beebe Offset — Colors 56-57, 194 Description 194 Envelopes 75, 195 Finishes 59 Grade Level 194 Grain, directions of 194 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 194 Non-standard specifications 94, 195 Packing 104, 194 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Offset grades 190, 191 Samples 194 Sizes 48-49, 194 Stocked, where obtainable 194 Uses, general 194 Weights 52-54, 194 Berkshire Text — Colors. 56-57, 174 Description 1 74 Envelopes 75, 175 Finishes 59, 174 Grade Level , 1 74 Grain, directions of 174 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 174 Non-standard specifications 86-87, 175 Packing 104, 174 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168-169 Samples 175 Sizes 48-49, 174 Stocked, where obtainable 1 74 Uses, general 1 74 Weights 52-54, 174 [373] r Biscay Wedding — Page Announcement Line 247 Colors 56-57, 230 Description 230 Envelopes 75, 231 Finishes 59, 230 Grade Level 230 Grain, directions of 230 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 230 Non-standard specifications 92-93, 231 Packing 104, 230 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Wedding grades 226, 227 Samples 230 Sizes 48-49, 230 Stocked, where obtainable 230 Uses, general 230 Weights 52-54, 230 Black Wrapping Papers 280 Bleach Boilers, The 339 Blotting Paper, Trade Customs of 326 Blue Box Line, The 263 Blueprint Paper 279 Blue Print Paper, Trade Customs of 321 Bond Papers 107 Acceptance 124-125 Airpost 120-121 Agawam 1 14—1 15 Analysis of bond uses 107 Characteristics 107 Chart, relative, of 110-111 Chevron 122-123 Contract 118-119 "Correct Use of Bond Papers for Business Purposes" 109 Coupon 1 12-1 13 Demand for 107 Description of ._..._ 107-129 Development of written communication 107 Low-grade bonds unwatermarked 107 Nine bonds cover field of bond requirements 108 Nine grades of 109 Norman 126-127 Number on market 107 Paper trade customs pertaining to 109 Persian 116-117 Qualities. 107 Longevity 107 Treatment 107 Impress 108 Appearance 108 Of a first-grade bond 108 Coupon — first grade 108 Telephone 128-129 Watermark 107 Why called "Bond" 107 Book Papers 166 Adaptability due to finish 166 Albion Text 176-177 American Bulking Book 178-179 American Eggshell 188-189 American English Finish 186-187 American Super Calendered 184-185 American Vellum 172-173 Arrive Halftone 182-183 Berkshire Text 174-175 Characteristics of 166 Colors 167 Deckle d'Aigle 170-171 Development of 166 Eagle-A Line of. Why established 166 First grade 166 Grades 167 Paper Trade Customs 311-314 Railroad Folder 180-181 Relative Chart 168-169 Two distinguished grades 166 Book Papers, Trade Customs of 311-314 Box Boards 277 Box Covers 277 Boxed Stationery; — See "Papeteries." Brand Names — Paper, owned by American Writing Paper Co 333-336 Bristols 214 Agawam Index Bristol 216-217 American Post Card 224-225 American Rope Bristol 222-223 Characteristics 214 Cherokee Index Bristol 218-219 i [374] Bristols — Continued Page Colors 214 Darien Index Bristol 220-221 First grade characteristics 214 Folding resistance demanded 214 Grades 214 How term was originally applied 214 Index Bristols 214 Paper Trade Customs 214 Relative Chart . . . 215 Use 214 Brown Print Paper 279 Brunswick Linen Ledger — Colors 56-57, 144 Description 144 Envelopes 75, 145 Finishes 59 Grade Level 144 Grain, directions of 144 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 144 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 145 Packing 144 Prices. Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 145 Sizes 48-49, 144 Stocked, where obtainable 145 Uses, general 52-54, 144 "Weights 144 B L'LKING 95 Definition of 95 High bulking papers 95 Relative bulking of box papers 96 Business Depending on Printing 281 Cabinet, Sample, Illustrated . 105 Calender Roll Paper 277 Calendering and Inspecting 341 Card Boards, Trade Customs of 316-321 Case, Packing, Illustrated 104 Cellulose 99 Chain Marks 344 Charge for the Plan 282 Chart Papers 277 Charts — Bond Papers in non-standard specifications 78-79 Bond Papers, relative quality-standards of 110-1 1 1 Book Papers in non-standard specifications 86—87 Book Papers, relative quality-standards of 168-169 Bristol Papers in non-standard specifications 90-91 Bristol Papers, relative quality-standards of 215 Cabinets of Wedding Announcements . 250 Cover Papers in non-standard specifications , 88-89 Cover Papers, relative quality-standards of 201 Envelope Papers suitable for each grade 75 Finishes and Formations in which each grade is stocked 59 Folded and Flat Sheets and Cards 246-248 Ledger Papers, in non-standard specifications 82-83 Ledger Papers, relative quality-standards of 141 Linen Papers in non-standard specifications 80 Linen Papers, relative quality-standards of 131 Method of Impress to which each grade is adaptable 62-63 Mimeograph Papers in non-standard specifications 81 Mimeograph Papers, relative quality-standards of 239 Mourning Stationery 253 New and Old Substance Weights 303 Offset Papers in non-standard specifications 94 Offset Papers, relative quality -standards of 191 Papers for covers of printed pieces 16-17 Papers for documents, office and factory forms 20-21 Papers for inside pages and self covers 14-15 Papers for single and folded cards 18-19 Papers for Stationery 22-23 Papeteries 254 Relative bulking of book papers 96 Standard Colors in which each grade is made 56-57 Standard Sheet Sizes in which each grade is stocked 48-49 Stork Announcements 251 Substance Weights in which each paper is stocked 52-54 Substance Weights in which one basis weight is expressed in terms of another 54 Typewriter Papers, sheet sizes and weights in which stocked 262 Visiting Cards and Envelopes . 252 Wedding and Papeterie Papers in non-standard specifications 92-93 Wedding and Papeterie Papers, relative quality-standards of 227 Writing Papers in non-standard specifications 84-85 Writing Papers, relative quality-standards of 155 Chemical Processes and Operations, Papers for 277 Chemical Wood Pulp 98 [3751 Cherokee Index Bristol — Page Colors v . . 56-57, 218 Description 218 Envelopes 75, 219 Finishes 59 Grade Level 218 Grain, directions of 218 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 218 Non-standard specifications 90-91, 219 Packing '. 104, 218 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bristol grades 214, 215 Samples 218 Sizes 48-49, 218 Stocked where obtainable 218 Uses, general 218 Weights 52-54. 218 Chester Offset — Colors 56-57, 196 Description 196 Envelopes 75, 197 Finishes 59 Grade Level. 196 Grain, directions of 196 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 196 Non-standard specifications 94, 197 Packing 104, 196 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Offset grades 190, 191 Samples 197 Sizes 48-49, 196 Stocked, where obtainable 196 Uses, general 196 Weights 52-54, 196 Chesterfield Papeterie — Colors 56-57, 232 Description 232 Envelopes 75, 233 Finishes 59, 232 Grade Level 232 Grain, directions of 232 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 232 Non-standard specifications 92-93, 233 Packing 104, 232 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Papeterie grades 226, 227 Samples 233 Sizes 48-49, 232 Stocked, where obtainable 233 Uses, general 232 Weights 52-54, 232 Chevron Bond — Colors 56-57, 122 Description 122 Envelopes 75, 123 Finishes 59 Grade Level 122 Grain, directions of 122 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 122 Non-standard specifications 78-79, 123 Packing 104, 122 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 122 Sizes 48-49, 122 Stocked, where obtainable 122 Typewriter Papers 270 Uses, General 122 Weights 52-54, 122 Writing Tablets 122 Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper 270 Covers , 270 Description 270 Envelopes 75, 270 Grade Level 270 Ordering, in 270 Packing 270 Prices Price List Ruling 270 Samples 270 Sizes 262, 270 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Chevron Bond 122 Stocked, where obtainable 270 Uses, general 270 Weights 52-54,270 Coating Papers 277 Colonial Linen — Colors 56-57, 134 Description 134 Envelopes 75, 135 Finishes 134 Grade Level 134 [376 Colonial Linen — Continued Page Grain, directions of 134 Impress, various forms to which adapted . . 62-63, 134 Non-standard specifications 80, 135 Packing ......' 104^ 134 Prices. . .^ Price List Qualities relative to other Linen grades 130, 131 Samples 135 Sizes ........" 48-49, 134 Stocked, where obtainable 134 Typewriter Papers ....!. 267 Uses, general 134 Weights ..;.... 52-54, 134 Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Paper 267 Covers ,.' 267, 273 Description 266, 267 Envelopes 267 Finishes .......' 266, 267 Grade Level 266 Ordering, in 267 Packing . 267 Prices Price List Ruling 267 Samples 267 Sizes 262, 267 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Colonial Linen 48-49, 134 Stocked, where obtainable 267 Uses, general 266 Weights 267 Colored Papers — Why developed 55 All necessary colors in each grade 55 The papers that are made in each color 56-57 Colors, all colors regul arly stocked 103 Commercial Stationery Cabinets 255-259 Acceptance Bond Stationery Cabinets 258 Contents of 255 Contract Bond Stationery Cabinets 257 Coupon Bond Stationery Cabinets 256 Description 255 Grades 255 Old Chester Mills Stationery Cabinets 259 Purpose . . 255 Where obtainable 255 Committee on Simplification of Paper Sizes 103 Construction Paper 277 Contents of Paper, the 338 Contract Bond Colors. 56-57, 118 Commercial Cabinets 257 Description 118 Envelopes 75, 1 19 Finishes 59 Grade Level 118 Grain, directions of 118 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 118 Non-standard Specifications 78-79, 1 19 Packing 104, 118 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110-111 Samples 119 Sizes 48-49, 118 Stocked, where obtainable 119 Typewriter Papers 260-262, 268 Uses, general 118 Weights 52, 54, 1 18 Writing Tablets 274 Contract Bond Stationery Cabinets 257 Contents of Cabinet 257 Grade Level 257 Packing 255, 257 Prices Price List Samples 257 Sizes 257 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Contract Bond 48-49, 1 1 8 Styles 257 Contract Bond Typewriter Paper 268 Covers 268 Description 268 Envelopes 75, 268 Grade Level 268 Ordering, in 268 Packing _. 268 Prices Price List Ruling . . : 268 Samples 268 Sizes 262, 268 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Contract Bond 48-49, 1 18 Stocked, where obtainable 268 Uses, general 268 Weights 52-54. 26S [3771 Page Converted Forms of Eagle-A Papers 245-273 Copy 283 Coupon Bond — Colors 56-57, 112 Commercial Cabinets 256 Description 112 Envelopes 75, 1 13 Finishes 59, 112 Grade Level 112 Grain, directions of 112 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 112 Non-standard Specifications 78-79, 1 13 Packing 104, 112 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 113 Sizes 48^9, 112 Stocked, where obtainable 113 Typewriter Papers 260-262, 263 Uses, general 112 Weights 52,54, 112 Writing tablets 274 Coupon Bond Stationery Cabinets 256 Contents of Cabinet 256 Grade Level 256 Packing 256, 255 Prices Price List Samples 256 Sizes 256 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Coupon Bond 48-49, 112 Styles 256 Coupon Bond Typewriter Paper 263 Covers 273, 263 Description 263 Envelopes 75, 263 Grade Level 263 Ordering, in 263 Packing 263 Prices Price List Ruling 263 Samples 263 Sizes 262, 263 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Coupon Bond 48-49, 112 Stocked, where obtainable 263 Uses, general 263 Weights 52-54, 263 Cover Papers 200 Arven Plate 206-207 Deckle d'Aigle 202-203 Herculean Cover 204-205 How graded 200 How used "*200 Paper Trade Customs 315-316 Paradox Cover 208-209 Relative Chart 201 Requisite qualities 200 Riverdale Cover 210-211 Standard Cover 212-213 Unusual Types 200 Use of chart as a basis of comparison 200 Cover Papers, Trade Customs of 315-316 Creating Confidence 282 Creative Printing 281 Customer's Business, Studying the 282 Darien Index Bristol — Colors 56-57, 220 Description 220 Envelopes 75, 221 Finishes 59 Grade Level 220 Grain, directions of 220 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 220 Non-standard specifications 90-91 , 221 Packing 104, 220 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bristol grades 214, 215 Samples 220 Sizes 48-49, 220 Stocked, where obtainable 220 Uses, general 420 Weights 52-54, 220 Dark Gray Box Line 271 Dark Green Box Line 268 Deckle d'Aigle — Announcement Line 246, 254 Colors 56-57, 170 Description 1 70 Envelopes 75, 171 [3781 Deckle d'Aigle — Continued Page Finishes 59, 170 Grade Level 170 Grain, directions of 170 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 170 Non-standard specifications 86-87, 171 Packing 104, 170 Prices Price List Qualities relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples 171 Sizes '48^49, 170 Stocked, where obtainable 171 Uses, general 1 70 Weights .....'...'.' 52-54, 170 Deckle d'Aigle Cover — Announcement Line 246 Colors 56-57, 202 Description 202 Envelopes 75, 203 Finishes 59 Grade Level 202 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 202 Non-standard specifications 88-89, 203 Packing 104, 202 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Cover grades 200, 201 Samples 203 Sizes 48-49, 202 Stocked, where obtainable 203 Uses, general 202 Weights 52-54, 202 Delta Mimeograph — Colors 56-57, 242 Description 242 Envelopes 75, 243 Finishes 59, 242 Grade Level 242 Grain, directions of 242 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 242 Non-standard specifications 81 , 242 Packing 104, 242 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Mimeograph grades 238, 239 Samples 242 Sizes 48^19, 242 Stocked, where obtainable 242 Uses, general 242 Weights 52-54, 242 Design 283 Dickinson Offset — Colors 56-57, 198 Description 198 Envelopes 75, 199 Finishes 59 Grade Level 198 Grain, directions of 198 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 198 Non-standard specifications 94, 199 Packing 104, 198 Prices ■ Price List Qualities, relative to other Offset grades 190, 191 Samples 199 Sizes 48-49, 198 Stocked, where obtainable 198 Uses, general 198 Weights 52-54, 198 Die Stamping, Embossing and, Papers adapted to 60-63 Direct Mail Advertising Association 4, 97 Distribution, Standardizing 5 Dorrington Papeterie — Announcement Line 247 Colors 56-57, 234 Description 234 Envelopes 75, 235 Finishes 59, 234 Grade Level 234 Grain, directions of 234 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 234 Non-standard specifications 92-93, 235 Packing 104, 234 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Papeterie grades 226, 227 Samples 235 Sizes 48-49, 234 Stocked, where obtainable 234 Uses, general 234 Weights 52-54, 234 Drawing Paper 277 Druggists' Wrapping 280 Drying Drums 34-0 [379] Duplex Papers 278 Duplex Wrapping 280 Duplicating 103 Eagle-A Quality, How Maintained 342 Embossing and Die Stamping — Papers adaptable to 60-63 Envelopes — Appropriate size of gg Choice of Paper for '/.'.', 68 How to order ' [[ .........,....', 73-74 Papers suitable to use with each grade !!!'!!!!!' : Printed matter on 68 Styles and uses ................. 69-72 Suitable for Eagle-A Papers !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!.. 105 To match various grades 105 To obtain the proper \[\ 73 United States Envelope Company ' 73 Use of ......'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'. 68 Trade Customs of 321 Evils of price cutting 281 Execution of the plan 283 Extension Ledger — Colors 56-57, 148 Description 148 Envelopes 75 p 149 Finishes 59 Grade Level 148 Grain, directions of 148 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 148 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 149 Packing 148 Prices. Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 1 49 Sizes 48-49, 148 Stocked, where obtainable 148 Uses, general 148 Weights 52-54, 148 Facing Paper 278 Farnsworth Papeterie — Colors 56-57, 236 Description 236 Envelopes 75, 237 Finishes 59, 236 Grade Level 236 Grain, directions of 236 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 236 Non-standard specifications 92-93, 237 Packing 104, 236 Prices. Price List Qualities, relative to other Papeterie grades 226, 227 Samples 237 Sizes 48-49, 236 Stocked, where obtainable 236 Uses, general 236 Weights 52-54, 236 Filter Paper 277 Finishes 103 All finishes regularly stocked 59, 103 Definition of 58 Finishes and Formations — Definition of . . . 58 Finishes and Formations in which each grade is stocked . , 59 How differentiated 58 Kinds of Finishes 58 Kinds of Formations - 58 Flat Writing! Papers 154 Colors 154 How described 154 Material made of 154 Mt. Nonotuck Mills 162-163 Mt. Tom Mills 164-165 Old Chester Mills 156-157 Paper Trade Customs 306-310 Parsons Tinted Writings 158-159 Relative chart of 155 Use of 154 Watermark 154 Wauregan Colored Flats 160-161 Weights 154 What term "Writings" includes 154 Food Containers 278 Forms included 244 Formations — Definition of 58 Freight Rates 305-306 General Rules for Use of Paper 9 General Uses of Paper 102 [380 Page Gelatine Board 279 Glassine and Grease Proof Papers, Trade Customs of 330 Gloria Ledger — Colors 56-57, 150 Description 150 Envelopes : 75, 151 Finishes 59 Grade Level 150 Grain, directions of 150 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 150 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 151 Packing 104, 150 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 151 Sizes 48-49, 150 Stocked, where obtainable 150 Uses, general 150 Weights 52-54, 150 Glossary 347-367 Government Record Ledger — Colors. 56-57, 142 Description 142 Envelopes 75, 143 Finishes 59 Grade Level 142 Grain, directions of 142 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 142 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 143 Packing 104, 142 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 143 Sizes , 48-49, 142 Stocked, where obtainable 143 Uses, general , 142 Weights 52-54, 142 Grade Being Run 77 Grade — Definition of 101 Made to non-standard specifications 105 Range of essential grades in each kind 1 00 Relative charts of 101 Standardizing each 1 00 Grain, Directions of, in Eagle-A Papers 104 Grain, Parallel to Chain Marks 345 Gumming Papers 278 Hard Fiber Paper 277 Herculean Cover — Colors. 56-57, 204 Description 204 Envelopes 75, 205 Finishes ». 59 Grade Level 204 Grain, directions of 204 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 204 Non-standard specifications 88-89, 205 Packing 104, 204 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Cover grades 200, 201 Samples 205 Sizes 48-49, 204 Stocked, where obtainable 204 Uses, general 204 Weights 52-54, 204 How Eagle-A Papers Are Packed 104 How Eagle-A Papers Are Trimmed 104 Illustrations — Announcement Sample Book 245 Box of Typewriter Paper 260 Commercial Stationery Cabinet 255 Eagle-A Quality, How Maintained Department of Technical Control — Laboratory 342 Microscope, the 343 Mullen Tester, the 343 Schopper Folder Machine, the 343 Tensile Tester, the 343 Envelope styles and their uses 69-72 Frontispiece Insert between end leaf and Contents How Paper Is Made Beater, the 339 Bleach Boilers, the _ 339 Calendering and Inspecting 341 Drying Drums 340 Loft, the 341 Jordan or Refining Engine, the 339 Paper Machine, another view of 340 Paper Machine, wet end 340 [3811 Illustrations — Continued Page Rag Cutter, the 338 Rag Duster, the 338 Rag Room, the 338 Rags, the 338 Sealing 341 Sizing 340 Trimming 341 Washers, the 339 Manuscript Covers 273 Map — "Freight Rates" 304-305 Mourning Stationery 253 Papeteries (boxed stationery) 254 Ream Package and Packing Case 104 Sample Cabinet and Sample Books 106 Sheets, Cards and Envelopes 249 Standard Forms for Printed Messages 26-27 Stork Announcements 251 Visiting Cards and Envelopes 252 Watermarking and Rubberstamp Marking Laid Formation, Figure 2 344 Watermark, Figure 1 344 Wedding Cabinet 250 Writing Tablets 274 Impress — Adaptability 102 As a use-factor 98 Consideration of 99 Definition of 60 Embossing and die stamping 60 Letterpress printing 60 Lithography 61 Machine Ruling 61 Method of impress to which each grade is adaptable 62-63 Mimeographing 61 Multigraphing 61 Pen writing 61 Quick way of finding papers suitable for each method of 61 Selecting paper for a definite 60 Various forms to which adapted 102-103 Index to Lesson Book 285-301 Industrial Papers — See "Specialties." Intaglio Printing 103 Jordan or Refining Engine, The 339 Journey Through the World's Largest Paper-making Institution, A 337 Jute Bristols 278 Kinds — Or classifications of 101 Relative qualities of papers 9 Laid and Wove Formation 344 Ledgers 140 Account Linen Ledger 146-147 5 Brunswick Record Ledger 144-145 Colors 140 Comparison with bonds 140 Extension Ledger 148-149 Gloria Ledger 150-151 Government Record Ledger 142-143 Grades 140 Important qualities desired in 140 Relative chart of 141 Selecting a 140 Telephone Ledger 152—153 Use of 140 Letterpress Printing, Relief or — Papers adaptable to 60-63 Relief or 102 Life, Definition of 101 Light Gray Box Line 266 Line, The Various Kinds and Grades of Eagle-A Quality-Standard Papers 97 How developed 98 What it embraces 97 Why it was developed 97 Linen Papers • • }30 Aulde Scotia Lynene 136-1 37 Characteristics of • • . ],9 Colonial Linen ,55 Colors 30 Description '^ Grades iA/i_ifR Paper Trade customs 306-310 Qualities of a first-grade Linen }30 Relative chart of ■ }3 1 Rival Linen 138-39 Surface qualities and appearance J30 Term confused with "Linen Finish" 130 U. S. Linen 132 1-133 Watermarks * 30 [3821 . Page Lines included 244 Lithography — Papers adapted to 61-63 Loft Drying 99, 341 Longevity, Relation to Use in Paper 8 As a use- factor 98 Consideration of 98 Relation to use in paper 8 Machine-dried 99 Machine Ruling — Papers adaptable to 61-63 Making Orders 77 Manuscript Cover 273 Colors 273 Description 273 Impress, various forms to which adapted 273 Packing 273 Prices Price List Sizes 273 Stocked, where obtainable 273 Uses, general 273 Weights 273 Map Papers 278 Materials Used in Paper-making 98 Microscopes 343 Mimeographing — Papers adaptable to 61-63 Mimeograph Papers — Characteristics of ■ 238 Delta Mimeograph 242-243 Development of Mimeograph paper 238 Grades 239 Limited requirement of 238 Peerless Mimeograph 240-24 1 Mt. Nonotuck Mills — Colors. 56-57, 162 Description 162 Envelopes 75, 163 Finishes 59 Grade Level 162 Grain, directions of 162 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 162 Non-standard specifications 84—85, 163 Packing 104, 162 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Writing grades 154, 155 Samples 163 Sizes 48-49, 162 Stocked, where obtainable 162 Uses, general 162 Weights 52-54, 162 Mt. Tom Mills — Colors 56-57, 164 Description 164 Envelopes 75, 165 Finishes 59 Grade Level 164 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 164 Non-standard specifications 84-85, 165 Packing 104, 164 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Writing grades 154, 155 Samples 164 Sizes 48-49, 164 Stocked, where obtainable 164 Uses, general 164 Weights 52-54, 164 Multigraphing — Papers adaptable to 61-63 Music Roll Papers 278 Mullen Tester 343 National Association of Employing Lithographers 4,97 National Association of Purchasing Agents 4,97 Recommendations of 302 National Association of Stationers and Manufacturers 4, 97 National Association of Steel and Copper Plate Engravers 4, 97 Ne Plus Ultra Line 264, 265, 266.267 Nitrating Paper 277 Non-Standard Specifications, Grades in 105 Non-Stocked Grades, Their Approximate Grade Levels 333-336 Norman Bond — Colors. 56-57, 126 Description 126 Envelopes 75, 127 383] / 1 ■r Norman Bond — Continued Page Finishes 59 Grade Level 126 Grain, directions of 126 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 126 Non-standard specifications 78—79, 127 Packing 104, 126 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 127 Sizes 48-49, 126 Stocked, where obtainable 52-54, 126 Uses, general 126 Weights 48-49, 126 Writing Tablets 126 Offset — Papers adaptable to 61-63 Offset Papers — Albion Offset 192-193 Beebe Offset 194-195 Characteristics 190 Chester Offset 196-197 Dickinson Offset 198-199 First Offset Grade 190 Paper Trade Customs 314 Relative Chart 191 Use-requirements, to meet 190 Offset Papers, Trade Customs of 314 Old Chester Mills — Colors 56-57, 156 Description 156 Envelopes 75,157 Finishes 59, 156 Grade Level 156 Grain, directions of . 156 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 156 Non-standard specifications 84-85, 157 Packing 104, 156 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Writing grades 154, 155 Samples 156 Sizes 48-49, 156 Stocked, where obtainable 156 Uses, general 156 Weights 52-54, 156 Old Chester Mills Stationery Cabinets 259 Contents of Cabinet 259 Grade Level 259 Packing 255, 259 Prices Price List Samples 259 Sizes 259 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Old Chester Mills 48-49, 156 Styles 259 Onion Skins and Manifolds, Trade Customs of 327 Orange Box Line 269 Packing, How Eagle-A Papers Are Packed 104 Paper — Analysis of use-requirements of 98 Brand names owned by the American Writing Paper Company 333-336 For sensitizing processes 279 How made 337 How to select the right 8 Materials used in making 98 Music roll 278 Ten essential kinds or classes 100 Use-factors, four general 98 Appearance 98 Impress 98 Longevity ..,.., 98 Treatment 98 Papers — Eagle-A, in converted form 106 For chemical processes and operations „ 277 For printing processes 278 Paper Buyers, How Benefited by Standardization 6 Paper Machine — Dry end, the 340 Wet end, the 340 Paper Standardization, Pioneer in 1-7 Paper Stocking, Standardized Mill Brand Grades 345 Parsons Tinted Writings — Colors 56-57, 158 Description 158 Envelopes 75, 159 Finishes 59, 158 Grade Level 158 Grain, directions of 158 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 158 [384] Parsons Tinted Writings — Continued Page Non-standard specifications 84—85 159 Packing 104,' 158 Prices. Price List Qualities, relative to other Writing grades 154, 155 Samples 159 Sizes. .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.' .'.* .'.' .' ' '48^-49, 158 Stocked, where obtainable 15g Uses, general !!.!:!!'! 158 Weights .......'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'."' '52-54, 15$ Pattern Paper 278 Peerless Mimeograph — Colors . 56-57, 240 Description 240 Envelopes 75, 241 Finishes ..'.'.'.'.'...'..... 59, 240 Grade Level ' 240 Grain, directions of 240 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 240 Non-standard specifications 81 , 241 Packing 104, 240 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Mimeograph grades 238, 239 Samples 240 Sizes 48-49, 240 Stocked, where obtainable 240 Uses, general 240 Weights 52-54, 240 Pencil Paper 278 Pen Writing — Papers adaptable to 61-63 Persian Bond — Colors. 56-57, 1 16 Description 116 Envelopes ' 75, 117 Finishes 59 Grade Level 116 Grain, directions of 116 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 1 16 Non-standard Specifications 78-79, 117 Packing 104, 116 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110-111 Samples 117 Sizes .' 48-19, 116 Stocked, where obtainable 116 Typewriter Papers 260-262, 267 Uses, general 116 Weights 52, 54, 116 Writing Tablets 274 Persian Bond Typewriter Paper 266-267 Covers . 267, 273 Description 266 Envelopes 75, 267 Finishes 266 Grade Level 266 Ordering, in 267 Packing 267 Prices Price List Ruling 267 Samples 267 Sizes 262, 267 Standard sizes, colors and weights of Persian Bond 48-49, 116 Stocked, where obtainable 267 Uses, general 266 Weights 52-54, 267 Photo Mounts 278 Photographic Papers 279 Photostat Papers 279 Plan in Printed Salesmanship 282 Planning Printed Salesmanship by Large Printers 282 Planning Printed Salesmanship by Small Printers 282 Postage Rates — Communications attached to parcel '. 65 First-class matter 64 Fourth-class matter, Domestic Parcel Post 65 Getting the most out of mailing cost 66 Letters attached to third-class mail 65 Mailings of matter without stamps 65 Pre-canceled postage stamps 66 Rates of postage on first-class matter 64 Rates of postage on fourth-class matter 65 Rates of postage on unsealed third-class matter 64 Second-class matter 64 Selecting the right weight of paper to reduce mailing cost 5 1 , 66 Third-class matter 64 What can be mailed for two cents, first-class matter 67 385] Practical Sizes — Page For advertising lines 24-4-5 For books 24-45 For letterheads, office and factory forms 46 Printed Pieces — Economy of production 24, 5 1 Folding and wearing requirements 51 Mailing costs 5 1-64 to 67 Index to kinds and styles 10-13 Practical sizes for 28-45 Papers for covers 16-1 7 Papers for documents, office and factory forms 20—21 Papers for inside pages and self covers 14—15 Papers for single and folded cards 18-19 Papers for stationery 22-23 Printed Piece Styles 24-46-50 Printed Salesmanship — Printing and multiplying of 284 How to plan 281-301 Study of 284 Printer, Consulting the 302 Printing Business Built by Printed Salesmanship 281 Printing Papers, Special 271 Printing Process, Papers for 278 Production Cost, Lowest — How Insured 100 Purpose 244 Quality Appearance of Printed Pieces 50 Of Papers in relation to use 8 Quality Manifold Typewriter Paper 272 Colors 272 Description 272 Finishes • 272 Packing 272 Prices Price List Samples 272 Sizes 262, 272 Stocked, where obtainable 272 Uses, general 272 Weights 272 Quality-Standards, definition of 97 Rag Cutter, the 338 Rag Duster, the 338 Rag Room, the 338 Railroad Folder — Colors 56-57, 180 Description 1 80 Envelopes 75, 181 Finishes 59, 180 Grade Level 180 Grain, directions of 180 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 180 Non-standard specifications 86-87, 181 Packing 104, 180 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Book grades 168, 169 Samples 181 Sizes 48-49, 180 Stocked, where obtainable 180 Uses, general 180 Weights 52-54, 180 Rates of Postage — Miscellaneous Information 64-67 Ream Wrapper, Illustrated 104 Relation — Comparative data as to qualities of different kinds of paper and different grades to each kind Between grades 101 Between kinds 101 Relative Charts, how developed 101 Relief or Letterpress Printing 102 Rival Linen — Colors 56-57. 138 Description ■ 138 Envelopes 75, 139 Finishes 59, 138 Grade Level 138 Grain, directions of 138 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 138 Non-standard specifications 80, 139 Packing 104. 138 Prices Price List Quality, relative to other Linen grades 130, 13 1 Samples 138 Sizes 48-49, 138 Stocked, where obtainable 138 Uses, general 138 Weights 52-54. 138 r 386 1 Riverdale Cover — Page Colors 56-57, 210 Description 210 Envelopes 75, 211 Finishes 59, 210 Grade Level 210 Grain, directions of 210 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 210 Non-standard specifications 88-89, 2 1 1 Packing 104, 210 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Cover grades 200, 201 Samples 211 Sizes . 48-49, 210 Stocked, where obtainable 210 Uses, general 210 Weights 52-54, 210 Roll News Print, Trade Customs of 331 Roman Typewriter Paper 266 Covers 267, 273 Description 266 Envelopes 267 Finishes 266 Grade Level < 266 Ordering, in 267 Packing 266 Prices Price List Ruling 266 Samples 267 Sizes 262, 266 Stocked, where obtainable 267 Uses, general 266 Weights 266 Rotogravure, papers adaptable to 61-63 Rubber Stamping 344 Safety Paper 279 Sample Books, illustrated 106 Samples, Paper 106 Sand Paper Base 279 Schopper Folder Machine, the 343 Sealing 341 Sensitizing Processes, Paper for 279 Service House, what it is 105 Service Houses 5 List of Insert between end leaf and back cover Shado-Craft Watermarking 279 Sheet News, Trade Customs of 332 Sizes — All sheet sizes regularly stocked 103 Printed piece 24—46 Selection of general size of printed piece in relation to standard sheet 25, 47 Sizing 340 Specifying the media 283 Standard Sheet Sizes 47-48-49, 103 Standardized Paper, the making of 337 Stationery, office and factory forms 302 Appropriate sizes 302 Design, make-up and arrangement of 302 Reducing waste in production 302 Uniformity of sizing 302 Stationery, planning of 302 Strength, determination of 101 Styles Printed Piece 24-46-50 Illustration of practical styles 26-27 Substance Factor, definition of „ 303 Substance Weight of Paper — ■ Relation to economy in producing printed piece 51 Relation to mailing cost of printed piece 51 Practical plan for relation of 51 Substance Weights of Paper — Definition of 50 Relation to style of printed piece 50 Relation to size of printed piece 51 Relation to quality appearance of printed piece 51 Relation to folding and wearing requirements 51 Selection of proper substance weight 50 Substance Weights, new and old, chart of 303 Successful Printed Salesmanship 282 Summary of Eagle-A Line 106 Surface Printing 103 [387 Page Specialties and Industrial Papers 275-280 Album Papers 277 Bag Papers 277 Box Boards 277 Box Covers 277 Calender Roll Paper 277 Chart Papers 277 Coating Papers 277 Construction Paper 277 Co-operation between maker and user 275 Development of Special Papers 275 Drawing Paper .■ 277 Duplex Papers 278 Duplex Wrapping 280 Equipment for making 276 Facing Paper 278 Food Containers 278 Gumming Papers 278 Jute Bristols 278 Manufacture of 275-277 Map Papers 278 Music Roll Paper 278 Papers for Chemical Processes and Operations 277 Papers for Printing Processes 278 Papers for Sensitizing Processes 279 Brown Print Paper 279 Photographic Papers 279 Photostat Papers 279 Pattern Paper 278 Pencil Paper 278 Photo Mounts 278 Safety Paper 279 Sand Paper Base 279 Shado-Craft Watermarking 279 Special Printing Papers 279 Special Wrapping Papers 280 Acid or Alkali Proof Papers 280 Anti-Rust Papers 280 Anti-Tarnish Papers 280 Black Wrapping Paper 280 Druggists' Wrapping 280 Specifications for 275 Waxing Paper 280 Wrapper 280 Specifications of Papers — Bond papers in non-standard specifications 78-79 Book papers in non-standard specifications 86-87 Bristol papers in non-standard specifications 90-91 Cover papers in non-standard specifications 88-89 Ledger papers in non-standard specifications 82—83 Linen papers in non-standard specifications 80 Making orders .••••: 77 Mimeograph papers in non-standard specifications 81 Offset papers in non-standard specifications 94 Papers having standard qualities. 76 Papers having standard specifications 76 Papers of non-standard qualities and specifications 76 Standard and non-standard papers . . 76 To find conditions controlling making of standard grades in non-standard specifi- cations .•■•••. 77 Wedding and Papeterie papers in non-standard specifications 92—93 What use of standardized papers means 77 When standard grade is being run 77 When use of standardized papers is necessary 77 Writing papers in non-standard specifications 84-85 Standard Cover — Colors 56-57, 212 Description 212 Envelopes 75, 213 Finishes 59, 212 Grade Level 212 Grain, directions of 212 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 212 Non-standard specifications 88-89, 213 Packing 104, 212 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Cover grades 200, 201 Samples 213 Sizes , 48-49, 212 Stocked, where obtainable 212 Uses, general 212 Weights 52-54, 212 Technical Association of the American Paper and Pulp Industry 101 Telephone Bond — Colors 56-57, 128 Description 128 Envelopes 77, 129 Finishes 59 Grade Level J28 Grain, directions of 1 28 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 128 [3881 Telephone Bond — Continued Page Non-standard specifications 78-79, 1 29 Packing 104, 128 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Bond grades 110, 111 Samples 128 Sizes 48-49, 128 Stocked, where obtainable 128 Uses, general 128 Weights 52-54, 128 Telephone Ledger — Colors 56-57, 152 Description 152 Envelopes 75, 153 Finishes 59 Grade Level 152 Grain, directions of 152 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 152 Non-standard specifications 82-83, 153 Packing 104, 152 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Ledger grades 140, 141 Samples 153 Sizes , 48-49, 152 Stocked, where obtainable 152 Uses, general 152 Weights 52-54, 152 Tensile Tester 343 Ticket Paper 279 Time and Freight Rates to Larger Cities 305 Tissue Papers, Trade Customs of 324 Treatment — As a use factor 98 Consideration of 99 Relation to use in paper 8 Trimming 341 Trimming, How Eagle-A Papers Are Trimmed 104 Typewriter Papers 260-273 Acceptance Bond Typewriter Paper 271 Agawam Parchment Typewriter Paper 264 Airpost Bond Typewriter Paper 269 Army Brown Box Line 270 Blue Box Line 263 Chevron Bond Typewriter Paper 270 Colonial Pro and Con Typewriter Paper 267 Contract Bond Typewriter Paper 268 Coupon Bond Typewriter Paper 263 Dark Gray Box Line 271 Dark Green Box Line 268 Description, general 260 Grades 260-261 Light Gray Box Line 266 Manuscript Cover 261, 273 Ne Plus Ultra Line 264, 265, 266, 267 Orange Box Line 269 Persian Bond Typewriter Paper 266-267 Purpose of 260 Quality Manifold Typewriter Paper 272 Roman Typewriter Paper 266 Sheet Sizes Chart 262 U. S. Linen Typewriter Paper 265 Typothet^e Lesson Book, The 284 Typothet^e Lesson Books, Where Obtainable ' 284 Uniformity, How Secured 100 U. S. Linen — Colors. 56-57, 132 Description 132 Envelopes 75, 133 Finishes 59, 132 Grade Level 132 Grain, directions of 132 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 132 Non-standard specifications 80, 133 Packing 104. 132 Prices Pnce List Qualities, relative to other Linen grades 131 Samples 133 Sizes 48-49. 32 Stocked, where obtainable 132 Uses, general 132 Typewriter Papers • •■ • 264 Weights 52-54, 132 U. S. Linen Typewriter Papers 265 Covers 265, 273 Description 264, 265 Envelopes ?5 > 265 Finishes 264, 265 Grade Level 264 Ordering, in 265 [389] U. S. Linen Typewriter Papers — Continued Page Packing 265 Prices Price List Ruling 266 Samples ' 265 Sizes 262, 265 Standard sizes, colors and weights of U. S. Linen 48-49, 132 Stocked, where obtainable 265 Uses, general ] . 264 Weights .'.'.'." 52-54, 265 United States Envelope Company 73 Authorized manufacturer 7,72 Divisions of 73 Envelope printing by 74 United Typothet^e of America 3,97 Use-factors, Four General 98 Appearance 98 Impress 98 Longevity 98 Treatment 98 Use of Printed Piece 8 Use-Requirements 8 Uses, General, to Which Papers Are Adapted 8-23, 102 Vegetable Parchment, Trade Customs of 327 Washers, The 339 Watermarking 344 Wauregan Colored Flats — Colors 56-57, 160 Description 160 Envelopes 75, 161 Finishes 59, 160 Grade Level 160 Grain, directions of 160 Impress, various forms to which adapted 62-63, 160 Non-standard specifications 84—85, 161 Packing. . . '. 104, 160 Prices Price List Qualities, relative to other Writing grades 154, 155 Samples 161 Sizes 48-49, 160 Stocked, where obtainable 161 Uses, general 160 Weights 52-54, 160 Wax Paper, Trade Customs of 329 Waxing Paper 280 Weddings and Papeteries — Arden Wedding 228-229 Biscay Wedding 230-231 Chesterfield Papeterie 232-233 Dorrington Papeterie 234—235 Farnsworth Papeterie 236-237 Papeteries Application of term "Papeteries" 226 Characteristics of 226 Grades 226 Relative Chart 227 Weddings Appearance sole factor 226 Application of term "Weddings" 226 Characteristics of 226 Two grades adequate , 226 Weights, All Weights Regularly Stocked 103 Where Eagle-A Papers May Be Obtained 105 Wire Marks 344 Wood Pulp, Chemical 98 Wrappers 280 Wrapping Papers, Special 280 Wrapping Paper, Trade Customs of 321 Writing Papers, Trade Customs of 306-3 10 [390] Service Service Houses Eagle- A Service Houses THE Eagle-A Service Houses are the media through which Eagle-A Papers are made available to printers, lithogra- phers, stationers, engravers, and other users; in fact, they form the external organization of the American Writing Paper Com- pany. Each Service House stocks the Eagle-A Papers and is an accredited sales representative for every one of the Eagle-A Quality-Standard Papers. The following list includes only the Service House warehouses where these papers are stocked. These merchants have also many sales offices and other methods of giving the widest dis- tribution service for Eagle-A Papers. SYMBOLS 1. Service House {with Warehouse') 3. Divisional house (with Warehouse) Symbol Name and Address 1 Albany, N. Y. Hudson Valley Paper Co. 520 Broadway 3 Atlanta, Ga. The Whitaker Paper Co. 2 Courtland St. Washington St. Viaduct 4 Augusta, Me. The Arnold-Roberts Co. 302 Water St. 3 Baltimore, Md. The Whitaker Paper Co. Guilford, Saratoga& Davis Sts, 1 Billings, Mont. Carpenter Paper Co. of Montana 5 Birmingham, Ala. The Whitaker Paper Co. 12 So. 20th St. 1 Boston, Mass. The Arnold-Roberts Co. 180-188 Congress St. 1 Boston, Mass. John Carter & Co., Inc. 593-599 Atlantic Ave. 3 Boston, Mass. The Whitaker Paper Co. 100-112 Shawmut Ave. 1 Buffalo, N. Y. R. M. Myers & Co. of Buffalo, Inc. 79 Ellicott St. 5 Buffalo, N. Y. The Whitaker Paper Co. 319 Main St. Branch house (with Warehouse) Sales Office Symbol Name and Address 5 Charleston, W. Va. The Whitaker Paper Co. P. O. Box 770 5 Chattanooga, Tenn. The Whitaker Paper Co. 305 James Bldg. 1 Chicago, III. Bradner Smith & Co. 175 W. Monroe St. 3 Chicago, III. The Whitaker Paper Co. 212-220 N. Sangamon St. 1 Cincinnati, Ohio The Whitaker Paper Co. 6th cor. Lock St. 5 Cleveland, Ohio The Whitaker Paper Co. 118 St. Clair Ave. 5 Colorado Springs, Colo. The Whitaker Paper Co. Bennet Bldg. 3 Columbus, Ohio The Whitaker Paper Co. 22 W. Naghten St. 1 Dallas, Texas E. C. Palmer & Co., Limited 407-409 Lacy St. 5 Dayton, Ohio The Whitaker Paper Co. 506 E. Third St. 3 Denver, Colo. The Whitaker Paper Co. 1625 Wazee St. 1 Des Moines, Iowa Carpenter Paper Co. 106-112 Seventh St. Eagle- A Service Houses— continued Symbol Name and Address 3 Detroit, Mich. The Whitaker Paper Co. 600 E. Jefferson Ave. 1 Houston, Texas E. C. Palmer & Co., Limited 3 Indianapolis, Ind. The Whitaker Paper Co 28-36 E. Georgia St. 5 Knoxville, Tenn. The Whitaker Paper Co. Holstan Nat'l Bank Bldg. 5 Lexington, Ky. The Whitaker Paper Co. Fayette Co. Nat'l Bank Bldg. 1 Lincoln, Neb. Lincoln Paper Company 14th &P Sts. 5 Louisville, Ky. The Whitaker Paper Co. Louisville Nat'l Bank Bldg. 5 * Minneapolis, Minn. The Whitaker Paper Co. 310 2nd Ave. So. 4 Newark, N. J. Lasher & Lathrop, Inc. 50 E. PeddieSt. 4 Newark, N. J. J. E. Linde Paper Co. 50 Lafayette St. 4 New Haven, Conn. The Arnold-Roberts Co. 128 Derby St. 1 New Orleans, La. E. C. Palmer & Co., Limited 433-439 Camp St. 1 New York, N. Y. Beekman Paper & Card Co., Inc. 318 West 39th St. 1 New York, N. Y. Lasher & Lathrop, Inc. 29-33 Lafayette St. 1 New York, N. Y. J. E. Linde Paper Co. 84 Beekman St. 5 New York, N. Y. J. E. Linde Paper Co. 148 E. 129th St. 1 New York, N. Y. Miller & Wright Paper Co. 65-67 Duane St. Symbol Name and Address 3 New York, N. Y. The Whitaker Paper Co. 48-52 Great Jones St. 1 Omaha, Neb. Carpenter Paper Co. 9th and Harney St. 1 Philadelphia, Pa. Garrett- Buchanan Co. 12 to 20 South Sixth St. 5 Philadelphia, Pa. The Whitaker Paper Co. 26 North 5th St. 3 Pittsburgh, Pd. The Whitaker Paper Co. 302 Penn Ave. 4 Providence, R. I. The Arnold-Roberts Co. 4 Providence, R. I. John Carter & Co., Inc. 28 Fountain St. 4 Richmond, Va. The Whitaker Paper Co. 1013 E. Canal. St. 1 Rochester, N. Y. R. M. Myers & Co. 27-29 Exchange St. 1 Salt Lake City, Utah Carpenter Paper Co. of Utah 143-145 State St. 1 Scranton, Pa. Megargee Brothers 130 Washington Ave. 1 St. Louis, Mo. Acme Paper Co. 115-125 South Eighth St. 3 St. Paul, Minn. The Whitaker Paper Co. Wright, Barrett & Stilwell Div. 5 Syracuse, N. Y. R. M. Myers & Co. 805 Keith Theatre Bldg. 5 Toledo, Ohio The Whitaker Paper Co. Spitzen Bldg. 1 Troy, N. Y. Troy Paper Corporation. 371 River St. 5 Washington, D. C. The Whitaker Paoer Co. 822 Munsey Bldg. €> U CO 4-1 Oh C3 O